AC 338 Type RM

Autoconer 338 Operation Manual Model “RM”

148-640 001 8.0 en 6.2003

EXIT

Weitergabe sowie Vervielfältigung dieses Dokuments, Verwertung und Mitteilung seines Inhalts sind verboten, soweit nicht ausdrücklich gestattet. Zuwiderhandlungen verpflichten zu Schadenersatz. Alle Rechte für den Fall der Patent-, Gebrauchsmuster- oder Geschmacksmustereintragung vorbehalten. The reproduction, distribution, and utilization of this document as well as the communication of its contents to others without explicid authorization is prohibited. Offenders will be held liable for the payment of damages. All rights reserved in the event of the grant of a patent, utility model, or design. Toute communication ou reproduction de ce document, sous quelques forme que se soit, et toute exploitation ou communication de son contenu sont interdites, sauf autorisation expresse. Tout manquement à cette règle est illicite et expose son auteur au versement de dommages et intérêts. Tous droits réservés pour le cas de la délivrance d’un brevet, d’un modèle d’utilité ou d’un modèle de présentation. È vietato consegnare a terzi o riprodurre questo documento, utilizzarne il contenuto o renderlo comunque noto a terzi senza esplicita autorizzazione. Ogni infrazione comporta il risarcimento dei danni subiti. Sono riservati tutti i diritti derivanti dalla concessione di brevetti per invenzioni industriali di utilità o di brevetti per modelli ornamentali. Sin nuestra expresa autorización, queda terminantemente prohibida la reproducción total o parcial de este documento, así como su uso indebido y/o su exhibición o comunicación a terceros. De los infractores se exigirá el correspondiente resarcimiento de daños y perjuicios. Quedan reservados todos los derechos inherentes, en especial los de patentes, de modelos registrados y estéticos. A reprodução, a distribuição e a utilização deste documento, assim como a comunicação do seu conteúdo a terceiros, são proibidas sem autorização expressa. Os infractores serão responsabilizados por perdas e danos. Todos os direitos são reservados no caso da concessão de uma patente, modelo de utilidade ou desenho industrial. Bu belgelerin çoðaltýlmasý ve içeriklerinin kazanç saðlamak amacýyla deðerlendirilip yayýmlanmasý kesin bir izin olmadan yasaktýr. Aykýrý davranýþlar, doðacak hasarý ödem mükellefiyetini beraberinde getirir. Patent, model veya dizayn tesciline iliþkin tüm haklar saklýdýr. Zonder uitdrukkelijke voorafgaande toestemming is het verboden dit document dan wel de hierin vervatte informatie te gebruiken voor andere doeleinden dan waarvoor de informatie is vrijgegeven, dan wel te vermenigvuldigen, verspreiden of op enige andere wijze aan derden bekend te maken. Overtreders zijn verplicht de hieruit voortvloeiende schade te vergoeden. Alle rechten zijn voorbehouden, in het bijzonder het recht om octrooien, gebruiksmodellen en siermodellen aan te vragen. Dette dokument må ikke videregives til andre eller mangfoldiggøres, og dets indhold må ikke udnyttes eller offentliggøres, uden vores udtrykkelige tilladelse. Overtrædelser af dette vil medføre krav om skadeserstatning. Alle rettigheder forbeholdes, særlig retten til gennemførelse af patent-, brugsmodel- eller mønsterbeskyttelse. Detta dokument får inte utan vårt tillstånd utlämnas till obehörig eller kopieras; ej heller får dess innehåll delges oberhöriga eller utnyttjas. Överträdelse medför skadeståndsansvar. Alla rättigheter förbehålls, särskilt rätten att inlämma patent-, bruksmönstereller mönsteransökningar.

W. Schlafhorst AG & Co. Postfach 10 04 35 D-41004 Mönchengladbach Tel. (++49) - (0) 21 61 / 28 - 0 Telefax (++49) - (0) 21 61 / 28 26 45 A Saurer Group Company

Autoconer 338

1 Safety Instructions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

1-1

2 Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

2-1

3 Informator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

3-1

4 Function . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

4-1

5 Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

5-1

6 Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

6-1

7 Clearer (Optional) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

7-1

8 Technology . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

8-1

9 Assembly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

9-1

10 Messages and Diagnosis . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10 - 1

148-640 001 en 6.2003

-3

Autoconer 338

-4

148-640 001 8.0 en 6.2003

Autoconer 338

1 Safety Instructions

148-640 001 en 6.2003

1-1

Autoconer 338

1-2

148-640 001 8.0 en 6.2003

Autoconer 338 1.0

General Safety Instructions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

1-5

1.0.1

Standards, Rules and Regulations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

1-5

1.0.2

Hazard Indications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

1-5

1.0.3

Accident Prevention . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

1-6

1.0.4

Transport and Storage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

1-6

1.0.5

Qualified Personnel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

1-6

1.0.6

Personal Safety . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

1-6

1.0.7

Prior to Machine Start-up . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

1-6

1.0.8

Technical Documentation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

1-6

1.0.9

Spare Parts / Add-on Parts / Conversion Parts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

1-6

1.0.10

Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

1-7

1.0.11

Work on the Machine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

1-7

1.0.12

Work on the Machine’s Electrical Equipment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

1-7

1.0.13

In Case of Emergency . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

1-7

1.0.14

Maintenance / Care / Cleaning / Repair . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

1-8

1.0.15

Work on Electrical Equipment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

1-9

1.0.16

Five Safety Rules . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

1-9

1.0.17

Handling of Electrostatic Endangered Components and Assemblies . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

1 - 10

1.0.18

General Machine Description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

1 - 11

1.0.19

Noise emission value . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

1 - 12

1.0.20

Unloading Instructions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

1 - 13

1.0.21

Weights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

1 - 14

1.1

Machine Frame . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

1 - 15

1.1.1

Machine Length: Model ”RM” with Continuous Tube Conveyor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

1 - 15

1.1.2

Machine Length: Model ”RM” with Sectional Tube Conveyor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

1 - 16

1.1.3

Machine Length: Model ”RM” with Continuous Tube Conveyor combined with Sectional Tube Conveyor(s) (HT10) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

1 - 17

1.1.4

Machine lengths: Model RC with tub . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

1 - 18

1.1.5

Machine lengths: Model RC with continuous tube conveyor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

1 - 19

1.1.6

Main Breaker Switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

1 - 20

1.1.7

Control Compartments . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

1 - 21

1.1.8

Power Rail Covers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

1 - 21

1.1.9

Covers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

1 - 22

1.1.10

Travelling Cleaner ”Neuenhauser” . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

1 - 22

1.1.11

Travelling Cleaner “Luwa” . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

1 - 23

1.1.12

Continuous Tube Conveyor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

1 - 24

1.1.13

Sectional Tube Conveyor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

1 - 24

1.1.14

Dust Removal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

1 - 25

1.1.15

Package Conveyor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

1 - 26

1.1.16

Package conveyor with roll-off ramp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

1 - 26

1.1.17

Package conveyor with intermediate package storage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

1 - 27

1.1.18

Compressed Air Supply . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

1 - 28

1.1.19

Disconnection of compressed air conduits . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

1 - 29

148-640 001 en 6.2003

1-3

Autoconer 338 1.2

Winding Unit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

1 - 31

1.2.1

Tilting the Winding Unit out . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

1 - 31

1.2.2

Yarn Guide Drum . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

1 - 32

1.2.3

Package Cradle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

1 - 32

1.2.4

Yarn Path . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

1 - 32

1.2.5

Splicer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

1 - 33

1.2.6

Knotter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

1 - 33

1.2.7

Suction Arm / Suction Pipe . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

1 - 34

1.3

Supply Package Change . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

1 - 35

1.3.1

Model RM / Package Creel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

1 - 35

1.3.2

Model E / Package Creel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

1 - 35

1.3.3

Model RC / Creel-out Magazine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

1 - 36

1.5

Package Doffer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

1 - 37

1-4

148-640 001 8.0 en 6.2003

Autoconer 338

1.0

General Safety Instructions

1.0.1

Standards, Rules and Regulations

The Autoconer has been inspected and approved by the proper authorities in respect to its work safety. The design of the machine complies with the following rules: D EC Machinery directive (98/37/EG) D EC Low-voltage directive (73/23/EWG) D EMV Directive (89/336/EWG) D Safety of machines EN 292-1 D Safety of machines EN 292-2 D Electrical equipment of industrial machines EN 60204-1 D Safety requirements for textile machines DIN EN ISO 11111 D UVV-Textilmaschinen/Textil machines (VBG 7 v) (EG = European Community) (EN = European Standards)

148-640 001 en 6.2003

1.0.2

Hazard Indications

Important instructions for personal safety and for secure machine operation are marked in the documention by a pictogram as follows:

a b c e d

Immediate danger of life and limb from general sources. Immediate danger of life and limb from electrical current. Immediate danger of life and limb from laser rays.

The product, or items in its environment could be damaged. Electrostatic endangered component (→ 1.0.17).

1-5

Autoconer 338

1.0.3

Accident Prevention

In order to prevent accidents it is of utmost importance to thoroughly familiarize the entire personnel coming in contact with the machine with these safety instructions. The safety instructions are of general validity, independent from the enclosed documentation.

a

The safety instructions, and locally applicable auxiliary rules and regulations must be followed religiously during any work on or in the machine!

The following work should be performed by specially qualified personnel only: D Erection/Installation D Initial Start-up D Operation

1.0.6

Personal Safety

In general, the operators should not wear or carry with them items which could be pulled into the machine. Among other items this applies to finger rings, necklaces, bracelets or jewelry of this kind. For the same reason, loosely fitting clothing should not be worn, especially wide-sleeved tops (Danger of Wrapping!). Long hair should be retained close to the head by suitable means.

1.0.7

Prior to Machine Start-up

D All safety equipment must be installed properly. D Double-check

D Maintenance, repairs, settings, modification, and machine cleaning.

– if there are persons still occupied with erection, conversion, maintenance, repair, modification, or cleaning duties;

1.0.4

– if there are obstructions on, below, or next to the machine;

Transport and Storage

The labels and signs affixed to the machine crating must be strictly observed.

1.0.5

Qualified Personnel

– if functional failures are indicated (Red lights); – if all electrical equipment is protected against human contact.

1.0.8

Technical Documentation

(e.g. qualified electrician) (VDE 0105 + VDE 1000 + EN 50110-1) Qualified personnel, e.g. electro-technician, are persons which due to their D vocational education, D general knowledge, experience, and special instruction, and D knowledge of applicable standards, rules and regulations, safety precautions, and operational conditions have been charged by the safety manager with the execution of the required work, and with detection and prevention of possible safety hazards.

The Technical Documentation should be filed in such manner that it is really accessible to all personnel, preferably in the slot provided on the machine.

1.0.9

Spare Parts / Add-on Parts / Conversion Parts

Your attention is drawn to the fact that spare parts / add-on parts / conversion parts not supplied by Schlafhorst have not been inspected for safety and have not been released for use by Schlafhorst. Utilization of such foreign parts could cause unforeseen safety hazards. Usage of certain foreign parts could result in material damage and/or personal injury. Schlafhorst can not be held liable for damages resulting from the use of parts not made and supplied by Schlafhorst.

1-6

148-640 001 8.0 en 6.2003

Autoconer 338

1.0.10 Operation The machine should be operated by trained and authorized personnel only. Safety hazards could originate on the machine if false operation is practiced. D Thoroughly familiarize yourselves with all aspects of the machine and its operation. D Thoroughly study the “manual and related documentation”. D Operate the machine only after exhaustive familiarization with operational components and with the functions of the machine, is completed. D Double-check the functionality of the operation components.

1.0.12 Work on the Machine’s Electrical Equipment Work of electrical nature has to be performed by authorized/special trained personnel according to technical rules and standards. If it is necessary to remove safety covers, bars, etc., the work area must be closed off by barriers and caution signs must be posted.

1.0.13 In Case of Emergency Turn main breaker switch directly from “I“ to “0“ !

D Be alert for unusual noises emitted by the machine, and have corrective action taken immediately in case of damage. D Safety hazards can result from arbitrary conversions and/or modifications on the machine. Schlafhorst can not be held liable for damages resulting from such arbitrary alterations.

1.0.11 Work on the Machine The OFF position of the machine’s main breaker switch can be secured by attaching a padlock on the switch handle.

The winding department personnel should be instructed to padlock this switch prior to performing maintenance, repairs, or cleaning work which has to be done with stopped machine. This precludes unauthorized switch-ON of the machine while other persons carry-out this type of work. The Autoconer must always be switched OFF, and secured (padlocked) against unauthorized manipulation before D safety parts or devices (covers) are removed, D beginning maintenance- or repair work on mechanical or electrical components, and scaling the machine’s upper portion.

148-640 001 en 6.2003

1-7

Autoconer 338

1.0.14 Maintenance / Care / Cleaning / Repair During the execution of such work the main breaker switch should be OFF and secured (padlocked), and caution signs should be posted. D Observe the maintenance recommendations issued with the machine. D Whenever a ladder is required for work on the equipment’s superstructure, only a step ladder with platform according to EN 191 (European Standard), or according to VGB 74, should be used. D Remove accumulations of dust and lint early, i.e. before a fire hazard develops. D An industrial vacuum cleaner with rubber-nozzle is recommended for machine cleaning. D Combustible or unhealthy cleaning liquids are prohibited. D Detergents or other aggressive cleaning means should not be used on plastic parts. Use of such cleaners could result in parts damage. D Spilled oils or cleaning liquids must be wiped off immediately. Soiled places should be degreased. D Changed oil must be accumulated and disposed of according to environmental rules and regulations.

a

The oil of machines in operation could be very hot!

Schlafhorst can not be held liable for damages originating from false maintenance or servicing, resp., by unauthorized personnel.

1-8

148-640 001 8.0 en 6.2003

Autoconer 338

1.0.15 Work on Electrical Equipment

1.0.16 Five Safety Rules

The electrical devices and assemblies are provided for the operation of an industrially utilized installation.

Switching OFF The entire portion of the installation or machine on which work is intended must be switched OFF on all phases. CAUTION: Consider foreign power input, such as for Informator, Yarn monitoring device, etc.!

Work on electrical equipment should be performed by qualified personnel only (as defined for specialists in DIN/ VDE 0105 and IEC 364), under observance of D VDE Rules, D 5 Safety rules by VBG4, D locally applicable rules and regulations,

Securing against unauthorized switching ON Attach signs to the switched-OFF portions of the machine or installation, noting:

D Technical Documentation, D EGB (ESD) measures.

D what is switched OFF, D reason for switching it OFF, and D name of person who switched this portion OFF. Unauthorized switching ON should be prevented by suitable means (e.g. padlocking). Examination of Voltage Absence (by qualified, authorized personnel only) D Check and tune measuring instrument D Check absence of voltage on all phases at the switch-OFF location D Check absence of voltage on all phases at the location of intended work. Grounding and Short-Circuiting All electric leads on the place of work should initially be grounded ➀ and then short-circuited ➁. (applies to equipment operating at 1000 V or higher)

Adjacent Parts under Voltage Neighboring parts or devices still under voltage should be covered by suitable means (e.g. insulation blankets or sheets).

Abbreviations:

148-640 001 en 6.2003

DIN

German Industrial Standards

EGB

Electrostatic endangered Parts or Assemblies

ESD

Electrostatic Sensitive Device

VDE

Association of German Electro-Technicians

IEC

International Electric Committee

UVV

Accident Prevention Rule

VBG

Rules by Professional Association

1-9

Autoconer 338

Elektrostatisch Gefährdete Bauelemente und Baugruppen Electrostatic Sensitive Device.

1.0.17 Handling of Electrostatic Endangered Components and Assemblies Electronic components and assemblies (Printed Circuit Boards) are endangered by electrostatic loads. The following rules should be strictly observed! All electrostatic endangered components and assemblies (called EGB in the following text) are marked with the sign shown on the left. Electrostatic loads build up through friction of insulation materials (e.g. floor covering, clothing made of synthetic fibers, etc.). Even minute loads could cause damage or destruction of certain components. Such damages are not always easy to detect, they could partly cause secondary damage or malfunction after a certain period of time. D Transport and Storage of EGB only in the special protective wrapping or casing supplied by Schlafhorst. D Avoid materials tending to generate electrostatic loads: – Non-conductive plastic containers and table tops, – Synthetic clothing, – Shoes with plastic soles, – Transparent folders, – Styrofoam casing, – Monitor screens, etc. D Wear – Cotton clothing, – EGB shoes with leather or conductive soles. D Utilize

D170-04

– Conductive floors, – EGB work stations with appropriate tooling (grounded soldering equipment, grounding bracelet, etc.), – Conductive EGB envelopes, plastic containers, IC bars or cartons of conductive foam material, – Containers and work surfaces made of wood, metal, conductive plastics, or paper envelopes.

1 - 10

148-640 001 8.0 en 6.2003

Autoconer 338

1.0.18 General Machine Description The Autoconer is a machine for automatic winding of crosswound yarn packages. The Autoconer represents an autonomous, compact winding machine with integrated drive, with a splicer/knotter on each winding unit, and with a corresponding sub-pressure supply. Plug-type connections are provided for electricity and compressed air supply. The Autoconer is conceived as single-unit machine in onesided length construction, as RH or as LH machine, composed of 6 machine sections, or 60 winding units (maximum). The winding unit gauge is 320 mm from one winding unit to the next one. Each winding unit is self-sufficient, composed of an upper part containing the assemblies required for the winding process, and a lower part for transport and creeling of supply packages. Single and plied yarns spun from natural or synthetic staple fibers, Siro yarns, Core yarns, Linnens, Ramie and Crepe yarn, can be wound after a winding test. No jute, animal hair cord, novelty yarn. The permissible yarn count range is 667 tex (Nm 1.5) through 3.5 tex (Nm 290). Special winding tests are required for yarns coarser than 330 tex (Nm 3) or finer than 5.9 tex (Nm 170).

148-640 001 en 6.2003

1 - 11

Autoconer 338

1.0.19 Noise emission value The A-valued, work place-related emission value of one individual machine decisively depends upon the machine location at the point of operation. The noise emission value can be calculated using the following formula: LpA = LpA,0 + ∆L 1 + ∆L 2 Explanation: LPA,0 : ∆L 1 : ∆L 2 :

Emission value applicable for the following operation conditions. Supplement for the sub-pressure (suction) adjusted on the Informator.

Emission value LpA,0 :

77.0 dB

Supplement ∆L 1 :

0.7 dB per 10 hPa sub-pressure increase

Supplement ∆L 2 :

0.25 dB for each additional 0.1 cycle per min. per wdg. unit.

This factor explains the influence of winding speed inasmuch as with known yarn break rate per yarn length the cycling frequency of the machine depends on winding speed. Furthermore, the suction noise levels are above those of the speed-depending winding noise. Standard relation:

Determination of the emission value made according to DIN EN ISO 9902-4. The measuring unit is smaller than 3 dB.

Example:

Cycling frequency of a machine is 1.1 cycle per minute per winding unit; operational sub-pressure is 45 hPa. The resulting emission value is 78.7 dB. Deviations from this value, up or down, are possible due to different compressed air levels, splicer prisms, suction nozzle settings, etc.

Supplement for cycling frequency / winding speed.

Machine:

Autoconer 338

No. of winding units:

60

Linear winding speed:

1100 mpm

Sub-pressure

30 hPa

Compr. air for splicing:

0.4 MPa

Code: 0 0 4 Prism: DZ3

Compr. air for opening:

0.4 MPa

Code: 1

Compr. air for multijet:

0.36 MPa

Compr. air for blow-lifting: 0.26 MPa Cycling frequency:

0.85 cycles per minute per winding unit

Noise pressure level: The local noise pressure level, incorporatinging operation conditions such equipment density, No. of machines, foreign noise influx, etc., could differ individually. It is therefore not possible to state an universally applicable value.

a

Excessive noise emission leads to impaired hearing ability. Hearing protection is mandatory beginning at 90 dB (A). From a noise imission pressure level of 85 dB (A) on up, UVV recommends hearing protection, as the probability of hearing damage increases considerably above this value. We recommend to wear hearing protection for all persons present in the environment of Autoconer(s).

1 - 12

148-640 001 8.0 en 6.2003

Autoconer 338 550 mm

70 mm 700 mm

1000 mm

230 mm

3900 mm

D 101-50

1.0.20 Unloading Instructions For crane transportation observe the following points:

D Use a double-T beam I 200 mm (8”), or

D Staying, or passing through under suspended loads is prohibited.

D a steel tubing 200 mm dia., 22 mm minimum wall thickness.

D Use two individual ropes of equal minimum length.

D Weight information must be strictly observed.

D When lifting a machine section, avoid slanted orientation of the ropes, as the section could be deflected.

148-640 001 en 6.2003

1 - 13

Autoconer 338

1.0.21 Weights AC 338 Model RM No. and Type 1

Road transport Weight kg gross

net

Crate

1230

1180

Crate

1180

1130

AC 338 Model RM

Rail transport

No. and Type

Weight kg gross

net

Contents

In cm Length

Width

Height

1 Section RM HT10

339

125

205

1 Section RM DHT

375

125

205

Contents

In cm Length

Width

Height

1

Box

1600

1130

1 Section RM DHT

440

140

190

1

Box

700

480

1 Control cabinet

140

130

238

1

Box

760

540

1 Suction end

170

135

220

AC 338 Model RM No. and Type

Surface transport Weight kg gross

net

Contents

In cm Length

Width

Height

1

Box

1600

1130

1 Section RM DHT

400

135

185

1

Box

1650

1180

1 Section RM HT10

425

135

185

AC 338 Model K No. and Type 1

Crate

AC 338 Model E No. and Type 1

Crate

AC 338 Model RM, K, E No. and Type


net

< 1180

< 1130

Contents 1 Section K

In cm Length

Width

Height

375

135

205


net

1180

1130

Contents 1 Section E

In cm Length

Width

Hight

375

125

205


net

Contents

In cm Length

Width

Height

1 Control cabinet

120

120

223

1

Crate

< 500

< 480

1

Crate

560

540

1 Suction end

146

125

208

1

Box

900

800

Accessories and tool cabinet

380

98

77

1

Box

540

490

Accessories

202

122

90

1

Box

1360

1260

Superstructure parts

380

98

77

1

Box

200

180

Delivery Package Doffer

110

90

127

1

Box

136

90

Screws container

50

60

90

1

Crate

180

170

Wdg.unit carriage

120

80

160

1

Box

320

220

Erector’s box

182

82

75

1

Cardboard

220

200

Travelling cleaner

216

81

51

1 - 14

148-640 001 8.0 en 6.2003

2923

Autoconer 338

L1

5

1

3

2

3

110

L2

3

3

2

3

4

N = Newton N

1

2

2500

4800

3 9600

4

5

2000

500

D101-05

1.1

Machine Frame

1.1.1

Machine Length: Model ”RM” with Continuous Tube Conveyor

No. of Winding Units

10

20

30

40

50

60

5585 6895

8895 10205

12205 13515

15515 16825

18825 20135

22135 23445

Lengths: L1 L2

148-640 001 en 6.2003

1 - 15

2923

Autoconer 338

L1

1

2

3

3

110

L2

3

3

3

2

4

N = Newton N

1

2

3

4

2500

4900

9800

2000

D101-04

1.1.2

Machine Length: Model ”RM” with Sectional Tube Conveyor


10

20

30

40

50

60

5905 6680

9535 10310

13165 13940

16795 17570

20425 21200

24055 24830

Lengths: L1 L2

1 - 16

148-640 001 8.0 en 6.2003

2923

Autoconer 338

L1

5

1

2

3

110

L2

3

3

3

3

2

4

N = Newton N

1 2500

2 4900

3 9800

4 2000

5 500

(max. values) Otherwise, floor pressures acc. to equipment layout

D101-06

1.1.3

Machine Length: Model ”RM” with Continuous Tube Conveyor combined with Sectional Tube Conveyor(s) (HT10)


30

40

40

50

50

50

60

60

60

60

1 x HT10 1 x HT10 2 x HT10 1 x HT10 2 x HT10 3 x HT10 1 x HT10 2 x HT10 3 x HT10 4 x HT10

Lengths: L1 L2

148-640 001 en 6.2003

12525 13835

15835 17145

16155 17465

19145 20455

19465 20775

19785 21095

22455 23765

22775 24085

23095 24405

23415 24725

1 - 17

2923

min. 10

Autoconer 338

110

L1 L2

1

2

3

3

3

3

3

2

4

N = Newton (N)

1

2

3

4

2500

4800

9600

2000

D101-80

1.1.4

Machine lengths: Model RC with tub

Winding units

10

20

30

40

50

60

5905 6680

9535 10310

13165 13940

16795 17570

20425 21200

24055 24830

Lengths: L1 L2

1 - 18

148-640 001 8.0 en 6.2003

800

2923

Autoconer 338

110

L1 L2

1

2

3

3

3

3

3

2

4

N = Newton (N)

1

2

3

4

2500

4800

9600

2000

D101-79

1.1.5

Machine lengths: Model RC with continuous tube conveyor

Winding units

10

20

30

40

50

60

5905 6814

9535 10444

13165 14074

16795 17704

20425 21334

24055 24964

Lengths: L1 L2

148-640 001 en 6.2003

1 - 19

Autoconer 338

1.1.6

Main Breaker Switch

Prior to the activities listed below, the main breaker switch (1) must always be switched OFF, and secured (padlocked) against unauthorized manipulation: D Removal / Opening of control compartments, safety devices, and/or safety covers; D Maintenance or repair work on mechanical and/or electrical assemblies; D Ascending on machine or superstructure. In cases of emergency only:

e

Instantly turn the main breaker switch from position “I“ to “0“ . Normally the machine is switched Off on the ”OFF” key (2), then de-energized on the main breaker switch (1).

b

With the main breaker switch in OFF (”0”) position, the following features remain line-powered: – the line input terminals, and – the primary terminals of the main breaker switch.

D161-67

1 2 D161-68

1 - 20

148-640 001 8.0 en 6.2003

Autoconer 338

1.1.7

b

Control Compartments Control compartments are to be opened only when the machine is switched OFF. Prior to opening a control compartment, switch the machine OFF on the ”OFF” key, and set the main breaker switch from “I“ to “0“ . Secure (padlock) the main breaker switch against unauthorized manipulation. (→ 1.1.6).

b

With the main breaker switch in OFF (”0”) position, the following features remain line-powered: – the line input terminals, and – the primary terminals of the main breaker switch.

1

b

Do not open the frequency converter (FC) (1)! Destruction hazard!

D161-25

1.1.8

b 1

Power Rail Covers The power rails carry appr. 300 VDC! Prior to removal of the power rail covers (1), switch the machine OFF on the ”OFF” key, and set the main breaker switch from “I“ to “0“. Secure (padlock) the main breaker switch against unauthorized manipulation. (→ 1.1.6)

D161-26

148-640 001 en 6.2003

1 - 21

Autoconer 338

1.1.9

a

Covers Covers are to be removed, or opened, only if the machine is switched OFF. Prior to removal of a cover, switch the machine OFF on the ”OFF” key, and set the main breaker switch from ”I“ to “0“. Secure (padlock) the main breaker switch against unauthorized manipulation. (→ 1.1.6)

D101-15

1.1.10 Travelling Cleaner ”Neuenhauser”

a

Watch out while cleaner travels! For work on the superstructure the travelling cleaner has to be keyed OFF at the control console (1), in order to keep suction hose and blow hose out of reach. While working on the lower portion of the machine, the patrol direction of the travelling cleaner can be reversed when slighly deflecting the suction hose or blow hose.

D270-17

1 - 22

1

148-640 001 8.0 en 6.2003

Autoconer 338

1.1.11 Travelling Cleaner “Luwa”

a

D270-08

Be cautious of the patroling travelling cleaner! For work on the machine, switch the travelling cleaner OFF on operation console (1), in order to prevent safety hazards from the cleaner’s blow or suction nozzles.

1

148-640 001 en 6.2003

1 - 23

Autoconer 338

1.1.12 Continuous Tube Conveyor Conveyor Belt / Incline

a b

Switch the tube conveyor OFF (1) prior to the performance of maintenance / repair work. The conveyor drive control (Frequency converter) remains powered when the conveyor is switched OFF! Prior to removal of covers, switch the machine OFF on the ”OFF” key, and set the main breaker switch from “I“ to “0“. Secure (padlock) the main breaker switch against unauthorized manipulation. (→ 1.1.6)

D401-29

1

D401-30

1.1.13 Sectional Tube Conveyor 1

a b

Switch the tube conveyor OFF (1) prior to the performance of maintenance / repair work. The conveyor drive control (Frequency converter) remains powered when the conveyor is switched OFF! Prior to removal of covers, switch the machine OFF on the ”OFF” key, and set the main breaker switch from “I“ to “0“. Secure (padlock) the main breaker switch against unauthorized manipulation. (→ 1.1.6)

D401-34

1 - 24

148-640 001 8.0 en 6.2003

Autoconer 338

1.1.14 Dust Removal

1

a b

The plexiglass cover (1) should be removed only if the dust removal device is switched OFF (2). The durst removal drive control (Frequency converter) remains powered when the dust removal drive is switched OFF! Prior to removal of covers, switch the machine OFF on the ”OFF” key, and set the main breaker switch from “I“ to “0“. Secure (padlock) the main breaker switch against unauthorized manipulation. (→ 1.1.6)

2 D200-07

148-640 001 en 6.2003

1 - 25

Autoconer 338

1.1.15 Package Conveyor 2 3

a

Remove packages from the conveyor belt only when the conveyor belt is stopped. Do not touch the running belt.

As package doffer and package conveyor are mutually interlocked, the package conveyor belt must always return to its neutral position, controlled by the orifices in the belt. Exercise special care if the conveyor had been stopped via turn switch (1).

e

The light sensors (2 and 3) used to control the drive motor could be unreliable due to accumulations of lint and dust (e.g. fiber finish).

Correct: Weekly cleaning

1 D401-15

1.1.16 Package conveyor with roll-off ramp In addition to the instructions under ”Package conveyor”, auxiliary instructions are valid for package conveyors with roll-off ramp:

a e

Do not reach into the area below the roll-off ramp (1)! Hazard of hand and/or finger injury! After switching ON of the package conveyor wait until the travelling cleaner has left the area of the roll-off ramp in direction drive end. Make sure that a suitable container is placed below the roll-off ramp (1) for the collection of doffed packages.

1

D401-38

1 - 26

148-640 001 8.0 en 6.2003

Autoconer 338

1.1.17 Package conveyor with intermediate package storage In addition to the notes for “Package conveyor”, comply with the following instructions for “Package conveyor with intermediate storage”:

1

3

a e

Do not reach into the area between bracer plate (1) and roll-off plate (2)! On machines with “Package conveyor with intermediate storage” the package diameter is limited to 240 mm.

2

D401-42

148-640 001 en 6.2003

1 - 27

Autoconer 338

1

*

1.1.18 Compressed Air Supply

a

Maximum permitted input pressure of the compressed air supply is 1.2 MPa (12 bar). Prior to working on the distribution unit the machine has to be keyed OFF, and the main breaker switch has to be set from ”I” to ”0”. Protect (padlock) the main breaker switch against unauthorized manipulation (→ 1.1.6). Turn-off compressed air supply on turn knob (1). Air compression remaining within the conduit system is relieved automatically. * Without hairiness nozzle ** With hairiness nozzle

D110-13

1

**

D110-14

1 - 28

148-640 001 8.0 en 6.2003

Autoconer 338

1.1.19 Disconnection of compressed air conduits

a

Caution for exiting compressed air jets! Shut-off compressed air supply at the distribution station (see above).

For certain maintenance/repair activities, and when removing a winding unit from a machine section, the following compressed air conduits per winding unit are to be disconnected from the supply pipe: Multijet Yarn end opening Splicing. For this purpose, separate the compressed air conduits from their couplings, and close the couplings with plugs. A sufficiet No. of plugs is available from spare part sets or accessories.

D161-37

148-640 001 en 6.2003

1 - 29

Autoconer 338

1 - 30

148-640 001 8.0 en 6.2003

Autoconer 338

1.2

Winding Unit

General

a

Do not reach into the area of the winding units (1) while the machine is switched ON. At other times, e.g. for removal of surplus yarn ends, always switch the winding unit, and the neighboring ones, OFF before reaching-in (→ 2.2.1).

Maintenance

b

1

Prior to maintenance/repair work, or to removal of covers, in the winding unit area the winding unit must be separated from its power source. Switch the machine OFF on the ”OFF” key, then set the main breaker switch from “I“ to ”0“. Secure (padlock) the main breaker switch against unauthorized manipulation (→ 1.1.6).

D101-08

1.2.1

b

1

Tilting the Winding Unit out Prior to tilting-out the winding unit must be separated from its power source. Switch the machine OFF on the ”OFF” key, then set the main breaker switch from “I“ to “0“. Secure (padlock) the main breaker switch against unauthorized manipulation (→ 1.1.6).

1

a

For maintenance, assembly, repairs, or for yarn guide drum exchange, tilt the winding unit forward and use the retainer rod (1) to secure it in tilted-out position.

D301-34

148-640 001 en 6.2003

1 - 31

Autoconer 338

1.2.2

a 1.2.3

Yarn Guide Drum Do not touch a running yarn guide drum! Accumulated yarn laps (drum laps) must be removed only while the yarn guide drum is stopped. Switch the winding unit OFF.

Package Cradle

On machines with propack only

e

Never move the package cradle up or down forcibly! Urgently observe the notes in chapter ”Operation”!

D303-18

1.2.4

a

Yarn Path Do not reach into the area of running yarn! Skin burns and/or cuts of fingers or hand could occur.

D303-13

1 - 32

148-640 001 8.0 en 6.2003

Autoconer 338

1.2.5

a

Splicer Do not reach into the area of the feeder pliers (1)! Hazard of hand and/or finger injury!

1

D303-13

1.2.6

a

Knotter Do not reach into thearea of the stripper fork (1)! Injury hazard from sudden protrusion of the stripper fork during the knotting cycle.

1

D303-19

148-640 001 en 6.2003

1 - 33

Autoconer 338

1.2.7

a

Suction Arm / Suction Pipe Beware of ascending suction arm (1) or suction pipe (2).

2

1

D303-13

1 - 34

148-640 001 8.0 en 6.2003

Autoconer 338

1.3

Supply Package Change

1.3.1

Model RM / Package Creel

a

Do not reach into the area of the supply package creel! Crush injuries of hand or fingers could occur.

Switch OFF the winding unit and adjoining ones, if required. The tube conveyor should also be stopped in order to prevent possible injuries.

D301-38

1.3.2

a

Model E / Package Creel Do not reach into the yarn path area (shown shaded in the illustration)! Burning and/or cutting injuries might occur.

D384-06

148-640 001 en 6.2003

1 - 35

Autoconer 338

1.3.3

Model RC / Creel-out Magazine

a

Do not reach into the magazine linkage (1)! Hazard of hand and/or finger injury!

Switch-OFF this winding unit as well as adjoining winding units. Also, switch-Off the tube conveyor for further prevention of injuries.

1

D376-01

1 - 36

148-640 001 8.0 en 6.2003

Autoconer 338 1.4

1.5

a

Package Doffer Be cautious of patroling doffers! Prior to performing work in the area of the doffer tracks switch the doffer(s) OFF: Move turn switch (1) counter-clockwise to ”Manual” (1). Prior to manually disengaging the doffer (2), move turn switch (1) to ”Manual”. When manually moving the doffer away be sure there are no obstructions.

3

During operation all covers, and the plexiglass cover (3) must be in place. Do not reach into the doffer’s working range during a doffing cycle (injury hazards!).

b

D501-24

Prior to work on the package doffer, or removal of doffer covers, the doffer must be separated from its power source. Switch machine OFF on the ”OFF” key, then set the main breaker switch from “I“ to “0“

1

Secure (padlock) the main breaker switch against unauthorized manipulation (→ 1.1.6).

D560-01

2

D501-43

148-640 001 en 6.2003

1 - 37

Autoconer 338

1 - 38

148-640 001 8.0 en 6.2003

Autoconer 338

2 Operation

148-640 001 en 6.2003

2-1

Autoconer 338

2-2

148-640 001 8.0 en 6.2003

Autoconer 338 2.1

Machine Frame . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

2-5

2.1.1

Switching ON and OFF of the entire machine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

2-5

2.1.2


2-6

2.1.3

Travelling Cleaner “Luwa“ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

2-7

2.1.4


2-8

2.1.5


2-8

2.1.6

Dust Removal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

2-9

2.1.7

Delivery Package Conveyor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

2-9

2.1.8


2 - 10

2.1.9

Package conveyor with intermediate storage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

2 - 11

2.1.10

Emptying of Yarn Waste Chamber / Dust Chamber . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

2 - 13

2.1.11

Replenishing the Cone / Sleeve Magazine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

2 - 13

2.1.12

Signal Lamps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

2 - 14

2.2

Winding Unit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

2 - 15

2.2.1

Switching the Winding Unit ON/OFF . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

2 - 15

2.2.2

Red light and Yellow light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

2 - 16

2.2.3

Inspection of spliced (or knotted) joint . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

2 - 18

2.2.4

Initiating a Clearer Cut . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

2 - 18

2.2.5

Tension Device Opening Key . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

2 - 18

2.2.6

Supply Package Change Cycle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

2 - 18

2.2.7

Manual removal of the delivery package . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

2 - 19

2.2.8

Manual Package Start . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

2 - 20

2.3

Supply Package (Bobbin) Change . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

2 - 21

2.3.1

Model RM / Replenishing the Circular Magazine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

2 - 21

2.3.2

Model E / Supply Package Creeling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

2 - 21

2.3.3

Model RC / Loading the Creel-out Magazine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

2 - 22

2.5

Package Doffer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

2 - 23

2.5.1

Switching the Doffer ON/OFF . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

2 - 23

2.5.2

Keyboard . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

2 - 23

2.5.3

Patrol Direction Reversal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

2 - 23

2.5.4

Manually Disengaging the Doffer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

2 - 23

2.5.5

Information and Failure Display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

2 - 24

148-640 001 en 6.2003

2-3

Autoconer 338

2-4

148-640 001 8.0 en 6.2003

Autoconer 338 2.0

2.1

Machine Frame

2.1.1

Switching ON and OFF of the entire machine

Switching the machine ON D Turn main breaker switch (1) from ”0” to ”I”. Signal lamp (4) glows. Certain parts of the machine are now under voltage, e.g. the transformer. D Actuate the ON key (2). Voltage supply of the machine is now switched ON. The machine begins production. Switching the machine OFF D Actuate the OFF key (3). Production ceases when all automatic cycles (on winding units or package doffer) are completed. D Only at total stop of the machine: Turn main breaker switch (1) from ”I” to ”0”. The machine is switched OFF.

D161-67

Note

2

1

3

Messages on the Informator display screen indicate the reason(s) if the entire machine, or individual sub-assemblies, fail to start upon being switched ON.

e

In case of an emergency only: Instantly turn the main breaker switch from ”I” to ”0”.

4

D161-23

148-640 001 en 6.2003

2-5

Autoconer 338

2.1.2

Travelling Cleaner ”Neuenhauser”

The travelling cleaner is activated whenever the machine is in operation. Dwell and patrol times of the travelling cleaner are programmed on the Informator. Separate switching ON/OFF of the travelling cleaner: D Actuate key (5). The travelling cleaner is now on operational standby. With non-producing machine, i.e. only the main breaker switch is ON (”I”), the suction drive also starts. D Actuate key (6). The travelling cleaner is inoperative.

e

Depending on type of fiber stock the travelling cleaner’s dwell time should not be too long, as deposits of dust and soiling matter can cause contamination of the yarn being processed.

Manual patrol direction reversal Slight deflection of suction hose or blow hose initiates the reversal of the travelling cleaner’s patrol direction.

D270-19

5 6

D161-23

2-6

148-640 001 8.0 en 6.2003

Autoconer 338

2.1.3

Travelling Cleaner “Luwa“

The travelling cleaner is activated as long as the machine is switched ON. Dwell times and patrol times are entered on the Informator. Separately switching the travelling cleaner OFF/ON: D Actuate key (5). The travelling cleaner is on standby. If the machine is in ”No production” mode (i.e. only the main breaker switch is ON “I“), the suction drive starts up. D Actuate key (6). The travelling cleaner is switched OFF.

e

The travelling cleaner should not remain in OFF status for too long (depending on the type of yarn being wound), as otherwise lint accumulations could get out of hand and interfere with the quality of the delivery packages.

D270-05

5 6

D161-23

148-640 001 en 6.2003

2-7

Autoconer 338

2.1.4 1

Continuous Tube Conveyor

During winding operation the tube conveyor can be switched OFF/ON separately on turn switch (1): D Turn switch in position ”I“: Conveyor ON. D Turn switch in position “0“: Conveyor OFF. Note: Regularly separate empty tubes from piece bobbins at the sorting table.

e

A switched ”OFF” tube conveyor causes production losses, as the winding units continue to wind until the next joining cycle is due; then they stop.

D401-30

2.1.5 1

Sectional Tube Conveyor

During winding operation each tube conveyor can be switched OFF/ON separately on turn switch (1): D Turn switch in position “I“: Conveyor ON. D Turn switch in position “0“: Conveyor OFF. Note: Regularly separate empty tubes from piece bobbins at the sorting box.

e

A switched ”OFF” tube conveyor causes production losses, as the winding units of the section continue to wind until the next joining cycle is due; then they stop.

D401-34

2-8

148-640 001 8.0 en 6.2003

Autoconer 338

2.1.6

Dust Removal

During production the dust removal feature can be switched OFF/ON separately per machine section on turn switch (1): D Turn switch in position “I“: Dust removal feature ”ON”. D Turn switch in position “0“: Dust removal feature ”OFF”. Note: The dust removal devices are self-cleaned automatically in regular intervals.

1

e

Extended OFF-switching of the dust removal feature during production can lead to serious quality defects!

D200-07

2.1.7

Delivery Package Conveyor

The package conveyor can be switched OFF/ON separately on turn switch (1): D Move turn switch to the right: Package conveyor ON. D Move turn switch to the left: Package conveyor OFF. Manual Dispatch of Packages from the Conveyor belt D Move turn switch to the right. D The package conveyor starts, provided the doffer is not engaged on a winding unit. D The conveyor belt stops when the first package (with package lift the second package) arrives at the end of the belt. D Carefully remove the package from the belt. D401-15

1

D The belt starts up again and runs until the next package arrives at belt’s end. D This is repeated until all packages are removed; the belt completes one-half revolution. The package conveyor switches OFF automatically. Note: The number of packages placed on the conveyor belt until the operator is prompted to dispatch the packages is entered on the Informator.

148-640 001 en 6.2003

2-9

Autoconer 338

2.1.8

Package conveyor with roll-off ramp

The conveyor is switched ON/OFF on turn switch (1): D Turn switch to the right: Package conveyor ON. D Turn switch to the left: Package conveyor OFF. Manual package removal D Turn switch to the right.

2

D The doffer completes a cycle already in progress. 1

D The travelling cleaner travels to its position at the drive end. Lamp (2) flashes during this period of time. D Subsequently the roll-off ramp (3) is tilted up. D The conveyor belt starts appr. 5 s after the roll-off ramp has been tilted up.

D101-13

D The conveyor belt stops as the first package arrives at the end of the belt. D Carefully remove the package from the belt. D The conveyor belt starts and runs until the next package arrives at the end of the belt. D Packages arriving at the roll-off ramp are guided into the collection container. D This procedure is repeated until all packages are removed from the package conveyor. The package conveyor is switched OFF automatically. D The roll-off ramp tilts down to neutral position. 3

D The travelling cleaner resumes operation (depending on Informator entry). Interruption of package conveyor operation during package removal

D401-38

D During removal turn the switch to the left: – The package conveyor stops. – The roll-off ramp (3) remains in tilted-up position. D The belt starts instantly when switched ON again. Note: The number of doffed packages after which the operator is prompted for package removal is programmed on the Informator.

2 - 10

148-640 001 8.0 en 6.2003

Autoconer 338

2.1.9

e

Package conveyor with intermediate storage On machines with “Package conveyor with intermediate storage” the package diameter is limited to 240 mm.

On turn switch (1) the function of the “Package conveyor with intermediate storage” can be switched ON or OFF: D Actuate the turn switch to the right for the first time: The package conveyor is switched to “Standby”. Swivel plates (2) swivel down, allowing the full packages to roll upon conveyor belt (4). 1

D Actuate the turn switch to the right for the second time: The package conveyor belt begins to run, the packages are removed. D Actuate the turn switch to the left: The package conveyor is switched OFF.

D101-13

Manual removal of packages D Actuate turn switch (1) to the right. D If applicable, the doffer completes a cycle already in progress. D Subsequently swivel plates (2) swivel down. They are now flush with roll-off plate (3). D The packages roll upon conveyor belt (4). D Swivel plates (2) return to their uppermost position. D Actuating turn switch (1) to the right for the second time starts conveyor belt (4). D The conveyor belt stops as the first package arrives at the end of the belt. 2

D Carefully remove the package from the belt. D The conveyor belt starts and runs until the next package arrives at the end of the belt.

4

D401-41

D This procedure is repeated until all packages are removed from the package conveyor. The package conveyor is switched OFF automatically.

2 D401-42

148-640 001 en 6.2003

3

2 - 11

Autoconer 338 Interruption of package conveyor operation during package removal D During package removal procedure actuate turn switch (1) to the left: – The package conveyor stops. – Swivel plates (2) remain in uppermost position. D The belt starts instantly when switched ON again. Notes: The number of doffed packages after which the operator is prompted for package removal is programmed on the Informator. 1

For cylindrical packages (cheeses) guide plates (5) and bracer plates (6) are not used.

D101-13

5

6

2 D401-42

2 - 12

148-640 001 8.0 en 6.2003

Autoconer 338

2.1.10 Emptying of Yarn Waste Chamber / Dust Chamber Yarn chamber and dust chamber must be emptied in regular intervals. These intervals depend on the type of yarn being wound.

e

Overfilled yarn chamber or dust chamber cause increased power consumption and must be avoided.

Opening the yarn chamber or dust chamber doors automatically switches the suction drive OFF, closing the doors switches the suction drive ON again.

e

With open yarn chamber or dust chamber the winding units continue to wind until the next joining cycle is required, then they stop.

D101-13

D101-14

2.1.11 Replenishing the Cone / Sleeve Magazine Place empty cones / sleeves from the top into the magazine, so that they are in line, not on top of eachother. Urgent for cones: Cone base (large diameter) to the right.

D270-06

148-640 001 en 6.2003

2 - 13

Autoconer 338

2.1.12 Signal Lamps H3 H2

Signal lamps indicate various machine statuses to prompt the personnel to manually interfere with the operation of the machine. When lighted the lamps glow either steady or flashing. Priority of flashing light is always higher than steady light. If during steady light a message is registered which causes flashing light, the light changes from steady to flashing. The reason for lamp lighting is displayed on the Informator. Note: After remedy of the reason for lighting the message must be confirmed on the Informator. The signal lamps are OFF as long as the machine is switched OFF. Red signal lamp (H3) Only the Red lamp signals functional failures. D Flashing Red light Failures in the assemblies of the basic machine, e.g. tripping of a motor overload switch. D Steady Red light Failures of the basic machine, e.g. absence of compressed air pressure.

D161-65

Failures in the area of the package doffer. Yellow signal lamp (H2) D Flashing Yellow light For wet splicer: Splicing water must be replenished. D Steady Yellow light Material flow failures, e.g. delivery package conveyor must be started. Additional information under: D Messages → Chapter 3.5. D Message Listing → Chapters 10.1.

2 - 14

148-640 001 8.0 en 6.2003

Autoconer 338

2.2

Winding Unit

2.2.1

Switching the Winding Unit ON/OFF

Switching ON D Turn winding unit switch (1) to the left until the black surface appears. Switching OFF D Turn winding unit switch (1) to the right until the red surface appears.

1

D301-39

148-640 001 en 6.2003

2 - 15

Autoconer 338

2.2.2

Red light and Yellow light

Red light → (2) Yellow light → (3) Red light ON steadily A winding failure has taken place. Start of winding unit after remedy: D Touch Red or Yellow light, or switch winding unit switch OFF-ON.

2

D The winding unit starts. Red light ON flashing at low frequency 3

A technical blockage has occurred, to be remedied by a qualified technician (→ 10.2). Red light ON flashing at high frequency Only on machines with wax sensor: D The wax roll has worn-off, to be replaced by a new one.

Yellow ligh ON steadily D301-39

Yellow light ON steadily indicates that the programmed yarn length (or diameter) of the package has been reached. The package is ready for doffing. The winding unit has been stopped, and a doffer request has been registered. On machines without package doffer(s): D Manually replace the package by an empty cone/sleeve and restart the winding unit manually (→ Manual new package start). Yellow light ON flashing Program transmission (→ 10.2).

2 - 16

148-640 001 8.0 en 6.2003

Autoconer 338 Red light → (2) Yellow light → (3) Red and Yellow light ON steadily Poor quality of the supply package (bobbin). Initiate a bobbin change cycle: D Touch Red or Yellow light, or switch winding unit switch OFF-ON. D The winding unit performs a bobbin change cycle and restarts.

2

Red as well as Yellow light ON flashing 3

Poor quality of the package being wound, to be changed manually. Manually replace the package by an empty cone/sleeve and restart the winding unit manually (→ Manual new package start). Or: A new lot has been started. The winding unit awaits manual new package start (→ Manual new package start). Red light ON steadily, Yellow light ON flashing D Evenly at 1Hz

D301-39

Winding unit has been stopped for test purpose (→ Part 3.4 Service: Test, Test mode, Test Winding unit “Joining cycle“). D Flashing alternatingly Toggle function activated (→ 4.2, Toggle operation).

148-640 001 en 6.2003

2 - 17

Autoconer 338

2.2.3

Inspection of spliced (or knotted) joint

Stop the winding unit on winding unit switch (1) during the joining cycle, and take the splice (or knot) out of the yarn path.

2.2.4

2

Initiating a Clearer Cut

While the winding unit winds, switch the winding unit switch (1) OFF/ON.

4

2.2.5 1

Tension Device Opening Key

Actuating key (4) opens the yarn tensioner, the ’quick clamp’, and the waxing device (if present). Releasing the key closes these components. Prerequisite: The winding unit must be switched OFF on winding unit switch (1).

D301-39

2.2.6

Supply Package Change Cycle

Manual initiation of a change cycle: D On the winding unit switch (1), switch winding unit OFF. D Touch the Red light (2). D For confirmation the Red light briefly lights up. D Switch winding unit ON. Now the supply package (bobbin) change cycle takes place and the winding unit starts.

2 - 18

148-640 001 8.0 en 6.2003

Autoconer 338

2.2.7 1

e

Manual removal of the delivery package On machines with propack only: Never move the package cradle up or down forcibly, leave it in lifted position if required!

D Switch the winding unit OFF on the winding unit switch. D After complete stop of the yarn guide drum, grab the package with your left hand. D With your right hand move opening lever (1) to the right, and remove the delivery package. Unless the same package is inserted again, proceed as instructed under ”Manual package start”.

D341-02

148-640 001 en 6.2003

2 - 19

Autoconer 338

2.2.8

e

Manual Package Start On machines with propack only: Never move the package cradle up or down forcibly, leave it in lifted position if required!

Manual package start could be required, e.g., D after lot start, or D after manual removal of a package, if the same package is not returned to the cradle. Neither a package, nor an empty cone/sleeve is in the cradle, the winding unit is switched OFF on winding unit switch (1): D Hold an empty cone/sleeve in your left hand. Observe LH/RH orientation of cones. D With your right hand, grab the lower yarn end and thread it into the guiding elements along the yarn path.

D341-01

D Place yarn end across the outer edge of the cone/sleeve and retain it in this position with your left hand. D With your right hand, move the opening lever to the right, and insert the cone/sleeve between the package adapters. Have the yarn end clamped on the RH side between cone/sleeve and adapter. D Winding of transfer tail: Manually rotate the cone/sleeve forward, while guiding the yarn manually, until a sufficiently long transfer tail is wound. D Package start after lot start: 2 1

– Briefly actuate the yellow illuminated key (2) – Switch the winding unit ON on winding unit switch (1). – The winding unit starts. D Package start after removal of a package: – Actuate and hold yellow key (2).

D301-40

– Switch the winding unit ON on winding unit switch (1). – Hold yellow key actuated until the yellow light lights up. On machines with propack only: The cradle descents. – The winding unit starts, the yellow lamp is extinguished. With this procedure the memorized yarn length, or package diameter, resp., is reset to zero.

2 - 20

148-640 001 8.0 en 6.2003

Autoconer 338

2.3

Supply Package (Bobbin) Change

2.3.1

Model RM / Replenishing the Circular Magazine

1

2

Pull and retain the leading yarn end off the bobbin. Place the package (bobbin) base first into a vacant magazine chamber (1). Push the yarn clamp (2) aside and allow the yarn end to be sucked into the suction tube.

D377-21

Sequence Allways begin replenshing at the first vacant magazine chamber viewing clockwise (→ Ill.) ending with chamber No. 5.

1 6 2

5

e

Never attempt to fill chamber No. 6.

3 4

D377-22

2.3.2

Model E / Supply Package Creeling

Manually separate and retain the leading yarn end. Place the supply package on the creel arbor (Base first). Thread the yarn into the pigtail (1) and place it next to the suction pipe (2). 2 1

D384-07

148-640 001 en 6.2003

2 - 21

Autoconer 338

2.3.3

Model RC / Loading the Creel-out Magazine

Separate and hold the leading yarn end of the creel-out package. Base first, place the creel-out package in the vacant pocket of the creel-out magazine (1). Have the yarn end drawn into suction nozzle (2).

2 1

D376-02

12

1

Creeling Sequence 2

Always begin creeling at the first vacant pocket in clockwise direction ( → Ill.), ending with magazine pocket No. 11.

3 4 5

e

Never attempt to creel pocket No. 12!

11 10 6 7 9

8

D376-03

2 - 22

148-640 001 8.0 en 6.2003

Autoconer 338 2.4

1

2.5

Package Doffer

2.5.1

Switching the Doffer ON/OFF

Switching ON D Move turn switch (1) to the right to “Automatic“. The doffer is switched ON. Switching OFF D Move turn switch (1) to the left to “Manual“. The doffer is switched OFF. Note: The doffer operates on (electronic) request only; i.e. it remains in standby position until a request from a winding unit is registered. 2

D560-01

2.5.2

Keyboard

Entries and inquiries can be performed via key board (2) (→ next page: “Display of information and failures“).

e 2.5.3

3

These entries/inquiries are to be performed by qualified authorized personnel only!

Patrol Direction Reversal

Two sensor plates (3) are provided on the side of the doffer; contact of either sensor plate with an obstruction causes immediate reversal of the doffer’s patrol direction. Slightly touching a sensor plate while the doffer is in standby mode causes the doffer to travel appr. 3 winding units in the corresponding direction.

D501-24

3

2.5.4

Manually Disengaging the Doffer

Pulling the latch (4) releases the doffer from its engagement with a winding unit!

e

The doffer’s turn switch (1) must be on “Manual“ or the machine must be switched OFF, before attempting to manually disengage the doffer from a winding unit! The doffer’s cycling drive must be in neutral position.

4

When shifting the disengaged doffer sideways be sure there is no obstruction in its way. Switching the doffer (or the machine, resp.) ON again automatically retains the latch.

D501-43

148-640 001 en 6.2003

2 - 23

Autoconer 338

2.5.5

Information and Failure Display

Text display (2) takes place in German or English only for the following functions: Display of Operation Status 2 3

1 3

D Doffer in “Automatic mode“ (1) Information displayed: (First line) AUTOMATIC, clock time (Second line) Winding unit requesting doffer, or radial position of cam package in °, present position (Winding unit No.) of doffer. D Doffer in “Manual“ (1) mode for service purpose

D560-01

Text display: (First line) Main Menu (Second line) MANUAL Individual menu items can be selected via keyboard.

e

These entries / scans are reserved for qualified, authorized personnel only!

Information Display Informational display appears whenever external actual occurrences hamper the doffer’s functions; e.g. “No cone / sleeve in the magazine“ (the winding unit to be doffed has no empty cones / sleeves in its magazine). Note: Information display appears only on the package doffer. Failure Messages Failure messages are indicated by Red flashing keys (3).

e

Malfunctions of the doffer must be remedied by qualified personnel only.

After failure remedy actuate the “Enter“ key for confirmation and message clearing. Note: Simultaneously the failure messages are indicated on the Informator in the language previously selected. Additional information → D 4.5 “Display of information and failures“ D 10.5 “Package doffer“

2 - 24

148-640 001 8.0 en 6.2003

Autoconer 338

3 Informator

148-640 001 en 6.2003

3-1

Autoconer 338

3-2

148-640 001 8.0 en 6.2003

Autoconer 338 3.0 3.0.1

General . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

3-7 3-7

3.0.2

Listing of Buttons and Symbols . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

3-8

3.1

Fundamentals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

3 - 13

3.1.1 3.1.2 3.1.3

Structure and Functions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Control Surface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Monitor Screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

3 - 13 3 - 14 3 - 15

3.1.4 3.1.5 3.1.6

Screen Structure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Screen Adjustments . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Master Menu / Structure of Dialog Windows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

3 - 16 3 - 18 3 - 19

3.1.7 3.1.8 3.1.9

Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Password Protection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Cancellation of Password Protection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

3 - 20 3 - 21 3 - 22

3.1.10 3.1.11 3.1.12 3.1.13

Entry / Selection of Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Window: Listings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Notes provided in the Manual . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

3 - 23 3 - 28 3 - 29 3 - 30

3.1.14 3.1.15 3.1.16

Initial Start . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Release of options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Printer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

3 - 31 3 - 32 3 - 34

3.1.17 3.1.18 3.1.19

PC-Card Slot . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . PC-Card Settings / Battery Change . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Reloading of the Informator Program . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

3 - 35 3 - 37 3 - 38

3.1.20 3.1.21

Battery Buffer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Voltage Supply/Fuse . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

3 - 40 3 - 41

3.2 3.2.1 3.2.2

Lot (Yarn Lot) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Group Memories . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Lot preparation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

3 - 43 3 - 43 3 - 44

3.2.3 3.2.4 3.2.5

Drum Drive . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Splicer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Thermosplicer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

3 - 45 3 - 48 3 - 49

3.2.6 3.2.7 3.2.8

Package . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Quality Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Quality Control, Autospeed . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

3 - 51 3 - 58 3 - 60

3.2.9 3.2.10 3.2.11

Quality control, Quality package . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Quality control, Clearer cuts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Quality Control, Cycles . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

3 - 62 3 - 66 3 - 69

3.2.12 3.2.13 3.2.14

Quality Control, Ribbon Breaking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Delivery Package Doffer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Special . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

3 - 70 3 - 72 3 - 75

3.2.15 3.2.16 3.2.17

Special settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Options (Variopack) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Control, Lot control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

3 - 76 3 - 78 3 - 80

3.2.18

Lot copying . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

3 - 87

148-640 001 en 6.2003

3-3

Autoconer 338 3.3

Machine Parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

3 - 89

3.3.1

Machine configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

3 - 90

3.3.2

Machine configuration, Basic adjustments . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

3 - 92

3.3.3

Machine configuration, Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

3 - 94

3.3.4

Machine configuration, Pneumatics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

3 - 96

3.3.5

Machine configuration, Section . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

3 - 97

3.3.6

Machine configuration, Specification . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

3 - 100

3.3.7

Machine configuration, Automation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

3 - 104

3.3.8

Shift calendar . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

3 - 107

3.3.9

Delivery Packages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

3 - 111

3.3.10

Delivery Packages, Package Doffer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

3 - 112

3.3.11

Delivery packages, Package conveyor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

3 - 114

3.3.12

Pneumatic System / Dust Extraction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

3 - 116

3.3.13

Pneumatics / Dust Extraction, Compressed Air / Sub-Pressure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

3 - 117

3.3.14

Pneumatics / Dust Extraction, Dust Removal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

3 - 118

3.3.15

Pneumatics / Dust Extraction, Travelling Cleaner . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

3 - 119

3.3.16

Network . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

3 - 120

3.4

Service . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

3 - 121

3.4.1

Test, Bus test . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

3 - 122

3.4.2

Test, Test mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

3 - 123

3.4.3

Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

3 - 126

3.4.4

Program transfer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

3 - 133

3.4.5

Internal Service Functions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

3 - 137

3.5

Data Display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

3 - 139

3.5.1

Production data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

3 - 140

3.5.2

Production Data, Lot Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

3 - 141

3.5.3

Production Data, Winding Unit Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

3 - 142

3.5.4

Production Data, Production Review . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

3 - 148

3.5.5

Production Data, extended Production Review . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

3 - 149

3.5.6

Production data, Clearer data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

3 - 150

3.5.7

Machine data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

3 - 158

3.5.8

Machine Data, Electric / Electronic Equipment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

3 - 159

3.5.9

Machine data: Compressed air/Sub-pressure (Suction) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

3 - 161

3.5.10

Machine Data, Automation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

3 - 164

3.5.11

Machine Data, Section . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

3 - 165

3.5.12

Machine Data, Package Doffer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

3 - 166

3.5.13

Messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

3 - 169

3.5.14

Reports . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

3 - 171

3.5.15

Reports, Lot-Reports . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

3 - 173

3.5.16

Reports, Winding Unit Reports . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

3 - 175

3.5.17

Reports, Machine Reports . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

3 - 179

3-4

148-640 001 8.0 en 6.2003

Autoconer 338 3.6

Dialog . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

3 - 181

3.6.1

Language . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

3 - 182

3.6.2

Date / Clock time . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

3 - 183

3.6.3

Master Key . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

3 - 184

3.6.4

Restoration of password protection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

3 - 185

3.6.5

Unit of Length . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

3 - 186

3.6.6

Unit of Weight . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

3 - 187

3.6.7

Unit of Yarn Count . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

3 - 188

3.6.8

Red Lights until Signal Lamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

3 - 189

3.7

Reports . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

3 - 191

3.7.1

Report heading . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

3 - 192

3.7.2

Shift report . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

3 - 192

3.7.3

Lot change report . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

3 - 195

3.7.4

Repeated shift report: Actual data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

3 - 195

3.7.5

Intermediate report: Actual data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

3 - 196

3.7.6

Repeated shift report: Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

3 - 197

3.7.7

Intermediate Report: Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

3 - 200

3.7.8

Repeated shift report: Actual data of a winding unit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

3 - 201

3.7.9

Intermediate Report: Actual Winding Unit Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

3 - 203

3.7.10

Test report . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

3 - 203

3.7.11

Configuration report . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

3 - 204

3.7.12

Messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

3 - 207

3.7.13

Start-up messages of the Informator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

3 - 207

3.7.14

Bus test . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

3 - 207

148-640 001 en 6.2003

3-5

Autoconer 338

3-6

148-640 001 8.0 en 6.2003

Autoconer 338

3.0

General

3.0.1

Introduction

Great care has been taken while collating text portions and illustrations contained in this manual. Occasional errors, however, cannot be totally precluded. Editor and authors can not be held legally liable in any respect for erroneous information and possible results thereof. All maintenance and service work must be performed by service personnel authorized by Schlafhorst. Schlafhorst will not accept liability for damages resulting from incompetent maintenance, or from service work performed by unauthorized persons.

a

Safety precautions must be complied with during the performance of any work (→ 1.0). The customer is responsible for compliance with locally applicable safety and equipment rules and regulations.

Operation Manual Prior to operation of the Informator the operation manual should be thoroughly studied. Any user detecting an error in the manual, or the possibility of false interpretation of an instruction, is asked to kindly inform Schlafhorst’s Technical Editorial department forthwith, in order to enable Schlafhorst to upgrade such passages of the manual. Monitor Screen Images Some of the menus are displayed only if the machine is specified and equipped accordingly. Such menus not in accordance with the equipment at hand, although explained in this manual, cannot be displayed on the monitor screen. The screen images depicted in this manual are only meant to serve for better understanding of the system, they could deviate from the actual display on the monitor screen.

148-640 001 en 6.2003

3-7

Autoconer 338

3.0.2

Listing of Buttons and Symbols

Buttons to the Right of the Screen Adjustment of Contrast: Lighter screen

Entry through “scrolling up“

Entry through “scrolling down“ Adjustment of Contrast: Darker screen Cursor down; one line down Printer: Advance paper feed Cursor up; one line up General Buttons Schlafhorst-Logo (For intergrated clearer only: Reversal to clearer menu)

Leafing, to next page

Leafing, to previous page O.K.; (entry confirmation) Leafing, several pages forward Go back; one level, or one step Leafing, several pages backward Info; call for help text Leafing to 1st page Abortion of entry Lot No., counting down Clear (erase) last entry Lot No., counting up Access denied, wrong password Winding unit No., counting down

Winding unit No., counting up

3-8

148-640 001 8.0 en 6.2003

Autoconer 338 Select

Display of actual number

Special selection, filter

... Display ... per 100 km (miles)

Cut out

Machine section

Mark

Printing of display on screen

Internal memory Insert PC Card Copy to ... Alert message, Red signal lamp Copying: Data to PC Card Warning, Yellow signal lamp Copy lot Chronological listing of messages Data-, or Program transfer Note, Information

Page 1

Page 2

Page 3

148-640 001 en 6.2003

3-9

Autoconer 338 Menu Button Symbols The sequence corresponds to the menu sequence. Lot

Machine setup

Setup

Machine configuration

Drum drive

Basic setting

Splicer

Options

Delivery package

Pneumatics

Quality control

Section

Delivery package doffer

Specification type

Special

Automation

Control

Shift calendar

Copy lot

Delivery packages


Delivery package conveyor

Autofeed

3 - 10

148-640 001 8.0 en 6.2003

Autoconer 338 Pneumatics/Dust removal

Service

Compressed air/Sub-pressure

Test

Dust removal

Bus test

Travelling cleaner

Test mode

Network

Maintenance

Start-up messages Informator

Program transfer

Internal service functions

148-640 001 en 6.2003

3 - 11

Autoconer 338 Data display

Machine Data

Production data

Electrics/Electronics

Lot data

Compressed air/Sub-pressure

Winding unit data

Automation

Production review

Section

Clearer data


Clearer data Wdg. unit or Lot per 100 km (mi)

Messages

Clearer data Wdg. unit or Lot

Reports

Clearer data of winding unit

Lot reports

Clearer data of lot

Winding unit reports

Clearer data Winding units data

Machine reports

Clearer data Lots data

Dialog

Date/Clock time

3 - 12

148-640 001 8.0 en 6.2003

Autoconer 338

3.1

Fundamentals

3.1.1

Structure and Functions

The Informator is incorporated in the energy and control unit of the machine. The Informator manages and stores all machine and production parameters, as well as production data required for the operation of Autoconer 338. Data exchange with the sub-assemblies of the machine also takes place via the Informator: D Winding unit D Package doffer D Yarn waste chamber D Suction unit D Dust removal D Clearer (Variable) D Empty tube conveyor D Package conveyor Communication/Entries Communication between Informator and user takes place via monitor screen dialog. D161-67

User entries also take place via monitor screen. Language During operation two languages are freely selectable: D German and one of the following languages: D English D French D Italian D Spanish D Portuguese D Turkish D Chinese* Reports Printouts from the integrated thermo printer take place D automatically at predetermined times (shift changes), D upon request by the user, or D at lot change.

* Optional

148-640 001 en 6.2003

3 - 13

Autoconer 338

1

2

inf00167

3.1.2

Control Surface

The Informator’s control surface is composed of two elements:

➀

The monitor screen (→ 3.1.3), on which entries are also made, and

➁

the printer (→ 3.1.16) with integrated PC-Card slot.

3 - 14

148-640 001 8.0 en 6.2003

Autoconer 338

1 2 3

inf00167e

3.1.3

Monitor Screen

Display / Resolution

Darkening of the Screen

The Informator incorporates a monochromic LCD screen with a resolution of 640 x 480 image points. The LCDscreen is back-lighted (cathodic tube).

The screen is automatically darkened if no screen activity has taken place during appr. three consecutive minutes.

Foil-Type Keyboard A foil-type keyboard is super-imposed on the screen, permitting direct user entries on the screen. Operation of the Screen Operation takes place through slight pressure on the screen surface. A menu item is selected as follows: D Touch the menu item to be selected with your finger tip or with a dull-tipped instrument. D Under no circumstance should a sharp-pointed instrument be used, as the screen surface is made of plastic material!

With darkened screen, touch any place on the screen in order to have the master menu (→ 3.1.6) appear. Cleaning of the Screen The screen surface is made of plastic material. Never use aggressive cleaning agents for cleaning! Use a soft cloth with little water and mild soap! Screen Lighting Control The degree of screen lighting can be adjusted on keys ➀ and ➁. Printing Paper Feed Actuation of key ➂ starts feed of the printing paper.

D Only one place should be touched at any time, in order to prevent false entries.

148-640 001 en 6.2003

3 - 15

Autoconer 338

2

1

3

4

5 6

6

inf00100e

3.1.4

Screen Structure

All windows of the screen are of identical layout, with a head line and a dialog window.

➀ ➁

➂

➃

Symbol fields: O.K.; entry confirmation

Head Line Info field with current date, clock time, and program version No. With integrated clearers only: Touching this field flip-flops between entries/displays of the Schlafhorst Informator and of the clearer system.

Return; one level back, one step back

Display of the menu item selected last (e.g. reports). Field is selectable for entries only. Function: Entry abortion, reset.

Info; calling the help text

Note: The fields shown under ➂ and ➃ are depicted “dimly“, i.e. these fields can not be selected, nor do they have a function to control.

3 - 16

148-640 001 8.0 en 6.2003

Autoconer 338

1

2

3

4

5 6

6

inf00100e

➄

Menu Windows The menu window depicts the various menu items: Menu item not selectable Menu item selectable, not actuated

A menu item is marked with a symbol and a corresponding legend;

Lot ...

Informator: Temperature 29°C

Notation

Menu item selectable, actuated (→ ➅) Lot ...

Test report output <>

148-640 001 en 6.2003

with a legend and the corresponding data.

“...“, means that a succeeding menu can be opened; “<>“, means that this menu item is a command, to be executed instantly.

3 - 17

Autoconer 338

1 2 3

inf00167e

3.1.5

Screen Adjustments

Display Lighting

Screen Lighting Control

The Informator’s monitor screen is backlighted by a cathodal tube.

The degree of screen lighting can be adjusted on keys ➀ and ➁:

In order to save lighting capacity the screen lighting is extinguished automatically if no screen activity has taken place in appr. three consecutive minutes.

➀ ➁

Screen Activation

more contrast

= Darker screen

less contrast

= Lighter screen

Printer’s Paper Feed ➂ (→ → 3.1.16)

The master menu (→ next page) appears when touching the darkened screen at any place.

3 - 18

148-640 001 8.0 en 6.2003

Autoconer 338

2

1

6

4

3

5

inf00101e

3.1.6

Master Menu / Structure of Dialog Windows

After screen activation, as well as after switch-ON and completion of the Informator’s start routine, the 5 menu items of the master selection (only the LH column ➀) appear on screen. Activation of Succeeding Levels D Touch menu item “Lot ...“ ➁. Menu level 1 with additional menu items relating to “Lot“ ➂ appears. D Touch menu item “Preparation ...“ ➃. Menu level 2 with menu items relating to “Lot preparation“ ➄ appears. Selection of a Menu Item D Touch menu item “Drum drive ...“ ➅. Menu “Drum drive“ is opened (→ next page).

148-640 001 en 6.2003

3 - 19

Autoconer 338

1

2

3

4 inf00460e

3.1.7

Menu

A menu is the level D in which entries and inquiries can be initiated, and/or D in which settings and data can be displayed. Example: Menu “Drum drive“ (Call-up of menu → previous page)

➀

Heading of menu

The dialog window displays the available data boxes:

➁

Data boxes for joint entries are joined to each other by a shaded connecting strip.

➂

Data boxes with pale indication are for information only.

➃

Keys with symbols could be shown in the lower portion of the menus. The utilized symbols are identical with the indications of the menu items. These keys represent a possibility for quick reversal to other menus, to assist experienced users. Exception: In menu “Machine setup...; Machine configuration...” these keys are the only way to reverse into further menus. Listing of all symbols → 3.0.2.

3 - 20

148-640 001 8.0 en 6.2003

Autoconer 338

1

inf00461e

3.1.8

Password Protection

Data entry is restricted by password protection in order to prevent unauthorized entries or erasures of data; only through entry of a “Password“ can access be gained to the system.

Note

Inaccessible menu items or data fields are marked with a key (→ ➀).

D all parameters and settings.

There are two access levels: D The master key allows access to all entries, except those which penetrate the Informator system.

Without password the user can freely review D all production data, and

Password Definition Passwords are defined in menu “Dialog“. Ten master passwords can be defined. The service key is required for password definition.

D The service key allows access to all entries, including those pertaining to “Internal service functions ...“

148-640 001 en 6.2003

3 - 21

Autoconer 338

1

inf00104e

3.1.9

Cancellation of Password Protection

Upon actuation of a menu item or a key protected by password, a window opens prompting entry of the password. The keyboard of this window resembles a pocket calculator. Entry: D The password is represented by a 4-digit number. D Enter the password, e.g. “1256“ then actuate key “O.K.“ (→ ➀). D Upon correct entry appears briefly “Access permitted“, the selected window (Menu) opens subsequently.

3 - 22

148-640 001 8.0 en 6.2003

Autoconer 338

3 1

2

1

inf00460e

3.1.10 Entry / Selection of Data There are four different types of entries:

Leafing Up/Down

D Selection via “Leafing up/down“

Used for, e.g., selection of the production group to be displayed.

D Entries via selection menu D Alphanumerical entries (Numbers and letters) D Numerical entries (Numbers)

Example for selection of a production group: D Actuate the menu items in the following sequence: Lot ...; Lot preparation ...; Drum drive ... D Now there are two possibilities: – Actuate the key for leafing up/down (→ ➀) for the selection of the desired production group,or – Actuate the field of the actual group (→ ➁). In the now appearing window the desired group can be selelected, with subsequent actuation of key “O.K.“ (→ ➂).

148-640 001 en 6.2003

3 - 23

Autoconer 338

2 1

inf00105e

Selection Menu

Entry Abortion

On the screen various menu items are displayed for selection.

While actuation of key “O.K.“ (→ ➀) confirms an entry key ➁ (last selection) can be actuated for cancellation of the entry portion already entered.

Example: D Actuate menu items in the following sequence: Lot ...; Lot preparation ...; Drum drive ...

The entry window is vacated, and previously entered data remains valid.

D Caution: Initially select a production group which is NOT in production (in order to prevent overwriting of existing parameters)! D Actuate menu item “Reversed drum drive“. D Now a password prompting could take place. D The selectable fields, in this case for reversed drum drive, appear on screen. D Select one of the fields, e.g. SLOW, then actuate key “O.K.“ (→ ➀). Now the new value is adapted, it is displayed in menu item “Reversed drum drive“.

3 - 24

148-640 001 8.0 en 6.2003

Autoconer 338

3 1

2

inf00106e

Alphanumerical Entries (Numbers and Letters)

Entry Abortion

A keyboard resembling a typewriter keyboard appears on screen.

While actuation of key “O.K.“ (→ ➀) confirms an entry key ➂ (last selection) can be actuated for cancellation of the entry portion already entered.

Example: D Actuate menu items in the following sequence: Lot ...; Lot preparation ...; Drum drive ...

The entry window is vacated, and previously entered data remains valid.

D Caution: Initially select a production group which is NOT in production (in order to prevent overwriting of existing parameters)! D Actuate menu item “Lot name“. D Now a password prompting could take place. D The alphanumerical keyboard appears on screen. D Enter a text, e.g. COTTON, then actuate key “O.K.“ (→ ➀). D Actuation of key “ERASE“ ➁ clears the sign entered last. D Now the new text is adapted, it is displayed in menu item “Lot name“.

148-640 001 en 6.2003

3 - 25

Autoconer 338

3 1

2

inf00107e

Numerical Entries

Entry Abortion

A keyboard resembling the keyboard of a pocket calculator appears on screen.

While actuation of key “O.K.“ (→ ➀) confirms an entry key ➂ (last selection) can be actuated for cancellation of the entry portion already entered.

Example: D Actuate menu items in the following sequence: Lot ...; Lot preparation ...; Drum drive ... D Caution: Initially select a production group which is NOT in production (in order to prevent ”overwriting” of existing parameters)!

The entry window is vacated, and previously entered data remains valid. Display of Boundary Values

D Now a password prompting could take place.

The boundary values (range from ... to) applicable to the entry on hand appears in the upper LH corner of the window. This value range is automatically matched with the machine configuration.

D The numerical keyboard appears on screen.

Example:

D Enter a number, e.g. 1100, then actuate key “O.K.“ (→ ➀).

On a machine of 30 winding units no operation range larger than 30 can be entered.

D Actuate menu item “Speed“.

D Actuation of key “ERASE“ ➁ clears the number entered last. D Now the new value is adapted, it is displayed in menu item “speed“.

3 - 26

148-640 001 8.0 en 6.2003

Autoconer 338

2

1

3

4

inf00108e

Numerical Entries from ... to ...

Entry Abortion

A keyboard resembling a pocket calculator keyboard appears on screen.

While actuation of key “O.K.“ (→ ➀) confirms an entry key ➁ (last selection) can be actuated for cancellation of the entry portion already entered.

Two lines are provided under ➂ for entry of values “from ... to“. Example: D Actuate menu items in the following sequence: Machine setup ...; Delivery packages ...; Package doffer ...

The entry window is vacated, and previously entered data remains valid. Display of Boundary Values

D Now a password prompting could take place.

The boundary values (range from ... to) applicable to the entry on hand appear in the upper LH corner of the window. This value range is automatically matched with the machine configuration.

D The numerical keyboard appears on screen.

Example:

D Entry of the first value as explained in “Numerical entries“.

On a machine of 30 winding units no operation range larger than 30 can be entered.

D Actuate menu item “Doffer 1 service range“.

D Touching data field “from ... to“ ➂ switches to value “to“. D Entry of the second value, then actuate key “O.K.“ (→ ➀). D Actuation of key “ERASE“ ➃ clears the number entered last. D The new values are now adapted, they are displayed in field “Doffer 1 service range“.

148-640 001 en 6.2003

3 - 27

Autoconer 338

3 5 2

4 1

4 3

inf00109e

6

3.1.11 Window: Listings Listings are provided in the area “Messages” and in menu “Lot copying“. A window containing 5 two-lined information blocks appears on screen.

➀

The 5 information blocks are situated below each other.

➁

Symbols are provided depending on the specific window; they are explained on the corresponding manual page.

➂

Scrolling within the screen page: One each line up or down.

➃

Leafing in screen pages: One each page up or down.

➄

Indication which page is on display.

➅

Key “Printing“: Actuation starts printing of of the actual screen page.

3 - 28

148-640 001 8.0 en 6.2003

Autoconer 338

inf00110e

inf00111e

3.1.12 Notes provided in the Manual Notes concerning D entries necessary to display the menu shown on the manual page, and D the selectable entry range to a menu item are always identical in this documentation. Example:

Delivery Package Entry: Lot ...; Lot preparation ...; Del. package ...

Touching the corresponding menu item opens the described menu, e.g.”Delivery package“.

Nominal-Diameter < 40.00 ... 326.00 (180.00) mm > < 1.57 ... 12.83 (7.09) in >

Value range of the described menu with the value preset on the Informator.

< Value range (preset) unit of meas. >

148-640 001 en 6.2003

3 - 29

Autoconer 338

1

inf00113e

3.1.13 Messages The Informator issues messages on screen D concerning the occurrence of failures, D upon initiation of a process, e.g. “Lot start“ and D concerning the state of equipment, or concerning failures (→ Ill.) Either the message window closes automatically after several seconds, or upon actuation of symbol field “Message confirmation“ (→ ➀). Note: Further information under 3.5 “Messages“, and in chapters 10.1.

3 - 30

148-640 001 8.0 en 6.2003

Autoconer 338

inf00114e

3.1.14 Initial Start Prerequisites for Initial start:

D After Restart continue in menu “Machine setup“:

D All mechanical settings on the machine have been completed.

– Shift calendar: Entry of shift calendar data.

D The Informator is activated.

– Delivery packages: Entries for package doffer and package conveyor.

All machine- and lot-related parameters must be entered on the Informator. Proceed in the following sequence for these entries: D Menu “Dialog“ – Language, Clock time, units for length and weight, and red lights until signal lamp ON. D Menu “Machine setup“ – Machine configuration: For initial start only, all entries related to the machine specifications are made at this time. Special release codes can be entered in menu “Options”. Related infomation under “Release of options” → 3.1.15. A Restart takes place after confirmation of these entries. Subsequently the machine is ready for operation.

148-640 001 en 6.2003

– Pneumatic features/Dust removal: Entries concerning compressed air/suction level, bobbin dust removal, and travelling cleaner. D Menu “Lot“ – (Lot) Setup Entries for drum drive, splicer, delivery package, quality control, package doffer. – (Lot) Control All entries are completed. Now the lot can be started in this menu.

3 - 31

Autoconer 338

1

inf00459e

3.1.15 Release of options Entry: Machine setup...; Machine configuration...; Symbol: Some of the machine functions are optional, being furnished at extra charge. For activation of such functions a release code (Dongle) must be entered in the window shown above. The desired option can not be activated if no release code is entered, or if the entered code does not match the Informator’s serial No.

Establishing the release code

The release code

The following data is required for such inquiry:

D is valid for one machine (Informator) only;

D Your customer No.

D is stored in a separate, battery-buffered memory of the Informator; and

D The machine No.

D will be lost only when removing the buffer batteries and switching the supply voltage OFF; thereafter is has to be newly entered.

D For Propack only: The number of winding units to be released.

3 - 32

If the release code is not known, please contact D Your Servicemanager, D your service inspector, or D Schlafhorst AG & Co., dept. WLA

D The Informator’s serial No. (see ➀)

148-640 001 8.0 en 6.2003

Autoconer 338

1

2

inf00459e

Entry of the release code

Emergency release

e

In exceptional circumstances, e.g. exchange of an Informator on a weekend, it is possible to obtain release of a function via an “Emergency release” feature.

To be urgently noted prior to the entry of a release code: For user control of the Informator, do not utilize language “Chinese”.

Entry of the release code is described on the corresponding page under “Machine setup...; Machine configuration...”.

It remains valid for 72 hours. Beginning with the 68th hour a message is displayed every hour. This “Emergency release” is available for a maximum of 3 occurrences. Subsequently a release can be obtained only through entry of the “correct” release code. Entry of Emergency release Through entry of the Informator’s serial No. (as emergency release code) the function(s) are released for 72 hours.

148-640 001 en 6.2003

3 - 33

Autoconer 338

3.1.16 Printer Low-maintenance printer for thermopaper with

1

D 40 signs per line.

2

D Paper end indication. D Over-heating protection.

2

All reports are issued via printer: D For paper tape removal, pull the tape down across the comb ➀. D A report already started is continued after paper roll renewal. D A report is aborted if there is no paper present at report start. D161-03

Maintenance Using a soft brush, thoroughly clean printer and adjacent areas before inserting a new paper roll. Changing the Paper Roll D Open the cover hood: Grab orifices ➁ with thumb and forefinger and flip the cover open. D Remove empty paper roll. D Actuate key ➂ Paper feed until all remaining old paper has been ejected. D Insert new paper roll and place leading end of paper into threading slot ➃.

3 D161-05

D Actuate key Paper feed ➂ until the paper protrudes from the ejection slot ➄ appr. 1”. D If the paper toes at threading, lift lever ➅ up in order to loosen the paper feed, straighten the paper and lower the lever for paper feed. D Hold leading paper end up while closing the cover hood.

5 4 6

D161-41

3 - 34

148-640 001 8.0 en 6.2003

Autoconer 338

1

D161-40

3.1.17 PC-Card Slot The PC-Card-slot serves for entering a PC-Card.

Handling Instructions

The PC-Card represents a portable data memory to allow

D Do not fold or twist the PC-Card.

D transmission of lot settings from one machine to another;

D Do not subject the card to high humidity or liquids.

D filing of lot settings; and D loading of programs and program sections to the Informator, to winding units, to package doffer(s), and to all control elements (e.g. program updating).

D When not in use, store the card in its hardbox. D Do not write on the card if its internal battery is empty. D Do not remove the card from the Informator while it is being read or written on. Inserting and Removing the PC-Card D Open cover hood as previously explained under “Printer“ (→ previous page). D Insert the PC-Card with the arrow on top pointing into slot ➀ until it hits a stop. D For removal simply pull the PC-Card out.

148-640 001 en 6.2003

3 - 35

Autoconer 338

D161-40

Two types of PC-Cards are utilized with the Informator:

PC-Card Type FLASH

D PC-Card Type SRAM (Optional)

They carry programs which can be loaded, e.g. into the Informator, or into winding units.

D PC-Card Type FLASH (one per installation) PC-Card Type SRAM Lot data from the Informator can be stored on the PC-Card, or transmitted from the PC-Card into the Informator. This allows copying of lot lot data from one machine to another. SRAM-Cards are provided with a memory for repeated writing; the memory contents are stored by an internal battery: D The life expectancy of the battery is appr. 4 years, after which the battery should be replaced (→ next page).

FLASH-Cards are furnished readily written, they can be rewritten by Schlafhorst only. Unintentional erasure of these cards in the Informator is not possible. The PC-Card always carries the programs of all devices of the machine, avoiding compatibility problems. Also, prior to data transmission exmination is made if the programs match eachother (e.g. program version doffer vs. program version winding unit). Programs not harmonizing with eachother can not be loaded. Loading of PC-Card Type FLASH - programs

D Measuring the battery voltage takes place after insertion of the card. A failure message is issued for insuffient battery voltage.

Transmission of the PC-Card programs (or program sections) to winding units, doffer, or machine control is described in menu “Program Transmission“ (Service ...; Program transmission ...).

Loading/storage of PC-Card Type SRAM - programs

For reloading (or overwriting) the Informator program please proceed as instructed on page 3.1.19.

Loading and storage is described in chapter “Lot copying“ (Lot ...; Lot copying ...).

3 - 36

148-640 001 8.0 en 6.2003

Autoconer 338

1

2 3

D161-39

3.1.18 PC-Card Settings / Battery Change Memory Protection Switch ➀

Battery Change on PC-Card Type SRAM

This switch is provided to protect data stored on the PCCard against unintentional overwriting or erasure.

D Open battery compartment Shifting the shift switch ➁ to the left opens the compartment.

D PC-Card Type FLASH – Overwriting of data on the Informator is not possible. – Loading of PC-Card data to other components is possible regardless of the position of the memory protection- switch. D PC-Card Type SRAM – Read only switch in LH position: PC-Card can be written on.

D Remove cover ➂. D Remove old battery. D Install new battery (3 V, type: CR2325), plus (+) terminal up. The data remains intact if the battery change time does not exceed several minutes. D Clips cover on, and lock via shift switch: to the right on ”LOCK“.

– Read only switch in “WP“ (RH) position: PC-Card is in Read only status. – Loading of PC-Card data to other components is possible regardless of the position of the memory protection switch.

148-640 001 en 6.2003

3 - 37

Autoconer 338

4 0

8 C

2

1

D161-10

3.1.19 Reloading of the Informator Program

b e

The work described as follows has to be performed with switched-ON machine, and exclusively by special-trained electricians!

a

All data is erased during this procedure (Lot data, Machine data, Production data)! For Informator with clearer integration: Possibly, clearer data could also be cleared! Comply with clearer operation instruction, and perform an ’Adjust’ if required.

D Open the control compartment door located on the rear of the machine’s drive end.

D The machine is energized as follows: – Main breaker switch = ON. – ON/OFF keys = OFF D Insert the PC-Card Type FLASH carrying stored programs into the module.

3 - 38

While the machine is energized, the control compartment door should be opened only in order to perform the following Informator settings. Other activities are not permitted! Prior to leaving the control compartment care must be taken that the compartment door is properly closed!

D A hexa-decimal switch (→ ➀) is located in the RH rear of the Informator module (ref. to ill.). Use a small screw driver to reset this switch from “2” to “5”. D Actuate the RESET key (→ ➁). D The Informator performs a RESET (the system is newly started).

148-640 001 8.0 en 6.2003

Autoconer 338

1 Data cleared, call INITIAL START

inf00245

D The menu for program transmission appears on screen, with a key arrangement below. D Confirm program transmission “Load the program from the PC-Card into the storage“ through entry of “Y”; actuate the ENTER key for confirmation. D The internal storage (FLASH) is now unloaded and reloaded. D A prompt appears in the display: “Hit to continue...”; Actuate the ENTER key. D Now loading of the new program data takes place.

D Upon completion of the loading process window “Main menu” appears on screen, with message: “Data cleared, call INITIAL START” (Daten gelöscht, URSTART aufrufen) (ref. to ill.). D Upon confirmation of the window (key ➀) the Informator is ready to receive further entries. D Return the position of the hexa-decimal switch from “5” to “2”. This must not be overlooked, otherwise the Informator cannot be operated, and an other RESET has to be performed! D Remove the PC-Card Type FLASH. D Enter parameter (→ Initial start 3.1.14). D Start the machine through actuation of the ON key. D Start the lot.

148-640 001 en 6.2003

3 - 39

Autoconer 338

D161-08

3.1.20 Battery Buffer All lot data and production data is stored under protection against power failure through buffer batteries. Whenever the battery voltage drops below 3,000 mV the batteries must be replaced within the next few days: D Current battery voltage is indicated in menu “Maintenance“ (Entry: Service ...; Maintenance ...).

Battery Replacement D Open the printer’s cover hood (→ Printer). D Remove paper from printer in order to gain access to the battery compartment (Ill.).

D Battery voltage is measured after switching the Informator ON, and thereafter every 12 hours. A failure message is issued for insuffient battery voltage.

D Replace old batteries by new ones; observe correct polarity! Note: All data remains intact when installing the new batteries less than 20 minutes after removal of the old ones.

Note:

D Insert paper roll (→ Printer).

Commercially available longlife Mignon batteries (LR 6, 1.5 V) are used as buffers.

D Close cover hood.

3 - 40

148-640 001 8.0 en 6.2003

Autoconer 338

1

24 V-

+

Si.

4 0

8 C

2

3

D161-20

3.1.21 Voltage Supply/Fuse From the power supply of the machine control, the Informator is supplied with a voltage of 24 VDC. This voltage ist present as soon as the machine is energized on the main breaker switch.

b

Comply with all applicable safety precautions (→ 1.0)

Inspection of the Informator’s Power Supply D The Informator appears to be without power, the monitor screen remains dark. D The signal lamp located on the operation console indicates that the machine is energized. D The Red LED next to the reset switch (→ ➀) represents the power indication of the Informator. D Pull the power supply plug (→ ➁). D Initially examine whether or not the supply line is energized (24 VDC). D Examine and replace (if required) the power supply fuse (→ ➂). D Fine wire fuse 5 x 20 mm, 6.3 A F (quick). D Replug the plug connection of the power supply cable. D Contact the Schlafhorst customer service dept. if the Informator remains inoperational.

148-640 001 en 6.2003

3 - 41

Autoconer 338

3 - 42

148-640 001 8.0 en 6.2003

Autoconer 338

D161-02

3.2

Lot (Yarn Lot)

3.2.1

Group Memories

The group memories, which could be visualized as the drawers of a drawer cabinet (→ Ill.), function as storage of lot-related parameters. The production data developing during winding is also stored in these group memories. The machine Informator incorporates up to 6 group memories, they are numbered 1 ... 6. Upon completion of Initial Start (e.g. after entering changes of equipment) the Informator automatically places basic setting values into the group memories. The Informator recognizes winding units/machine sections of different specifications [e.g. different yarn guide drums or yarn joining systems (e.g. splicer or knotter)]. Each group is preoccupied with “Basic setting values“ facilitating the operation of the machine; i.e. after Initial Start Autoconer 338 is ready for operation. The group memories are utilized

A group memory can be in one of the following states: D DEFINED: Ready for production (→ Ill. G5 ... G6) – Allocation to sections defined, – Production parameters entered, – Changes are permitted. D PRODUCTION: The defined group has been started, it produces utilizing the entered production parameters (→ Ill. G1 ... G2), is now called Lot. D LOT CHANGE: State of the group during lot change (→ Ill. G3 ... G4). The following lot changes can be selected by entry: – Lot end with full delivery packages: Full packages only are present at lot end. – Instant lot end: Instant lot termination.

D to start of a lot, or D to start different lots on one machine, and D to store parameters of recurrent lots, for later allocation of the group to winding units/machine sections as required.

148-640 001 en 6.2003

3 - 43

Autoconer 338

inf00462e

3.2.2

Lot preparation

Now the user has to examine the ”Basic entry values” and change deviating lot parameters if required. Prior to lot start, enter the winding unit range scheduled for winding according to the lot parameters of the selected group memory.

e

Prior to entry/change of data be sure the correct group memory has been selected! Entries/Changes influence a running lot; erroneous entries can cause production losses! Prior to lot start, double-check, and modify if required, all entries on the Informator, and all settings on the machine.

The following definitions are to be considered for this purpose: D Winding units of different specifications (Type of drum, Yarn joining system) are not to be combined.

3 - 44

D Example: On a machine of 5 sections, section 1 is equipped with asymmetrical yarn guide drums of type U6”, 2gg as, and sections 2 ... 5 with symmetrical yarn guide drums of type U6″, 2gg s. The winding units of sections 1 and 2 can not be started (combined) to process one lot. D Only adjoining (neighboring) winding units can be combined. Example: Winding units 10 ... 25 can be started to process one lot. Winding units 1 ...10, and 26 ... 30 can not be started to process one lot. D The allocation of winding units to one lot does not have to correspond to mechanical sections. Subsequently the lot is started through entry on the Informator. The group memory’s status changes from ”DEFINED” to ”PRODUCTION”. Copy lot Data of one machine can be stored on a PC Card, for copying to other machines scheduled to operate with identical lot parameters.

148-640 001 8.0 en 6.2003

Autoconer 338

inf00251e

3.2.3

Drum Drive

Entry: Lot...; Preparation...; Drum drive... Lot Name

Speed

Freely defined, customer-decided name of a lot, to be printed in the reports.

Linear yarn velocity while winding, taking the ribbon breaker feature into consideration.

< 18 signs maximum >

This entry value depends on the type of yarn guide drum installed.

Lot No.

< 250 ... 2000 (1000) mpm >

Freely defined, customer-coded number of a lot to simplify recognition of production parameter allocation. This number is printed in the reports.

Note

< 18 digits maximum >

With activated Autospeed ( → 3.2.8) entries or entry changes are validated for the winding units when the machine is switched ON, or, resp., after completion of the next bobbin change cycle. Reversed Drum Drive Entry for optimization of “Upper end pick-up“. < SLOW, MEDIUM, FAST >

148-640 001 en 6.2003

3 - 45

Autoconer 338

inf00251e

Smooth Starting Code

C-Acceleration Code

Initial acceleration phase of the yarn guide drum from zero to 100 mpm; the main acceleration phase (C-Acceleration) begins thereafter.

The C-Acceleration Code describes the acceleration of the yarn guide drum from appr. 100 mpm to the selected nominal speed.

Alteration of this entry could be of advantage when using yarn waxing, and for problems due to clearing after start-up (after splicing / knotting).

< 1 ... 255 (18) >

SLOW Acceleration 1 m/s2 → to abate extremely numerous start-up cuts MEDIUM → Basic (Factory) setting

Acceleration 2 m/s2

HIGH → for highest acceleration

Acceleration 3 m/s2

3 - 46

X-Acceleration Code The X-Acceleration Code is used after a doffing cycle for initial start of a new package only. It controls the drum acceleration from appr. 100 mpm on up, first time after doffing only. < 1 ... 255 (4) >

148-640 001 8.0 en 6.2003

Autoconer 338

inf00251e

Loop Gate Code

Displacement drive

The loop gate prevents yarn loop formation during the initial withdrawal of yarn from the supply package. “OFF“ should be entered if this feature is not installed, or if it is not to be used.

Entry only for machines equipped with traverse displacement feature. ON/OFF switching of traverse displacement drive.

Entry:

Speed:

OFF 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 CONT

Gate OFF, always open 100 mpm 200 mpm 300 mpm 400 mpm 500 mpm 600 mpm 700 mpm 800 mpm Continually closed

148-640 001 en 6.2003

< OFF, ON >

3 - 47

Autoconer 338

inf00117e

3.2.4

Splicer

Entry: Lot ...; Preparation ...; Splicer Opening Code

Splicing Code

The splicer performs knot-free joining of two yarn ends. This takes place through initial opening of the ends, preparing them for splicing.

Joining of the opened yarn ends takes place immediately after opening. The total of entry for pulse 1, plus pause, plus pulse 2 cannot exceed the value of 22 (corresponds to 440 ms).

The time of opening depends on the setting for ON-duration. Entry:

ON duration (appr.):

0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7

Function OFF 100 ms 200 ms 300 ms 400 ms 500 ms 600 ms 700 ms

Entry:

ON duration (appr.):

0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9

Function OFF 20 ms 40 ms 60 ms 80 ms 100 ms 120 ms 140 ms 160 ms 180 ms

Basic (Factory) Setting: Pulse 1: 5 Pause: 3 Pulse 2: 5 3 - 48

148-640 001 8.0 en 6.2003

Autoconer 338

inf00464e

3.2.5

Thermosplicer

Entry: Lot...; Setup...; Splicer The settings are to be made as instructed under “Splicer“ (→ 3.2.4). Description of the additional menu items: Note During heating-up of the thermosplicer (4 ... 10 min.), as well as for increasing or reducing the air temperature by at least 10 % the winding units are not ready for operation. The following message window is displayed until at least 10 % of the winding units have reached their nominal temperature: “THERMOSPLICERS OF GROUP x NOT YET AT NOMINAL TEMPERATURE”

148-640 001 en 6.2003

3 - 49

Autoconer 338

inf00464e

Thermosplicer code Entry of code for the splicing temperature (see table on the right). The indicated temperatures are those measured on the air exits of the prism. Enter code “0“ for deactivation of heating. < 0 ... 12 (0) > Accelerated cooling Entry if for D lowering the nominal temperature, or D for lot end the thermosplicer is to be cooled rapidly with compressed air.

Code

°C

Material

0

-

Heated air OFF

1 2

58 66

100 % Synthetics

3 4 5 6

75 83 92 100

Animal fibers with Synthetics

7 8 9 10 11 12

108 117 125 133 142 150

Animal fibers

< NO, YES >

3 - 50

148-640 001 8.0 en 6.2003

Autoconer 338

inf00542e

3.2.6

Package

Entry: Lot...; Setup...; Package... Note

Diameter correction

Diameter as well as yarn length correction is always activated! Therefore both, diameter and length correction factor must always be entered, regardless if winding for equal diameters or for equal yarn length!

The diameter correction factor is a tuning factor to heighten the precision of diameter acquisition.

Nominal diameter When winding with length measuring the Informator automatically sets the nominal diameter to “0.00“. This ensures emergency stop at diameter 326 mm, or 12.8 inches, resp. Precision of the entered nominal diameter has to be refined through entry of a diameter correction factor.

For calculation of the correction factor it is urgently required to take the value already adjusted into consideration: Diameter correction factor = Old correction factor

x

Nominal diameter Act. diameter (pract. value)

< 0.800 - 1.200 (1.000) >

After a power failure, or after package doffing, it takes appr. 40 seconds until a valid value for the diameter has been calculated. < 40.00 - 326.00 (180) mm > < 1.57 - 12.83 (7.09) inches >

148-640 001 en 6.2003

3 - 51

Autoconer 338

inf00542e

Nominal yarn length

Length correction factor

When winding for identical diameters the Informator automatically sets the nominal yarn length to “0“ = unlimited.

The length correction factor is a tuning factor to heighten the precision of yarn length acquisition. It is also used to calculate the production quantity, therefore it must always be established and entered.

The precision of the nominal length has to be refined through entry of a length correction factor. The range of values depends on the type of yarn guide drum. < 5000 - 650000 m > < 5468 - 710846 yds >

For calculation of the correction factor it is urgently required to take the value already adjusted into consideration: Length correction factor = Old correction factor

x

Nom. length Act. length (pract. value)

< 0.800 - 1.200 (1.000) >

3 - 52

148-640 001 8.0 en 6.2003

Autoconer 338

1

2

3 inf00469e

These entries are valid only for machine model ”K“

➁ Entries for operation mode 1:1 winding only:

Operation mode model “K“

Length

Entry to specify the required operation mode of machine model K: “normal”, or “1:1 W inding”, or “Peeling method”. Further information concerning these operation modes in part 4.3.

Entry only when winding a defined yarn length.

➀ NORMAL = Normal winding on machines model K. ➁ 1 FOR 1 = 1:1 Winding: Operation mode for unwinding and rewinding of yarn on a defined package.

Entry of maximum permitted overrun of the nominal length: Winding continues when reaching the entered nominal length before depleting the supply package. Winding continues until the length entered here has been reached. < Nominal length - 650000 m > < Nominal length - 710846 yds >

➂ PEELING = Operation mode for unwinding a defined yarn length from a package and rewinding it on a new package.

148-640 001 en 6.2003

3 - 53

Autoconer 338

1

2

3 inf00469e

These entries are valid only for machine model ”K“

➂ Entries for operation mode Peeling only:

Over-diameter

Length

Entry only when winding a defined package diameter.

Entry of the yarn length to be unwound from the supply package.

Entry of maximum permitted overrun of the nominal package diameter: Winding continues when reaching the entered nominal diameter before depleting the supply package. Winding continues until the diameter entered here has been reached. < Nominal diameter - 326.0 mm > < Nominal diameter - 12.83 in >

3 - 54

When winding a defined diameter: < 40 – 650000 (100) m > < 43 – 710846 (109) yds > When winding a defined yarn length: < 40 – Nominal length (100) m > < 43 – 710846 (109) yds >

148-640 001 8.0 en 6.2003

Autoconer 338

inf00542e

No. of plies

Yarn count

No. of plies 1 = Single yarn. No. of plies together with yarn length is used for production calculation.

Entry of yarn count (yarn fineness) corresponding to entry under “Yarn count unit“.

< 1 - 9 (1) >

< 1.00 - 300 (34.00) Nm > < 1000.00 - 3.33 (29.41) tex > < 0.59 - 177.15 (20.08) Ne >

148-640 001 en 6.2003

3 - 55

Autoconer 338

inf00542e

Tension device mode

Yarn tension

Entry only with installed yarn tension sensor.

Entry only with installed yarn tension sensor, and selection of REGULATOR for “Tension device mode“.

Entry whether or not the yarn tension is to be controlled or regulated. CONTROL =

Entry of a fixed value (Yarn tension) for the entire bobbin unwinding time (→ ill. above).

REGULATOR =

Yarn tension to be regulated so that it constantly remains at the value in cN entered under Yarn tension (→ ill. previous page).

3 - 56

Entry of the yarn tension to be regulated, in cN. < 1 - 100 (50) cN >

148-640 001 8.0 en 6.2003

Autoconer 338

inf00541

Yarn tension code Entry only without yarn tension sensor, or if CONTROL has been selected for “Tension device mode“. This entry determines the yarn tension through setting of the tension disc pressure (Higher value = Higher yarn tension). < 0 - 100 (50) >

148-640 001 en 6.2003

3 - 57

Autoconer 338

inf00118e

3.2.7

Quality Control

Quality Package The Informator utilizes the quality control package to monitor the yarn length per delivery package or the package diameter, and the number of clearer cuts. Furthermore, the number of inferior packages can be distinguished from OK packages for possible sorting out, if required.

e

Entry or alteration of the boundary value erases the number of packages already classified. This prevents false interpretation of the results.

The winding units perform always towards the upper boundary value if lower and upper boundary values are defined; i.e. when winding for identical yarn length with entered diameter values the winding unit stops either at defined yarn length, or when reaching the upper diameter boundary. The value reached first causes the winding unit to stop. This also applies, in inverted fashion, when winding for identical package diameters.

The quality package classifies only if, at least, boundary values are defined for length or diameter, resp. (Minimum / Maximum). D Boundary values for length when winding for identical package diameters, or D Boundary values for diameter when winding for identical yarn lengths. The quality package is deactivated if no boundary values are entered (Minimum / Maximum). Through Informator entry decision is made if the entered boundary values are to be used D for observation only (in report print-out) or D for control (Winding unit stop for inferior quality).

In the shift report yarn length and package diameter are depicted as bar diagrams.

3 - 58

148-640 001 8.0 en 6.2003

Autoconer 338 At stop of a delivery package D Red/Yellow lights flashing signal inferior quality of the package (Surpassing quality boundaries). The package is not doffed, it remains stopped in the cradle. D Yellow steady light signals an OK package. A doffer request is posted, automatic doffing will be performed. Classification of a Delivery Package The Informator divides the difference between upper and lower boundary value into ten equal portions. Thus 12 different quality classes are established: – 10 classes within the boundary values, and – 2 classes outside (above and below) the boundary values.

Diameter > 190 8 190 0 186 0 182 0 178 4 174 ■■■■■■■■■ 114 170 ■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■ 224 166 ■■■ 34 162 4 158 0 154 0 < 150 0 Total No. of Packgs. 388

Example: Upper limit 190 mm Lower limit 150 mm Divisor = (190 - 150) / 10, i.e. 1 portion = 4 mm 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7. 8. 9. 10. 11. 12.

≥190 ≥186 ≥182 ≥178 ≥174 ≥170 ≥166 ≥162 ≥158 ≥154 ≥150

<190 <186 <182 <178 <174 <170 <166 <162 <158 <154 <150

Quality class > upper limit Quality class Quality class Quality class Quality class Quality class Quality class Quality class Quality class Quality class Quality class Quality class < lower limit

The longest bar printed (26 portions = 100%) depicts the maximum value of the 12 quality criteria. Evaluation D When winding for identical diameters, an actual yarn length below the minimum permitted yarn length means that the density of this package is too low. An actual yarn length matching the permitted maximum length means that the density of this package is too high. D When winding for identical yarn lengths, an actual diameter below the minimum permitted diameter means that the density of this package is too high. An actual diameter matching the maximum permitted diameter means that the density of this package is too low.

148-640 001 en 6.2003

3 - 59

Autoconer 338

inf00118e

3.2.8

Quality Control, Autospeed

Entry: Lot...; Preparation...; Quality control...; Autospeed Autospeed Operation Mode Autospeed reduces the linear yarn speed when unwinding from the lower portion of a bobbin, thus permitting a nearly identical degree of yarn tension throughout the entire unwinding process of the bobbin. OFF:

Autospeed switched OFF.

YARN TENSION:

On machines with Autospeed and yarn tension sensor (optional): Measurement of yarn tension via tension sensor on each winding unit.

YARN LENGTH:

Autospeed yarn length (Standard) Measurement of yarn length per bobbin.

(→ next page)

3 - 60

148-640 001 8.0 en 6.2003

Autoconer 338

inf00118e

For Operation Mode “Yarn Length” only

For Operation Mode “Yarn Tension“ only

The winding unit can not clearly recognize the yarn length of a newly creeled bobbin. Autospeed assumes the yarn length of a reference bobbin for the calculation of tension control.

Entry with installed yarn tension sensor only, and with entry “Yarn Tension“ (→ 3.2.6).

D Yarn length per bobbin Entry of the yarn length of a full bobbin*. < 100 - 20000 (5000) m > < 109 - 21872 (5468) yds > D Autospeed Speed reduction to: Entry of the percentage value to which the winding speed should be reduced*. < 50 - 90 (70) % >

Through variation of the tension disc pressure the yarn tension sensor regulates the yarn tension. Autospeed reduces the winding speed if this regulation is no longer possible towards the bobbin’s bottom portion. D Autospeed Speed reduction to: Entry of the percentage value to which the winding speed should be reduced*. < 50 - 90 (70) % > * Note Entries or entry changes are validated for the winding units when the machine is switched ON, or, resp., after completion of the next bobbin change cycle.

D Autospeed Begin at: Entry of the percentage value of the bobbin’s yarn length at which the winding speed should be reduced*. < 20 - 80 (60) % >

148-640 001 en 6.2003

3 - 61

Autoconer 338

inf00439e

3.2.9

Quality control, Quality package

Entry: Lot...; Preparation...; Quality control...; Quality package... The following entries depend on the setting in dialog window ”Delivery package...” (Nominal diameter, nominal yarn length), allowing winding for yarn length per package, or diameter of package.

Singling out

Notes:

< NO, YES >

D The maximum diameter must be selected large enough to prevent stops due to insufficient yarn length! Exception: Dye packages.

Minimum/maximum length

D Changing quality parameters clears (erases) the presently valid classification of packages pertaining to these entries.

YES

=

Automatic quality control activated

NO

=

Automatic quality control deactivated

Entry ”0” deactivates yarn length monitoring (Length = unlimited). < 0 - 650000 (0 - 0) m > < 0 - 710846 (0 - 0) yds > Maximum/minimum diameter Entry ”0” deactivates diameter monitoring (Diameter stop at 326 mm). < 0.00 - 326.00 (0.00 - 0.00) mm > < 0.00 - 12.83 (0.00 - 0.00) inches >

3 - 62

148-640 001 8.0 en 6.2003

Autoconer 338 Evaluation by Informator

Notes:

Decision is made, whether a package stopped due to quality infraction Length/Diameter is to remain in the package cradle, or if it is to be doffed automatically.

D When reaching the maximum diameter, the package is stopped prematurely, i.e. with insufficient yarn length.

Doffing release is given if the classification is within the limitation values. Quality infraction

With deactivated automatic quality control this package would be doffed automatically, and further processing continues without detection of quality shortcomings. D With activated length monitoring a winding unit stops for package doffing:

A package released for doffing is not doffed automatically (Quality stop), if

– The doffing cycle does not take place, instead the Yellow light is extinguished manually.

D at least one of the a.m. quality criteria values is exceeded (i.e. actual value same as maximum value, or smaller than minimal value), and

– The winding unit starts anew with the non-doffed package.

D if YES had been selected for ”Singling out” in the quality package. In case of a quality infraction/quality stop the winding unit remains stopped with flashing Red and Yellow signal lamps, and no doffer request is issued. The package has to be doffed manually.

– After completed acceleration examination takes place whether or not the package diameter is significantly smaller. – The winding unit stops again, with glowing Yellow light, for doffing. This function is activated automatically when the diameter reaches >100 mm.

A quality infraction Length/Diameter is registered if: D On packages wound for defined diameter, the actual yarn length, when reaching the nominal diameter, falls short of the minimum length (package too soft), or if the actual yarn length, when reaching the nominal diamter, matches maximum yarn length (package too hard). D On packages wound for defined yarn length, the actual diameter, when reaching the nominal yarn length, falls short of the minimum diameter (package too hard), or if the actual diameter, when reaching the nominal yarn length, matches maximum diameter (package too soft).

148-640 001 en 6.2003

3 - 63

Autoconer 338

inf00439e

Waxing

OFF

= Function OFF

Only on machines provided with wax roll monitoring.

MESSAGE ONLY

Entry whether or not the waxing feature (wax roll drive motor) is to be activated.

= Winding unit keeps producing with quick flashing red lamp.

INSTANT STOP

= Winding unit stop immediately (with 15 s delay) with steadily lit red lamp.

STOP AFTER 5 MIN:

= Winding unit stop after 5 min. with steadily lit red lamp.

< OFF, ON > Wax monitoring Only on machines provided with wax roll monitoring. With activated wax roll monitoring a sensor indicates beforehand if the wax roll is nearly depleted. Entry if the winding should stop instantly or with a delay in case of wax roll depletion. With delayed stop the winding unit consumes the residual wax before stopping.

STOP AFTER 10 MIN: = Winding unit stop after 10 min. with steadily lit red lamp. STOP AFTER 20 MIN: = Winding unit stop after 20 min. with steadily lit red lamp. STOP AFTER 30 MIN: = Winding unit stop after 30 min. with steadily lit red lamp. STOP AFTER 40 MIN: = Winding unit stop after 40 min. with steadily lit red lamp. STOP AFTER 50 MIN: = Winding unit stop after 50 min. with steadily lit red lamp. STOP AFTER 60 MIN: = Winding unit stop after 60 min. with steadily lit red lamp.

3 - 64

148-640 001 8.0 en 6.2003

Autoconer 338

inf00439e

Hairiness nozzle Only on machines provided with hairiness nozzle. Entry whether or not the hairiness nozzle (for reduction of yarn hairiness) is to be activated. < OFF, ON>

148-640 001 en 6.2003

3 - 65

Autoconer 338

inf00553e

3.2.10 Quality control, Clearer cuts Entry: Lot...; Setup...; Qualitäty control...; Clearer cuts... Maximum clearer cuts

Stop if limit exceeded

Permitted upper limit of clearer cuts* per bobbin. When reaching this value the bobbin is declared “useless“. If YES (→ on the right) has been selected under “Stop if limit exceeded“, the winding unti stops with red and yellow lamp lit steadily. This stop is cancelled automatically when the next bobbin change cycle takes place.

The winding unit stops when reaching the limit value if “YES“ had been entered:

< 0 - 20 (0 = OFF) >

D The winding unit is stopped with steadily lit red and yellow lamps. D Now the ’useless’ bobbin can be inspected and changed, if required: – Switch the winding unit switch OFF/ON, or actuate either red light key or yellow light key: – The winding unit performs a bobbin change cycle and switches ON again. – Stop status is cancelled. < NO, YES >

* ’Clearer cuts’ means total of: Cuts for Thick places, Thin places, Double ends, Neps, and Foreign fibers.

3 - 66

148-640 001 8.0 en 6.2003

Autoconer 338

inf00553e

Minimum/maximum percentage

Clearer knife monitoring

The minimum (or maximum, resp.) percentage establishes the permitted deviation (falling short oder exceeding) from the mean value of all winding units of the group. These are also the criteria for the “OFF-Standard“-reports.

Entry for activation/deactivation of knife monitoring.

At shift end the Informator calculates the mean value of clearer cuts on all winding units of a group, and the limit values based on the entries made here. Subsequently the Informator compares the values from the individual winding units with the limit values, thus detecting ’runaways’ from average winding behavior.

a) Knife monitoring on Informator: OFF Clearers made by Zellweger: With activated cut monitoring on the clearer side, knife monitoring is carried out by Zellweger. The clearer counts a knife blockage as failure message. Clearers made by Loepfe: Knife monitoring is not provided.

Minimum percentage < 40 - 99 (40) > Maximum percentage < 101 - 200 (200) >

148-640 001 en 6.2003

3 - 67

Autoconer 338

inf00553e

b) Knife monitoring on Informator: ON Clearers made by Zellweger: The function is identical to the one described under “OFF”. Clearers made by Loepfe: 1. With knife monitoring activated on the clearer: After a clearer cut the winding unit computer waits for appr. 10 m of running yarn, to register whether or not the yarn is cut again. If not the clearer issuess a knife blockage as failure message. Simultaneously it transmits a “Technical blockage” to the winding unit computer.

Bobbin change at clearer alert* Entry if on a winding unit stopped for clearer alert the required bobbin change is to take place automatically or manually. MANUAL

= The bobbin can be inspected on the winding unit.

AUTOMATIC

= The winding unit changes the bobbin automatically into running production (Entry for, e.g., compensation of dispersions between clearer measuring heads).

2. With knife monitoring deactivated on the clearer: The winding unit computer itself triggers a knife blockage with failure message if after a clearer cut the yarn was not cut again after appr. 10 m of running yarn.

3 - 68

* Not valid for machines of model D or V with spinning position identification (SPID)

148-640 001 8.0 en 6.2003

Autoconer 338

inf00121e

3.2.11 Quality Control, Cycles Entry: Lot...; Preparation...; Quality control...; Cycles... Adjoining cycling failures

Start-up cuts until bobbin change

Entry of the number of adjoining cycling failures after which the winding unit computer has to set the winding unit in Red light status.

Selection of the number of permitted sequential start-up cuts after which the winding unit initiates a bobbin change. A start-up cut takes place, e.g., if the clearer detects a nontolerable splice after the winding unit starts up.

< 1 - 6 (4) >

< 1 - 6 (2) > Suction arm motion Entry of the No. of nodding motions of the suction arm for upper end pick-up.

Splicing failures until bobbin change

D the upper end is detected by the upper end sensor, or

Selection of the number of permitted sequential splicing failures cuts after which the winding unit initiates a bobbin change. A splicing failure is a non-completed splice joint.

D the entered No. of nodding motions is completed.

< 1 - 6 (2) >

Upper end search is terminated, if

The suction arm leaves the package. < 1 - 10 (3) >

148-640 001 en 6.2003

3 - 69

Autoconer 338

inf00285e

3.2.12 Quality Control, Ribbon Breaking Entry: Lot...; Preparation...; Quality control...; Ribbon breaker... Ribbon breaker (by yarn guide drum)

Cradle pressure*

”Ribbon breaking through yarn guide drum” is accomplished by pulsating motor control, in order to prevent build-up of parallel yarn layers (”Ribbons”) on the package. This pulsation produces defined slippage between drum and delivery package. The pulsation frequency determines the speed differential between drum and package.

This entry determines the cradle pressure, in Newton.

< OFF, 3, 6, 9, 12, 15 (6) % >

Settings of less than 10 N, and more than 30 N, are reserved for special applications. These are to be utilized only upon consultation of Schlafhorst’s application technology department!

Cradle ribbon breaker* Entry if ribbon breaking through cradle pressure compensation (electro-mechanical cradle compensation propack) is to be switched ON or OFF. < ON, OFF >

Note With propack the mechanical setting of cradle pressure is obsolete. The setting range extends from 10 N to 30 N.

10 N 20 N 30 N

= = =

soft package moderately hard package hard package

< 5 ... 45 (20) N >

* This entry is valid only for machines provided with electro-mechanical cradle pressure compensation propack.

3 - 70

148-640 001 8.0 en 6.2003

Autoconer 338

inf00285e

Auxiliary cradle pressure at C acceleration*

Cradle depression time at X acceleration*

”C acceleration” means the time from slow start-up of the package until reaching nominal winding speed. Entry of additional cradle pressure, in Newton, during C acceleration.

”X acceleration” means smoother acceleration after package doffing. Entry of the time period during which the additional cradle pressure is to be effective during and after the X acceleration. The degree of additional cradle pressure corresponds with the entry under ”Auxiliary cradle pressure at C acceleration”.

Note: This setting makes sense only if D a minimum density of the package is defined (generally, ”0” should be entered for dye packages), or

< 0 ... 30 (3) s >

D 20 ... 30 N had been entered under ”Cradle pressure”. < 0 ... 15 (5) N >

* This entry is valid only for machines provided with electro-mechanical cradle pressure compensation propack.

148-640 001 en 6.2003

3 - 71

Autoconer 338

inf00471e

3.2.13 Delivery Package Doffer Entry: Lot...; Setup...; Package doffer... These entries on the Informator are adopted automatically by the package doffer(s). The values can also be over-written in the Informator through entry on the doffer! On machines equipped for multi-lot processing (MPV) the allotment of working ranges of the doffers to production groups is taken into consideration. Tranfer tail Entry identical to the entry on the doffer assigned to this lot (Entry under “Transfer tail“ → 3.3.7). < WITHOUT, WITH >

Transfer tail winds Entry of No. of winds of the transfer tail. Eingabe “0“ = no transfer tail. < 0, 3 - 8 (6) > Code for transfer tail’s winding tension This entry changes the pressure of the tension discs, thus controlling the tightness of the transfer tail (Higher value = tighter transfer tail). Entry “0“ = The value entered on the Informator for normal winding operation is adopted. < 0 -100 (30) >

3 - 72

148-640 001 8.0 en 6.2003

Autoconer 338

inf00471e

Cradle depression time

Code for nose tail tension

Entry of cradle depression time (in seconds) at start-up of the newly inserted cone/sleeve.

This entry changes the pressure of the tension discs, thus controlling the tightness of the nose tail (Higher value = tighter nose tail). Entry ”0“ = The value entered on the Informator for normal winding is adopted.

< 0 - 16 (3) s > Code for nose tail

< 0 -100 (1) >

The yarn end is placed across the flank of the package. This entry changes the angular rotation of the package for placing the nose tail (Higher value = larger angle). When entering “ON PACKAGE“ the end is placed on the circumference of the package. < ON PACKAGE, 1 - 16 (8) >

148-640 001 en 6.2003

3 - 73

Autoconer 338

inf00471e

Autofeed*

No. of supplied cones/sleeves*

Entry whether or not Autofeed is to be activated.

Entry of No. of cones/sleeves to be placed in the cone/ sleeve magazine.

< OFF, ON>

< 1 ... 3 (2) > Type of cone/sleeve* Entry of the type of the utilized cones/sleeves. Note The allocation of Autofeed magazines to types of cones/ sleeves is established under ”Machine setup..., Packages..., Autofeed...”. < A ... H >

Cone/sleeve storage replenished manually < >* Selection of this menu item cleares (erases) all registered requests by Autofeed for delivery of cones/sleeves to the machine. New requests by Autofeed are processed. Example: After a lot change all magazines of the winding units have been replenished manually with cones/sleeves. Actuate this menu item prior to lot start, in order to clear all registered requests by Autofeed.

* Entry only for machines equipped with cone/sleeve supply Autofeed.

3 - 74

148-640 001 8.0 en 6.2003

Autoconer 338

inf00472e

3.2.14 Special Entry: Lot...; Setup...; Special... The following entries are provided in menu “Special”: D Special settings Special settings for optimization of the course of cycling of the winding unit. D Options Entries for Variopack* Variopack represents the intelligent combination of the independent control circuits for Autotense and Propack to one system, for the prevention of bulging-out package flanks.

* Entry only on machines for which the auxiliary option has been released.

148-640 001 en 6.2003

3 - 75

Autoconer 338

inf00473e

3.2.15 Special settings Entry: Lot...; Setup...; Special...; Special settings... Note Entries under “Special settings” are provided for optimization of the winding unit performance. For processing of noncritical yarn types no settings deviating from standard settings should be entered.

WET LINNEN COARSE

Altered progression: e.g. coarse wet linnen.

WET LINNEN FINE

Altered progression: e.g. fine wet linnen.

STANDARD SPECIAL

Alternatively for acceleration of cycling of the winding unit.

Cycling progression winding unit Enter if cycling (Speed, braking moments, end opening, etc.) should be adapted to the various yarn types. Attention: Consider customer requirements and yarn properties when changing the course of cycling on a winding unit! STANDARD

Normal cycle progression.

LYCRA

Altered progression: e.g. for elastic yarn types.

3 - 76

Suction at bobbin change Enter if after bobbin change a certain yarn length (new package start end) should be withdrawn from the package. Entry 1 ... 40 means No. of revolutions of the package in reverse for upper end pick-up. Entry “0” deactivates this function. < 0 ... 40 >

148-640 001 8.0 en 6.2003

Autoconer 338

inf00473e

Delayed package lift-off

OFF

Function deactivated.

The lift-off feature lifts the package off the yarn guide drum at yarn break or at bobbin change. Entry of how many revolutions (1 ...16) the package coasts out without package lift. This entry determines the positioning of the yarn relative to the drum. Entry “OFF” deactivates this function.

1 REVOLUTION

One rev. in winding direction.

2 REVOLUTIONS

2 revs. in winding direction

< OFF, 1 ... 16 > Delayed upper end pick-up* Setting for the prevention of ends-on-flank. Prior to upper end search the package revolves (1 ... 15 revolutions) in winding direction.

::: 15 REVOLUTIONS

15 revs. in winding direction

Reversed rotation with suction arm* Setting for the prevention of ends-on-flank. Prior to upper end search the package revolves in reversed direction. The No. of revolutions corresponds with the entry for “Delayed upper end pick-up. < NO, Yes >

* The entries function in conjunction.

148-640 001 en 6.2003

3 - 77

Autoconer 338

inf00474e

3.2.16 Options (Variopack) Entry: Lot...; Setup...; Special...; Options... Variopack Variopack represents the intelligent combination of the independent control circuits for Autotense and Propack to one system, for the prevention of bulging-out package flanks. Entries for Variopack are possible only for winding units for which D the option “Variopack” has been released, D the option “Propack” has been released, D in specification “Propack: WITH” had been entered, and D under “Yarn tensioner mode: REGULATOR” had been entered.

3 - 78

148-640 001 8.0 en 6.2003

Autoconer 338

inf00474e

For Variopack 5 pre-set curves are selectable. These curves incorporate all settings adapted to specific yarn-related and technological requirements for the progression of package build: OFF

Function “Variopack” is switched OFF.

CURVE 1

weak*; e.g. for woolen blends

CURVE 2

weak-medium*; e.g. Wool

CURVE 3

medium*; e.g. Wool/Siro

CURVE 4

strong*; e.g. Wool with Elastan

CURVE 5

special; e.g. Cotton with Elastan

Notes When activating Variopack, or when changing the value entries for “Cradle pressure” or “Yarn tension”, a message indicating the working range of cradle pressure and yarn tension is issued. If the yarn tension falls short of the minimum value (4 cN), due to the selected CURVE 1 ... 5, D the curve adapts itself correspondingly, and D a message is issued.

Further informaton → 4.2etc. “Variopack”.

* These descriptions indicate to which degree the Variopack system interferes with the winding process.

148-640 001 en 6.2003

3 - 79

Autoconer 338

inf00475e

3.2.17 Control, Lot control Entry: Lot...; Control... Lot change control functions only D if the machine is switched ON; D if the section lock* is not activated on any of the winding units; and

e

Prior to entries be sure the correct group had been selected! Prior to lot start, double-check, and modify if required, all entries on the Informator, and all settings on the machine!

The control is structured in such fashion that sensible dialogs only can be called in any lot status. For documentation of each change of lot status an entry is made in the message listing (Entry: Data display...; Messages...).

* The section lock could be activated, e.g., if the compressed air pressure had dropped below minimum value, which inhibits restart of the winding units.

3 - 80

148-640 001 8.0 en 6.2003

Autoconer 338

1

inf00475e

➀

Selection of the group/lot.

Note:

Winding unit range

e

This entry influences the currently running lot, production losses will occur in case of false entries.

Further information related to ”Lot, Group memory”.

Range of winding units to be processing the group selected in menu ”Lot...; Preparation..” with the defined values.

Lot name

This range can be changed, i.e. increased or reduced, while the lot is being processed (ref. to next page).

Customer’s description of the selected group/lot.

< 1 - No. of winding units of the machine, 60 max. > Lot No. Customer-established code of the selected group/lot.

148-640 001 en 6.2003

3 - 81

Autoconer 338

1

2

3

inf00476e

Change of winding unit range

e


The working range for the lot can be changed, i.e. increased or reduced, while the lot is being processed. Only an increase or reduction of the range is possible: D Range increase The newly defined winding units must not belong to an other lot (Group in production or in lot change). Enter the new (enlarged) range under ➀.

D Range reduction Initially execute the entry under “Reduce” ➁. Enter the new (reduced) winding unit range under ➀. After the entry of “Reduce: IMMEDIATE”: All removed winding units will react as described under ”Instant (Immediate) lot end <>”. After the entry of “Reduce FULL PACKAGES”: All removed winding units will react as described under “Lot end with full packages <>”. During the time of change menu items ➂ are displayed. The display may appear after a delay.

With a time delay the new winding units are incorporated in the winding unit range.

3 - 82

148-640 001 8.0 en 6.2003

Autoconer 338

1 inf00477e

Status

No. of packages until lot end

Status of the selected group/lot: DEFINED PRODUCTION LOT CHANGE

= Ready for production = Lot in production = Status during lot change.

e


Entry of No. of packages to be produced until automatic lot end is initiated: D This entry is valid instantly, and it can be made at any time while a lot is in production. D Entry 0 = unlimited, i.e. this lot is to be composed of an indefinite No. of packages. D When increasing the No., e.g., from 500 to 750 packages, packages already produced are counted-in. D When changing the No., e.g., from 0 (indefinite) to 500 packages, packages already produced are not counted-in.

➀

Display: No. of packages already produced.

At the approach of lot end the winding units of the group stop, one-by-one, will full packages, similar to ”Lot end with full packages”. In this status, when changing to ”0”, production is restored on all winding units. Winding units already stopped wait for manual restart. < 0 - 65535 >

148-640 001 en 6.2003

3 - 83

Autoconer 338

inf00475e

Lot start <> After the user has completed D entry of the lot parameters, according to lot records, into the group memory (memories), or D copying of the parameters from an other group, or D copying from a PC-Card,

D The Informator transmits the data to the winding units, to enable them to produce using the described values. D The lot status changes from ”DEFINED” to ”PRODUCTION”. D The winding units perform one cycle, in order to correctly place the lower end.

the lot can be started:

D If no upper end is available, the winding units, with yellow light ON, wait for manual start-up.

D Select the group memory ¡ ... ¥ to be started.

D Production can begin.

D Define the range of winding units to be producing using the parameters of the group (→ previous page ”Winding unit range”). D Actuate key ”Lot start <>“ and then ”O.K.”. Prior to lot start: D The system checks, whether or not – the entered parameters are permitted for the equipment specifications of the allotted winding units, and – the selected range of winding units is vacant. (if not, a message will be issued)

3 - 84

148-640 001 8.0 en 6.2003

Autoconer 338

inf00475e

Immediate lot end <>

Lot end with full packages <>

e

e



D The staus of the group/lot changes to ”Lot change” (LOT CHANGE).

D The status of the group/lot changes to lot change with full packages (LOT CHANGE).

D Production of this lot is aborted instantly, the winding units are vacated.

D All winding units of the group assume lot change mode, and countinue winding until the next doffing cycle is required; i.e., on each winding unit the package being wound is completed.

D The winding units assume ”Yellow light flashing” mode (the packages are of inferior quality, because neither yarn length nor package diameter is completed), they stop with all yarn ends cut. D After (manual) package doffing the winding units are locked and will not start again. D When all packages are doffed the lot is accounted for automatically. D The group/lot changes to status ”Defined”. D If ”WITH” (→ 3.5.15) had been entered in lot change report, print-out of the lot change report takes place.

D When the packages is full, each winding unit stops, with yellow lights ON. D The doffer doffs the package, yet fails to place an empty cone/sleeve into the cradle. With activated quality control packages of inferior quality are not doffed, such winding units stop with FLASHING yellow light. D As all packages are doffed by the doffer, the lot is completed, automatic accounting takes place. D The group/lot changes to status ”DEFINED”. D If ”WITH” (→ 3.5.15) had been entered in lot change report, print-out of the lot change report takes place.

148-640 001 en 6.2003

3 - 85

Autoconer 338

inf00478e

Lot end, Accounting

Reduce

e


Information concerning the entry “Reduce” see “Change of winding unit range” under: Range reduction.

This entry is possible only if the lot change had been initiated through ”Lot end with full packages”, or through ”Immediate lot end”.

The entry applies only to the winding units taken out for ,Range reduction’! FULL PACKAGES =

Winding unit stop takes place with full packages.

IMMEDIATE =

Instant stop of the winding units.

Note: This entry is necessary only if, e.g., the lot change has not been completed due to failure of a winding unit to report package doffing to the Informator (e.g. a winding unit has been removed from the machine). D Entry ”Lot end, accounting” terminates the lot change.. D Depending on previous entry, lot end/accounting takes place similar to ”Lot end with full packages” or ”Instant lot end”.

Package cone change at lot end This entry controls the change of cones/sleeves at lot end. WITHOUT = At lot end no empty cone/sleeve is inserted into the package cradle. WITH =

3 - 86

At lot end a new empty cone/sleeve is inserted into the package cradle.

148-640 001 8.0 en 6.2003

Autoconer 338

7 1

5

2

6

3

6

4

5

inf00125e

3.2.18 Lot copying Entry: Lot ...; Lot copying ... In this menu the control values of menu “Setup“ (Lot ...; setup ...) of one group can be copied to an other group.

Special symbol boxes:

➀

Key “Internal memory“: The groups stored in the Informator are displayed.

➁

Key “PC-Card“: The groups stored on the PC-Card are displayed.

➂ ➃ ➄

Key “Copying“: For entry copy from ... to.

➅

Keys “Leafing“: Leaf one page forward or backward. Possible only if more groups are stored than can be shown in one window.

➆

Selected group and group status (here: in production).

During this procedure, the control values D within the Informator, D from Informator to a PC-Card (→ 3.1.17), or D from a PC-Card to the Informator can be copied. Consequently, with the PC-Card copying of the control values of one group from machine to machine is also possible. Opening the menu window places the groups already stored on display. The first group is selected.

148-640 001 en 6.2003

Key “Clearing“: For clearing the selected group. Keys “Cursor up, Cursor down“: One line up or down in the display.

3 - 87

Autoconer 338

5 1

2

7 6

4

3 2

8 inf00181e

Examples: D Copying of the control values of group “Cotton“ to group ”KASHMIR“. – Command: Select group “Cotton“ (→ ➀). Actuate “Cursor up/down“ keys (→ ➁) until the group is selected. – Command: ... copy to ... Actuate the ”Copy“ key (→ ➂). – Command: Select group ”KASHMIR“ (→ ➃). Actuate ”Cursor up/down“ keys (→ ➁) until the group is selected. The display of the selected groups (from -> to) takes place in the last line of the window (→ ➇). – Actuate symbol box ”O.K.“ (→ ➄). Brief display: “Enter a name for the group“. – Enter new name of the group to be copied, then actuate ”O.K.“. or: – if the selected group (here “KASHMIR“) is to be overwritten: Actuate ”O.K.“.

D Copying of the control values of a group on the PC-Card to the Informator. – Insert the PC-Card (→ 3.1.17) – Command: Display the contents of the PC-Card. Actuate key “PC-Card“ (→ ➅). – Command: Select group “KASHMIR“. Actuate “Cursor up/down“ keys (→ ➁) until the group is selected. – Command: ... copy to ... Actuate the “Copy“ key (→ ➂). – Command: Display the contents of the Informator. Actuate key “Internal memory“ (→ ➆). – Command: Select group “KASHMIR“ (→ ➃). Actuate “Cursor up/down“ keys (→ ➁) until the group is selected. – Actuate symbol box “O.K.“ (→ ➄). Brief display: “Enter a name for the group“. – if the selected group (here “KASHMIR“) is to be overwritten: Actuate ”O.K.“; or enter a new name first, then actuate ”O.K.“. – Remove PC-Card.

3 - 88

148-640 001 8.0 en 6.2003

Autoconer 338

inf00406e

3.3

Machine Parameters

Entries required by the Informator for machine setup (Machine parameters) are normally parameters not subject to changes during production process and/or lot change.

The machine configuration had been entered at installation/erection of the machine, it normally requires changes only

Exceptions are the interval times of dust extraction (removal) and travelling cleaner, which are subject to changes due to the different types of fiber stock.

D after machine conversions, e.g. replacement of the yarn guide drums by a different type; or

The following parameter entries are required for machine setup: D Machine configuration D Shift calendar D Delivery packages

D at installation of a different version of Informator software.

e

Changes of machine confirguration always* initiate a New start of the Informator, causing loss of production data! Production data as well settings related to the changes are getting lost.

– Package doffer – Package conveyor D Pneumatics and dust extraction – Sub-pressure of the suction unit – Dust extraction – Travelling cleaner D Network

148-640 001 en 6.2003

* Exception: Entry of a release code only, without changes of the specifications, does not initiate a New start.

3 - 89

Autoconer 338

1

inf00479e

3.3.1

Machine configuration

Entry: Machine setup...; Machine configuration

e

Changes of machine confirguration always* initiate a New start of the Informator, causing loss of production data! Production data as well settings related to the changes are getting lost.

The machine configuration has to be newly entered, or changed, resp.

The machine configuration incorporates all necessary data concerning the specifications of the machine, such as D Machine model/Variants, D Specification of the sections and of the winding units, and D Degree of Automation required for the desired production.

D after installation for Iinitial start of the machine, D after conversion work, e.g. installation of a different drum type, and/or D after exchange of the Informator software.

Notes For machine configuration further menus can be opened only through actuation of key ➀. Confirmation of the entries through actuation of “OK” only if the entries in all the menus are complete.


3 - 90

148-640 001 8.0 en 6.2003

Autoconer 338

2 1

inf00129e

Confirmation/abortion of entries After entries/changes of the machine configuration the screen display for entries can be exited only through actuation of key “O.K.“

e

Changes of machine configuration always* initiate a New start of the Informator, causing loss of production data! Production data as well settings related to the changes are getting lost.

D Abortion of entries – Upon actuation of key “O.K“ a safety inquiry takes place: “CAUTION!! Confirmation of entries will generate INITIAL START with erasure of actual data!!“. – At this point entry abortion can be initiated through actuation of key “Abort“ (→ ➀). – An additional message window opens, asking “Do you want to abort the entered specification?“

– Actuation of key “Confirmation“ (→ ➁) aborts the entry. – Message window “Entered specification aborted“appears briefly. – Now the previously valid machine specification remains valid. D Entry confirmation – Upon actuation of key “O.K“ a safety inquiry takes place: “CAUTION!! Confirmation of entries will generate INITIAL START with erasure of actual data!!“. – Actuation of key “Confirmation“ (→ ➁) initiates the New start of the Infomator. – Message window “Specification O.K.! Wait! New start of system!“ appears briefly. – The newly entered specification is adopted by the machine specification parameters.


148-640 001 en 6.2003

3 - 91

Autoconer 338

inf00480e

3.3.2

Machine configuration, Basic adjustments

Entry:

Machine setup...; Machine configuration...; Symbol:

(Basic adjustment)

Machine type

Serial No.

Machine orientation, left-hand or right-hand machine.

Serial No. of the machine as indicated in specifications or on the machine tag.

< RH, LH >

< Machine 10 (18 digits maximum) > Model Entry of machine model. Model RM Model E Model K Model RC Model MIX

= = = = =

circular magazines only (Model RM) for rewinding only (Model E) for rewindung only (Model K) Creel-out rewinding only Machine composed of mixed models

Name of machine Customer’s No./Code of the machine, to be printed on report headings. < Machine 10 (18 digits maximum) >

Note: ”Model MIX” has to be entered even if only one section contains winding units of varying models! < Model RM, Model E, Model K, Model RC, Model MIX > 3 - 92

148-640 001 8.0 en 6.2003

Autoconer 338

1

inf00480e

Name of Company

Name of Clearer

The Company name is printed in the report headings.

The clearer type is printed in the report headings. With integrated clearer this entry is factory-set.

< Schlafhorst (18 digits maximum) >

< Clearer (18 digits maximum) > Note For reversal to the next menu “Options” actuate key ➀.

148-640 001 en 6.2003

3 - 93

Autoconer 338

1

2

inf00481e

3.3.3

Machine configuration, Options

Entry:

(Options)

Machine setup...; Machine configuration...; Symbol: For activation of the listed functions it is necessary to enter release codes (Dongles). The function can not be activated unless a release code is entered, or if the entered release code does not match the Informator’s serial No. Further information → 3.1.15.

Release code for Propack

e


Release code for Propack is a 14-digits numerical code. Enter the code, matching the Informator, under ➀. After the entry, the display in button ➁ appears, showing D the total number of winding units to be released for Propack, and D the remaining number of winding units which could also be released for Propack.

3 - 94

148-640 001 8.0 en 6.2003

Autoconer 338

2

1

3

inf00481e

Rlease code for Variopack Variopack

Note

e

For reversal to the next menu “Pneumatics” actuate key ➂.


Release code for Variopack is a 14-digits numerical code. Enter the code, matching the Informator, under ➀. After the entry, the display in button ➁ appears, showing WITHOUT =

Variopack not released.

WITH =

Variopack released.

148-640 001 en 6.2003

3 - 95

Autoconer 338

1

inf00482e

3.3.4

Machine configuration, Pneumatics

Entry:


(Pneumatics)

Suction system

Travelling cleaner

Suction system:

Entry whether or not the machine is equipped with a travelling cleaner.

HDS CENTRAL

= =

Machine with suction drive (Serial) Machine without suction drive; central suction system for several machines.

< HDS, CENTRAL >

< WITHOUT, WITH > Note For reversal to the next menu “Section” actuate key ➀.

Dust extraction Entry whether or not the machine is equipped with the dust extraction feature. < WITHOUT, WITH >

3 - 96

148-640 001 8.0 en 6.2003

Autoconer 338

inf00483e

3.3.5

Machine configuration, Section

Entry:


(Section)

No. of sections

Section size/Winding units

Entry of the number of mechanical machine sections.

1. Value: Maximum number of winding units which could be accomodated in this section. 2. Value: Number of winding units actually installed in this section.

< 1 - 6 (3) > Section Selection of the section to which the following entries are to be applied. Note: The following 3 entries, ”Section size/Winding units”, ”Magazine type”, and ”Empty tube conveyor”, depend on the entries made under ”Maschine configuration, Basic adjustments” (→ 3.3.2) . For some machine models ”Magazine type” and ”Tube conveyor” are factory-set, therefore not selectable.

148-640 001 en 6.2003

Example: Machine Model RM: Entry ”10/10” signifies that 10 of 10 possible winding units are installed in the selected section. Machine model ”MIX TYPE”: Entry ”11/5” signifies that 11 winding units could be accommodated in this section, yet only 5 ”RC” winding units for creel-out rewinding are installed. Ref. also to the tabulation on the next page. < 10/10, 11/11, 11/10, 11/5, 10/5, 10/6, 10/7, 10/8 >

3 - 97

Autoconer 338

inf00483e

Entry: Section size/Winding units

Entry: Magazine type

Explanation

11/11 or 11/10

CIRC.MAGAZINE

Circular magazines only (Model RM)

10/10

CIRC.MAGAZINE

Circular magazines only (Model RM)

E MAGAZINE

Rewinding devices only, magazine model E

K MAGAZINE

Rewinding devices only, magazine model K

11/5

RC MAGAZINE

Model RC, creel-out rewinding only

10/5

RC-RC-RC-RC-E*

4 RC-type wdg. units and 1 E-type wdg. unit*

RC-RC-RC-RC-K*

4 RC-type wdg. unist and 1 K-type wdg. unit*

E-RC-RC-RC-RC*

1 E-type wdg. unit and 4 RC-type wdg. units*

K-RC-RC-RC-RC*

1 K-type wdg. unit and 4 RC-type wdg. units*

RC-RC-RC-E-E-E*


RC-RC-RC-K-K-K*


RC-RC-E-E-E-E-E*


RC-RC-K-K-K-K-K*


RC-E-E-E-E-E-E-E*

1 RC-type wdg. unit and 7 E-type wdg. unist*

RC-K-K-K-K-K-K-K*

1 RC-type wdg. unit and 7 K-type wdg. units*

10/6 10/7 10/8

* Always viewed from the operator’s aisle. 3 - 98

148-640 001 8.0 en 6.2003

Autoconer 338

1

inf00483e

Magazine type

Empty tube conveyor

This entry depends on machine model (possibly factoryset).

This selection entry is possible for circular magazines (Model RM) only; for all other magazine types it is factoryset.

Entry of the magazine type(s) installed in this section. Further notes concerning this entry: Ref. to the tabulation on the previous page.

Entry of the empty tube conveyor type installed in this section. WITHOUT DHT

= =

HT10

=

no empty tube conveyor continuous empty tube conveyor (Standard for model RM). sectional empty tube conveyor(s)

< WITHOUT, DHT, HT10 > Note For reversal to the next menu “Specification” actuate key

➀.

148-640 001 en 6.2003

3 - 99

Autoconer 338

inf00484e

3.3.6

Machine configuration, Specification

Entry:


(Specification)

In window ”Machine specification type” up to 6 specification types can be described, and allocated to production groups of winding units. Winding units of identical specification (Cradle, drum, splicer/knotter, etc.) are considered to be of one specification type: D The combination can go across section boundaries. D The winding unit numbers must be in sequence (i.e not winding units 1 ... 10 and winding unit 30 ... 40). D Normally, there is only one specification type for all winding units of a machine. Standard ”Specification type No.: 1” covers winding units 1 ... (No. of winding units of the machine). Additional specification types have to be described if winding units of different specifications are installed in one machine.

3 - 100

148-640 001 8.0 en 6.2003

Autoconer 338

inf00484e

Machine specification type no.: x

Cradle type

The entry window opens with ”Specification type no.: 1”. Touching this button switches to the next specification type.

Entry of cradle orientation for RH or LH winding of delivery packages. < RH, or LH (Winding direction)>

All further entries relate to the selected specification type. <1-6> Working range (Winding unit range) Entry of the range of winding units to which the selected specification type is to be allocated; normally this covers the entire machine. < 1 - (No. of winding units) >

148-640 001 en 6.2003

Drum type Type of yarn guide drums installed in the selected winding units (gg = pitch): U6” 1.5gg sy U6” 2gg sy U6” 2gg as U6” 2.5gg sy U6” 2.5gg as U6” 3gg as S3” 1.5gg sy S4” 1.5gg sy N5” 1.5gg sy T8” 2.5gg sy T10” 3.5gg as

3 - 101

Autoconer 338

inf00484e

Traverse displacement drive

Yarn tension sensor

Entry whether or not the selected winding units are equipped with the traverse displacement feature.

Entry whether or not the selected winding units are (optionally) equipped with yarn tension sensors.

< WITHOUT, WITH >

< WITHOUT, WITH >

Splicer type

Can be entered only on machines with external rewinding device (→ next page) or on machines of model E, K, or RC:

Entry of yarn joining system of the selected winding units. < SPLICER, THERMOSPLICER, WETSPLICER, KNOTTER > Splicer with auxiliary devices

Additional entry ”WITH + LIFT-OFF”. This entry is made if the winding units are provided with automatic tuning of the yarn tension sensor (auxiliary tuning lever). < WITHOUT, WITH, WITH + LIFT-OFF >

Entry of auxiliary devices installed in the splicers of the selected winding units for improvement of splicing quality. < RETAINER TUBE, BLOW NOZZLE >

3 - 102

148-640 001 8.0 en 6.2003

Autoconer 338

1

inf00484e

Propack

Rewinding

Entry whether or not the selected winding units are provided with the electro-mechanical cradle pressure compensation Propack.

Only on machines of model RM!

For this entry the corresponding No. of winding units must have been released (→ “Release code Propack”; Entry: Service...; Options...). < WITHOUT, WITH > Wax monitoring Entry whether or not the selected winding units are equipped with wax roll monitoring.

Entry whether or not the selected winding unit(s) is (are) equipped with ”External rewinding device(s)”. This device facilitates rewinding of delivery packages. < WITHOUT, WITH > Auxiliary devices on yarn tensioner Entry whether or not the yarn tensioners of the selected winding units are equipped with auxiliary devices (gate tensioner, or yarn lock). < WITHOUT, GATE TENSIONER; YARN LOCK >

< WITHOUT, WITH > Note Hairiness nozzle Entry whether or not the selected winding units are equipped with the hairiness nozzle (for reduction of yarn hairiness).

For reversal to the next menu “Automation” actuate key

➀.

< WITHOUT, WITH >

148-640 001 en 6.2003

3 - 103

Autoconer 338

inf00485e

3.3.7

Machine configuration, Automation

Entry:


(Automation)

Package conveyor

Package lift

Entry whether or not the machine is equipped with package conveyor, and which type.

Entry whether or not the package conveyor is equipped with package lift.

WITHOUT

without package conveyor

< WITHOUT, WITH >

BELT

with package conveyor

BELT&INTERFACE

with package conveyor and with a control interface for external transport systems.

Swivel gate Entry whether or not the package conveyor is equipped with a swivel gate. < WITHOUT, WITH >

3 - 104

148-640 001 8.0 en 6.2003

Autoconer 338

inf00485e

Autofeed

Doffer No.

Entry whether or not the machine is equipped with Autofeed, and if with, Autofeed of either 4 or 8 magazines.

Touching this button advances to the next doffer (if several doffers are installed).

< WITHOUT, WITH 4 MAGAZINES, WITH 8 MAGAZINES >

All further entries relate to the selected doffer.

No. of doffers

Maximum service range

Entry of No. of delivery package doffers.

Entry of the maximum patrol range (mechanically limited by the length of the flextrack) of the selected doffer (Winding units from ... to ...).

< 0 - 4 (1) >

< 1 - (No. of winding units) >

148-640 001 en 6.2003

3 - 105

Autoconer 338

inf00485e

Transfer tail Entry of type of transfer tail: D WITHOUT WHEN RH WIND – Doffer without cone/sleeve drive, and without yarn guide element – RH winding (Transfer tail on the right) D WITH WHEN RH WIND

Note

e

Changes of machine configuration always* initiate a New start of the Informator, causing loss of production data! Production data as well settings related to the changes are getting lost. Confirmation of the entries through actuation of “OK” only if the entries in all the menus are complete.

– Standard Delivery package doffer – RH winding (Transfer tail on the right) D WITHOUT WHEN LH WIND – Doffer without cone/sleeve drive, and without yarn guide element – LH winding (Transfer tail on the left) D WITH WHEN LH WIND – Standard Delivery package doffer – LH winding (Transfer tail on the left)

3 - 106


148-640 001 8.0 en 6.2003

Autoconer 338

inf00134e

3.3.8

Shift calendar

Entry: Machine parameters...; Shift calendar... The shift calendar lists the times at which shift changes take place, and at which shift reports are to be printed. Controlled by the shift calendar, the Informator continually registers and memorizes all operation data. General notes:

D Data is not registered / memorized if there is no production during a shift, or if the ON time of the machine is less than 15 minutes. D For a shift report repetition the data of the previous production shift can be called-up.

D In case of a power failure during shift change time, shiftrelated processes are carried out upon power restoration. D If a lot change takes place during a shift: Data is documented in a lot change (→ 3.7.3) report. D At lot start, data is registered and evaluated beginning at this moment in time. D There has to be a duration of at least 15 minutes between two shift changes. D Maximum shift duration is limited: An automatic shift change takes place at 00:00 o’clock if there is no entry in the shift calendar (as for Saturday and Sunday in the illustration above).

148-640 001 en 6.2003

3 - 107

Autoconer 338

1

2

3

4

inf00134e

Shift change times

Standard allocation

Shift change times have to be entered individually for each day of the week. Up to 6 shift change times per weekday are allowed. Also, whether or not a shift report is to be issued at shift change time can be entered.

The illustration above depicts the shift calendar with standard allocation:

3 - 108

➀ ➁ ➂

Weekdays

➃

Saturday and Sunday: Shift change at 06:00 o’clock; shift report not to be printed.

Shift change times Monday through Friday: Shift changes at 06:00, at 14:00, and at 22:00 o’clock; shift reports not to be printed.

148-640 001 8.0 en 6.2003

Autoconer 338

6

2

1

3 4 5 inf00135e

Entry of shift change times

➂

Button ”copy to”: The day allocation of the intermediate memory is to be allocated to the selected day (→ ➃). Button ”copy to” appears only if the intermediate memory contains an allocation.

Display structure and buttons with special symbols:

➀

Buttons for weekdays and selection of weekdas (Example above: Tuesday).

➁

Buttons for report print-out control (from top to bottom):

➃

Button ”cut out”: Copy the day allocation of the selected day into the intermediate memory.

– No execution of shift change at the indicated time.

➄

”Clear” (erase) button: Clear (erase) the entries of this day.

➅

Buttons indicating the allocation for the day selected under ➀.

– Execute shift change, no print-out of shift report. – Execute shift change, with print-out of shift report.

– Buttons on the left: Shift change times. – Buttons on the right: Control of report print-out (→ ➁).

148-640 001 en 6.2003

3 - 109

Autoconer 338

6

2

1

3 4 5 inf00135e

Example: D The day allocation for Tuesday has to be changed: – Select the screen page described under 3.3.8. Touch button ”TU” for Tuesday, in order to have the screen page appear as shown above. – Now all entries will relate to Tuesday! (The day can be changed through actuation of an other weekday button). – Touching one of the shift change time buttons (→ ➅ on the left) opens the window for entry of the clock time. Entry from 00:00 to 23:59 ”O.K.” for entry confirmation. – After touching one of the buttons for shift change control ( → ➅ on the right) the allocation can be changed through touching one of the buttons under ➁.

3 - 110

D The times for Tuesday are now newly entered, and they are to be transferred to Monday: – Weekday Tuesday is still selected. – Touch button ➃ ”cut out”. The complete allocation for Tuesday is now copied into the intermediate memory. – Under ➀ touch the button for Monday. – Touch button ➂ ”copy to”. The complete allocation for Tuesday has now been copied to Monday. – Selecting an other day, and then touching button ”copy to” copies the allocation to any other day. – Touch button ”O.K.” after completion of all entries; the new day allocations are now registered in the shift calendar.

148-640 001 8.0 en 6.2003

Autoconer 338

inf00486e

3.3.9

Delivery Packages

Entry: Machine configuration...; Packages... Under “Packages“ entries are made for D the package doffer(s), and for D the package conveyor D cone/sleeve supply Autofeed (Option)

148-640 001 en 6.2003

3 - 111

Autoconer 338

1

inf00487e

3.3.10 Delivery Packages, Package Doffer Entry: Machine parameters...; Packages...; Package Doffer Entry of the winding unit range to be served by the package doffer selected under ➀. Default allotment for the range is 0 ... 0.

e

3 - 112

With One Doffer installed D Normal entry is: 1 ... (No. of winding units).

Entry of value = “0“ deactivates doffer control. The number of doffers per machine in this menu is identical to the entry in menu Machine configuration.

148-640 001 8.0 en 6.2003

Autoconer 338

1

inf00487e

Notes concerning 2 ... 4 installed doffers

Entry with 2 ... 4 Doffers installed

D Enter the service ranges for the individual doffers as desired for the individual working ranges. The maximum working range, limited by mechanical boundaries, had been entered under ”Machine configuration, Automation“ (→ 3.3.7).

D The entry window always opens with doffer 1. D The service range for one doffer is displayed. D Actuation of key ... ”Doffer No.“ (→ ➀) switches to entries for doffers 2 ... 4.

D Doffer No.1 is located at the drive end, while doffer X is located at the suction end of the machine.

Changing the Doffer’s Service Range

D Winding units of one doffer service range must be winding on identical cones/sleeves.

First change the service range of the neighboring doffer, then change the range of the doffer being programmed.

D After completion of entries the doffer examines the admissibility of the entries: – Relation between service range and length of the flextrack. – Relation between service range and neighboring doffer. – The types of yarn guide drums in the service range correlated to the drum’s yarn traverse stroke.

148-640 001 en 6.2003

3 - 113

Autoconer 338

inf00488e

3.3.11 Delivery packages, Package conveyor Entry: Machine setup...; Packages...; Package conveyor This menu is omitted if no package conveyor is installed in the machine. Start of conveyor belt

Automatic stop of the conveyor belt

Choices for conveyor belt start:

Selection for automatically stopping the conveyor belt:

D MANUAL Upon completion of the number of packages entered under “Packages until start“ the yellow signal lamp lights up, prompting the operator to remove the packages manually.

D OFF The conveyor runs for one half of its belt’s revolution, removing all packages from the machine.

D AUTOMATIC The conveyor belt starts automatically at completion of the number of packages entered under ”Packages until start“, or if an additional package is ready to be doffed on one of the winding units.

D LIGHT BARRIER The belt runs until a package actuates the light barrier located at the end of the conyeyor. Removal is terminated after one half of the belt’s revolution. D INTERFACE The conveyor belt is stopped by an external transport system.

D INTERFACE The conveyor belt is started by an external tranport system.

3 - 114

148-640 001 8.0 en 6.2003

Autoconer 338

inf00488e

Packages until start

Package lifter: Operation mode

Illustration of menu window: See also previous page.

Illustration of menu window: See previous page.

Entry of number of doffed packages

Eintry whether or not the package lifter feature (optional) is to be activated.

D at which the belt is to be started for package removal, or D at which the operator is to be prompted by the yellow signal lamp for manual package removal.

< OFF, ON >

< 0 - (No. of winding units), 0 = OFF > Speed of conveyor belt Prerequisites: D Entry possible only if a package lifter is not specified. (Machine setup...; Machine configuration...; Automation; “Package lifter: without”). D “Automatic belt start” (see previous page) must be switched ON. Now follows the selection of the belt speed either for normal package removal, or for fast package removal. < NORMAL, FAST >

148-640 001 en 6.2003

3 - 115

Autoconer 338

inf00407e

3.3.12 Pneumatic System / Dust Extraction Entry: Machine parameters...; Pneumatic system / Dust extraction... Under “Pneumatic system/Dust extraction“ entries are made for D Compressed air / Sub-pressure (suction), D Dust removal devices, and for D The travelling cleaner.

3 - 116

148-640 001 8.0 en 6.2003

Autoconer 338

inf00490e

3.3.13 Pneumatics / Dust Extraction, Compressed Air / Sub-Pressure Entry: Machine parameters...; Pneumatics / Dust Extraction...; Compressed air / Sub-pressure... Operative Sub-Pressure (Suction) Entry of the nominal sub-pressure value in -hPa (-mbar) at which the machine should operate. The Informator transmits this value to the frequency converter controlling the suction unit. The FC regulates the suction drive motor’s velocity (RPM) so that the entered suction level is obtained by the suction unit. < 25 - 65 (50) -hPa (-mbar) >

148-640 001 en 6.2003

3 - 117

Autoconer 338

inf00491e

3.3.14 Pneumatics / Dust Extraction, Dust Removal Entry: Machine parameters...; Pneumatics / Dust Extraction...; Dust Extraction... Self-Cleansing Entry of the time interval at which the dust extraction device(s) are to be automatically cleaned of accumulated lint and dust. 0

=

Function deactivated, no automatic self-cleansing.

1

=

Continuous cleansing without interval.

2 ... 99 =

The interval between two cleansing cycles is between 2 ... 99 minutes, depending on entry.

< 0 - 99 (10) min >

3 - 118

148-640 001 8.0 en 6.2003

Autoconer 338

inf00492e

3.3.15 Pneumatics / Dust Extraction, Travelling Cleaner Entry: Machine parameters...; Pneumatics / Dust extraction...; Travelling cleaner... Travelling cleaner: Operation status

Travelling cleaner: Pause

At entry “INTERVAL“: After each patrol cycle the cleaner remains stopped for the time entered under “Travelling cleaner pause“.

Entry is effective only when “INTERVAL” had been selected under “Travelling cleaner, operation status”. Entry of the pause period between patrols.

OFF

= Travelling cleaner switched OFF.

< 2 - 30 min >

INTERVAL

= Travelling cleaner patrols in intervals.

CONTINUOUS PATROL = Travelling cleaner patrols continuously. < OFF, INTERVAL, CONTINUOUS >

148-640 001 en 6.2003

3 - 119

Autoconer 338

inf00493e

3.3.16 Network Entry: Machine setup...; Network... Network connection Entry whether or not the Informator is provided with network connection, in order to provide connection with a superior data acquisition system, e.g. ConerPilot. The entry D requires entry of the “Service key” as password; D it is activated after a “New start” of the Informator (Voltage OFF/ON). < WITHOUT, WITH >

3 - 120

148-640 001 8.0 en 6.2003

Autoconer 338

inf00494e

3.4

Service

Menu ”Service” combines all functions necessary for skilled users to obtain detailed information concerning data transfer between Informator and connected participants, such as winding unit(s), package doffer(s), frequency converter(s), etc. Furthermore, this menu also incorporates D the test mode for package doffer(s) and winding units; D entries required for program transfer from a PC card to winding units, package doffer(s), and machine control; and D internal service functions provided for Schlafhorst service personnel.

148-640 001 en 6.2003

3 - 121

Autoconer 338

1 1

1 2 1

3 inf00549e

3.4.1

Test, Bus test

Entry: Service...; Test...; Bus test... Bus test <> Window ”Bus test“ indicates

➀

the registered bus participants including their status (accessible, i.e. connected; not accessible, i.e. no connection; functional), and

➁

possibly the date of registration and the complete version No.

Actuation of key ➂ initiates print-out of the presently displayed screen page.

3 - 122

148-640 001 8.0 en 6.2003

Autoconer 338

inf00496e

3.4.2

Test, Test mode

Entry: Service...; Test...; Test mode... Note Opening of menu “Test mode” requires entry of the “Service key” as password! Test winding units Test winding units can be activated for one or more winding units, the user is enabled to inspect the start-up of the winding unit(s). When activating test mode the winding unit continues winding until the next cycle is required, then stops with red and yellow winding unit lamps flashing at identical frequency.

148-640 001 en 6.2003

After brief actuation of red and yellow key the winding unit starts: D Red and yellow lamps are extinguished, the cycle begins. D The winding unit runs until the next yarn break takes place, then stops. Red and yellow lamps flash at identical frequency.

3 - 123

Autoconer 338

inf00496e

Activation of test mode for the winding units entered under ”Winding unit range“. OFF

=

Test mode OFF

JOINING CYCLE

=

Prior to cycling the winding unit waits with the red lamp lit steadily and the yellow lamp flashing (1 Hz).

WITHOUT CLEARER

CONTINUOUS CYCLING

3 - 124

=

= =

Winding unit “produces” without consideration of clearer function. No yarn clearing takes place! Clearer does not have to be installed.

Winding unit range Entry/Display of the first and last winding unit for test mode. Test mode is activated for the defined range if ON is entered under ”Test winding units“. < 1 - (Number of winding units) (1 - 1) > Test machine control MST Test of machine control is presently of no consequence for machine models RM, K, or E: Production is not interfered with. This entry activates/deactivates the test mode. < OFF, ON>

Winding unit cycles and winds continuously (appr. every 10 ... 17 s). A package has to be in the cradle.

148-640 001 8.0 en 6.2003

Autoconer 338

inf00496e

’Cold’ start <>

e

With this procedure all data (Lot, Machine, Productions data) is being cleared (erased)! On Informator with intergrated clearer: Clearer data could also be cleared! Study the clearer manual, and execute a calibration routine (Adjust), if required.

When selecting menu item “Cold start <>” with subsequent actuation of “OK” the cold start takes place instantly, without prior safety inquiry! The Informator is newly run-up.

148-640 001 en 6.2003

3 - 125

Autoconer 338

inf00543e

3.4.3

Maintenance

Entry: Service...; Maintenance... Forced bobbin change <>

Maintenance mode HDS (Suction drive)

Manually initiated bobbin change cycle (Forced bobbin change) for depleting (of bobbins) the winding units defined under “Forced bobbin change“.

ON/OFF switching of maintenance mode of the suction drive. Maintenance mode is deactivated automatically after appr. 5 min., i.e. the suction drive returns to normal operation mode.

A forced bobbin change is possible only D if the winding unit switch is ON, and D if neither yellow lamp, nor D red lamp is ON! Bobbin change range Pre-definition of winding unit, or winding unit range, on which a forced bobbin change is to take place. (Entry: Forced bobbin change).

Maintenance mode functions: D The suction drive motor runs at a fixed velocity of appr. 1500 rpm. D The cycling lock(s)* of the defined winding unit(s) are activated. PASSIVE=

Suction drive in normal operation mode.

ACTIVE =

Suction drive in maintenance mode. Cycling lock activated.

< 1 - No. of winding units (1 - 1) > * With activated cycling lock(s) the winding unit(s) keep producing until the next cycle is required, then stop(s).

3 - 126

148-640 001 8.0 en 6.2003

Autoconer 338

inf00543e

Emergency operation of HDS (Suction drive)

Break thermosplicer

HDS emergency operation. In emergency operation mode the suction drive motor runs at fixed velocity. Entry is made in %; Entry 100% = maximum velocity (rpm). Emergency operation has to be activated, e.g., of the subpressure sensor is defective.

Only on machines with Thermosplicers.

OFF = Emergency operation deactivated; normal operation with regulation of sub-pressure. 25% = Suction drive motor runs at 25% of the maximum rpm. 30% = Suction drive motor runs at 30% of the maximum rpm. ... ... ... 100% = Maximum velocity (rpm) of the motor.

148-640 001 en 6.2003

After keying OFF of the machine, normally the winding units are free of voltage. When the machine is keyed-ON the thermosplicers have to heat-up prior to start of the winding units. Through entry of “ACTIVE” the voltage remains present, the thermosplicers remain heated. The winding units are in “Standby” status. Message window “PAUSE THERMOSPLICER” is displayed during this time. Cancellation can be intiated on the Informator as well through keying-ON of the machine. < PASSIVE, ACTIVE >

3 - 127

Autoconer 338

inf00543e

Cycling lock due to tube conveyor When entering “PASSIVE“ the cycling locks* of the winding units are not activated and keep producing, as long as the tube conveyor is inoperational D because of a failure, or D for maintenance.

e

Entry ”ACTIVE“ is usually selected during normal operation. Entry “PASSIVE“ can cause production loss!

PASSIVE =

Tube conveyor inoperational for maintenance purpose. Cycling lock* deactivated.

ACTIVE =

Tube conveyor in normal operation.

3 - 128

148-640 001 8.0 en 6.2003

Autoconer 338

1

2

3 inf00145e

Informator Start messages

➁

After each power failure restoration (Restart, or New start) or Initial start, the Informator is newly run-up and performs a Self-test, called ’start-up test’. Message window ”Startup Informator“ is always actualized after each self-test.

➀

Upon actuation of the key a listing of the startup messages of the Informator appears, i.e. the reason(s) Restart/New start, or Initial start, of the Informator are indicated (e.g. a power failure had taken place).

Upon actuation of this key follows the display of a chronological listing of Informator-internal messages and events. This listing assists Schlafhorst Service personnnel for failure search.

➂

Actuation of this key initiates print-out of the displayed screen page.

Example: D New start after power failure (Restart): Warm start – < Date > < Time > – sdog !!!! Power fail !!!! D New start after actuation of the Reset key (Restart): Cold start – < Date > < Time > – sdog !!!! RESET key actuated !!!!

148-640 001 en 6.2003

3 - 129

Autoconer 338

1 2

inf00543e

➀

Informator: Battery-Voltage

Calibration of Touch <>

Indication of voltage level of the buffer batteries installed in the Informator. These batteries are used for power failure-prove storage of production data.

This entry initiates the calibration of the touch-screen display. Further explanation on next page.

The batteries must be renewed if the indicated voltage drops below 3000 mV (→ 3.1.20).

➁

Informator: Temperature Indication of the Informator’s operation temperature. The Informator is designed for operation temperatures up to 60 °C. For temperatures above 60 °C it is necessary to provide cooling.

3 - 130

148-640 001 8.0 en 6.2003

Autoconer 338

1

2 inf00544e

inf00545e

Display screen calibration (Touch-Screen) Screen calibration D should be executed only if the menu items can not be actuated without problems, and D with keyed-OFF machine.

➀

With keyed-ON machine a message is issued to have the machine keyed-OFF before calibration.

➁

With keyed-OFF machine the Informator restarts after the illustrated message and automatically activates the calibration routine. Further information on next page.

Note Should the machine’s voltage disappear during calibration (e.g. due to machine switch-OFF, or due to a power failure), the calibration routine is newly started upon voltage restoration.

148-640 001 en 6.2003

3 - 131

Autoconer 338

No.

Screen display

Action to be taken

Adjustment of screen range 1

Hit lower left edge of LCD Display

Touch the displayed lower left-hand corner of the screen.

2

Hit upper right edge of LCD Display

Touch the displayed upper right-hand corner of the screen.

3

Veryfy if LCD screen calibration is correct. Hit the Touchsreen and a cross must appear exactly on that position. Hit “Y” or “N“ when finished. Calibrations correct (Y/N) ?

Touch the touch-screen at any place: A cross must be indicated exactly where the screen is touched. Then, if the setting is OK, confirm with “Y” for yes. The routine repeats beginning with No. 1 if “N” for no is entered. After appr. 15 s without entry an automatic reversal to No. 4 takes place.

Setting of fixed key “Darker screen” 4

Hit UP button, lower left edge

Touch the lower left-hand corner of key “Darker screen”.

5

Hit UP button, upper right edge

Touch the upper right-hand corner of key “Darker screen”.

Setting of fixed key “Lighter screen”

6

Hit UP button, lower left edge

Touch the lower left-hand corner of key “Lighter screen”.

7

Hit DOWN button, upper right edge

Touch the upper right-hand corner of key “Lighter screen”.

Setting of fixed key “Printer: Paper feed”

8

Hit Paper Feed button, lower left edge

Touch the lower left-hand corner of key “Printer: Paper feed”.

9

Hit Paper Feed button, upper right edge

Touch upper right-hand corner of key “Printer: Paper feed”.

Veryfy if calibration of buttons is correct. Hit “Y” or “N“ when finished. Calibrations correct (Y/N) ?

For OK calibration, confirm with “Y” for yes. The routine for setting of fixed keys is repeated beginning with No. 1 when entering “N” for no. After 30 s without any actuation the calibration routine start anew beginning with No. 1.

10

3 - 132

Calibration ready

A new start (restart) of he Informator takes place upon successful calibration of the touch-screen.

148-640 001 8.0 en 6.2003

Autoconer 338

inf00498e

3.4.4

Program transfer

Entry: Service...; Program transfer...

e

Prior to program transfer be sure the PC-Card incorporates the correct program version (part No.)! See also item “Load part No. of PC-Card <>”.

Reviewed program versions (Update) stored on a PC-Card Type FLASH, can be transferred from Informator via machine bus

Note:

D to the winding units,

D Opening of menu “Program transfer” requires entry of the “Service key” as password.

D to the package doffer(s), and D to machine control.

D Reload the Informator program → 3.1.19.

148-640 001 en 6.2003

3 - 133

Autoconer 338

inf00498e

Data transmission to machine control D For data transmission to machine control the machine must be switched ON: – Main breaker switch = ON, – Machine keyed OFF. D Insert the PC-Card (→ 3.1.17). D Actuate key “PC-CARD -> Machine control”. D Continue → on the next page: ”Data transmission begins after actuation of key O.K. ...”

D Assemblies to which a new program is to be transmitted must be taken out of production through deactivation: – Switch OFF all winding units on their winding unit switches. – Package doffer(s): Set turn switch(es) located on the doffer(s) to “Manual”. D Insert the PC-Card (→ 3.1.17). D Enter the target to which the new program is to be transmitted: – Winding unit or winding unit range – Doffer(s)

Data tranmission (all other assemblies, except “Machine control”) D For data transmission the machine must be keyed ON (in production):

Note: More info concerning target selection: → Next two pages.

– Main breaker switch = ON, – Machine “ON key” = ON.

3 - 134

148-640 001 8.0 en 6.2003

Autoconer 338

1

inf00501e

3 2

inf00500e

D Data transmission begins after actuation of key ”O.K.”: – Initially the existing program of the target computer is cleared (erased). – Next the transmission of the new program begins. D During program transfer: – The routines of clearing/transmission are indicated on screen (see ➀ for clearing).

D Screen ➁ is shown during program transmission. D At completion of program transfer indication ➂ shows 100 % before disappearing. – Only now can the PC-Card be removed! – Re-activate the assemblies previously deactivated. D Only after program transfer to machine control: – Have the machine keyed ON.

– Data transmission to winding unit(s): [winding unit lamp(s)] - The red lamp flashes during program clearing - The yellow lamp flashes during data transmission.

148-640 001 en 6.2003

3 - 135

Autoconer 338

inf00498e

PC-Card -> Winding units*

Loading of the PC-Card’s part No. <>

Entry of winding unit or winding unit range to which the PC-Card data is to be transmitted.

Entry prior to program transfer for double-checking whether or not the PC-Card bears the correct program version No. (part No.). All program versions of a given machine must be identical.

< 1 - (Number of winding units) (1 - 1) > PC-Card -> Doffer* Entry of doffer (or all doffers, resp.) to which the PC-Card data is to be transmitted. < DOFFER 1 - (No. of doffers), ALL DOFFERS > PC-Card -> Machine control* Entry for transmission of PC-Card data to machine control. *Note: For program transfer the machine must be keyed ON (in production), while the target assembly (e.g. the winding units, or the package doffer(s) must be deactivated!

3 - 136

148-640 001 8.0 en 6.2003

Autoconer 338

inf00147e

3.4.5

Internal Service Functions

Entry: Service...; Internal Service functions The internal service functions are provided for authorized Schlafhorst service personnel only, therefore they are not explained in this manual.

e

Uncontrolled entries in this menu lead to malfunctions and production losses!

148-640 001 en 6.2003

3 - 137

Autoconer 338

3 - 138

148-640 001 8.0 en 6.2003

Autoconer 338

inf00228e

3.5

Data Display

Through activation in menu “Data display” actual data pertaining to D Production, D Machine, and/or messages can be displayed. Furthermore, reports are defined in this menu, and printing of actual reports can be initiated.

148-640 001 en 6.2003

3 - 139

Autoconer 338

inf00228e

3.5.1

Production data

Entry: Data display...; Production data... Menu “Production data“ displays production summaries of the current shift, or of the previous shift, concerning D Lot data D Winding unit data D Clearer data Production review displays, for all producing groups, the production factor; in window “Extended production review” it also displays a listing of reasons for production decreases.

3 - 140

148-640 001 8.0 en 6.2003

Autoconer 338

1

3

2

inf00176e

3.5.2

Production Data, Lot Data

Entry: Data display...; Production data...; Lot data... Window “Lot data“ displays the actual production review of the production group selected under ➀ for the current shift.

D Machine efficiency (average machine efficiency in %).

Actuation of key ➁ switches this window to the data from the previous shift.

D Red lights (Total No. of Red lights).

➂

D Clearer cuts (Total from cuts for thick places, thin places, and double ends).

Display: Status of the production group (Defined, Production, or Lot change).

D Repeater cycles (Average repeaters per yarn joint). D Duration of Red lights (Total time of all Red lights in min).

Listing of displayed data (from left to right):

D Yarn joints (No. of splices / knots).

D Lot name (customer’s lot description).

D Yarn breaks (No. of yarn breaks).

D Lot No. (customer’s lot code).

D Production time (since shift start).

D Working range of the production group (Winding unit from ... to ...).

D Doffed packages (No. of doffed delivery packages). D Time span (since shift start).

D Production weight (in kg oder lbs).

148-640 001 en 6.2003

3 - 141

Autoconer 338

inf00177e

3.5.3

1

2

Production Data, Winding Unit Data

Entry: Data display...; Production data...; Winding unit data... Window “Winding unit data“ displays the actual production review of the winding unit selected under ➀ for the current shift.

Listing of the displayed data (from left to right):

Actuation of key ➁ switches this window to the data from the previous shift.

D Machine efficiency (Average machine efficiency in %).

D Production weight (in kg oder lbs). D Yarn length wound shift (since shift start). D Yarn length wound package (Yarn length on package being wound). D Diameter wound (Diameter of package being wound). D Radial position cam package (aktual radial position of cycling drive).

3 - 142

148-640 001 8.0 en 6.2003

Autoconer 338

inf00177e

D Operation status Operational status of the winding unit, e.g.: RUNS: ACCELERATING RED LIGHT: GENERAL YELLOW LIGHT: DOFFER ACTIVATED OFF: WAITING FOR START WINDING UNIT NOT ACCESSIBLE Listing of all operational statuses → next page. D Last reason for Red light Reason for last Red light, e.g.: UNKNOWN REDLIGHT CIRC. MAGAZINE NOT IN NEUTRAL POS. START-UP FAILURE DRUM LAP Listing of all Red light reasons → page after next page.

D Upper end failures (No. of upper end failures). D Start-up cuts (No. of start-up cuts). D Clearer cuts (No. of clearer cuts). D Tension breaks (No. of breaks caused by yarn tension). D Yarn joints (No. of splices/knots). D Yarn breaks (No. of yarn breaks). D Bobbin changes (No. of bobbin change cycles). D Packages doffed (No. of doffed packages). D Winding unit OFF-time (Time in min. during which the Wdg. unit switch was/is OFF). D Production time (Time in min. during which the wdg. unit has been producing).

D Repeater cycles (Average repeaters per yarn joint). D Red lights (Total No. of Red lights). D Duration of Red lights (Total time of all Red lights in min).

148-640 001 en 6.2003

3 - 143

Autoconer 338 Possible Statuses of the Winding Unit WINDER NOT ACCESSIBLE

= Winding unit not accessible via data bus.

UNKNOWN CONDITION

= The present status is unknown to the Informator.

NO PROGRAM/PARAMETERS

= Winding unit has no data required for production start.

REQUEST FOR PROGRAM

= Winding unit requesting a program.

LOAD PROGRAM

= Program transmission to winding unit in progress.

NO WORKING PARAMETERS

= Winding unit lacks operation parameters.

OFF : GENERAL

= Winding unit generally switched OFF.

OFF : WINDER-SWITCH

= Winding unit switched OFF on wdg. unit switch.

OFF : WAITING FOR START

= Winding unit OFF, waiting for being started.

OFF : START-UP MODE

= Winding unit OFF, waiting for manual start.

OFF : TEST THERMOSPLICER

= Winding unit OFF, thermosplicer in Test status.

OFF : CLEARER NOT READY

= Winding unit OFF, clearer not on standby.

OFF : TENSIONER BUTTON ON

= Winding unit OFF, tension device-opener actuated.

OFF : RED LIGHT BUTTON ON

= Winding unit OFF, Red light key is actuated.

OFF : YELLOW LIGHT BUTTON ON

= Winding unit OFF, Yellow light key is actuated.

OFF : NO BUS CONNECTION

= Winding unit OFF, no communication via data bus.

OFF : POWER-FAIL

= Winding unit OFF, mach. control reports power failure.

OFF : CLEARER NOT ACCESSIBLE

= Winding unit OFF, clearer is not accessible.

SELF-TEST

= Winding unit in self-test status.

SERVICE TEST EQUIPMENT

= Winding unit: Test device connected for service.

CYCLE GENERAL

= Winding unit: Cycle in progress.

CYCLE FREQUENCY

= Winding unit: Cycle in progress.

CYCLE WITHOUT THREAD

= Winding unit: Cycle in progress without yarn recognition.

CYCLE TESTMODE

= Winding unit switched in test status. → next page

3 - 144

148-640 001 8.0 en 6.2003

Autoconer 338 CYCLING LOCK

= Winding unit in cycling lock status. At cycling lock activation the wdg. unit continues production until the next cycle is required, then stops.

CYCLING LOCK : NO COMPRESSED AIR

= - ” -, Compressed air pressure dropped below limit.

CYCLING LOCK : NO SUCTION

= - ” -, Suction air sub-pressure dropped below limit.

CYCLING LOCK : EMPTY TUBE CONVEYOR

= - ” -, Cycling lock triggered by empty tube conveyor.

CYCLING LOCK : SPLICING WATER

= - ” -, Splicing water needs replenishing (Wet splicer only).

CYCL. LOCK : MACH.STATUS UNKNOWN

= - ” -, Machine reports an unknown status.

CYCLING LOCK : MACHINE OFF

= - ” -, Machine having been keyed OFF.

CYCLING LOCK : SUCTION DRIVE MOTOR

= - ” -, Failure of suction drive frequency converter.

CYCLING LOCK : POWER FAIL

= - ” -, Power failure on machine.

CYCLING LOCK : HDS MAINTENANCE STATUS = - ” -, Suction drive is switched to maintenance status (→ Service..., Maintenance...). CYCL. LOCK : TRANSFORMER OVERHEATING = - ” -, Overheating of transformer T1 in the drive end. CYCLING LOCK : THERMOSPLICER DWELL

= - ” -, “Dwell thermosplicer“ is switched to ACTIVE (→ Service..., Maintenance...).

WAIT : ZERO POSITION DOFFER

= Wdg. unit waits for neutral position of doffer.

WAIT : STOP MOTION

= Wdg. unit waiting: Briefly ignore clearer signal.

WAITING FOR THERMOSPLICER

= Winding unit waits for thermosplicer to heat up.

NULL POSITION DOFFER

= Wdg. unit fails to recognize neutral position of doffer.

YELLOW LIGHT : GENERAL

= Wdg. unit is in Yellow light status.

YELLOW LIGHT : PACKAGE READY

= Yellow light: Wdg. unit stopped for doffing.

YELLOW LIGHT : WAITING FOR DOFFING

= Yellow light: Waiting for doffer.

YELLOW LIGHT : DOFFER RUNNING

= Yellow light: Doffing in progress.

RED LIGHT : GENERAL

= Winding unit is in Red light status.

RED LIGHT : WAITING FOR BUTTON

= Red light: Waiting for confirmation (red or yellow light).

RED LIGHT : DELETION BAN

= Red light: Red light can not be deleted.

RUN : GENERAL

= Wdg. unit running: Normal production.

RUN : INITIAL START

= Wdg. unit running: In start-up phase.

RUN : STARTUP

= Wdg. unit running: In acceleration phase.

RUN : FINAL SPEED

= Wdg. unit running: At nominal speed.

RUN : AUTOSPEED

= Wdg. unit running: Nominal speed reduced by Autospeed / Autotense.

148-640 001 en 6.2003

3 - 145

Autoconer 338 All Reasons for the last registered Red light of the Winding Unit CIRCULAR MAGAZINE NOT IN NEUTRAL POSITION

= Circular magazine is not in neutral position.

CIRCULAR MAGAZINE IN TRANSFER POSITION

= Circular magazine is not in transfer position.

CIRCULAR MAGAZINE BLOCKAGE

= Circular magazine is blocked (jammed).

PILOT DRIVE NOT IN NEUTRAL POSITION

= Cycling linkage is not in neutral position.

NO PULSES FOR PILOT DRIVE

= Cycling drive fails to receive pulses for calculation of radial cam package position.

PILOT DRIVE BLOCKAGE

= Cycling drive is blocked.

WRONG SETTING PILOT DRIVE

= Cycling drive is falsely positioned.

SPEED CONTROL FAILURE

= Failure of proper speed control.

WINDING DRIVE BLOCKAGE

= Blockage of winding drive.

WINDING DRIVE NOT STOPPING

= Winding not stopping.

PACKAGE BLOCKAGE

= Delivery package is blocked.

PACKAGE NOT STOPPING

= Delivery package fails to stop.

CUTTING KNIFE BLOCKAGE

= Cutting knife blockage.

LAP GUARD

= Drum lap recognized.

RIBBON BREAKER FAILURE

= Ribbon breaker fails to function properly.

STARTUP FAILURE

= Failure of start-up after doffing.

TOO MANY CYCLES

= Recognition of too many cycles.

NO LOWER END AFTER BOBBIN CHANGE

= Lower end missing after bobbin change cycle.

THERMOSPLICER FAILURE

= Thermosplicer failure recognized.

BAD PACKAGE QUALITY

= Bobbin classified “Bad” by the winding unit.

PILOT DRIVE NOT STOPPING

= Cycling drive fails to stop.

CLEARER-INTERNAL TECHNICAL BLOCKAGE

= Technical failure of clearer.

WINDING DRIVE OVERLOAD

= Winding drive electrically overloaded.

PILOT DRIVE OVERLOAD

= Cycling drive electrically overloaded.

NO SIGNAL FROM YARN TENSION-SENSOR

= Yarn tension sensor fails to transmit signals.

CAN-CHIP FAULT

= No connection with CAN bus. → next page

3 - 146

148-640 001 8.0 en 6.2003

Autoconer 338 CLEARER : INTERFACE FAULT

= No data transmission possible via clearer interface.

CLEARER : YARN COUNT ALERT

= Clearer alert due to yarn count deviation.

CLEARER : ERROR CLUSTER ALERT

= Clearer alert due to fault cluster.

CLEARER : MOIRÉ ALERT

= Clearer alert due to moiré formation.

CLEARER : CV-ALERT

= Clearer alert due to CV deviation.

CLEARER : FOREIGN FIBER ALERT

= Clearer alert due to foreign fiber recognition.

WRONG DRUM PULSES

= False pulses from drum registered.

NO LOWER END

= No lower end registered.

THERMOSPLICER: DEFECTIVE PRISM

= Defective prism on thermosplicer.

THERMOSPLICER: DEFECTIVE THERMO ELEMENT

= Defective thermo element on thermosplicer.

UNKNOWN REDLIGHT

= The status transmitted by the winding unit is unknown.

UNKNOWN REDLIGHT (37)

= Yarn not in tension device while running.

UNKNOWN REDLIGHT (38)

= Too many bobbin change cycles in sequency.

148-640 001 en 6.2003

3 - 147

Autoconer 338

1

2

3

inf00150e

3.5.4

Production Data, Production Review

Entry: Data display...; Production data...; Production review... The window for production review is divided into 6 parts. Each part covers one of the 6 definable production groups. Groups actually producing are depicted in prominent fashion. The parts for non-producing groups are empty.

➁

Data Windows displaying the following Data: – Lot name and lot No. as entered under “Lot control“. – Last acquired production factor.

➀

Presentation of the Production Factors of producing groups. The depicted window width corresponds to the production factors of the last 15 minutes. A conclusive display is not possible for less than 15 minutes, therefore no data is displayed before then.

Production speed Production factor = × 1000 Nominal speed

The production factor represents a forecast of how much the actual production will be below the theoretical production. Theoretical production is calculated from nominal winding speed and production duration.

3 - 148

– Produced weight in kg/lb since lot start or since shift start.

➂

Producing Group In order to obtain additional information concerning a producing group, actuate the data window of the group (group 2 in the example). The screen switches to “Extended production review“ (→ next page). The data windows of non-producing groups are empty and marked “***“.

148-640 001 8.0 en 6.2003

Autoconer 338

1 2

3

4

inf00151e

3.5.5

Production Data, extended Production Review The extended production review can be selected only from ➂ 2nd Column the production review (→ 3.5.4).

Production limited due to:

The dialog window displays the data of the group selected in the production review menu.

➀

– OFF times (e.g. winding unit switch OFF) – Cycle times (Yarn joining cycle, bobbin change cycle, etc.)

Changing to an other Group

– Waiting times (e.g. warm-up time of thermosplicer)

Actuation of the “UP“ and “DOWN“ key allows changing to an other group.

– Red lights (Winding unit stops due to Red lights)

➁

1st Column

– Yellow lights (Winding unit stops due to Yellow lights)

– Lot name (Customer’s lot description)

– Autospeed (Speed reduction by Autospeed)

– Lot No. (Customer’s lot code) – Lot status (DEFINED = defined, valid winding unit range; PRODUCTION = lot being produced; LOT CHANGE = lot change in progress, lot end with full packages) – Working range (winding unit range allotted to this lot)

148-640 001 en 6.2003

➃

3rd Column Production loss from: – Acceleration of the winding units – electronic ribbon breaker

3 - 149

Autoconer 338

1

inf00440e

3.5.6

Production data, Clearer data

Entry: Data display...; Production data...; Clearer data... Due to the magnitude of clearer cuts and alerts to be displayed, window ”Clearer data” has been partitioned into 3 screen pages. Selection of pages 1 ... 3 takes place on buttons 1, 2, and 3 (→ ➀). Displayable values for cuts and alerts depend on the clearer type. ”***” is displayed if the clearer fails to transmit values. The 3 window pages are distinguished as follows:

Additionally, the following windows containing clearer data can be selected: D Clearer data of one winding unit, actual No. of cuts. D Clearer data of one winding unit, prorated per 100 km (mi) yarn length. D Clearer data of one lot, actual No. of cuts. D Clearer data of one lot, prorated per 100 km (mi) yarn length.

D Clearer cuts D Special clearer cuts D Clearer alerts

3 - 150

Upon initial selection of ”Clearer data” the 1st window displays page 1 with the actual No. of cuts of the various categories, transmitted by the clearer to the Informator. This data covers the 1st lot of the current shift.

148-640 001 8.0 en 6.2003

Autoconer 338

inf00440e

Clearer data, page 1: Clearer cuts (nCC) Listing of displayed cut categories: D Nep cuts (nCN) D Short thick place cuts (nCS) D Long thick place / Double end cuts (nCL) D Thin place cuts (nCT) D Foreign fiber cuts (nCF)

148-640 001 en 6.2003

3 - 151

Autoconer 338

inf00441e

Clearer data, page 2: Special clearer cuts (nCSP) Listing of displayed cut categories: D Yarn count cuts (nCCA) D Failure cluster cuts (nCFS) [Yarn fault clusters] D Moiré cuts (nCMO) D Surface index cuts (nSFI) D Foreign fiber cluster cuts (nCFFS) D Splice / knotter cuts (nCSK) D Bunch cuts (nCB) D Upper end cuts (nCU) D System cuts (nCSY)

3 - 152

148-640 001 8.0 en 6.2003

Autoconer 338

inf00442e

Clearer data, page 3: Clearer alerts (nRA) Listing of displayed alert categories: D Yarn count alerts (nCA) D Failure cluster alerts (nFSA) [Yarn fault cluster] D Yarn fault alerts (nGFA) D Foreign fiber alerts (nFFA) D Moiré alerts (nMOA) D CV alerts (nCVA) D Surface index alerts (nSFIA) D IPI alerts (nIPIA) D CMT alerts (nCMTA) D Foreign fiber cluster alerts (nFFSA)

148-640 001 en 6.2003

3 - 153

Autoconer 338

6 1

3

4

5

2

inf00440e

Window illustrated above: Clearer data of one lot, actual No. of cuts. ➀ Selection of the lot to be displayed.

➁ ➂

Button for reversal to the last completed shift.

➃

Reversal to: Clearer data of a winding unit, actual No. of cuts.

➄ ➅

Reversal to window ”Lot data” (→ 3.5.2).

Reversal to: Clearer data prorated per 100 km (mi) yarn length of the lot.

Display: Status of the production group (Defined, Production, or Lot change).

3 - 154

148-640 001 8.0 en 6.2003

Autoconer 338

6 1

3

4

5

2

inf00443e

Window illustrated above: Clearer data prorated per 100 km (mi) yarn length of the lot. ➀ Selection of the lot to be displayed.

➁ ➂ ➃


➄ ➅

Reversal to window ”Lot data” (→ 3.5.2).

Reversal to: Clearer data of one lot, actual No. of cuts. Reversal to clearer data prorated per 100 km (mi) yarn length of a winding unit. Display: Status of the production group (Defined, Production, or Lot change).

148-640 001 en 6.2003

3 - 155

Autoconer 338

1

3

4

5

2

inf00444e

Window illustrated above: Clearer data of one winding unit, actual No. of cuts. ➀ Selection of the winding unit to be displayed.

➁ ➂


➃ ➄

Reversal to: Clearer data of one lot, actual No. of cuts.

Reversal to: Clearer data prorated per 100 km (mi) yarn length of the selected winding unit. Reversal to window ”Winding unit data” (→ 3.5.3).

3 - 156

148-640 001 8.0 en 6.2003

Autoconer 338

1

3

4

5

2

inf00445e

Window illustrated above: Clearer data of a winding unit prorated per 100 km (mi) yarn length. ➀ Selection of the winding unit to be displayed.

➁ ➂


➃

Reversal to: Clearer data prorated per 100 km (mi) yarn length of a lot.

➄

Reversal to window ”Winding unit data” (→ 3.5.3).

Reversal to: Clearer data of one winding unit, actual No. of cuts.

148-640 001 en 6.2003

3 - 157

Autoconer 338

inf00230e

3.5.7

Machine data

Entry: Data display...; Machine data... Menu “Machine data” displays settings and operation statuses concerning the following devices: D Electrical / Electronic equipment D Compressed air / Suction air (Sub-pressure) D Automation D Section D Package doffer

3 - 158

148-640 001 8.0 en 6.2003

Autoconer 338

inf00153e

3.5.8

Machine Data, Electric / Electronic Equipment

Entry: Data display...; Machine data...; Electric / Electronic equ’t.... Machine

Motor Overload Switch GZK 1

OFF

=

Machine switched OFF.

OK

=

Overload switch not tripped.

ON

=

Machine switched ON, but not ready for production.

TRIPPED

=

Overload switch tripped.

READY =

Machine ready, or in production.

Motor Overload Switch Machine OK

=

Overload switch not tripped.

TRIPPED

=

Overload switch tripped.

148-640 001 en 6.2003

3 - 159

Autoconer 338

inf00153e

Operation Status Machine Control

Informator: Battery Voltage

ON

= Machine control activated

OFF

= Machine control deactivated

Voltage display of the buffer batteries installed in the Informator for power fail-proof storage of the production data.

SELFTEST

= Machine control in self-test

SERVICE

= Machine control OFF for service

PROGRAM REQUEST

= Machine control waits for program transmission

BOOTING

= Machine control boots the program

CYCLING LOCK

= Machine control has switched the winding units to “Lock activated”

TESTMODE

= Machine control deactivated in Test mode

NOT ACCESSIBLE

= Machine control not accessible via data bus

3 - 160

The batteries must be replaced if the displayed voltage is less than 3,000 mV. Informator: Temperature Display of the Informator’s operational temperature. The Informator is designed to operate at temperatures up to 60 °C (140 ºF). Auxiliary cooling must be provided for higher temperatures.

148-640 001 8.0 en 6.2003

Autoconer 338

1

inf00550e

3.5.9

Machine data: Compressed air/Sub-pressure (Suction)

Entry: Data display...; Machine data...; Compressed air/Sub-pressure...

➀

Section

Suction drive motor: Operating status

Selection of the section to which the following entries are to be applied. Suction system HDS

=

Machine with suction drive

CENTRAL

=

Machine without suction drive; the following indications are omitted.

Indication of the suction drive motor’s operating status. OK

=

Suction drive motor OK

ALERT

=

Suction drive motor failure

Operational suction level Nominal value for the sub-pressure level in -hPa (-mbar), corresponding to setting under “Machine setup, Compressed air/Sub-pressure“.

Suction system: Operating status Operating status of suction system:

Standby suction

OK

=

Sub-pressure OK

STANDBY

=

Idle sub-pressure level

Nominal suction level in -hPa (-mbar) while no joining cycles are in progress, i.e. no suction is being consumed. This value is calculated by machine control.

ALERT

=

No sub-pressure (no suction)

148-640 001 en 6.2003

3 - 161

Autoconer 338

1

inf00550e

Current suction

Active power FU suction drive motor

Indication of the actual suction level generated by the suction drive. A value in -hPa (-mbar) should be indicated, somewhere between standby suction and operating suction.

Indication of effective power in kW presently being consumed by the suction drive motor.

Frequency FU suction drive motor Indication of actual frequency in Hz controlling the suction drive motor. Current FU suction drive motor

Inside temperature FU suction drive motor Indication of the internal temperature of the suction drive motor’s frequency converter. Heat sink temperature FU suction drive motor Indication of cooling block temperature of the suction drive motor.

Indication of actual current (in Amp.) presently being utilized by the suction drive motor.

3 - 162

148-640 001 8.0 en 6.2003

Autoconer 338

1

inf00550e

Compressed air: Operating status

Dust extraction

Indication whether or not the compressed air supply is in normal range.

Indication whether or not the section selected under “Section“ is equipped with the dust extraction feature.

OK

=

Compressed air supply is OK

WITH

=

Machine with dust extraction

ALERT

=

Compressed air failure

WITHOUT

=

Machine without dust extraction

Section

Dust extraction: Operation mode

Selection of the section of which the following entries concerning dust extraction are to be applied.

Indication if the section selected under “Section“ is switched ON or OFF.

< 1 - (No. of sections) >

ON

=

Dust extraction switched ON.

OFF

=

Dust extraction switched OFF.

148-640 001 en 6.2003

3 - 163

Autoconer 338

inf00155e

3.5.10 Machine Data, Automation Entry: Data display...; Machine data..., Automation... Package Conveyor

Package Conveyor: Operation Status

Type of package conveyor as entered under “Machine configuration“.

NEUTRAL

=

Conveyor belt in neutral position

RUNS

=

Conveyor running

ALERT

=

Package conveyor failure

BELT

=

Machine with integrated package conveyor

WITHOUT

=

Machine without package conveyor

EXTERNAL

=

Machine with external conveyor system

Packages until Start Display of the number of packages to be completed until the conveyor starts, as entered under “Machine parameters, Packages, Package Conveyor“.

Package Lift Display of whether or not the package conveyor is equipped with the package lift feature. Package Lift: Operation Mode Display of ON or OFF mode of the package lift feature. Package Lift: Operation Status

No. of Packages on Belt

OK

=

Package lift feature OK

No. of packages currently located on the conveyor belt (for automatic dispatch only).

ALERT

=

Package lift failure

3 - 164

148-640 001 8.0 en 6.2003

Autoconer 338

1

inf00156e

3.5.11 Machine Data, Section Entry: Data display...; Machine data...; Section...

➀

Section

Dust Extraction

Selection of the machine section for which the following data is to be displayed.

Display of whether or not the machine is equipped with the dust extraction feature.

Empty Tube Conveyor

Dust Extraction: Operation Status

Type of tube conveyor as defined under “Machine configuration“.

Display of ON or OFF mode of the dust extraction feature.

WITHOUT

=

No tube conveyor (Type K)

Magazine Type

CTC (DHT)

=

Continuous tube conveyor (Standard with model RM)

Display of installed magazine type.

STC (HT10)

=

Sectional tube conveyor (Optional for model RM)

CIRCULAR MAGAZINE

=

Circular magazine

REWINDING

=

Rewinding device

Empty Tube Conveyor RUNS

=

Running

OFF

=

Switched OFF

ALERT

=

Tube conveyor failure

148-640 001 en 6.2003

3 - 165

Autoconer 338

1

inf00235e

3.5.12 Machine Data, Package Doffer Entry: Data display...; Machine data...; Package doffer...

➀

Selection of the doffer for which the following data is to be displayed.

Operation Status Listing of the available operation statuses of the doffer → next page.

No. of Doffers Display of the number of doffers defined for the machine.

Radial Position of the Cam Package

Maximum Service Range

Display of the current radial position of the cam package in degrees.

Maximum service range of the selected doffer, limited by mechanical boundaries.

Radial Position of the Package Guide Arm

Doffer Service Range Range of winding units serviced by the doffer selected under ➀.

Display of the current radial position of the package guide arm in degrees. Last Winding Unit served Last winding unit on which a package doffing cycle had been performed.

3 - 166

148-640 001 8.0 en 6.2003

Autoconer 338

inf00235e

Transfer tail Entry of type of transfer tail winding: D WITHOUT TRANSFER TAIL, RH WINDING – Package doffer without cone/sleeve drive and without yarn guide component – RH winding D WITH TRANSFER TAIL, RH WINDING – Standard package doffer – RH winding (Transfer tail on RH side) D WITHOUT TRANSFER TAIL, LH WINDING – Package doffer without cone/sleeve drive and without yarn guide component – LH winding D WITH TRANSFER TAIL, LH WINDING – Standard package doffer – LH winding (Transfer tail on LH side)

148-640 001 en 6.2003

3 - 167

Autoconer 338 Available Operation Statuses of the Package Doffer (Doffer) Doffer not accessible

=

Doffer not accessible via data bus.

Unknown status

=

Doffer transmits an unknown status (failure).

No program / parameters

=

Doffer has no data to start production.

Program request

=

Doffer requesting a program (SPS).

Program loading

=

Doffer being loaded with a program.

No operation parameters

=

Doffer has no operation parameters.

Doffer OFF

=

Doffer switched OFF.

Doffer Selftest

=

Doffer performing a self test.

Doffer Service

=

Doffer is switched in Service mode.

Manual operation

=

Doffer is switched in manual mode.

Manual, pause

=

Doffer in manual mode, currently in patrol pause.

Manual, patrolling

=

Doffer in manual mode, currently patrolling.

Manual, engaged

=

Doffer in manual mode, engaged on a winding unit.

Manual, doffing

=

Doffer in manual mode, performing a doffing cycle.

Manual, failure

=

Doffer in manual mode, switched OFF for failure.

Automatic mode

=

Doffer in automatic mode, (Normal operation).

Automatic, pause

=

Doffer in automatic mode, currently in patrol pause.

Automatic, patrolling

=

Doffer in automatic mode, currently patrolling.

Automatic, engaged

=

Doffer in automatic mode, engaged on a winding unit.

Automatic, doffing

=

Doffer in automatic mode, performing a doffing cycle.

Automatic, failure

=

Doffer in automatic mode, switched OFF for failure.

3 - 168

148-640 001 8.0 en 6.2003

Autoconer 338

3.5.13 Messages H3 H2

Entry: Data display...; Messages... On its monitor screen the Informator displays messages releated to machine statuses. In addition, signal lamps are provided to call operator and/or maintenance personnel to the machine. Listing of messages → Chapters 10.1. Signal Lamps on the Machine The signal lamps display various machine statuses. They either glow steady or flashing. The priority of flashing lights is higher than the steady-ON type: The light changes from steady to flashing if during steady light a message is issued requiring a flashing light. The cause for messages with lighting of the Red and/or Yellow signal lamp is displayed on the Informator ( → next page). Note: The display must be confirmed after remedy of a failure. All signal lamps are OFF as long as the machine is stopped.

D161-67

Red Signal Lamp (H3) D Flashing Malfunction in the area of the basic machine, e.g. a motor overload relay is tripped. D Steady ON Malfunction in the area of the basic machine, e.g. absence of compressed air. Failures in the area of the package doffer. Yellow Signal Lamp (H2) D Flashing Message for Wetsplicer only: Replenish splicing water. D Steady ON Materials flow-problems, e.g. start of package conveyor.

148-640 001 en 6.2003

3 - 169

Autoconer 338

1 2 3

4 inf00158e

Screen Page “Messages” displays the message listing containing in clear text the the causes for lighting the Red and/or Yellow signal lamps:

➀

Alert messages = Red signal lamp When actuating the key for opening of the window “Messages“ the reasons for switching the Red alert lamp ON are listed, up to the time of window opening.

➁

Notes D The screen lists a maximum of 5 messages. Continuation through “leafing”. D Actuation of key ➃ initiates print-out of the current screen page. Listing of available messages → Chapter 10.1.

Warnings = Yellow signal lamp When actuating the key for opening of the window “Messages” the reasons for switching the Yellow warning lamp ON are listed, up to the time of window opening.

➂

History = Listing of all messages, alert-type as well as warning-type, in order of occurrence, up to the time of window opening.

3 - 170

148-640 001 8.0 en 6.2003

Autoconer 338

inf00231e

3.5.14 Reports Entry: Data display...; Reports... The Informator transmits reports to the printer:

Structure

D at predetermined times,

Intermediate reports, shift reports and lot change reports are identical in respect to their structure. They differ only in respect to heading and time of print-out.

D when called for by the user, and D automatically for certain occurrences. In this menu the reports are controlled, including their scope and contents.

148-640 001 en 6.2003

Note: Sample reports are depicted in chapter 3.7.

3 - 171

Autoconer 338

inf00231e

Types of Reports D Lots reports – Repeated shift report: Actual data. Print-out of production data of the completed shift. – Intermediate report: Actual data. Print-out of production data of the current shift. – Repeated shift report: Settings. Print-out of entered settings (Lot control values) of the completed shift. – Intermediate report: Settings. Print-out of entered settings (Lot control values) of the current shift.

D Winding unit reports – Repeated shift report: Actual data. This report documents the production and clearer data (Cuts, Red lights, Cycles, etc.) of the winding unit(s) for the completed shift. – Intermediate report: Actual data. This report documents the production and clearer data (Cuts, Red lights, Cycles, etc.) of the winding unit(s) as intermediate results for the current shift. – Test report This report documents the production data of the winding unit(s), with defined values. D Machine reports – Machine’s configuration report. This report documents the operation and machine specification data.

3 - 172

148-640 001 8.0 en 6.2003

Autoconer 338

1

inf00159e

3.5.15 Reports, Lot-Reports Entry: Data display...; Reports...; Lot reports...

➀

Reports for the selected group are printed.

Repeated Shift Report: Settings “This report”

Repeated Shift Report: Actual Data

D displays the settings used for the last completed shift;

“This report”

D can be called at any time; and

D represents the report of production data of the last completed shift;

D prints the following information:

D can be called for at any time; D is structured identically to the shift report; D covers the selected production group; and D prints the following information:

– Drum drive settings – Splicer settings – Delivery package settings – Quality control settings – Package doffer settings.

– Production data of the lot. – Quality data of the lot (only if yarn length data or diameter data, resp., had been entered). – Off-Standard data of the production group.

148-640 001 en 6.2003

3 - 173

Autoconer 338

inf00159e

Intermediate Report: Actual Data

Intermediate Report: Settings

“This report”

“This report”

D represents the report of production data of the current shift;

D is the intermediate report of settings used for the current shift;

D can be called at any time;

D can be called at any time; and

D is structured identically to the shift report;

D is structured identically to the “Repeated shift report: Settings“.

D is printed for the selected group; and D prints the following information: – Production data of the lot. – Quality control data of the lot (only if yarn length data or diameter data, resp., had been entered).

Lot Change Report Entry of whether or not the lot change report is to be printed at lot change time. The structure of the lot change report is identical to the shift report. The last data of the lot can also be called before the next shift change as “Repeated shift report: Actual data“. Note: Entry “Lot change report” can also be performed in menu “Lot..., Control...“. < WITH, WITHOUT >

3 - 174

148-640 001 8.0 en 6.2003

Autoconer 338

1

inf00160e

3.5.16 Reports, Winding Unit Reports Entry: Data display...; Reports...; Winding unit reports...

➀

For the selected winding unit or winding unit range, reports “Repeated shift report: Actual data“ and “Intermediate report: Actual data” are printed.

Repeated Shift Report: Actual Data “This report” D reports the production data of the last completed shift; D can be called at any time; D is structured identically to the shift report; D is printed for the selected winding unit(s); and D prints the following information: – Production data of the winding unit(s).

148-640 001 en 6.2003

3 - 175

Autoconer 338

inf00160e

Intermediate Report: Actual Data

Definition of Winding Unit Test Report

“This report”

Description → on next page.

D reports the production data of the current shift; D can be called at any time; D is structured identically to the shift report; D is printed for the selected winding unit(s); and

Test Report Start: Current Shift Upon actuation of key “Test Report Start“ and subsequently key “O.K.“ the report covering the current shift is printed.

D prints the following information: – Production data of the winding unit(s), and – Quality control data (only if yarn length data or diameter data, resp., had been entered).

Test Report Start: Previous Shift Upon actuation of key “Test Report Start“ and subsequently key “O.K.“ the report covering the previous shift is printed.

Winding Unit Range Enter the first and last winding unit to be subjected to the following test report. Only winding units in production, or in lot change, will be taken into consideration. < 1 - (No. of winding units), (1 - 1) >

3 - 176

148-640 001 8.0 en 6.2003

Autoconer 338

1

2

3

4

5

inf00161e

Defining Winding Unit Test Report

➀ ➁ ➂ ➃

Ref. to previous page “Winding unit range“ Ref. to previous page “Test report start: Current shift“ Ref. to previous page “Test report start: Previous shift“ The attribute controls the output of the selected line:

VACANT

Line invalid; no print-out

DEFINED

Valid line; prepared for print-out

ACTIVE

Valid line; print-out of values for each winding unit of the selected range. Totals or mean values of the group, resp., are printed below the last wdg. unit line.

TOTAL

Valid line; prints only the totals of the values for the wdg. unit range.

PRE-ENTRY

The pre-entry of the Informator for this line is loaded. The line receives the attribute DEFINED.

148-640 001 en 6.2003

➄

Each one of the 30 keys is individually selectable. Selection of values to be printed in the test report. After actuation the selection listing appears on screen. This listing extends over 3 screen pages, accessible via “leafing“ (lower RH corner). Listing of all values → next page.

3 - 177

Autoconer 338 Listing of all selectable values: NIX

Vacant, no utilization

%MA

Machine efficiency in %

%RL

Red lights per yarn joint in %

%AO

Repeaters per yarn joint in %

%SF

Upper end failures per yarn joint in %

%CSK

Splicing / Knotting cuts per yarn joint in %

nCC/

Total of clearer cuts (nCS + nCL + nCT) per 100 km yarn length

nJO

No. of yarn joints (Splices/Knots)

nBC

No. of bobbin changes

nCC

Total of all clearer cuts (nCS + nCL + nCT + CFF + CNO)

nTB

Yarn tension breaks

tRUN

Winding unit’s run time

tOFF

Winding units’ OFF time

nCS

No. of thick place cuts

nCL

No. of double end cuts

nCT

No. of thin place cuts

nSF

No. of upper end failures

nCSK

Splicing / Knotting cuts

nAO

No. of repeaters

kg (lbs)

Production in kilograms

g/h

Production in grams per hour

nTB/

Yarn tension breaks per 100 km y.l.

nJO/

Yarn joint per 100 km yarn length

%YL

Efficiency loss from yellow lights in %

nDPH

manually doffed packages due to inferior quality

nDP

doffed OK packages (manually or by doffer)

nRL

No. of Red lights

nCY

Total No. of cycles

tCY

Cycle times

tRL

Red light time (incl. flashing)

tYL

Yellow light time

nCF

No. of foreign fiber cuts

nCN

No. of nep cuts

nCCA

No. of yarn count cuts

nCB

No. of bunch cuts

nCSY

No. of clearer system cuts

3 - 178

148-640 001 8.0 en 6.2003

Autoconer 338

inf00162e

3.5.17 Reports, Machine Reports Entry: Data display...; Reports...; Machine reports... Configuration Report Output This report D contains the machine specification data and its parameter data; D can be called at any time; and D prints the following information: – Pneumatics – Section – Specification type – Automation – Package doffer – Dialog – Dust extraction – Packages – Shift calendar

148-640 001 en 6.2003

3 - 179

Autoconer 338

3 - 180

148-640 001 8.0 en 6.2003

Autoconer 338

inf00265e

3.6

Dialog

The following entries are combined in menu “Dialog”: D Language D Date/Clock time D Master key; restore password protection D Units for length, weight, yarn count D Red lights until signal lamp lights up

148-640 001 en 6.2003

3 - 181

Autoconer 338

inf00502e

3.6.1

Language

Entry: Dialog...; Language Entry of language for user guidance. < GERMAN, ENGLISH, FRENCH, ITALIAN, SPANISH, PORTUGUESE, TURKEY, RUSSIAN, CHINESE >

3 - 182

148-640 001 8.0 en 6.2003

Autoconer 338

1

1

inf00163e

3.6.2

Date / Clock time

Entry: Dialog...; Date / Clock time Entry of date and clock time. Date and clock time are entered on buttons ➀ by ”leafing” (holding the resp. button depressed).

148-640 001 en 6.2003

3 - 183

Autoconer 338

inf00164e

3.6.3

Master Key

Entry: Dialog...; Master key Entry of up to 10 master keys (passwords) is possible. The service key is required for this entry. The master key D renders accessible all Informator entries for machine control and lot control; D renders accessible all entries on the package doffer; and D is represented by a 4-digit (maximum) numeral. Restoration of password protection → next page. < 0 - 9999 >

3 - 184

148-640 001 8.0 en 6.2003

Autoconer 338

inf00265e

inf00266e

3.6.4

Restoration of password protection

Entry: Dialog...; Restore password protection Actuation of menu item “restore password protection” renders inaccessible again all entries for machine control and lot control. This includes entries on the package doffer.

148-640 001 en 6.2003

3 - 185

Autoconer 338

inf00165e

3.6.5

Unit of Length

Entry: Dialog...; Unit of length Entry of the unit of length. m =

Meter

metric system

yds =

Yards

english system

3 - 186

148-640 001 8.0 en 6.2003

Autoconer 338

inf00169e

3.6.6

Unit of Weight

Entry: Dialog...; Unit of weight Entry of the unit of weight. kg =

kilograms

metric system

lbs =

Pounds

english system

148-640 001 en 6.2003

3 - 187

Autoconer 338

inf00166e

3.6.7

Unit of Yarn Count

Entry: Dialog...; Unit of yarn count Nm=

metric system

tex =

tex system

Ne =

english cotton count

3 - 188

148-640 001 8.0 en 6.2003

Autoconer 338

inf00170e

3.6.8

Red Lights until Signal Lamp

Entry: Dialog...; Red lights until signal lamp The Red signal lamp lights up steadily when the No. of Red lights on the winding units of the entire machine (including steady and flashing lights) exceeds the boundary value previously entered. < 0 - (No. of winding units - 1) >

148-640 001 en 6.2003

3 - 189

Autoconer 338

3 - 190

148-640 001 8.0 en 6.2003

Autoconer 338

3.7

Reports

The Informator transmits reports to the printer: D At fixed times, established by the user. D Upon manual initiation by the user. D Automatically upon certain occurrences. In this menu the reports are controlled in respect to magnitude and contents. Structure Intermediate reports, shift reports, and lot reports are identical in their structures. They differentiate only in respect to the times at which they are issued, and in their headings.

D Winding unit reports – Repeated shift report: Actual data The report documents production data of one winding unit for the shift completed last. – Intermediate report: Actual data The report documents production data of one winding unit, as intermediate results for the current shift. – Winding unit test report The report documents production data of one winding unit, or of a defined range of winding units. D Machine reports

Types of Reports D Shift report – The shift report is printed after shift changes at the predetermined times.

– Configuration report of the machine The report documents machine parameters and equipment specifications.

– During the next shift the shift report can be repeated through manual initiation as “Repeated shift report”. D Lot report – Repeated shift report: Actual data Print-out of production data of the shift completed last. – Intermediate report: Actual data Print-out of production data of the current shift, as “Intermediate report” – Repeated shift report: Settings Print-out of settings (Lot control values) used in the shift completed last. – Intermediate report: Settings Print-out of settings (Lot control values) used in the current shift.

148-640 001 en 6.2003

3 - 191

Autoconer 338

************************************** * Informator System 338 * ************************************** 148-xxx.xxx V:x.xx xx.xx.xx xx:xx Name of company Name of machine

RM Serial No.

Name of clearer Network connection

LEFT HAND WITHOUT

************************************** * Informator System 338 * ************************************** 148-xxx.xxx V:x.xx xx.xx.xx xx:xx Name of Name of Name of Network

Report heading

The report heading appears on top of all reports. Part No. and program version No. of the Informator; Date and Time of the print-out. Customer name (free text); Machine model (e.g.: Model RM) Customer’s machine No. (or name); Machine serial No. Clearer Type; RH or LH machine Informator WITH or WITHOUT network connection.

3.7.2

Shift report

The shift report documents the production data of the completed shift. Report heading (→ 3.7.1)

company RM machine Serial No. clearer LEFT HAND connection WITHOUT *** SHIFT REPORT ***

Group 1 Lot name Lot number Working range Shift end No. of plies Yarn count Speed Nominal length Nominal diameter

xx.xx.xx [Nm] [m/min] [m] [mm]

Baumwolle BW 0815 1 - 30 xx:xx 1 34.00 1000 100000 180.00

***** Lot Production Data ***** Production time Observation time Time span Machine efficiency Production weight Packages doffed Yarn joints Yarn breaks

[min] [min] [min] [%] [kg] /100 /100

Clearer cuts /100 Clearer cuts per bobbin Red lights [%] Average time per red light[min] Repeater cycles [%]

3 - 192

3.7.1

Group No. of the lot Lot name Lot No. Working range (wdg. unit Nos.) of the lot Shift end of lot (Date, Time) Single yarn (1), or No. of plies Yarn count Nominal winding speed Nominal length / package (with length definition only) Nominal diameter (with diameter definition only) Production data of the lot

1656 2045 2640 86.5 45.65 301 72.6 35.4 53.5 4.2 34.6 1.6 10.9

Production time in min Observation time (machine-ON time) in min Shift duration in min Machine efficiency in % Production weight in kg (lbs) No. of doffed packages Yarn joints (splices/knots) per 100 km (mi) of yarn Yarn breaks (= clearer cuts + tension breaks) per 100 km (mi) yarn length Clearer cuts per 100 km (mi) yarn length Clearer cuts per bobbin Red lights per yarn joint in % Average time per red light in min Repeater cycles per yarn joint in %

148-640 001 8.0 en 6.2003

Autoconer 338 Lot quality data

***** Lot Quality ***** Length >650000 0 650000 0 595000 *** 10 540000 ******* 22 485000 *********** 32 430000 ****************** 56 375000 ************************** 77 320000 ****************** 55 265000 ******* 22 210000 ***** 15 155000 *** 10 <100000 0 ---------------------------------------Total packages 299 Packages of inferior quality... No. Cuts Length > 15 <100000 >650000 ---------------------------------------5 18 0 0 10 23 0 0

From the entries of lower and upper limit values in menu ”Quality control” the Informator establishes the increments at which the bar diagram with the distribution of packages is printed. The quality criteria for equal length are printed when winding for equal diameters of the packages. The quality criteria for equal diameter are printed when winding for equal yarn lengths of the packages. The diagram represents the 12 quality classes of all wound packages of the lot. Packages shown with ”<” or ”>” are outside of the established quality standard. The number of packages in each quality class is also printed. Further information → 3.2.10. Total of all packages wound After the bar diagram follows a listing of all packages with at least one quality infraction. The number of infractions is also printed for each winding unit. Wdg. unit No.; Clearer cuts per bobbin; Lower and upper limit value. OFF-Standard winding units of the lot Listing of winding units of more than 15 minutes production time, showing infraction of limit values for: – Efficiency, or – Clearer cuts, or – Tension breaks, or – Production time (less than 15 min). These Off-Standard limit values are calculated automatically by the Informator.

***** Lot OFF-Standard ***** No.

%MA nCC nTB %RL <<15 nOS 83.9 34/78 5.54 ----------------------------------------

Limit value for machine efficiency; limit value for clearer cuts (min./max.); limit value for tension breaks; No. of Red lights (no limit value entered); production time less than 15 min.; No. of successive OFF-Standard shifts (no limit value entered). Listing of OFF-Standard winding units (if existing):

3 4 5 16

78.6 84.5 69.4* 84.3

38 23.83* 43.6 85* 2.46 24.5 55 1.05 53.5 63 12.46* 24.4

* * * *

1

Winding unit No.; machine efficiency in %; clearer cuts; tension breaks in %; Red lights in %; production time less than 15 min; No. of successive shifts with limit value * = Infraction of OFF-Standard limit values initiates data print-out of this winding unit.

148-640 001 en 6.2003

3 - 193

Autoconer 338 Messages

***** Messages ***** No compressed air No sub-pressure

= 4 = 2

No Messages occured

Listing of all messages prompting the signal lamp to light-up. Example: No compressed air: 4 occurrences; insufficient sub-pressure (suction): 2 occurrences. or: No messages have been issued. Further Information → 10.1. Clearer data

***** Clearer data ***** n /100 km (mi) ------------------------------------Clearer cuts (nCC) (nCN) 0 44.4 (nCS) 0 66.4 (nCL) 0 99.4 (nCT) 0 110.4 (nCF) 0 120.4 ------------------------------------(nCC) 0 89.7

Clearer data of the production group is listed as follows: 1. No. of cuts 2. Cuts prorated per 100 km (mi) of yarn (nCC) (nCN) (nCS) (nCL) (nCT) (nCF)

Total and average per 100 km (mi)

Special clearer cuts (nCSP) (nCCA) 0 *** (nCFS) 0 *** (nCFFS) 0 *** (nSFI) 0 *** (nCMO) 0 *** (nCSK) 0 *** (nCU) 0 *** (nCB) 0 *** (nCSY) 0 *** ------------------------------------(nCSP) 0 ***

(nCSP) (nCCA) (nCFS) (nCFFS) (nSFI) (nCMO) (nCSK) (nCU) (nCB) (nCSY)

Clearer alerts (nRA) (nCA) 0 *** (nFSA) 0 *** (nFFA) 0 *** (nFFSA) 0 *** (nSFIA) 0 *** (nMOA) 0 *** (nCMTA) 0 *** (nIPIA) 0 *** (nCVA) 0 *** (nGFA) 0 *** ------------------------------------(nRA) 0 ***

(nRA) (nCA) (nFSA) (nFFA) (nFFSA) (nSFIA) (nMOA) (nCMTA) (nIPIA) (nCVA) (nGFA)

3 - 194

Clearer cuts Nep cuts Short thick place cuts Long thick place cuts / Double end cuts Thin place cuts Foreign fiber cuts

Special clearer cuts Yarn count cuts Fault cluster cuts Foreign fiber cluster cuts Surface index cuts Moiré cuts Splice cuts / Knotter cuts Upper end cuts Yarn bunch cuts System cuts

Total and average per 100 km (mi) Clearer alerts Yarn count alerts Fault cluster alerts Foreign fiber alerts Foreign fiber cluster alerts Surface index alerts Moiré alerts CMT alerts IPI alerts CV alerts Yarn fault alerts


148-640 001 8.0 en 6.2003

Autoconer 338


company machine clearer connection

RM Serial No. LEFT HAND WITHOUT

3.7.3

Lot change report

The lot change report is printed automatically at lot end if in menu “Control“ (Lot...; Control...) printing had been activated. This report contains actual data pertaining to the group/lot, the data is identical with the shift report (→ 3.7.2).

*** LOT CHANGE REPORT *** Group 1 Lot name Lot number Working range Shift end No. of plies Yarn count Speed Nominal length Nominal diameter



************************************** * Informator System 338 *

Group No. of the lot Lot name Lot No. Working range (wdg. unit Nos.) of the lot Shift end of lot (Date, Time) Single yarn (1), or No. of plies Yarn count Nominal winding speed Nominal length / package (with length definition only) Nominal diameter (with diameter definition only)

3.7.4

Repeated shift report: Actual data

************************************** 148-xxx.xxx V:x.xx xx.xx.xx xx:xx

The repeated shift report

Name of Name of Name of Network

D is structurally identical with the shift report.



D reports data of the last shift, and

*** SHIFT REPORT *** Group 1 Lot name Lot number Working range Shift end No. of plies Yarn count Speed Nominal length Nominal diameter

148-640 001 en 6.2003



Group No. of the lot Lot name Lot No. Working range (wdg. unit Nos.) of the lot Shift end of lot (Date, Time) Single yarn (1), or No. of plies Yarn count Nominal winding speed Nominal length / package (with length definition only) Nominal diameter (with diameter definition only)

3 - 195

Autoconer 338


3.7.5

Intermediate report: Actual data


The intermediate report


D is structurally identical with the shift report, except



D reports data of the current shift, D it does not incorporate print-out of of the OFF-Standard winding units.

*** INTERMEDIATE REPORT *** Group 1 Lot name Lot number Working range No. of plies Yarn count Speed Nominal length Nominal diameter

3 - 196

PRODUCTION

[Nm] [m/min] [m] [mm]

Baumwolle BW 0815 1 - 30 1 34.00 1000 100000 180.00

Group No. of lot; Group status: DEFINED, PRODUCTION, LOT CHANGE Lot name Lot No. Working range (wdg. unit Nos.) of the lot Single yarn (1), or No. of plies Yarn count Nominal winding speed Nominal length / package (with length definition only) Nominal diameter (with diameter definition only)

148-640 001 8.0 en 6.2003

Autoconer 338



3.7.6

Repeated shift report: Settings

Settings Shift Report lists the settings for a group/lot, in this case for the previous shift. Report heading (→ 3.7.1)


*** SETTINGS SHIFT REPORT *** Group 1

DEFINED

Lot name Lot number Working range

Baumwolle BW 0815 1 - 30

Group No. of lot; Group status: DEFINED, PRODUCTION, LOT CHANGE Lot name Lot No. Working range (wdg. unit Nos.) of the lot

***** Lot Parameters***** Drum drive... Speed [mpm] Reverse drive of the drum Smooth starting code: C-Acceleration Code: X-Acceleration Code: Loop gate Code: Displacement drive Splicer... Yarn ends open Code: Splicing codes: Thermo-splicer Codes: Accelerated cooling Package... Nominal diameter Diameter correction Length correction

1000 MEDIUM MEDIUM 50 4 4 ON 4 5,3,5 7 NO

[mm]

180 1.000 1.000

Nominal length [m] 220000 Length correction 1.000 Diameter correction 1.000 Operation mode model K NORMAL No. of plies 1 Yarn count [Nm] 20.00 Yarn tension mode: REGULATION Yarn tension: Yarn tension code:

148-640 001 en 6.2003

[cN]

100 50

Drum drive values: Nominal linear winding speed in mpm (yds/min) Reversed drive speed of the drum for yarn search Initial drum acceleration at start-up Drum acceleration after yarn joining (splicing or knotting) Drum acceleration after package doffing Loop gate code Traverse displacement ON or OFF (optional) Splicer values: Code for yarn end opening Codes for Pulse 1, Pause, and Pulse 2 Thermosplicer code (optional) Accelerated cooling of splicer, YES or NO Delivery package values: Nomial diameter in mm (in) Diameter correction factor Length correction factor or: Nominal yarn length in m (yds) Length correction factor Diameter correction factor Operation mode model K: NORMAL, 1 : 1, or PEELING Single yarn (1), or No. of plies Yarn count Yarn tensioner: Regulation (through tension sensor), or Control Nominal yarn tension value in cN (with tension sensor only) Yarn tension code (with activated control only).

3 - 197

Autoconer 338

Quality control... Autospeed... Autospeed operation mode

Yarn length

Yarnlength [m] Autospeed Speed reduction to: [%] Autospeed beginning at:[%] Quality package... Singling out Minimum length Maximum length Minimum diameter Maximum diameter Waxing Wax monitoring

5000 70 60 NO 220000 225000

[m] [m] [mm] [mm]

220 235 OFF MESSAGE ONLY

Hairiness nozzle

ON

Clearer cuts... Maximum clearer cuts Stop if limit exceeded Minimum percentage [%] Maximum percentage [%] knife monitoring Bobbin change during clearer alert Cycles... Repeater cycles in sequence Suction arm motions Start-up cuts until supply change Splicing failures until supply change Upper end failures in sequence Ribbon breaker... Drum ribbon breaker Cradle ribbon breaker Cradle pressure Aux. Cradle pressure at C-acceleration Cradle press. time at X acceleration

20 NO 40 200 OFF MANUAL

4 3 2 2 4

[N]

6% ON 20

[N]

5

[s]

3

Quality control data: Autospeed data (optional): Autospeed mode: OFF, YARN TENSION, YARN LENGTH For YARN LENGTH only: Yarn length per bobbin in m (yds) For YARN LENGTH only: Reduce winding speed towards bobbin end to... % Begin reduction at ... % Quality package data: Singling-out of inferior packages: YES/NO Quality limit for minimum length Quality limit for for maximum length or: Quality limit for minimum diameter Quality limit for maximum diameter Waxing drive (Motor ON/OFF) Status of wax roll monitoring: OFF, MESSAGE ONLY, INSTANT STOP, STOP AFTER x MIN Hairiness nozzle (Option), ON or OFF Clearer cut data: Permitted maximum clearer cuts per bobbin Stop if limit exceeded: YES/NO Minimum for remaining under mean value Maximum for remaining under mean value Knife monitoring, ON or OFF Bobbin change at clearer alert: MANUAL or AUTOMATICALLY Cycling data: No. of repeater cycles per yarn joint. No. of upper end failures No. of start-up cuts until supply change No. of splicing failures until supply change. No. of permitted sequential upper end failures Ribbon breaker data: Ribbon breaking in % Cradle pressure compensation, ON or OFF*. Cradle pressure (in Newton) for the package*. Auxiliary cradle pressure at C-Acceleration (in Newton)*. Time s, during which aux. cradle pressure at X-Acceleration is to be effective*.

* This data only for machines provided with the electromagnetic cradle pressure compensation Propack.

3 - 198

148-640 001 8.0 en 6.2003

Autoconer 338

Package doffer ... Transfer tail winds Transfer tail tension Code: SEHNE code: SEHNE tension code Cradle depressor time [s]

3 30 8 20 2

Special settings ... Cycling progression winding unit

STANDARD

Suction at bobbin change Delayed package lift-off

0 OFF

Delayed upper end pick-up

OFF

Reversed rotation with suction arm Options ... Variopack

NO OFF

Data of package doffer(s)*: No. of transfer tail winds Code for transfer tail winding tension Code for Nose winds Code for Nose winds tension Aux. cradle depressor time in s. Special settings for optimization of cycle progression: Adaption of cycle progression: STANDARD, LYCRA, COARSE WET LINNEN, FINE WET LINNEN Withdrawal of yarn length at boobin change: 0 ... 40 Delayed package lift-off after yarn break: OFF, 1 ... 16 Delayed upper end search: OFF, 1 ... 15 REVOLUTIONS Reversal with suction nozzle against winding direction: NO/YES Options: Deactivation, or setting, resp., of the Variopack curve (Option): OFF, CURVE 1 ... 5

** Print-out of all delivery package doffers with patrol ranges within this production group.

148-640 001 en 6.2003

3 - 199

Autoconer 338


3.7.7

Intermediate Report: Settings

The Intermediate Report: “Settings”


D lists the settings used for the group/lot of the current shift, and


D is structurally identical with “Repeated shift report settings“.



*** SETTINGS INTERMEDIATE REPORT *** Group 1 Lot name Lot number Working range

3 - 200

PRODUCTION Baumwolle BW 0815 1 - 30

148-640 001 8.0 en 6.2003

Autoconer 338




3.7.8

Repeated shift report: Actual data of a winding unit

The “Shift report: Actual data of a winding unit“ shows production data of the selected winding unit, for the shift just completed. Report heading (→ 3.7.1)

*** WINDING UNIT SHIFT REPORT *** Group 1 Lot name Lot number Working range Shift end No. of plies Yarn count Speed Nominal diameter Nominal length

PRODUCTION Baumwolle BW 0815 1 - 30 xx.xx.xx xx:xx 1 [Nm] 34.00 [mpm] 1000 [mm] 180.00 [m] 100.000

The winding unit is alloted to the following lot: Group No. of lot; Group status: DEFINED, PRODUCTION, LOT CHANGE Lot name Lot No. Working range (wdg. unit Nos.) of the lot Shift end, with date and time Single yarn (1), or No. of plies Yarn count Winding speed Nominal diamter, or: Nominal yarn length of packages

**** Winding unit-Production Data **** Winding unit 1 Production time [min] 1656 Observation time [min] 2045 Time of winding unit OFF [min] 34 Machine efficiency [%] 88.7 Production weight [kg] 5.65 Yarn length wound/shift [m] 1457280.4 Yarn length wound/package [m] 100.000 Diameter wound [mm] 180.00 Packages doffed 15 Bobbin changes 2735 Yarn joints /100 672.6 Yarn breaks /100 35.4 Clearer cuts /100 Tension breaks /100 Upper end failures [%] Splice- / knotter cuts [%] Red lights [%] Average time per red light [min] Repeater cycles [%]

148-640 001 en 6.2003

30.4 5.0 6.8 3.6 34.6 2.2 11.7

Print-out of data from winding unit No. (e.g. 1) Production time in min Observation time (machine-ON time) in min OFF time of winding unit in min Machine efficiency Production weight in kg (lbs) Wound yarn length during shift Wound yarn length of the package completed last Diameter of the package completed last No. of doffed packages No. of bobbin change cycles Yarn joints (splices/knots) per 100 km (mi) of yarn Yarn breaks (= clearer cuts + tension breaks) per 100 km (mi) Clearer cuts per 100 km (mi) Tension breaks per 100 km (mi) Upper end failures per yarn joint in % Splice/Knot cuts per yarn joint in % Red lights per yarn joint in % Average time per red light in min Repeater cycles per yarn joint in %

3 - 201

Autoconer 338 Clearer data ***** Clearer data ***** n /100 km (mi) ------------------------------------Clearer cuts (nCC) (nCN) 0 44.4 (nCS) 0 66.4 (nCL) 0 99.4 (nCT) 0 110.4 (nCF) 0 120.4 ------------------------------------(nCC) 0 89.7

Clearer data of the production group is listed as follows: 1. No. of cuts 2. Cuts prorated per 100 km (mi) of yarn (nCC) (nCN) (nCS) (nCL) (nCT) (nCF)


Special clearer cuts (nCSP) (nCCA) 0 *** (nCFS) 0 *** (nCFFS) 0 *** (nSFI) 0 *** (nCMO) 0 *** (nCSK) 0 *** (nCU) 0 *** (nCB) 0 *** (nCSY) 0 *** ------------------------------------(nCSP) 0 ***

(nCSP) (nCCA) (nCFS) (nCFFS) (nSFI) (nCMO) (nCSK) (nCU) (nCB) (nCSY)

Clearer alerts (nRA) (nCA) 0 *** (nFSA) 0 *** (nFFA) 0 *** (nFFSA) 0 *** (nSFIA) 0 *** (nMOA) 0 *** (nCMTA) 0 *** (nIPIA) 0 *** (nCVA) 0 *** (nGFA) 0 *** ------------------------------------(nRA) 0 ***

(nRA) (nCA) (nFSA) (nFFA) (nFFSA) (nSFIA) (nMOA) (nCMTA) (nIPIA) (nCVA) (nGFA)

3 - 202

Clearer cuts Nep cuts Short thick place cuts Long thick place cuts / Double end cuts Thin place cuts Foreign fiber cuts

Special clearer cuts Yarn count cuts Fault cluster cuts Foreign fiber cluster cuts Surface index cuts Moiré cuts Splice cuts / Knotter cuts Upper end cuts Yarn bunch cuts System cuts

Total and average per 100 km (mi) Clearer alerts Yarn count alerts Fault cluster alerts Foreign fiber alerts Foreign fiber cluster alerts Surface index alerts Moiré alerts CMT alerts IPI alerts CV alerts Yarn fault alerts


148-640 001 8.0 en 6.2003

Autoconer 338

************************************** * Informator 338 *

3.7.9

Intermediate Report: Actual Winding Unit Data


The “intermediate report of actual winding unit data“


D is structurally identical with the “shift report of actual winding unit data“.



D lists the production data of the selected winding unit for the current shift, and

** WINDING UNIT INTERMEDIATE REPORT **




3.7.10 Test report The structure of the test report is established by the entries in menu “Winding unit reports“ (Data display...; Reports...; Winding unit reports...) and printed for the selected winding unit range. Depending on definition the print-out of a winding unit range takes place either with sub-totals or only with a total of the winding unit range. Report heading (→ 3.7.1)

*** WINDING UNITS TESTREPORT *** Lot... Group 1 Lot name Lot number Working range No. of plies Yarn count [Nm] Speed [m/min] Nominal diameter [mm] Nominal length [m]

PRODUCTION Baumwolle BW 0815 1 - 30 1 34.00 1000 180.00 100.000

The winding units are allotted to the following lot: Group No. of lot; Group status: DEFINED, PRODUCTION, LOT CHANGE Lot name Lot No. Working range (wdg. unit Nos.) of the lot Single yarn (1), or No. of plies Yarn count Winding speed Nominal diameter, or Nominal yarn length of packages

Winding unit range 01-02

Winding unit range to be printed.

No. %MA %RL %AO %SF %CSK nCC/ 1 88.3 1.34 0 0 0 0 2 *** *** *** *** *** *** -------------------------------------88.3 1.34 0 0 0 0

Test report listing data from the individual winding units: Winding unit with production time Winding unit without production Evaluation line: Mean value/Total of the above values of each column. Print-out of values (max. 30) previously selected for the test report. Entry and listing of values see 3.5 “Reports, Winding unit reports”.

No. nJO nBC nCC nTB tRUN tOFF 1 0 0 0 0 1234 21 2 0 0 0 0 0 0 -------------------------------------0 0 0 0

148-640 001 en 6.2003

3 - 203

Autoconer 338



3.7.11 Configuration report The configuration report contains equipment specifications of the machine and corresponding machine parameters. Report heading (→ 3.7.1)


*** CONFIGURATION REPORT *** Options Key for Winding Total -

... propack units: Remaining

Keycode for variopack variopack

xxxxxxxxxxxxxx 30 - 0 xxxxxxxxxxxxxx WITH

Pneumatics system... Suction system

HDS

Dust extraction Travelling cleaner

WITH WITH

Section... Number of sections

3

Section Section size / Winding units Magazine type Empty tube conveyor

1 10/10

CIRC. MAGAZINE HT10

Section 2 Section size / Winding units 10/10 Magazine type CIRC. MAGAZINE Empty tube conveyor HT10 Section 3 Section size / Winding units 8/10 Magazine type RC-K-K-K-K-K-K-K Empty tube conveyor WITHOUT

3 - 204

Options: Release code Propack: No. of release code No. of winding units: Total releaseable, yet to be released Release code Variopack: No. of release code Variopack: with oder without Pneumatics settings: Suction drive (system): Machine-integrated (HDS/HPS), or Central Dust removal (extraction), with or without Travelling cleaner, with or without Sectional settings: No. of sections Settings for 1st section: Mechanically possible No. of wdg. units in this section / No. of actually installed wdg. units Magazine type: Circular magazine (RM), Rewinding device, etc. Empty tube conveyor WITHOUT, continuous (DHT), or sectional (HT10) Settings for 2nd section

Settings for 3rd section:

148-640 001 8.0 en 6.2003

Autoconer 338

Machine specification type... Machine specification type no.: 1 Working range 1 - 30 Cradle type RH WINDING DIRECTION Drum type U6” 2gg as Displacement drive WITH Splicer type SPLICER Splicer with RETAINER TUBE Yarn tension sensor WITH propack WITH Wax monitoring WITH Linnen package WITHOUT Hairiness nozzle WITHOUT Rewinding WITHOUT Auxiliary devices on yarn tensioner WITHOUT

Description of specification types: Description of specification type 1: Woring range, winding units from ... to... Cradle, for RH winding or LH winding Drum type Traverse displacement drive, with or without (optional) Splicer type: Splicer, Thermosplicer, or Wetsplicer Splicer with retainer tube or blow nozzle Yarn tension sensor, with or without (optional) Propack: with or without (optional) Wax roll monitoring, with or without (optional) Linnen package, with or without (optional) Hairiness nozzle, with or without (optional) External rewinding device, with or without (optional) Auxiliary tensioner devices, with or without (optional) Now follows the description of specification type 2, if defined.

Automation... Package conveyor Package lift Swivel gate Autofeed Number of doffers

Automation settings: Package conveyor: without, with, or external Package lift: WITH or WITHOUT Swivel gate, WITH or WITHOUT Autofeed, WITHOUT or WITH 4 (8) MAGAZINES No. of doffer(s)

Doffer No. Maximum service range Transfer tail

BELT WITH WITH WITHOUT 1 1 1 - 30 WITH WHEN RH WIND

Dialog... Language Unit of length Unit of weight Unit of yarn count Red lights until signal lamp

ENGLISH [m] [kg] [Nm] 9

Pneumatics system... Dust removal [min] 10 Operative suction [-hPa] 50 Travelling cleaner: Operating mode INTERVAL Travelling cleaner: dwell [min] 10

148-640 001 en 6.2003

Settings for doffer No. 1: Maximum patrol range from wdg. unit ... to ... Transfer tail: - without for RH winding - with for RH winding - without for LH winding - with for LH winding Now follow the settings for more doffers, if required. Settings in menu dialog: Language of user instruction Yarn length unit, m or yds Yarn weight unit, kg or lbs Yarn count unit: Nm, tex, or Ne (Cotton count) No. of Red lights until signal lamp ON Pneumatics settings: Dust removal: Self-cleaning in ... min intervals Suction drive: Nominal sub-pressure in -hPa (-mbar) Travelling cleaner: Operation mode, OFF, INTERVAL, or CONTINUOUS Travelling cleaner: Dwell time in min

3 - 205

Autoconer 338

Package doffer ... Doffer 1 service range

1 - 30

Package conveyor... Start conveyor belt

MANUAL

Delivery package settings: Patrol range of doffer 1 Settings for doffer 2, 3 etc., if applicable. Settings for package conveyor Start of package conveyor: AUTOMATIC or MANUAL

Automatic stop conveyor belt LIGHT BARRIER Packages until start 0 Package lift: Operating mode OFF Speed of package conveyor HIGH SPEED

Automatic stop: OFF or LIGHT BARRIER

Shift calendar...

Shift calendar settings:

Mo Tu We Th Fr -------------------------------------06:00 -06:00 -06:00 -06:00 -06:00 -14:00 -14:00 -14:00 -14:00 -14:00 -22:00 -22:00 -22:00 -22:00 -22:00 --:-- --:-- --:-- --:-- --:---:-- --:-- --:-- --:-- --:---:-- --:-- --:-- --:-- --:--

No. of packages until conveyor belt starts Package lift: Operation mode, OFF or ON Speed of conveyor belt

Shift calendar listing the 7 weekdays, each with 6 possible shift change times. Code ”+” = with shift report Code ”-” = without shift report No. code = no shift change

Sa Su ---------------06:00 -06:00 --:-- --:---:-- --:---:-- --:---:-- --:---:-- --:-Network ... Network connection

3 - 206

WITHOUT

Network: Network connection: WITH or WITHOUT

148-640 001 8.0 en 6.2003

Autoconer 338

3.7.12 Messages *** Messages - History *** xx.xx.xx xx:xx:xx FAILURE OF CONTINUOUS TUBE CONVEYOR xx.xx.xx xx:xx:xx FAILURE FREQUENCY CONVERTER(FC) MOTOR xx.xx.xx xx:xx:xx DEPLETION OF YARN WASTE CHAMBER xx.xx.xx xx:xx:xx NO SUB-PRESSURE

*** Start-up Messages *** Warm start - xx.xx.xxxx xx:xx:xx sdog POWER FAIL Cold start - xx.xx.xxxx xx:xx:xx sdog !!!! NEW PROGRAM INTRODUCED !!!!

Print-out of messages prompting the signal lamp to light up. Additional information → 3.5 Messages. Alert messages Warnings History

= Red signal lamp = Yellow signal lamp = Listing of all messages (Alert messages and warnings).

3.7.13 Start-up messages of the Informator Print-out of the start-up messages of the Informator. Additional information → 3.4 Maintenance. Start-up messages = Listing of the start-up messages of the Informator Start-up messages History = Chronological listing of Informatorinternal messages and events.

3.7.14 Bus test *** Bus Test *** Winding unit 2 to 30: no connection Doffer: no connection INF : 148-xxx-xxx S:x.xx.xx connected xx.xx.xx x:xx:xx Winding unit 1: connected V:x.xx.xx Machine control V:x.xx.xx

148-640 001 en 6.2003

All recognized bus participants are printed including D their status (connected or no connection), D (possibly) the date of registration, and D theSoftware’s version No.

Additional information → 3.4 Test, Bus test.

3 - 207

Autoconer 338

3 - 208

148-640 001 8.0 en 6.2003

Autoconer 338

4 Function

148-640 001 en 6.2003

4-1

Autoconer 338

4-2

148-640 001 8.0 en 6.2003

Autoconer 338 4.1

Machine Frame . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

4-5

4.1.1

Physical and Functional Assemblies . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

4-5

4.1.2

Energy unit (Drive end) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

4-6

4.1.3

Suction end . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

4-7

4.1.4

Dust Removal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

4-9

4.1.5


4 - 10

4.1.6

Travelling Cleaner “Luwa” . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

4 - 11

4.1.7

Delivery Package Conveyor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

4 - 12

4.1.8


4 - 14

4.1.9

Package conveyor with intermediate package storage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

4 - 16

4.1.10


4 - 18

4.1.11


4 - 19

4.2

Winding Unit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

4 - 21

4.2.1

Functional Sub-Assemblies . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

4 - 21

4.2.2

Package Cradle (Standard) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

4 - 22

4.2.3

Package Cradle (with taper acceleration) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

4 - 23

4.2.4

Standard Cradle Pressure Compensation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

4 - 24

4.2.5

Electro-mechanical Cradle Suspension control propack . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

4 - 25

4.2.6

Package Lift (Standard) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

4 - 26

4.2.7

Package Lift with propack . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

4 - 27

4.2.8

Package Brake . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

4 - 28

4.2.9

Yarn Guide Drum . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

4 - 29

4.2.10

Yarn Traverse Displacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

4 - 30

4.2.11

Drum Lap Guard and Drum Lap Brush . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

4 - 31

4.2.12

Suction Arm and Suction Arm Stop . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

4 - 32

4.2.13

Suction Pipe . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

4 - 33

4.2.14

Yarn Trap . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

4 - 34

4.2.15

Waxing device . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

4 - 35

4.2.16

Autospeed . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

4 - 36

4.2.17

Autotense . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

4 - 37

4.2.18

Bobbin Unwinding Diagrams . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

4 - 38

4.2.19

Variopack . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

4 - 39

4.2.20

Electronic Yarn Clearer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

4 - 41

4.2.21

Splicer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

4 - 42

4.2.22

Knotter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

4 - 46

4.2.23

Yarn Tensioner . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

4 - 51

4.2.24

Hairiness nozzle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

4 - 52

4.2.25

Multijet . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

4 - 53

4.2.26

Toggle Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

4 - 54

4.2.27

Acceleration and Ribbon Breaker . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

4 - 55

4.2.28

Acceleration and Ribbon Breaking with propack . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

4 - 56

4.2.29

Yarn Length Measuring and Diameter Calculation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

4 - 57

148-640 001 en 6.2003

4-3

Autoconer 338 4.3

Bobbin Change . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

4 - 59

4.3.1

Model RM / Sub-Assemblies and Functional Assemblies . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

4 - 59

4.3.2

Model RM / Cam Package with Drive . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

4 - 60

4.3.3

Model RM / Yarn Shears . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

4 - 61

4.3.4

Model RM / Bobbin Peg . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

4 - 62

4.3.5

Model RM / Bobbin Chute . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

4 - 63

4.3.6

Model RM / Yarn Lifter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

4 - 64

4.3.7

Model RM / Magazine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

4 - 65

4.3.8

Model RM / Yarn Clamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

4 - 66

4.3.9

Model RM / Loop Gate . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

4 - 67

4.3.10

Model E / Sub-Assemblies and Functional Assemblies . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

4 - 68

4.3.11

Model RC / Sub-Assemblies . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

4 - 69

4.3.12

Model RC / Cam package with Drive . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

4 - 70

4.3.13

Model RC / Yarn shears . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

4 - 71

4.3.14

Model RC / Creel arbor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

4 - 72

4.3.15

Model RC / Creel-out Chute . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

4 - 73

4.3.16

Model RC / Transfer Finger . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

4 - 74

4.3.17

Model RC / Magazine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

4 - 75

4.5

Package Doffer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

4 - 77

4.5.1

Sub-Assemblies and Functional Assemblies . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

4 - 77

4.5.2

Package doffer, Patrol direction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

4 - 79

4.5.3

Yarn lifter with base transfer tail winding device . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

4 - 80

4.5.4

Package Guiding . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

4 - 81

4.5.5

Cradle Opener . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

4 - 82

4.5.6

Cradle Lift . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

4 - 83

4.5.7

Depressor Lever . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

4 - 84

4.5.8

Cone/Sleeve feeder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

4 - 85

4.5.9

Cone/Sleeve Drive . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

4 - 86

4.5.10

Doffing Cycle Progression . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

4 - 87

4.5.11

Status of Sensors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

4 - 100

4.5.12

Information and Failure Display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

4 - 102

4.5.13

Failure Messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

4 - 103

4.5.14

Information Display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

4 - 103

4.5.15

Entries / Inquiries . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

4 - 108

4.5.16

Menu Layout . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

4 - 110

4.5.17

Menu “Manual Operation“ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

4 - 111

4.5.18

Menu “Data display“ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

4 - 112

4.5.19

Menu “Parameters“ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

4 - 115

4.5.20

Menu “Specification“ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

4 - 117

4.5.21

Menu “Key code“ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

4 - 118

4.5.22

Menu “Master data“ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

4 - 120

4.5.23

Menu “Master function“ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

4 - 121

4-4

148-640 001 8.0 en 6.2003

Autoconer 338 4.0

8

6

7

5 4 3 2 1 D 101-01

4.1

Machine Frame

4.1.1

Physical and Functional Assemblies

1 Energy Unit (Drive End) 2 Winding Unit 3 Circular Magazine 4 Package Doffer 5 Tube Conveyor 6 Travelling Cleaner 7 Sub-Pressure Generator (Suction End) 8 Package Conveyor

148-640 001 en 6.2003

4-5

Autoconer 338

7

1 2 3 6 4 5

D 161-70

4.1.2

Energy unit (Drive end)

Composed of:

4 Module ’Intermediate DC circuit’ (GZK)

1 Control compartment,

5 Transformer compartment

Location of machine control elements, with connection for peripheral devices. 2 Informator with integrated clearer, Administers and stores all lot parameters and production data. 3 Control console,

6 Compressed air control unit, Incorporates pressure guard, pressure controls, moisture separator, and customer-supplied compressed air connection. Setting of operational air pressure for yanr end opening, splicing, Multijet, and hairiness nozzle *. 7 Signal lamps

Composed of main breaker switch for machine start, also incorporating the Emergency-OFF switch, and the ON and OFF keys for machine operation; also the keys for the control of the travelling cleaner, and the ’Power ON’ indicator and ON time counter.

* Optional

4-6

148-640 001 8.0 en 6.2003

Autoconer 338

4.1.3

=A9+C3

Suction end

The suction drive generates the sub-pressure (air suction) required for the operation of the machine.

5 2

Directly driven by motor (+C2-M1), fan wheel (1) inhales (sucks) air through suction beam (2). Initially the suction air enters yarn waste chamber (3) and dust chamber (4). Being filtered by a filter screen, the air leaves the sub-pressure generator and is exhausted into the winding room through noise absorber (5). Overhead or underfloor exhaust can be provided; if so desired, a customer-supplied connection with the air conditioning system is also possible. The motor’s velocity is controlled by a frequency converter FU/FC (+C1-A1) in such fashion that the sub-pressure (suction) level is held constant as required for yarn end joining, independent of D the required number of cycles, and D of the degree of filling of yarn waste chamber and dust chamber. If none of the winding units cycles the control automatically loweres the suction level by 25 % (idling sub-pressure) of the programmed suction level (operational sub-pressure).

+C2-M1 D 101-07

1

3

Note: With a few exceptions all machines are factory-adjusted for a maximum adjustable suction level of 65 -hPa (-mbar). Exceptions are machines to process linnen yarn, or similar yarn conditions. Such machines are factory-adjusted for a maximum adjustable suction level of 80 -hPa (-mbar), and their length is limited to 40 winding units.

=A9+C3

Increase of the suction level to 80 -hPa (-mbar) could also be necessary for processing of very fine yarn counts. When projecting machines expected to require a suction level of 80 -hPa (-mbar) it is recommended to consult Schlafhorst engeneering dept. This could possible require a reduction of the number of winding units per machine. Consultation is also recommended for projected machine extensions with required suction levels up to 80 -hPa (-mbar).

4

+C1-A1

D 101-03

148-640 001 en 6.2003

4-7

Autoconer 338 Sub-pressure (suction) control

=A9+C3

The machine control circuit transmits the nominal value for sub-pressure entered on the Informator to the frequency converter (+C1-A1) via machine bus (CAN). The actual value is monitored by transmitter (+C2-B21) located in the yarn waste chamber. It changes the actual suction value (-hPa) into a proportional voltage value to be transmitted to the frequency converter. Through permanent comparison of nominal and actual value the FC controls the velocity of motor (+C2-M1) so that the suction level in the suction beam (entered on the Informator) is kept constant. Emptying of yarn waste chamber and dust chamber A warning light indicates when the motor reaches its end (maximum) velocity (RPM), due to choking by a full yarn waste (or dust) chamber. For energy savings purpose, the chambers are to be depleted of yarn waste and or dust accumulations in regular intervals. Doors are provided for screen cleaning and chamber depletion in front (yarn waste chamber) and rear (dust chamber). Sensors +C1-B1 and B2 monitor opening of the door(s). The suction drive is switched OFF when the door(s) are opened while the machine runs.

+C2-M1 +C1-B2

D 101-07

=A9+C3

The winding units continue production until the next joining cycle is required, then change to OFF status. After door closing the suction drive starts automatically, the winding units resume production status.

+C2-B21

+C1-B1 +C1-A1 D 101-03

4-8

148-640 001 8.0 en 6.2003

Autoconer 338

=A4+C1 1 Y1 2

6

Y2 5 7 3

4 M1 S1 D 200-09

4.1.4

Dust Removal

The dust removal device collects and deposits dust particles and fiber fly generated by unwinding the bobbins at high speed. Each machine section is provided with a dust removal device, which can be (S1) stopped, e.g. for maintenance work (→ Maintenance instructions). One suction nozzle (1), tapping the suction channel (2), is provided for each winding unit. Blower motor (M1) generates the required sub-pressure in the suction channel (2). The fiber fragments generated from yarn end opening and splicing are drawn-in by suction nozzle (1) and deposit themselves on filter basket (3). Cleaning of the filter basket takes place automatically, including the evacuation of the collected dust/fiber fleece. Depending upon the degree of fiber/dust generation a time interval for the cleaning process has to be entered on the Informator.

148-640 001 en 6.2003

Automatic Ceaning and Evacuation At expiration of the time interval the machine control activates, via machine bus (CAN), frequency converter A1 for the dust removal device of the first section, and then all other frequency converters for dust removal in intervals of 15 seconds. The frequency converter performs the internal control of the evacuation process: For a defined period of time the air cylinder (Y2) opens shutter (4) located in the connection tube (5) between suction duct and suction beam (6). With a delay, air cylinder (Y1) closes throttle plate (7). This reverses the flow of air through the filter basket. The collected fleece of dust and fibers is separated from the filter basket and is drawn through the suction beam into the yarn waste/dust collection chambers.

4-9

Autoconer 338

=A8+C1

2

4 5

1

6

3

9

7

4 5 10 8 D 272-28

4.1.5


The travelling cleaner (1) keeps winding units and the immediate environment of the Autoconer free of contaminating matter. A separate patrol drive motor (M1), located above the drive end, drives the travelling cleaner via belt (2). Fan wheel (3) of the travelling cleaner generates the subpressure for suction hoses (5), and the air pressure required for blow hoses (4). The sucked-off dust and lint is accumulated on filter screen (6) located in the housing cover. Disposal of the accumulations takes place via disposal tube (7) into the waste and dust chamber (8) each time the travelling cleaner reverses its patrol direction at the machine’s suction end. If required (e.g. for work on a winding unit, or for energy saving reason) the travelling cleaner can be parked above the drive end. Control Patrol operation of the travelling cleaner is controlled by the machine control, via relay +E1-K2, located in the drive end.

When, during its patrol from suction end to drive end, the travelling cleaner actuates initiator +C2-B2 first, and then initiator B1, the Informator registers the end of one patrol cycle. When reaching the number of patrol reversals previously entered on the Informator, the travelling cleaner remains stopped for the entered duration (in min.) (Relay +E1-K2 = OFF). Patrol direction reversal Patrol reversal direction of the travelling cleaner takes place automatically on suction end and drive end. Reversal stops (9) located on the patrol tracks initiate the mechanically controlled reversal of the patrol direction. Patrol direction reversal in case of obstruction Slight deflections of suction hose or blow hose (4 & 5) initiate instant patrol direction reversal. This reversal takes place through mechanical linkages (10) mounted between suction hoses and blow hoses, on both sides.

Depending on Informator entry, the travelling cleaner patrols either continuously, or cyclically with a dwell after a predetermined number of patrol cycles:

4 - 10

148-640 001 8.0 en 6.2003

Autoconer 338

=A8+C1

2

5

1

4 3

6

4

7 D 272-04

4.1.6

Travelling Cleaner “Luwa”

The travelling cleaner (1) keeps the winding units and the immediate surroundings of the machine free of dust and fly. A separate patrol drive motor M1 located above the drive end of the machine drives the travelling cleaner via an endless belt (2). The cleaner’s fan wheel (3) generates the required blow air and suction air for blow hoses (4) and suction hose (5). The accumulated dust and lint is deposited into yarn wasteand dust chamber (7) via removal tube (6), each time the travelling cleaner reverses its patrol direction at the machine’s suction end. For maintenance/repair work, e.g. on a winding unit, the travelling cleaner can be “parked“ above the drive end.

148-640 001 en 6.2003

Control The patrol operation of the travelling cleaner is controlled via relay (+E1-K2) by the machine control located in the energy unit. Depending upon Informator entry the travelling cleaner patrols continuously, or it remains stopped for a certain period of time after completion of a certain number of patrol cycles. If during its patrol the travelling cleaner actuates initiator (+C2-B2) first and B1 second, the Informator recognizes this as being the end of a patrol cycle. At completion of the number of patrol direction reversals entered on the Informator the travelling cleaner stops and remains stopped for the period of time (min.) entered on the Informator (Relay +E1-K2 = OFF).

4 - 11

Autoconer 338

=A5+C1

=A2+C6-S1

2

=A2+C6-B2

1

B3 B5

M1

D 401-09

4.1.7

Delivery Package Conveyor

The function of the package conveyor is controlled by entries on the Informator: D Manual package removal (Standard setting) When a predefined number of packages has been placed on the conveyor belt, or if the doffer attempts to doff a package for disposal on a conveyor location already occupied by a package, the yellow signal lamp prompts manual removal (manual conveyor start) of all packages located on the belt. D Automatic package removal Similar to “Manual removal”, except that the conveyor starts automatically. D Belt automation Choice between one-half automatic belt revolution until all packages are removed (e.g. when joined to an automatic transport system), and manual removal of the packages at the end of the automatically started belt.

4 - 12

Example: Manual Removal Settings on the Informator: Type of removal: Manual Automatic start: ON No. of packages to start: (Depends on No. of winding units) Package lifter, mode: ON Turn switch (+E1-S2) has been turned to ON to start the conveyor belt. Via direct drive (M1) the packages are transported towards the removal position at the machine’s suction end. When a package passes light barrier (B3) the belt’s speed is reduced. When light barrier (B5) determines the presence of a package, the belt stops briefly, and motor (M2) actuates the package lifter (1) until initiator B7 is actuated.

148-640 001 8.0 en 6.2003

Autoconer 338

=A5+C1

B6

M2

B7

D 401-08

The conveyor belt restarts. It stops again as the next package passes light barrier (B3). It starts again after manual removal of the package from the package lifter, vacating light barrier (B5), and motor (M2) has returned the package lifter to neutral position (B6 actuated). This process is repeated until the conveyor belt is free of packages and stops, because the limit switch (=A2+C6-S1) has dipped into the orifice (2) of the conveyor belt.

Control The package conveyor is controlled by frequency converter A2. For data exchange this frequency converter is connected with machine control and Informator via machine bus (CAN). Example for data exchange: The conveyor must not start while a doffing cycle is in progress, and a doffing cycle can not start as long as the conveyor runs. Monitoring The speed (RPM) of the direct drive motor (M1) is controlled by the machine control (=A1+C8-A1) via polar wheel and initiator (=A2+C6-B2). A blockage of the belt is reported by the machine control to frequency converter (A2) which in turn switches motor M1 OFF.

148-640 001 en 6.2003

4 - 13

Autoconer 338

1

2

D401-36

4.1.8

Package conveyor with roll-off ramp

The roll-off ramp represents an auxiliary function of the package conveyor.

Prerequisites for start and operation of the package conveyor with roll-off ramp

The ramp facilitates removal of packages when simultaneously processing two or more yarn lots on one machine.

General conditions and functions, such as required for switching ON/OFF of the package conveyor, remain unchanged.

Guide plate (1) guides the packages on roll-off ramp (2) for rolling off the conveyor belt and into the collection container. During normal winding operation the roll-off ramp remains withdrawn (tilted-down), in order to prevent collision with the travelling cleaner.

4 - 14

Auxiliary conditions required for switching ON of the package conveyor with roll-off ramp The package conveyor can not be started unless the travelling cleaner is switched-OFF manually in its park position at the drive end.

148-640 001 8.0 en 6.2003

Autoconer 338

3

2

D401-37

Package conveyor ON

Tilting up of the roll-off ramp

After switching ON, the conveyor belt of the package conveyor with roll-off ramp starts only

At start of the package conveyor the roll-off ramp is in neutral (tilted down) position (Magnet valve =A02+C02-X2 = ON).

D if the travelling cleaner has arrived in its park position at the drive end, and D if appr. 5 s after switching ON the roll-off ramp has been tilted up automatically. Package removal takes place as explained under ”Package conveyor”.

At arrival of the travelling cleaner in park position air cylinder (3) is activated by magnet valve =A02+C02-X1, pushing the roll-off ramp up to roll-off position. Conveyor belt arrives in zero position At arrival of the conveyor belt in zero position the roll-off ramp is lowered through deactivation of air cylinder (3) (Magnet valve =A02+C02-X2 = ON). Depending on operation mode, the travelling cleaner now starts, either instantly or at expiration of the dwell time entered on the Informator.

148-640 001 en 6.2003

4 - 15

Autoconer 338

1

3

2 D401-41

4.1.9

e

Package conveyor with intermediate package storage On machines with “Package conveyor with intermediate storage” the package diameter is limited to 240 mm.

’Intermediate storage’ represents an auxiliary function of the package conveyor.

Each one of the now vacated intermediate storage positions can receive an other full package, prior to the start of the package conveyor belt. After completed down/up motion of the swivel plates the conveyor belt is started separately.

It permits intermediate storage of doffed full packages (1) prior to their release to roll upon the conveyor belt (2).

Prerequisites for starting the package conveyor with intermediate storage

Swivel plates (3) stop the doffed packages in a position above the conveyor belt.

General conditions and functions, such as required for switching ON/OFF of the package conveyor, remain unchanged.

When starting the removal process by an overriding removal system, or by manual removal, the swivel plates swivel to lowermost position. All packages already collected in the intermediate storage are released to roll onto the conveyor belt. Subsequently the swivel plates return to uppermost position.

4 - 16

Additional prerequisite for starting the package conveyor with intermediate storage In order to prevent interference with the package doffer(s), the latter are locked-out only during the swivel motions of the swivel plates.

148-640 001 8.0 en 6.2003

Autoconer 338

6 4

5

7

1 3 D401-43

2

Package conveyor ON

Lowering and raising of the swivel plates

On package conveyor with intermediate storage, after switching-ON the conveyor belt starts only after

The swivel plates (3) are coupled with each other sectionally via shaft (4), the are centrally controlled by air cylinder (5).

D the doffer has completed a doffing cycle in progress, and

During normal production piston rod (6) of cylinder (5) is withdrawn, the swivel plates (3) are in uppermost position. A doffed package (1) rests in intermediate storage.

D the swivel plates (3) have completed their down/up motion, and the conveyor belt (2) has been started again. Package removal takes place as explained under ”Package conveyor”.

This status also prevails at interruption of the control voltage (e.g. if the machine is switched-OFF). Upon first switching-ON of the package conveyor voltage is released to magnet valve (7). The chambers of cylinder (5) are reversely pressurized, piston rod (6) is ejected as shown in the illustration. An arm on shaft (4) is lifted, moving the swivel plates (3) to lowermost position, flush with the rolloff plate. The packages are released to roll upon the conveyor belt (2). Time-controlled the magnet valve is again deactivated. The entire process is reversed, the swivel plates (3) return to their neutral, uppermost position.

148-640 001 en 6.2003

4 - 17

Autoconer 338

=A7+C1

S1 A1 5

3 2

B1 B2 4

1

D 401-31

4.1.10 Continuous Tube Conveyor The tube conveyor dispatches empty tubes (and ejected piece bobbins) to a gathering location. At each supply package (bobbin) change the ejector (1) ejects the tube from the bobbin peg onto the tube conveyor (2). The tube conveyor belt transports the tubes to the belt incline (3). The tubes are elevated to a transfer position, from which a spring-loaded ejector (4) throws the tubes on the sorting table (5), where tubes are manually separated from pieces.

Switching ON and OFF The tube conveyor is controlled via frequency converter (A1). During machine operation the tube conveyor can be stopped and started separately on switch S1. With switch S1 OFF, however, the frequency converter (A1) is not free of voltage! Blockage and Overload Monitoring The tube conveyor’s belts are monitored for blockage and overload (Initiators B1 and B2). After remedy of a failure the conveyor can be restarted through OFF/ON switching of switch S1. Upon occurence of a conveyor failure the winding units continue to operate until the next cycle is required. This function can be activated and deactivated through entry on the Informator.

4 - 18

148-640 001 8.0 en 6.2003

Autoconer 338 =A7+C1 6 3

M1

7

4 A1

5

S1

2 1

D 401-47

4.1.11 Sectional Tube Conveyor The tube conveyor dispatches empty tubes (and ejected piece bobbins) to a gathering location. At each supply package (bobbin) changes the ejector (1) ejects the tube from the bobbin peg onto the tube conveyor (2).

Switching ON and OFF The tube conveyor is controlled via frequency converter (A1).

One independent tube conveyor per machine section. Each tube conveyor with incline is driven by a common drive motor (M1). The incline elevates the tubes to transfer position.

During machine operation the tube conveyor can be stopped and started separately on switch S1. With switch S1 OFF, however, the frequency converter (A1) is not free of voltage!

There are two different types of guide plates at the transfer position:

Blockage and Overload Monitoring

For tubes up to 325 mm length For these tube lengths guide plate (3) guides the tubes into sorting box (4). With correctly adjusted sorting slot the tubes drop into the gathering box (5) until a piece bobbin blocks the drop slot. Piece bobbins must now be singled out manually, and the accumulated empty tubes are dropped into the gathering box through manual tilting of the sorting box.

The tube conveyor’s belt is monitored for blockage and overload (Initiator B1). After remedy of a failure the conveyor can be restarted through OFF/ON switching of switch S1. Upon occurence of a conveyor failure the winding units continue to operate until the next cycle is required. This function can be activated and deactivated through entry on the Informator.

For tubes above 325 mm length Guide plate (6) guides tubes and pieces directly into the gathering box (5); pieces must be separated from empty tubes manually. The depressor (7) assures secure transport up to the transfer position.

148-640 001 en 6.2003

4 - 19

Autoconer 338

4 - 20

148-640 001 8.0 en 6.2003

Autoconer 338

1

2

3

D 301-103

4.2

Winding Unit

4.2.1

Functional Sub-Assemblies

Viewed from top to bottom, the winding unit is composed of three major sub-assemblies: 1 Winding unit housing with package cradle, directly driven yarn guide drum, yarn traverse displacement, control and operation elements with signal lamps. 2 Central housing with suction arm, waxing device, electronic clearer, yarn tension sensor, splicer (knotter), yarn tensioner, and suction pipe. 3 Magazine housing with circular magazine (”RM”), bobbin chute, and bobbin peg.

148-640 001 en 6.2003

4 - 21

Autoconer 338

=A3+C1 1 5

3

4 2

B14.5

D 325-25

4.2.2

Package Cradle (Standard)

The package cradle (1) chucks a cone or sleeve held between two adapters (2 & 3). The RH adapter (3) can be shifted horizontally on the cradle opener lever, against spring pressure. Sensor (B14.5) registers the adaptor’s revolutions. The package cradle is fastened on the cradle carrier (4), which is clamped on the cradle shaft (5). The package cradle linkage is oil cylinder-damped, in order to prevent vibrations.

4 - 22

148-640 001 8.0 en 6.2003

Autoconer 338

=A3+C1 1 5

3

4 2

B14.5 6 7 6

D 325-18

4.2.3

Package Cradle (with taper acceleration)

The package cradle (1) holds the delivery package. The package is chucked between the two package adapters (2 & 3). The cradle opening lever is used to move (open / close) the RH adapter (3) laterally. Sensor (B14.5) registers the number of adapter rotations. The package cradle is mounted on cradle carrier (4), which is seated on cradle shaft (5). Outrigger (6), mounted on the winding unit housing, carries setting scale (7). The degree of taper acceleration is adjustable on this setting scale. The package cradle system is damped hydraulically in order to prevent cradle vibrations during the winding process.

148-640 001 en 6.2003

4 - 23

Autoconer 338

H

M

1

S

2

D 301-43

4.2.4

Standard Cradle Pressure Compensation

The increasing cradle pressure due to increasing yarn weight of the package is compensated, keeping the operational cradle pressure nearly constant. This feature also allows the basic adjustment of the pressure of the package against the yarn guide drum. The spring force of draw spring (2) changes corresponding to the setting of setting lever (1). The scale on the setting lever is used for initial basic settings: S = soft

= soft delivery package

M = medium

= medium-dense package

H = hard

= hard package

4 - 24

148-640 001 8.0 en 6.2003

Autoconer 338

=A3+C1 4 3

2

B13

1

M60 D 325-23

4.2.5

Electro-mechanical Cradle Suspension control propack

With the electro-mechanical cradle suspension control ”propack” the cradle pressure (suspension) is controlled by step motor M60 and a two-stage gear drive (1 + 2). The gear drive is linked with the cradle by a spring coupling. Twisting of the coupling loads springs (3), and the selection of the twisting angle results in a defined pressure exerted upon cradle (4) against the yarn guide drum. Cradle pressure compensation The cradle pressure to be applied at various package diameters and package weights is calculated for the corresponding radial positioning of motor M60. Ribbon breaking through cradle suspension control Shortly before reaching package diameters subjected to ribbon winding, i.e. critical speed relation between drum circumference and package circumference, the electro-mechanical cradle suspension control generates pulsating relief of cradle pressure, resulting in a defined intermittent slippage between the two circumferences. This function abruptly, and pulsatingly, changes the circumferential speed relation between yarn guide drum and package from shortly before until shortly after the critical diameter range.

148-640 001 en 6.2003

Neutral position/Initialization position After switch-ON of the winding unit the system has to be intialized, in order to memorize the present radial position of step motor M60. Initialization takes place via Hall sensor B13 for an angular position of the cradle above the largest possible diameter of 326 mm (12.83”). Neutral position of step motor M60 is determined by the number of required steps. In neutral position the empty cone/sleeve contacts the drum, and the suspension drive is fully relaxed. Settings Mechanical settings related to cradle suspension are no longer required when utilizing the electro-mechanical cradle suspension control propack. Data entry of all parameters required for production takes place centrally on the Informator. Entries under: “Lot...; Preparation...; Quality control...; Ribbon breaker...”

4 - 25

Autoconer 338

=A3+C1

3 2 4

B14.5

1

D 325-31

4.2.6

Package Lift (Standard)

The package lift function lifts the package off the yarn guide drum at each yarn break (or bobbin run-out), in order to prevent disturbance of the outer yarn layers of the delivery package. Disappearance of yarn from the measuring slot of the electronic clearer (e.g. due to yarn break or bobbin run-out) triggers a signal activating the package lift function. From a compressed air valve, controlled by magnet valve Y80, the damping cylinder (1) is subjected to air pressure, causing piston rod (2) to move down. Via damping lever (3), which is fastened on the cradle shaft, the piston rod thus lifts the cradle (4) off the yarn guide drum. When the sensor B14.5 of the RH adapter registers complete stop of the package, an other valve vents the air pressure, allowing the package to return to contact with the yarn guide drum.

4 - 26

148-640 001 8.0 en 6.2003

Autoconer 338

=A3+C1

3 4

B14.5

2

1

D 325-26

4.2.7

Package Lift with propack

The package lift feature lifts the cradle with package off the yarn guide drum for yarn break cycles and for bobbin change cycles. Its purpose is the prevention of damaged yarn layers. As the electronic clearer detects the absence of yarn from its measuring slot, e.g. after clearer cut or yarn break, it transmits a signal for activation of the package lift feature. Controlled by magnet valve Y80, damping cylinder (1) is pressurized by compressed air, causing piston rod (2) to move down. Via damping lever (3), connected with the cradle shaft, piston rod (2) lifts the package in cradle (4) slightly off the yarn guide drum. When Hall sensor B14.5, located on the RH package adapter, registers complete stop of the package, a valve vents the compressed air, causing the package to return to contact with the yarn guide drum.

148-640 001 en 6.2003

4 - 27

Autoconer 338

=A3+C1

B14.5 1

2

D 325-11

4.2.8

Package Brake

At yarn break (or bobbin run-out) braking of the package takes place until the package has come to a complete stop. For this purpose the winding unit computer actuates magnet valve Y80, subjecting the package brake, located in the RH package adapter, to air pressure via air conduit (1). The brake lining is pressed against brake ring (2) until the revolution sensor (B14.5), also located in the RH adapter, registers package standstill. Subsequently the air valve vents the brake cylinder, contact between brake lining and brake ring is discontinued. The braking action is terminated.

4 - 28

148-640 001 8.0 en 6.2003

Autoconer 338

B14.3 5

2

B14.2

1 4 M75

M14.1

3

D 301-99

4.2.9

Yarn Guide Drum

The guide grooves of the yarn guide drum (1) place the yarn in cross-wound layers on the delivery package. Motor (M75) directly drives drum shaft (2). For the purpose of yarn traverse displacement the drum shaft can be shifted laterally in its roller bearings. Motor (M14.1) drives the traverse displacement device. On polar wheel (3) two ‘Hall’ sensors (B14.2 and B14.3) register RPM and direction of rotation of the yarn guide drum; this is used by the winding unit computer, among other puposes, for D steplessly adjustable speed control, as programmed on the Informator, continually comparing actual and nominal RPM; and for the

148-640 001 en 6.2003

D ribbon breaking device, periodically generating a minute slippage between drum and package through abrupt speed increase of the yarn guide drum. This results in an offset between guide groove and actual yarn layer. The yarn is placed in a different location on the package, preventing the development of ribbon winds. After a completed yarn joining cycle deflector plates (4 and 5) guide the yarn towards the lateral center of the drum, where it slides into the drum’s guide groove. At bobbin run-out, or at yarn break, the lower contours of the deflection plates guide the free upper yarn end, also towards the drum center.

4 - 29

Autoconer 338

=A3+C1

6

2 M14.1

2

1

5 3

4

D 303-03

4.2.10 Yarn Traverse Displacement This device reduces the density difference between package edges and package yarn body. Via gear (1) the drive motor (M14.1) drives cam (2). Cam (2) actuates rocker lever (3), pushing the lever’s roller (4) against pressure cap (5). The drum is thus shifted laterally, relative to the package in laterally fixed position. As soon as the highest point of the cam is surpassed the drum is pushed back to its former position by a pressure spring. The traverse displacement feature can be canceled. Through direction reversal of the drive motor pawl (6) engages with a ratchet on cam (2), stopping the lateral displacement of the yarn guide drum.

4 - 30

148-640 001 8.0 en 6.2003

Autoconer 338 2

=A3+C1

3 4

2

B14.4

4

D 313-06

5

6

1

4.2.11 Drum Lap Guard and Drum Lap Brush In case of a yarn break the drum lap brush (1) prevents the lower yarn end from remaining in the guide groove of the yarn guide drum (2). If, however, the yarn end is caught nevertheless, and a drum lap begins to develop, the drum lap guard (3) prevents winding unit damages. At the beginning of a drum lap the accumulating yarn layers push the drum lap guard (3) down. Drum lap guard and actuation lever (5) are seated on a common shaft (4). When the actuation lever is lifted, ‘Hall‘ sensor (B14.4) is actuated by magnet (6), transmitting a signal to the winding unit control. The winding unit is stopped with Red light.

148-640 001 en 6.2003

4 - 31

Autoconer 338

=A3+C1

2 B4

1 D 301-100

4.2.12 Suction Arm and Suction Arm Stop Suction arm (1) picks-up and inhales the upper yarn end from the delivery package after a yarn break, clearer cut, or bobbin run-out. As soon as the package is stopped, and begins reversed rotation, the suction arm picks-up the upper end from the package. Under spring presure the suction arm (1) swivels up against the suction arm stop (2). The yarn guide drum rotates in reverse during the entire pick-up routine, in order to offer the yarn end to the suction arm mouth. Controlled by its cam, the suction arm performs one or several ”nodding” motion(s), in order to pull snagged ends away from the package surface. The upper end pick-up time is terminated as soon as the optical upper end sensor (B4) detects the presence of the inhaled yarn. The suction arm swivels down again, threading the upper yarn end into the splicer.

4 - 32

148-640 001 8.0 en 6.2003

Autoconer 338

=A3+C1 4 3

2

1

D 368-56

4.2.13 Suction Pipe The suction pipe threads the yarn into yarn tensioner and splicer. As soon as the suction arm (1) has threaded the upper yarn end into the splicer (2), the suction pipe (3) swivels down. The suction pipe shutter (4) opens, the lower yarn end is inhaled. The suction pipe swivels up, threading the lower end into the yarn joining (splicing) devices.

148-640 001 en 6.2003

4 - 33

Autoconer 338

=A3+C1

1 2

D 363-01

4.2.14 Yarn Trap The yarn trap’s task is to instantly draw-in the lower yarn end in case of a yarn break within the drum’s guide groove, in order to prevent the development of a “drum lap“. During the winding process the yarn trap (1) inhales and evacuates loose wads of fiber fragments and dust which can be generated through yarn waxing. During the yarn joining cycle electro magnet (Y79) places the yarn trap shutter (2) in front of the yarn trap’s (1) mouth, in order to prevent inhalation of a loop of the yarn, which at this point is not tensioned. At start-up the shutter opens under spring pressure when the closing magnet is deenergized.

4 - 34

148-640 001 8.0 en 6.2003

Autoconer 338

=A3+C1

M66 B66

8

7

8

4

6

3

B66

7

3 5 D 363-11

1

2

4.2.15 Waxing device The waxing device applies minute wax particles on the running yarn. Gear motor (M66) drives a shaft carrying square shaft (1). Wax roll (2) is seated on the square shaft, continually rotating against yarn running direction. Pressure fork (3) pushes against drag washer (5) of the wax roll, under pressure of torsion spring (4). For yarn end joining (splicing/knotting) the drive motor stops instantly. Through rotation reversal a lift-off helix pushes against the spring-pressured counter plate (6) with two lift-off plungers (7). The latter push against wax roll (2), opening a slot for yarn threading.

Wax roll monitoring Optionally the winding units can be provided with wax roll monitoring. During the winding process, due to wear-off of the wax roll, the pressure fork (3) keeps tilting counter-clockwise. The actuation surface (8) thus approaches wax sensor B66. when the wax roll is nearly worn-off the actuation surface (8) actuates wax sensor B66. Simultaneously an Informator message is issued prompting the operator to replace the wax roll.

At start of the winding unit the rotation direction is reversed again. Thus the spring-pressured counter plate returns to neutral position on the lift-off helix turning backwards, the wax roll returns to contact with the yarn.

148-640 001 en 6.2003

4 - 35

Autoconer 338

Setting Range: Reduction to ...

Winding Speed %v 100 90 80 70 60 50 40 30 20 10 0

Velocity Progression with Recommended setting

%v = 60

= Changeable Range

10 20 30 40 50 60 70 80 90 100 Setting Range: Reduction Start at ...

Yarn Lenght

D 161-16

4.2.16 Autospeed The yarn tension during unwinding of a bobbin increases considerably when unwinding from the bottom portion of the bobbin (→ 4.2.18). This tension increase is mostly due to friction between yarn and spinning tube surface. Other yarn-specific factors, however, also contribute to this phenomenon, such as type of fiber stock, twist, hairiness, etc.

For speed reduction control the following entries must be made on the Informator:

The speed control feature Autospeed facilitates nearly constant yarn tension throughout the unwinding process of the entire bobbin, due to winding speed reduction when unwinding the bottom portion of the bobbin.

D Speed reduction start at:

The start of speed reduction is based on the yarn length proportions of a refence bobbin; therefore the yarn tension of bobbins of lesser yarn length (piece bobbins) can not be controlled correctly.

4 - 36

D Total yarn length per bobbin: Entry of the yarn length of a full bobbin (Reference bobbin). Entry of the percentage value of the yarn length at which the speed reduction should begin. D Reduction to: Entry of a percentage of the nominal winding speed to which the winding speed should be reduced. Depending on yarn and bobbin build conditions, utilization of the speed control feature Autospeed can allow increases of the average winding speed.

148-640 001 8.0 en 6.2003

Autoconer 338

=A3+C1

B67

D 301-101

4.2.17 Autotense The yarn tension sensor Autotense (B67) permits constant yarn tension progression throughout the complete unwinding process of a bobbin. Through regulation of the yarn tensioner the yarn tension is continuously compared with a nominal value entered on the Informator. If this control is no longer possible towards the bottom portion of the bobbin, Autospeed reduces the unwinding speed so that Autotense can function in the controllable tension range. After each yarn break a new zero-tuning is performed automatically, in order to prevent unreliable measurements.

148-640 001 en 6.2003

4 - 37

Autoconer 338

Example: 100% cotton 29 tex (Nm 34; 20’s CC)

1250

Without Autospeed Vaverage 1200 mpm

100 90 80 60 40 20 0

1450 1200 1000 800 600 400 200 0

With Autospeed Vaverage 1300 mpm

100 80 60 65 40 20 0

Yarn Tension (cN)

Winding Speed (mpm)

1000 800 600 400 200 0

1450 1200 1000 800 600 400 200 0

With Autotense Vaverage 1380 mpm

100 80 60 40 20 0

Bobbin Unwinding Time D 362-01

4.2.18 Bobbin Unwinding Diagrams During the unwinding process bobbin-related conditions lead to yarn tension progressions depicted above without and with Autospeed / Autotense. Advantages of Autotense: D In many applications production increase due to higher average winding speeds. D Quality improvement of yarn (e.g. better evenness of waxing) and delivery package (even density). D Reduction of yarn breaks when unwinding from the bottom portion of the bobbins. D Reduction of ejected piece bobbins. D Central entry of all settings on the Informator.

4 - 38

148-640 001 8.0 en 6.2003

Autoconer 338

D100X642

D100X643

4.2.19 Variopack Variopack represents the intelligent combination of the independent control circuits for Autotense and Propack to one system, for the prevention of bulging-out package flanks. The illustrations depict packages wound from identical yarn under identical conditions, without and with Variopack:

The upper yarn layers thus exert an increasing pressure upon the inner layers. These inner layer can not withstand this pressure. When reaching a certain diameter the yarn body collapses: The inner yarn layers are forced to bulgeout.

LH illustration without Variopack: Package with bulging-out package flanks when winding elastic, lively yarn types.

Function of the Variopack system

RH illustration with Variopack: optimized package.

With increasing package diameter, the Variopack system controls the two winding parameters Yarn tension and Cradle pressure in such fashion that bulging-out of the package flanks is effectively prevented. The package parameters

Reasons and application range When winding elestic, lively yarn types, such as D Woollens, D Woollen blends, D Woolsiro, or D soft Core yarn, the package flanks tend to bulge out.

D density, D diamter, and D yarn weight are controlled as required. With Variopack delivery packages are produced which can withstand the enormous pressures building up when winding elastic yarn types.

During winding elastic yarn types are subjected to pre-tensioning and attempt to shrink back to their original consistency after having been wound on the delivery package.

148-640 001 en 6.2003

4 - 39

Autoconer 338

D100X642

D100X643

Variopack settings The settings are made through entries on the Informator. Five pre-established curves are selectable. These curves incorporate all settings adapted to specific yarn-related and technological requirements for the progression of package build: D Curve 1: weak*

e.g woollen blends

D Curve 2: weak-medium* e.g. woollens D Kurve 3: medium*

e.g. Woolsiro

D Curve 4: strong*

e.g. Wool with Elastan

D Curve 5: special

Cotton with Elastan

* These descriptions indicate to which degree the Variopack system interferes with the winding process. An optimized setting must be established through test runs:

One of the curves should be selected, based on the many possibilities deriving from the various textile materials and customer requirements. After selection of one of the curves, the shape of this curve can be further influenced by Informator entries for D Yarn tension, and D Cradle pressure. For first application of Variopack it is always necessary to wind sample packages. Such sample packages should also be subjected to testing in subsequent processing (weaving, knitting, warping, dyeing, etc.). Furthermore, testing is necessary over the entire package build-up process: D Yarn guiding by the yarn guide drum (for yarn types tending to false tracking), and D even wax application, especially at package start and package completion.

For slightly eleastic yarn types (e.g. Wool/Synthetics blends) curve 1 “weak” could suffice, whereas curve 4 “strong“ could be required for very eleastic yarn types, such as wool with Elastan.

4 - 40

148-640 001 8.0 en 6.2003

Autoconer 338

=A3+C1

D6

D 301-101

4.2.20 Electronic Yarn Clearer The electronic yarn clearer (D6) monitores the running yarn for evenness. Thick and thin places as well as double ends are cut out. The clearer constantly exchanges data with winding unit electronics and clearer center, which is integrated with the Informator*. Depending on winding speed the clearer recognizes the predetermined limits of tolerable yarn faults. At recognition of a yarn fault beyond these limits the clearer instantly cuts the yarn, initiating a winding unit stop and a subsequent joining cycle. Note: The clearer is not made by Schlafhorst. Records and instructions concerning function, settings, and maintenance are furnished by the individual clearer manufacturers.

*Option: External clearer center

148-640 001 en 6.2003

4 - 41

Autoconer 338

1

2

D 368-57

4.2.21 Splicer Utilizing compressed air the splicer ‘whirls‘ the yarn ends together, forming knotless yarn joints. The tensile strength of the splice is nearly identical to the yarn strength, thus representing the ideal, yarn-like joint of two yarn ends. The splicer is fastened on the winding unit housing. It is driven from the cam package shaft of the winding unit via plug coupling (1). Shaft (2) carries the cams for splicing. They control: D Yarn end clamping D Yarn end cutting D Yarn end feeding The control of yarn end opening and splicing takes place through settings on the Informator. Splice testing takes place automatically at winding unit start-up, as the splice passes through the clearer’s measuring slot.

4 - 42

148-640 001 8.0 en 6.2003

Autoconer 338 Splicing takes place as follows:

3

Suction arm (1) and suction pipe (2) transport the yarn ends to be spliced. The suction pipe shutter (3) guides both, lower and upper yarn end.

2

The suction pipe shutter (3) pushes the upper end brought down by the suction arm (1) into the channel of the splicer prism (4).

4

1

D 368-48

Yarn clamps (5 and 6) close, separately clamping upper and lower end. Opening valve (=A3+C1-Y81) releases compressed air for yarn end opening. Both, shears (7 and 8 ) close.

5 7

Feeder (9) and lid (10) begin their motion, shifting to the right.

10

9 8

6

D 368-59

148-640 001 en 6.2003

4 - 43

Autoconer 338 Shears (7) cut the lower end, shears (8) cut the upper end. The cut-off surplus ends are evacuated through suction arm and suction pipe. Retainer tubes (11 and 12) inhale upper and lower end and open both yarn ends in preparation for splicing. 7

The feeder pulls the opened yarn ends out of their retainer tubes (11 and 12).

11

12

8

D 368-60

The feeder has pulled the yarn ends completely out of the retainer tubes (11 and 12), placing them next to eachother with defined overlapping into the splicing prism. The opening valve (=A3+C1-Y81) closes, shutting off the opening air. The splicing valve releases compressed air to the prism. The air jet whirls the two yarn ends together, forming a spliced yarn joint.

D 368-61

Lid, clamps, shears, and feeder release the readily spliced yarn and return to neutral position.

D 368-62

4 - 44

148-640 001 8.0 en 6.2003

Autoconer 338 3

9

The winding unit starts. Feeder (9) and lid (10) have returned to neutral position. The suction pipe shutter (3) also releases the readily spliced yarn.

10

D 368-63

All control parts have returned to neutral position. The clearer tests the spliced joint.

D 368-64

148-640 001 en 6.2003

4 - 45

Autoconer 338

D300x201

4.2.22 Knotter Suction arm and suction pipe thread the yarn ends into the knotter head. During its down stroke the suction arm threads the upper end into the knotter head. The upper end is thus placed into the lower threading/clamping contour, and in front of the upper threading/clamping contour. During its up stroke the suction pipe threads the lower end into the knotter head. The lower end is thus placed into both, lower and upper threading plate contours. The suction pipe shutter, located at the end of the suction pipe, simultaneously pushes the upper end fully into the upper threading/clamping contour.

4 - 46

148-640 001 8.0 en 6.2003

Autoconer 338 Knotter types Depending on the yarn type the following knotter types are available: D Knotter FK4 See upper illustration Standard knotter for the following application range: Yarn count range: Nm 1.5 ... Nm 60 D Knotter FK 1 (and FK1/mini) See lower illustration Knotter for yarn count range Nm 60 ... Nm 100. Preliminary knotting tests are required for yarn counts Nm 80 and finer. Note D300x202

The following description applies to knotter FK4. Function and operation of knotters FK4 and FK1 are identical.

D300x203

148-640 001 en 6.2003

4 - 47

Autoconer 338

1

4 3 2

6

5

D362-04

D300x201

The knotter produces a fisherman’s knot

Formation of a knot

The fisherman’s knot is composed of 2 individual knots, each one wound around the opposite yarn end.

Suction arm and suction pipe thread the yarn ends into the knotter head. The cartridge beaks are positioned between the yarn ends.

The tails of the fisherman’s knot are oriented parallel and close to the yarn being wound. When subjected to strain the fisherman’s knot is pulled even tighter. Components of the fisherman’s knotter

The ejector fork is positioned behind the yarn ends (neutral position). Upper and lower yarn clamps are open, the crown gear is in neutral position.

1. Knotter cartridge 1 2. Knotter cartridge 2 3. Ejector fork 4. Upper yarn clamp 5. Lower yarn clamp 6. Crown gear

4 - 48

148-640 001 8.0 en 6.2003

Autoconer 338 The crown gear turns to the left, the yarn ends cross each other. Driven by the crown gear, the cartridge beaks turn towards each other. The upper nose of the crown gear shifts the lower end to the left, crossing it over the upper end. The upper end is located in the slot of the crown gear and is thus not shifted. The crown gear’s lower nose pushes the upper end to the right past the lower end. Controlled by the crown gear (clamping piece with control cogs), the two yarn clamps close, clamping upper and lower ends.

D300x202

Crown gear and cartridge beaks continue to rotate. From its yarn end, each cartridge beak forms a loop around itself. The upper beak loops the lower end, while the lower beak loops the upper end. Simultaneously the crown gear crosses the two ends further.

D300x204

After three-quarters of a revolution (270_) the beak points are behind their ends, the beaks are open. At continuation of the rotation each beak ’grabs’ its end, clamping it securely on one side and cutting it on the other side.

D300x205

148-640 001 en 6.2003

4 - 49

Autoconer 338 Both beaks have severed their respective yarn ends. For a yarn break cycle, suction arm and suction pipe inhale and evacuate the surplus yarn ends; for a bobbin change cycle, this task is performed by the suction arm, and by the yarn clamp of the circular magazine. Each cartridge beak has formed a loop from its respective yarn end around itself. Due to the crossing of the two yarn strands each individual half-knot is looped around the opposite yarn strand. The ends of the individual half-knots (loops) are still retained by their cartridge beaks. The crown gear continues to rotate until the beak points again point forward and slightly towards each other (370_).

D300x206

The ejctor fork shifts forward between the two cartridge beaks, stripping the two yarn loops off the beak points. As each beak keeps its yarn end clamped, two individual knot halves are formed: D The upper knot half (formed from the lower end) is wound around the upper end. D The lower knot half (formed from the upper end) is wound around the lower end. The ejector fork moves slightly back. Simultaneously the crown gear turns back until the cartridge beaks have turned back 90_. The beaks open, releasing their respective yarn ends.

D300x207

The ejector fork begins its second, the larger stroke portion. It thus pushes the individual knot halves together to form a fisherman’s knot. The knotted yarn is still retained by the two yarn clamps controlled by the crown gear. Crown gear and cartridges return to their neutral position. The clamps open, releasing the knotted yarn. The ejector fork also returns to neutral position. The winding unit starts.

D300x208

4 - 50

148-640 001 8.0 en 6.2003

Autoconer 338

=A3+C1

L77

3

N

N

2

S

S

M69 S

N

1

D 301-47

4.2.23 Yarn Tensioner The yarn tensioner (1) provides a defined degree of yarn tension, required to obtain a certain density (hardness) of the delivery package. The yarn runs between rotating tension discs (2 and 3), driven against the direction of the running yarn by tensioner motor (M69).

Machines with Autotense Setting of yarn tension in cN takes place through entry on the Informator.

Disc (2) is driven directly, while disc (3) is coupled with disc (2) via permanent magnets.

Autotense controls the tension disc pressure in accordance with the yarn tension sensor’s measurements and with the Informator entry so that the yarn tension remains nearly constant throughout the unwinding process of the entire bobbin.

The desired yarn tension is generated through friction of the yarn against the two tension discs.

The modulation of tension disc pressure is attained through variation of the voltage supplied to dip coil (L77).

Machines without Autotense

Tensioner Opening

The tension disc pressure is a fixed value, preset on the Informator.

The RH tension disc is opened for threading of the yarn into the tensioner. For this purpose the running direction of tensioner motor (M69) is reversed briefly. The motor incorporates a worm drive which shifts the tension disc laterally, thus opening the tensioner.

Dip coil (L77) receives a fixed voltage value in proportion to the Informator setting; i.e. the pressure between the two tension discs remains the same throughout the winding process. This causes yarn tension increase when unwinding from the bottom portion of the bobbin.

148-640 001 en 6.2003

Yarn Quick Clamp Through brief increase of tension disc pressure during joining and bobbin change cycles the lower end is securely clamped and placed in a defined position for the suction pipe.

4 - 51

Autoconer 338

S 2 4

5

3

Z

1

D301-122

4.2.24 Hairiness nozzle Optional device ’Hairiness nozzle’ (1) is located in the lower portion of the tension device. It reduces yarn hairiness during the winding process: Protruding long fibers are placed on the yarn surface. This results in reduced yarn hairiness with reduction of fiber fly during subsequent processing. The function of the hairiness nozzle (ON or OFF) is entered on the Informator. Structure Core of the hairiness nozzle is the nozzle body (2) with yarn channel (3) and threading slot (4). Through rotation of the nozzle body the hairiness nozzle can be adapted to S- or Z-twisted yarn. Pre-cleaner (5) is located below the nozzle body. It prevents yarn loops from entering the nozzle.

4 - 52

Function A magnet valve releases compressed air to the nozzle body if D the winding unit is switched-ON, D running yarn is sensed, and D no winding unit blockage is registered. This means that compressed air is released to the hairiness nozzle continually during the entire winding process. The air exits through an air entry bore directed eccentrical to the yarn channel. The air jet produces a whirl within the yarn channel, winding protruding fibers around the yarn core. The compressed air pressure can be adjusted independent from other pneumatic devices.

148-640 001 8.0 en 6.2003

Autoconer 338

d) 6 FM1

4 7 7

6 3 2 a)

5 b)

c)

5 1 D301-116

4.2.25 Multijet Multijet represents a blow-off device for clean-keeping of dust- and fly-endangered Autoconer assemblies. One multijet assembly is installed on each winding unit. During each yarn joining cycle multijet nozzles emit short air blasts targeted to: D Tension device (1)

Legend of air conduits a) Main supply conduit b) Clearer and waxing device c) Tension device d) Damping cylinder

D Clearer (2) D Waxing device (3) Operational air pressure of the multijet is 0.35 hPa (3.5bar). From the connection point within the control compartment the compressed air is routed into a supply conduit located below the suction beam sections. From this supply conduit, one compressed air conduit branches off for each winding unit. Each branch routes compressed air to valve (4). Shortly after start of the yarn joining cycle, cam FM1 briefly actuates valve (4): Via flexible tubings the air is routed to blow nozzles (5) and (6), and to conduit (7). On a quick-lock connector each multijet can be separated from the supply conduit, without interference of compressed air supply to the remaining winding units.

148-640 001 en 6.2003

4 - 53

Autoconer 338

4.2.26 Toggle Operation

=A3+C1

During toggle operation the yarn joining linkage can be placed into any desired radial position of the cam package via toggling or steady drive, e.g. for the performance of setting or maintenance work. As the joining linkage reaches appr. 28° “Bobbin change start“, the bobbin change linkage starts and runs until arriving at the “Transfer position“ (RM-position: appr. 222°). An other start of the bobbin change linkage takes place when the joining linkage arrives at appr. 176° (Suction arm moving down).

H1

D Set winding unit switch (S1) to the right on “OFF“ in order to interrupt winding operation. H2 S1

D Actuate Red (H1) and Yellow (H2) lamps simultaneously and hold until both of them are flashing: – Red and Yellow lamps flash alternatingly at appr. 1Hz: Cycling linkage in neutral (Zero) position. During toggling all functions are activated when reaching their radial position of the cam package (e.g. splicer). – Red lamp flashes at 2 Hz, Yellow lamp flashes at 1 Hz: Cycling linkage not in neutral position. Only the cycling linkage can be started, no other function (as e.g. the splicer).

D 301-21

D Toggle on the Red lamp until reaching the desired radial position. D If prior to toggling the cycling linkage had been in neutral position, the linkage can be moved in reverse through toggling on the Yellow lamp. This function should be operated only for exact positioning of the cycling linkage. D Termination of toggle operation: When switching the winding unit ON the unit starts from any position of the cycling linkage.

4 - 54

148-640 001 8.0 en 6.2003

Autoconer 338

Ribbon Breaker

Breaker Stroke Small Package

Large Package

Acceleration

mpm Speed

2 2

255 ... 1 Slow Start-up fast medium slow

1

100 0

D 161-17

1 Time

s

4.2.27 Acceleration and Ribbon Breaker Acceleration from standstill of the delivery package up to nominal winding speed takes place in two increments: Slow start-up and Acceleration.

Ribbon breaking is achieved through defined brief braking of the yarn guide drum.

The slow start-up accelerates the yarn guide drum up to 100 mpm linear yarn speed. Then further acceleration takes place up to nominal winding speed.

The so generated minute slippage between package and drum causes offsetting of package winds from eachother, avoiding the development of ribbon winds (parallel layers, patterns).

D C-Acceleration With Informator-setting “C-Acceleration“ the control is provided with the permissible slippage between drum and package.

Such defined brief braking and accelerating, called breaker stroke, can be preset on the Informator. It represents the speed differential (slippage) in %, independently of the actual package diameter.

D X-Acceleration Entry “X-Acceleration“ defines smoother acceleration after package doffing.

For control of speed, acceleration and slippage during acceleration and normal winding operation the winding unit’s electronic circuitry continually registers the pulses transmitted from the sensors on yarn guide drum and delivery package.

When reaching the winding speed preset on the Informator controlled speed modulation begins, under consideration of the ribbon breaker feature.

148-640 001 en 6.2003

4 - 55

Autoconer 338

Ribbon breaking

propack

Breaker stroke

Acceleration with propack

m/min

Speed

without

Cradle pressure

0

Time

D 161-66

s

4.2.28 Acceleration and Ribbon Breaking with propack Winding units equipped with the electro-mechanical cradle suspension control propack, D C-Acceleration, and D X-Acceleration are controlled as on any other winding unit (see previous page). Through entry on the Informator, with propack it is possible to initiate additional cradle pressure for the acceleration period, which allows considerable decrease of the time required for acceleration. When reaching the nominal winding speed programmed on the Informator, winding units equpipped with propack, too, assume regulated speed control under consideration of ribbon breaking.

For the control of winding speed, acceleration, and slippage during acceleration, the winding unit’s electronic circuitry continually registers the pulses transmitted from the sensors located on yarn guide drum and delivery package. propack is activated shortly before reaching a critical speed relation between drum and package. Initially the ribbon breaking stroke is decreased. Through decrease of the cradle pressure a defined additional slippage between drum and package takes place. The package bypasses the critical speed relation and winds below this value. Thus the package is ”carried over” the critical ribbon range. Upon surpassing the critical range normal ribbon breaking is restored.

Ribbon breaking consists of defined, alternating short-term acceleration and braking of the yarn guide drum (see previous page).

4 - 56

148-640 001 8.0 en 6.2003

Autoconer 338

=A3+C1 2

1 D 301-99

4.2.29 Yarn Length Measuring and Diameter Calculation Depending on entry on the Informator a winding unit produces packages either of nearly identical yarn lengths, or of nearly identical diameter. For quality assurance diameter as well as yarn length can be monitored. Example: If a package is too soft the diameter could be reached before the preset yarn length is attained. The winding unit control stops the winding unit and signals the faulty package with flashing Red as well as Yellow light. Safety stop always takes place at 326 mm package diameter.

For calculation of yarn length and package diameter the winding unit control continually registers the pulses from the sensors on yarn guide drum (polar wheel and sensor B14.2 → 1) and delivery package (RPM sensor B14.5 → 2). Through simple counting of pulses, however, neither the yarn length nor the package diameter can be determined with any degree of precision. Many conditions are of decisive influence upon the measuring results: Fiber stock, spinning method, yarn tension pressure, yarn tension, winding speed, cradle pressure, cradle pressure compensation, package taper, etc. Therefore it is necessary to determine, on one winding unit, a correction factor for each set of winding and yarn conditions, and to enter this correction factor on the Informator whenever this set of conditions applies to the winding job on hand. After the correction factor has been determined a tolerance for identical yarn length per package of 2 %, and for identical package diameter of 1 % can be achieved.

148-640 001 en 6.2003

4 - 57

Autoconer 338

4 - 58

148-640 001 8.0 en 6.2003

Autoconer 338

1

2

3

D 301-48

4.3

Bobbin Change

4.3.1

Model RM / Sub-Assemblies and Functional Assemblies

1 Magazine 2 Bobbin Chute 3 Bobbin Peg A bobbin change cycle is initiated by the electronic circuitry of the winding unit if the lower end sensor fails to detect the presence of a lower yarn end during a yarn joining (splicing/knotting) cycle. The motion sequences are described on the following pages.

148-640 001 en 6.2003

4 - 59

Autoconer 338

M75

1 2 3

3 4 5 6

D 301-49

4.3.2

Model RM / Cam Package with Drive

Drive motor (M 75) drives gear (3) via gears (1) and (2). The cam contour (4) controlling the yarn shears is located on one flank of gear (3). Cams (5) and (6) are also fastened on gear, controlling the following functions: 5 controls the bobbin chute’s trap doors and centering doors 6 controls bobbin peg and ejector

4 - 60

148-640 001 8.0 en 6.2003

Autoconer 338

1

3 4 2

D 301-50

4.3.3

Model RM / Yarn Shears

At the start of the bobbin change cycle the cam-controlled clamping lever (1) tilts. It is seated on a common shaft with an actuation lever, which (at bobbin change only) actuates the yarn shears (2). The yarn shears cut a yarn end which could extend from the otherwise empty spinning tube into the tension assembly (3). The suction pipe (4) evacuates the residual yarn end above the yarn shears.

148-640 001 en 6.2003

4 - 61

Autoconer 338

3 5

5 6 6 1 2

7 4

D 301-51

4.3.4

Model RM / Bobbin Peg

At the beginning of a bobbin change cycle cam (1) tilts cam follower (2), moving the pull rod (3) up, and via a lever linkage moving lever (4) down. The bobbin peg (5), seated on a common shaft with lever (4), tilts forward, withdrawing peg claw (6) into the peg’s channel. In this position (ejection/creeling position) the bottom of the spinning tube, no longer retained by the claw, contacts the ejector (7). Cam-controlled the ejector ejects the tube onto the tube conveyor belt and returns to its neutral position. After creeling of a new bobbin the bobbin peg with the bobbin returns to neutral (yarn unwinding) position, simultaneously releasing the claw (6) to retain the bobbin while being unwound.

4 - 62

148-640 001 8.0 en 6.2003

Autoconer 338

2 1

3 D 301 50

4.3.5

Model RM / Bobbin Chute

With the bobbin peg in creeling position cam follower (1) is tilted. The cam follower sits on a common shaft with actuation levers which initially close the trap doors (2) and subsequently the centering doors (3). The centering doors form a funnel for secure guiding of the bobbin onto the bobbin peg. After creeling the centering doors open completely, while the trap doors open partly. In this position the bobbin peg with bobbin returns to unwinding position. Finally the trap doors open completely, returning to their neutral position.

148-640 001 en 6.2003

4 - 63

Autoconer 338

1

3

2

9 6

4 7 8

5

5

D 301-52

4.3.6

Model RM / Yarn Lifter

Yarn lifter (1) lifts the leading yarn end of the newly creeled bobbin along guide wire (2) into the pick-up range of suction pipe (3). In neutral position the yarn lifter contacts chute bracket (4). When the suction pipe has tilted forward to its pick-up position a cam follower is tilted which sits on a common shaft with actuation lever (5). As the actuation lever (5) moves in arrow direction, clamping lever (8) is tilted via push rod (6) and and pull rod (7), moving the yarn lifter (1) accordingly. The yarn lifter tilts forward until it contacts the tension assembly, placing the yarn on suction pipe shutter (9). For a joining (splicing/knotting) cycle the suction pipe inhales the yarn end, and the end is clamped by the suction pipe shutter. When the yarn has been taken over by the suction pipe the yarn lifter returns to its neutral position.

4 - 64

148-640 001 8.0 en 6.2003

Autoconer 338

6 2

5

1 3

4 6

D 377-26

4.3.7

Model RM / Magazine

During the trap doors’ closing motion the magazine cylinder (1) rotates for tranfer of the next bobbin to the bobbin peg. In neutral position driver (2) bears against indexing wheel, retaining the cylinder in fixed position. At the beginning of the bobbin change cycle gear (3) drives meshing bevel gears (4) and (5). Bevel gear (5) is plugged on a common shaft with driver (2). As the driver-integrated roller (6) enters the indexing wheel the magazine cylinder is rotated 60°. Subsequently the driver returns to contact with the indexing wheel, retaining the cylinder in fixed position.

148-640 001 en 6.2003

4 - 65

Autoconer 338

1

3

2 4

4

D 377-27

4.3.8

Model RM / Yarn Clamp

Yarn clamp (1) retains the leading yarn ends of the bobbins located in the chambers of the magazine cylinder (2). When placing bobbins into the cylinder chambers the yarn clamp is opened manually for inhalation of the yarn ends. In neutral position the clamp is held closed under pressure of a torsion spring. As the yarn lifter takes the yarn into take-over position for suction pipe (3), the yarn clamp opening motion begins, cam-controlled, until it is halfway open relative to suction tube (4). During take-over, i.e. while the yarn lifter contacts the tension assembly, the yarn clamp briefly closes completely, and opens fully for evacuation of the residual yarn end after yarn joining (splicing/knotting), and then closes again (neutral position). Note: For winding of certain critical yarn types a different bevel gear is used, deleting the partly-open position of the yarn clamp.

4 - 66

148-640 001 8.0 en 6.2003

Autoconer 338

1

2

D 377-20

4.3.9

Model RM / Loop Gate

The loop gate is optional. At unwinding start from a new bobbin it prevents yarn loops from entering the tension assembly. The loop gate is required when unwinding highly twisted, non-steamed yarn types which tend to curl-off from the bobbin. In neutral position the gate wire (1) is in standby position next to the bobbin. When the leading yarn end is drawn into the suction pipe, the winding unit control transmits a signal to gate magnet (2). Over a linkage the gate wire is placed on the tip of the bobbin’s spinning tube. While being pulled off the bobbin the yarn is thus under tension. When the yarn guide drum reaches a velocity preset by a code on the Informator, the gate magnet is de-energized, and a torsion spring returns the gate wire to neutral position.

148-640 001 en 6.2003

4 - 67

Autoconer 338

3 2 1 D 384-01

4.3.10 Model E / Sub-Assemblies and Functional Assemblies 1 Balloon separator 2 Shaft with creel peg 3 Support angle Autoconer 338 model ”E” is provided with a single creel peg per winding unit for cross-wound packages to be creeled manually as supply packages for the windingprocess. The creel peg serves to retain the supply package in unwinding position.

4 - 68

148-640 001 8.0 en 6.2003

Autoconer 338

1

2

3

D 376-04

4.3.11 Model RC / Sub-Assemblies 1 Magazine 2 Creel-out chute 3 Creel arbor A creel-out change cycle is intiated by the electronic circuitry of the winding unit if the lower end sensor fails to detect the presence of a lower yarn end at the beginning of a yarn joining (splicing/knotting) cycle. The sequence of motions is described on the following pages.

148-640 001 en 6.2003

4 - 69

Autoconer 338

M75 1 2 3

3 4 5 6 D 376-05

4.3.12 Model RC / Cam package with Drive Drive motor (M 75) drives gear (3) over gears (1) and (2). Cam contour (4) controlling the yarn shears is located on one flank of gear (3). Also fastened on gear (3) is the cam package with cams (5) and (6), controlling the following functions: 5 Controls the creel-out chute’s trap doors and centering doors, 6 Controls creel-out arbor and ejector.

4 - 70

148-640 001 8.0 en 6.2003

Autoconer 338

3 1

4

2

D 376-10

4.3.13 Model RC / Yarn shears At start of the supply package change cycle clamping lever (1) begins to move, controlled by its cam. By a common shaft it is joined with an actuation lever for actuation (closing) the yarn shears (2) during the change cycle. The yarn shears cut the yarn end possibly extending from the creel-out package into the yarn tensioner (3). The cutoff surplus yarn end is drawn-in and evacuated by the suction pipe (4).

148-640 001 en 6.2003

4 - 71

Autoconer 338

3

1 5

6

5

2

7

6

4

D 376-11

4.3.14 Model RC / Creel arbor At the beginning of the supply package change cycle, controlled by cam (1) the cam follower (2) moves down, and pull rod (3) on the opposite end of the cam follower moves up. The linkage prompts lever (4) to move down. Creel arbor (5), mounted on a common shaft with lever (4), tilts forward, withdrawing claw lever (6) into the arbor’s Uprofile. Consequently, in ejection/creeling position the creel-out cone/sleeve rests loosely on ejector (7). Cam-controlled, the ejector throws the cone/sleeve on the tube conveyor belt. The ejector then returns to its neutral (bottom) position. After arrival of a new creel-out package the creel arbor tilts back to unwinding position. In unwinding position of the creel arbor the creel-out package is retained internally by the claw lever (6).

4 - 72

148-640 001 8.0 en 6.2003

Autoconer 338

2

1

3 D 376-14

4.3.15 Model RC / Creel-out Chute With the creel-out arbor in creeling (receiving) position, cam follower (1) is actuated by its cam. The cam follower is mounted on a common shaft with the actuation levers for opening the trap doors (2) and for opening the centering flaps (3). The centering flaps form a funnel for guiding the creel-out package onto the creel arbor. After completed creeling the centering flaps open completely, the trap doors open partly. When reaching this position the creel arbor returns, cam-controlled, to unwinding position. Subsequently the trap doors open completely, neutral (unwinding) position is restored.

148-640 001 en 6.2003

4 - 73

Autoconer 338

3

1

2

9

4

7 8

5

6

5

D 376-19

4.3.16 Model RC / Transfer Finger Transfer finger (1) transfers the leading yarn end of the newly creeled creel-out package along guide wire (2) towards the mouth of suction pipe (3). In neutral position the transfer finger contacts chute bracket (4). As the suction pipe has moved forward to transfer position, a cam follower, mounted on a common shaft with actuation lever (5), begins to tilt. The actuation lever moves in the direction indicated above by an arrow, clamping lever (8), joined with the transfer finger (1) linkage, tilts via push rod (6) and pull rod (7). The transfer finger tilts forward until it contacts the yarn tensioner, placing the yarn on the suction pipe shutter (9). For the yarn end joining cycle the suction pipe inhales the yarn end, and the yarn end is then firmly clamped by the closing suction pipe shutter. After transfer of the yarn to the suction pipe the transfer finger returns to its neutral position.

4 - 74

148-640 001 8.0 en 6.2003

Autoconer 338

2 7

5

4

6 3 1

7 8 9

D 376-09

4.3.17 Model RC / Magazine During the closing motion of the trap doors the magazine cylinder (1) indexes one increment, releasing the next creelout package to drop down for creeling. In neutral position the driver (2) contacts geneva cross (3), retaining the cylinder in position. At start of the change linkage the gear begins to rotate bevel gears (4) and (5). Bevel gear (5) sits on a common shaft with the driver (2). When roller (7) of the driver enters the geneva cross, the magazine is indexed 30° via gear belt wheel (6), gear belt (8), and gear belt wheel (9). Subsequently the driver again contacts the geneva cross, firmly retaining the magazine cylinder in position.

148-640 001 en 6.2003

4 - 75

Autoconer 338

4 - 76

148-640 001 8.0 en 6.2003

Autoconer 338 4.4

2

3

1 6

7 5

4

D 501-48

4.5

Package Doffer

4.5.1

Sub-Assemblies and Functional Assemblies

The package doffer patrols on tracks located above the winding units. Upon request from a winding unit the doffer winds a nose tail on the completed package, and doffs the package. The doffer also places a new cone/sleeve from the magazine into the package cradle and winds a transfer tail. The major functional assemblies of the doffer are: 1 Patrol Drive 2 Cycling Drive with Control Cam Package 3 Engaging (Latch) Assembly 4 Yarn Lift with Transfer Tail Winding Device 5 Nose Tail Winding Device 6 Package Cradle Opener 7 Package Cradle Lift

148-640 001 en 6.2003

4 - 77

Autoconer 338

14 11 9

15 8

10

13 12 13

D 501-49

Sub-Assemblies and Functional Assemblies (cont’d.) 8

Package Guiding

9

Cradle Depressor Lever

10

Cone/Sleeve Feeder

11

Cone/Sleeve Drive

12

Information and Failure Display

13

Sensor Plates for Patrol Direction Reversal

14

Ultrasonic Sensor

15

Light Sensor

4 - 78

148-640 001 8.0 en 6.2003

Autoconer 338 +C1-B10

=A6

2

+C3-B30

+C1-B11

3

+C2-B20

1

+C2-B21

5 4

1

D 521-35

4.5.2

Package doffer, Patrol direction

The package doffer is provided with one each sensor plate (1) on either side. When slightly actuated by an obstacle these sensor plates initiate reversal of the patrol direction via capacitive distance sensors (+C3-B30) or (+C1-B10) resp. With the doffer in waiting position, slightly touching one of the sensor plates causes the doffer to continue patroling along three winding units. Normally the doffer is engaged on a winding unit, resuming patrol only upon receiving an other request for doffing. All winding units permanently transmit their winding unit numbers via Infrared interface. In case of simultaneous registry of several requests the requesting winding units are approached in optimized sequence. During patrol the doffer continually recognizes its present location from the winding unit numbers permanently transmitted from the winding units.

148-640 001 en 6.2003

Shortly before engaging on a requesting winding unit the doffer decelerates its patrol velocity to engaging speed. In engaging position on the requesting winding unit air cylinder (2) is actuated by magnet valve (+C1-Y2). This releases latching strip (3), engaging it with the latch bolt of the superstructure. Correct latching of the latching strip is monitored by Hall sensor (+C1-B11). Prior to the beginning of the doffing cycle D ultra-sonic sensor (+C2-B20) inquires whether or not the package conveyor belt position (4), or the intermediate storage space (optional), resp., is vacant; and D light sensor (+C2-B21) inquires whether or not a cone/ sleeve is present in the magazine (5). The doffing cycle starts if both reactions are positive. If one of the conditions is not met the doffer unlatches and continues patrol to the next requesting winding unit, or it remains in parking position if no further request is registered.

4 - 79

Autoconer 338

=A6

4

4

1 6

3 7

7 2

4

10 11

5 9 8

D 520-49

4.5.3

Yarn lifter with base transfer tail winding device

At the beginning of a package doffing cycle, cam-controlled the yarn lifter housing (1) tilts towards the lateral center of the yarn guide drum, and the yarn lifter head moves down simultaneously. The yarn guide drum rotates the package, allowing the yarn catch plate (2) to catch the traversing yarn. During the subsequent up motion of the yarn lifter head the yarn slides from the deflection plates (3) into swivel bow (4). Cam-controlled swivel bow (4) guides the yarn to the left of the package, placing the nose tail (5) on the LH package flank. Positioning of the nose tail is adjustable on the Informator (→ 3.2). Subsequently the swivel bow guides the yarn to the right. At arrival of the swivel bow in the lateral drum center the air cylinder (6) actuates clamping shears (7), simultaneously cutting the yarn and retaining (clamping) the lower yarn end. The remaining upper yarn end is wound on the outer package surface. At this point of the cycle the swivel bow (4) briefly moves forward, causing the package to securely roll onto the package conveyor belt.

4 - 80

The yarn lifter head remains in its position until the package has been placed on the package conveyor belt, and the package cradle has been lowered to creeling position. Now the yarn lifter head tilts forward between the package adapters, and moves sideways until stop (8) contacts winding unit housing (9). Thus the yarn, retained in the clamp of shears (7), is placed across the RH package adapter (10). During chucking of the cone/sleeve the yarn lifter moves to the left to base transfer tail position, monitored by Hall sensor (+E1-B15). At completed chucking of the cone/sleeve, clamping shears (7) open up. The cone/sleeve drive starts, winding the transfer tail. During transfer tail winding air cylinder (6) is again activated briefly. This moves the yarn guide plate (11) somewhat to the right, in order to fix the first wind of the transfer tail. At the end of transfer tail winding the yarn lifter leaves the base transfer tail position and laterally returns to its neutral position. During this motion a few more winds are wound onto the cone/sleeve.

148-640 001 8.0 en 6.2003

Autoconer 338

=A6 +C1-B13 +C1-B12

+C1-M3

1 2

D 521-27

4.5.4

Package Guiding

Before the package rolls from the package cradle onto the swivel trough the Informator transmits the actual package diameter to the doffer control. Cam-controlled, the package guide arm (1) moves to the rear. Simultaneously, driven by motor (+C1-M3), the package guide lever (2) moves behind the package to a position corresponding to the package diameter. Simultaneously with cradle lifting and swivel trough the package guide arm (2) moves to the rear. This in order to make sure that especially tapered packages are reliably transferred to the conveyor belt, or to the swivel plates of the (optional) intermediate storage device, resp. At the end of the depositing process the package guide lever (2) tilts to its highest position, which is montored by ’Hall’ sensor (+C1-B13). Subsequently, the package guide lever (2), driven by motor (+C1-M3) and the package guide arm (1), cam-controlled, return to their respective neutral position. Neutral position is monitored by ’Hall’ sensor (+C1-B12).

148-640 001 en 6.2003

4 - 81

Autoconer 338

=A6

2

+E1-B14

1

3

D 521-23

4.5.5

Cradle Opener

The package is completed when the nose tail has been placed on the LH package flank. For depositing the package on the package conveyor belt the cradle opener (1) (cam-controlled) opens the opening lever (2) of the winding unit. The end position of the cradle opener is monitored by ’Hall’ sensor (+E1-B14). The package rolls, guided by package guide lever (3), on a swivel trough towards the package conveyor belt. Upon completed depositing of the package the cradle opener partly closes the cradle, in order to decrease the friction while the cradle is pushed down to cone/sleeve receiving position. At arrival in receiving position an empty cone/ sleeve is placed in the cradle by the cone/sleeve feeder arm. Cam-controlled, the cradle opener initially closes the cradle until the cone/sleeve is securely chucked. Subsequently the cradle opener returns to its neutral position.

4 - 82

148-640 001 8.0 en 6.2003

Autoconer 338

=A6 7

6 +C3-B32

4

5 8

3

1

2

5”/6”

3”/4”

D 521-48

4.5.6

Cradle Lift

When the cradle has been opened by the cradle opener, the cradle lifter (1), cam-controlled with adjoining linkage, moves forward, with its roller (2) lifting swivel trough (3) and package cradle to a point that the package (4) can roll onto the package conveyor belt, aided by the package guide lever. The cradle depressor lever pushes the cradle down towards cone/sleeve receiving position until pawl (5) contacts bolt (6). When the cone/sleeve is chucked, and the lower yarn end has been wound upon the cone/sleeve, the cradle lifter again briefly lifts the cradle a short distance; magnet valve (+C1-Y1) releases a pulse to air cylinder (7), releasing the pawl (5), and allowing the cone/sleeve to be lowered until contacting the yarn guide drum. The cradle lifter returns to its neutral position. This position is monitored by ’Hall’ sensor (+C3-B32), which must be actuated by magnet (8) in order to allow the doffer to start again.

148-640 001 en 6.2003

4 - 83

Autoconer 338

=A6

1

2

3 D 521-49

4.5.7

Depressor Lever

From its highest position (for package depositing), the package cradle (2) is pushed down to cone/sleeve receiving position by the cradle depressor lever (1). After completion of transfer tail winding the cradle depressor lever pushes cradle and cone/sleeve down against the yarn guide drum (3). The winding unit starts, and after a pre-determined period of time the depressor lever returns to neutral position.

4 - 84

148-640 001 8.0 en 6.2003

Autoconer 338

=A6

1

1

5

2

3

2 4

4 +C1-Y3 +C1-Y4

D 521-43

4.5.8

Cone/Sleeve feeder

With its gripper (2) the cone/sleeve feeder (1) grabs one cone or sleeve from the cone/sleeve magazine (3) for transfer to the package cradle. Cam-controlled, the gripper (2) moves towards the magazine. Pneumatically controlled by magnet valve +C1-Y3, finger (4) coses towards prism (5), grabbing the next cone/ sleeve from the magazine. Subsequently the gripper, holding the cone or sleeve, returns to its original position.

Finger (4) is controlled by the magnet valves. S +C1-Y3 ”Gripper closed”, and S +C1-Y4 ”Gripper open”. Modes of gripper finger (4):

Y3

Y4

Mode

Cam-controlled, feeder and gripper now move towards the package cradle, to insert the new cone or sleeve.

0

0

non-defined mode

In this position magnet valves +C1-Y3 and -Y4 place the finger (4) in ”hold” pressure, in order to allow lateral shifting of the cone or sleeve.

1

0

Finger closed (Cone/sleeve clamped)

0

1

Finger open

1

1

Finger ”holds” (Cone/sleeve can be shifted)

Upon closing of the package cradle, firmly chucking the cone or sleeve, finger (4), controlled by magnet valve +C1-Y3, releases the cone or sleeve. Feeder and gripper return to neutral position.

148-640 001 en 6.2003

4 - 85

Autoconer 338

=A6

1

4 4 6 +C3-M4

3

2

5

D 521-50

4.5.9

Cone/Sleeve Drive

The drive wheel (1) of the cone/sleeve drive motor (+C3-M4) rotates the cone/sleeve for the purpose of winding the transfer tail. The number of required transfer tail winds is selectable on the Informator. During transfer tail winding the clamping shears are actuated once again, moving the yarn guide plate somewhat from left to right in order to overwind (fix) the first wind. The cone/sleeve drive arm (2) is free-hinged, it tilts under its own weight to the cone/sleeve (3) when released by its control cam.

4 - 86

The yarn lifter leaves the transfer tail winding position and returns laterally to its neutral position. During this motion a few yarn winds are placed on the cone/sleeve, before the yarn lifter reaches its neutral position. Now the cradle depressor lever (4) pushes cradle and cone/ sleeve (3) against the yarn guide drum (5) for the purpose of slip-free drive of the cone/sleeve, while the cone/sleeve drive arm bears against stop (6). This in order to prevent simultaneous drive by yarn guide drum and drive arm. Controlled by its control cam the drive arm returns to its neutral position.

148-640 001 8.0 en 6.2003

Autoconer 338

4.5.10 Doffing Cycle Progression The progression of a doffing cycle by radial position of the cam package is listed on the following pages. Sensors listed in the table under ”Inputs”: Inscription Description Table

Diagram

B10

=A6+C1-B10

RH distance sensor

B11

=A6+C1-B11

Latch engaged

B12

=A6+C1-B12

Guide lever in neutral position

B13

=A6+C1-B13

Guide lever in bypass position

B14

=A6+E1-B14

Cradle opener in end position

B15

=A6+E1-B15

Yarn lifter in transfer tail position

B20

=A6+C2-B20

Package conveyor sensor

B21

=A6+C2-B21

Cone/sleeve magazine sensor

B30

=A6+C3-B30

LH distance sensor

B31

=A6+C3-B31

Cam package in neutral position

B32

=A6+C3-B32

Cradle lifter in neutral position

B33

=A6+C3-B33

Yarn lifter in neutral, threading, or on-drum position

Motors and valves listed In the table under ”Outputs”: Inscription Description Table

Diagram

K1

=A6+E1-D2

Relay on PCB ‘MB-Adapter-XW’ for reversal between patrol drive motor and cycling drive motor.

M1

=A6+C2-M1

Patrol drive

M2

=A6+C2-M2

Cycling drive

M3

=A6+C1-M3

Guide lever drive

M4

=A6+C3-M4

Cone/sleeve drive

Y1

=A6+C1-Y1

Disengage cradle lifter lock

Y2

=A6+C1-Y2

Disengage latch

Y3

=A6+C1-Y3

Cone/sleeve gripper closed

Y4

=A6+C1-Y4

Cone/sleeve gripper open

Y5

=A6+C1-Y5

Yarn lifter clamp closed

Y6

=A6+C1-Y6

Yarn lifter shears closed

148-640 001 en 6.2003

4 - 87

Autoconer 338

1

D 501-48

Control cams listed in the table under ”Cams” (from right to left, → 1):

Table (Inscription on cam)

Component

RAO 1

Cradle opener

SPF 2

Package guide

RAH 3 and 4

Cradle lifter

ZUB 5

Feeder housing

RAA 6

Cradle depressor lever

GRE 7

Feeder gripper

HAA 8

Cone/sleeve drive

FHA 9

Yarn lifter lateral

KRA 10

Nose tail lateral

KRR 11

Nose tail radial

FHG 12

Yarn lifter housing

FHK 14

Yarn lifter head

4 - 88

148-640 001 8.0 en 6.2003

Autoconer 338 Legend Radial position of Cam Package: ~ ”Degree”

-> The position in degrees depends on settings.

Statuses of Inputs and Outputs: 0

-> Sensor not actuated; output (motor, valve) switched OFF.

1

-> Sensor actuated; output switched ON.

1 ... 0

-> Sensor / motor actuated / switched ON for a certain period of time (or for a certain length, resp.), and switched OFF again.

0 ... 1

-> Sensor is actuated / switched ON after a certain time (or after a certain length, resp.).

M2 = n1

-> Nominal RPM of the cycling drive.

M2 = n2

-> RPM of cycling drive for slow start-up (n2 less than n1).

M2 = n3

-> RPM of cycling drive for positioning (n3 less than n2).

M-BUS

-> Data exchange via machine bus with the named participant (These actions are shaded grey in the table).

Radial Position

Inputs

Outputs

M-BUS Informator M-BUS Informator

M-BUS Informator

148-640 001 en 6.2003

The doffer is engaged on the requesting winding unit,and asks the Informator for doffing parameters (Doffing process, Nose tail, Transfer tail, Cradle depression).

Request for doffing release. Doffer display: Info 6 ”Waiting for doffing release from Informator!” Doffer release issued. Release is issued only if the package conveyor belt is in neutral position.

M-BUS Winding unit

M-BUS Winding unit

Function

Transmission of doffing parameters. M-BUS Informator

0°

Cam No.

Registering of the package doffer. Doffer display: Info 14 ”Waiting for doffer release by winding unit”. Winding unit is ready for doffing and transmits the package diameter. The winding unit’s Yellow lamp goes OFF. During the entire doffing cycle the doffer transmits a ”Livecheck” to the winding unit. The returns to Yellow light status automatically at interruption of the ”Livecheck” signal.

4 - 89

Autoconer 338

Radial Position

Inputs

Outputs

Cam No.

Function

B11 = 1

Y2 = 0

Latch engaged

B12 = 1

M3 = 0

Package guide in neutral; motor M3 deenergized.

B14 = 0

Cradle opener not in end position.

B15 = 0

Yarn lift not in transfer tail position.

B20 = 0

Package disposal (Package conveyor) vacant.

B31 = 1

Cycling drive in neutral.

B32 = 1

Y1 = 1

Cradle lift in neutral; cradle lift lock ON.

B33 = 1

Yarn lift in neutral. Y3 = 0 Y4 = 1

Feeder hand switched to ”Up”.

Y5 = 0

Yarn lift clamp OFF.

Y6 = 0

Yarn lift shears OFF.

M1 = 0

Patrol motor braking and being switched OFF.

K1 = 1

With a delay switching over from patrol motor to cycling motor (Power and rotor position sensor).

M2 = n1

Start doffing cycle, cycling drive ON at maximum RPM.

0°

M3 = 1 M3 = 1...0

2°

B12 = 1...0

Start of package guide lever: Motor M3 receives voltage (retaining function), subsequently the package guide lever is raised until it has left its neutral position (10°maximum). The package guide lever is lifted off its mechanical stop.

B31 = 1...0

With dropping flank of sensor ”Cycling linkage neutral B31” the cycling counter is initialized to 2°.

3° ... 18°

RAO1

Cradle opener bow moves to waiting position.

3° ... 31°

FHK14

Yarn lift head swivels down.

4 - 90

148-640 001 8.0 en 6.2003

Autoconer 338

Radial Position

Inputs

Outputs

Cam No.

Function

3° ... 39°

SPF2

3°... 28°

KRR11

Nose tail swivel bow swivels towards the yarn guide drum.

8° ... 38°

FHG12

Yarn lift housing swivels towards drum for yarn catching.

10°

B12 = 0

~15°

B33 = 0

Package guide housing swivels back.

Start of package guide lever: The package guide lever is moved to a higher position, in order to pass the winding unit.

M3 = 1...0

The yarn lift leaves neutral position. M-BUS Winding unit

Yarn search: Setting of yarn tension.

15° M-BUS Winding unit ~29°

Setting of yarn tension completed.

B 33 = 1

35° ... 70°

FHG12

The yarn lifter has reached the position on the drum.

KRA10

Swivel bow swivels to yarn transfer position.

38°

M2 = n3

Cycling speed reduced for positioning.

40°

M2 = 0

Cycling dwell for yarn search. Process: Yarn search.

40°

M-BUS Winding unit

40°

M2 = n1

For yarn search: Drum drive motor ON. Start cycle. Cycling drive ON at maximum RPM.

43°...70°

FHG12

Yarn lift housing swivels back to neutral position, for yarn lifting and unthreading from drum guide groove and deflection plate.

49°...78°

FHK14

Yarn lift head swivels up, for yarn lifting and unthreading from drum guide groove and deflection plate.

FHG12

The yarn lifter has left the position on the drum.

~50°

148-640 001 en 6.2003

B 33 = 0

4 - 91

Autoconer 338

Radial Position

Inputs

Outputs

Cam No.

M3 = 1...0

Start of package guide lever: Package guide lever being positioned behind winding unit. Position depends on package diameter. During this motion the package guide lever passes through its neutral position between appr. 53° and 62° (B12 = 1).

50° B12 = 0...1 B12 = 1...0 ~60°

B33 = 1

Yarn lift arriving in neutral.

72°... 94°

KRA10

79°...113°

GRE7 M-BUS Winding unit

81° 81

Function

M-BUS Winding unit

Swivel bow with yarn swivels back next to the package for winding the nose tail. Feeder hand dips into cone/sleeve magazine grabbing a new cone or sleeve resp. Fixing of yarn before nose winding (Drum motor runs): After package revolutions setting: Confirmation. No. of package revolutions completed.

M-BUS Winding unit M-BUS Winding unit

Yarn search: Drum motor OFF. Drum stopped.

92°

M2 = n3


94°

M2 = 0

Cycling dwell. Process: Placing Nose winds (Sehne).


Nose winds: Setting of yarn tension [Value: Sehne (Nose winding) tension code]. Setting of yarn tension completed.

94° M-BUS Winding unit M-BUS Winding unit 94°

4 - 92

Drum motor ON for placing nose winds (Sehne). Package rotates appr. 12°. Drum stopped.

M2 = n1

Start cycle. Cycling drive ON at maximum RPM.

148-640 001 8.0 en 6.2003

Autoconer 338

Radial Position

Inputs

Outputs

Cam No.

Function

95°...113°

FHG12

Yarn lift housing swivels partially towards drum, in order to have the yarn end shorter after cutting.

94°...123°

KRA10

Swivel bow swivels back to package ejection position.

97°...109°

FHK14

Yarn lift head continues moving up, for yarn cutting.

FHG12

The yarn lift leaves neutral position.

~100°

B33 = 0

110°

112°

M2 = n3


M2 = 0

Cycling dwell. Process: Yarn end placing on package circumference.

Y6 = 1

Yarn being cut and clamped. Feeder hand switched to ”Retain”. With a delay the feeder hand is switched to ”Closed”.

Y3 = 1 Y4 = 1...0

Winding up of yarn end. Drum drive motor ON for some package revolutions.

M-BUS Winding unit 112° 112 M-BUS Winding unit 112°

No. of package revolutions completed. Drum motor stopped. M2 = n1


117°...149°

GRE7

118°...151°

KRA10

123°...151°

KR11

Swivel bow ejects package.

127°...149°

RAO1

Cradle opener lever moves forward to end position opening the package cradle.

148-640 001 en 6.2003

Feeder hand moves back with new cone/sleeve. Nose winding lever returns to neutral.

4 - 93

Autoconer 338

Radial Position

Inputs

Outputs

RAH3 RAH4

135°...168° ~135°

B32 = 0

Function Cradle lift moves up, lifting cradle and swivel plate, to allow the package to be guided to the rear. Cradle lift leaves neutral.

142°

M-BUS Winding unit

144°

M2 = n2

~133°

Cam No.

Package brake ON. After 70 ms ”Package brake OFF” is transmitted to the winding unit. Cycling drive ON at RPM for slow start-up. Cradle opener arrives in end position. Due to activation of the package brake at 142° the cradle opener could briefly be pushed out of its end position.

B14 = 1

149°...177°

ZUB5 GRE7

Feeder hand housing and suction pipe move towards the package cradle.

149°...167°

RAO1

Cradle opener bow moves back slightly, in order to reduce friction during cradle depression or cradle lowering, resp.

151°...175°

KRA10

Swivel bow returns to doffer housing, resuming neutral position.

M3 = 1...0

Package guide lever guides the package onto the conveyor belt. Start and stop of the package guide lever depends on package diameter: Package diameter 0 ... 149 mm = Start at 153° Package diameter 150 ... 320 mm = Start at 153 ... 163° Depending on diameter the package guide lever arrives in neutral at appr. 180° (B12 = 1).

153°...163° B12 = 0...1

~153°

B14 = 0

Cradle opener leaves its end position.

161°...199°

FHG12

Yarn lift housing again swivels towards yarn guide drum in order to position the yarn in front of the package adapter.

166°...197°

RAA6

Cradle depressor lever pushes cradle down to cone/sleeve receiving position.

170°...195°

KRR11

Swivel bow returns to neutral position.

180 °

4 - 94

Y1 = 0

The valve controlling the cradle depression lock is deactivated.

148-640 001 8.0 en 6.2003

Autoconer 338

Radial Position

Inputs

Outputs

Cam No.

Function

181°...207°

RAH3 RAH4

Cradle lift returns to cone/sleeve receiving position.

181°...202°

FHK14

Yarn lift head moves slightly down, in order to place the yarn in front of the package adapter.

FHG12

The yarn lifter has reached the position on (above) the drum. (radially)

RAO1

Cradle opener bow opens the cradle completely.

FHA9

The yarn lifter has left the position on (above) the drum. (axially)

201°...222°

ZUB5

Feeder housing completes its motion towards the cradle.

201°...232°

GRE7

Feeder hand feeds cone/sleeve to cradle in receiving position.

182°

B 33 = 1

194°...212° 195°

~205°

B 33 = 0

B14 = 1 B33 = 1

Cradle opener arrives in end position. Yarn lift arrives in position for cone/sleeve receiving.

208°...228°

RAA6

Cradle depressor lever moves into position to bypass the cone/sleeve drive.

220°

Y5 = 1

Yarn lift clamp switched ON.

224°

Y4 = 1

Feeder hand switched to ”Retain”.

224°...245°

FHA9

M3 = 1...0

For monitoring the package guide lever moves to bypass position. During this motion the package guide lever leaves its neutral position at appr. 200° (B12 = 0) and moves into its bypass position at appr. 250° (B13 = 1).

225° B12 = 1...0 B13 = 0...1 225°...246°

RAO1

228° ~230°

148-640 001 en 6.2003

M2 = n1 B14 = 0 B33 = 0

Simultaneously with the cradle opener bow the yarn lift moves to the left until a stop is contacted in order to clamp the yarn between adapter and cone/sleeve.

Cradle opener bow moves back sufficiently to allow the cradle to close, chucking the cone/sleeve. Cycling drive ON at maximum RPM. Cradle opener leaves its end position. Yarn lift leaves the position for cone/sleeve receiving.

4 - 95

Autoconer 338

Radial Position

Inputs

~235°

B15 = 1

Outputs

Cam No.

Function Yarn lift arrives in position for transfer tail. (Monitoring yarn lift clamp).

243°...272°

GRE7

Feeder hand moves back partly.

244°

Y6 = 0

The yarn is clamped between cone/sleeve and adapter, and is no longer retained by the yarn lift shears.

247°

Y3 = 0

Feeder hand switched to ”OPEN”.

247°

M-BUS Winding unit

Package brake ON. After 70 ms ”Package brake OFF” is transmitted to the winding unit.

250°...273°

RAA6

252°

M2 = n2

253°...272°

Cradle depressor lever again moves down, placing the drive wheel on the cone/sleeve. Cycling drive ON at RPM for slow start-up.

ZUB5

Feeder housing moving back somewhat. Feeder hand switched to ”Retain”. With a delay the feeder hand is switched to ”Closed”.

264°

Y3 = 1 Y4 = 1...0

272°

M2 = n3


274°

M2 = 0

Cycling dwell. Process: Winding of transfer tail.


Setting of yarn tension.

274° M-BUS Winding unit

4 - 96

Transfer tail: Yarn tension setting (Value: Transfer tail tension code).

Setting of confirmation for No. of revolutions of cone/sleeve. Confirmation 1: at 1.5 package revolutions. Confirmation 2: when reaching value ”Transfer tail tension code”.

148-640 001 8.0 en 6.2003

Autoconer 338

Radial Position

Inputs

274° 274°

Cam No.

M4 = 1

Confirmation 1 reached. Y6 = 1

Yarn lift shears ON (Winds displacement).

M-BUS Winding unit

Confirmation 2 reached (Value: Transfer tail tension code). After placing the transfer tail: - Cone/sleeve drive is switched OFF. - Yarn lift clamp is switched OFF. - Start cycle. Cycling drive ON at maximum RPM. - Yarn lift shears are switched OFF. - Yarn lift leaves the transfer tail position.

M4 = 0 Y6 = 0 M2 = n1 Y5 = 0

274°

Function Cone/sleeve drive ON (Transfer tail winding).

M-BUS Winding unit

274° 274°

Outputs

B15 = 0 M-BUS Winding unit

Setting of yarn tension to winding tension.

274° M-BUS Winding unit

Winding tension set.

275°...303°

FHA9

Yarn lift returning laterally to neutral.

SPF2

Package guide housing returns from bypass position to neutral. During this motion the package guide lever leaves its bypass position at appr. 285° (B13 = 0) and moves into its neutral position at appr. 305° (B12 = 1).

M3 = 1...0 276°...322°

B13 = 1...0 B12 = 0...1

285°

M4 = 1

288°...305° 290°

B 33 = 1

291°...318° 292°

148-640 001 en 6.2003

FHK14

Feeder housing moves up slightly.

FHA9

The yarn lifter has reached the position on (above) the drum. (axially)

FHG12

Yarn lift head returns to its neutral position.

M4 = 0

294°...305° 300°

Cone/sleeve drive switched ON.

B 33 = 0

Cone/sleeve drive switched OFF. RAH3 RAH4

Cradle lift approaches again in order to unlock itself.

FHG12

The yarn lifter has left the position on (above) the drum. (radially)

4 - 97

Autoconer 338

Radial Position

Inputs

Outputs

ZUB5 GRE7

300°...324° 302°

M4 = 1

302°...324°

B 12 = 1

Function Feeder housing and suction pipe return to neutral. Cone/sleeve drive switched ON.

RAO1

304° 305°

Cam No.

Cradle opener bow returns to neutral.

Y1 = 1

Valve for cradle locking being switched ON.

M3 = 0

Package guide lever drive is switched OFF, in order to allow the guide lever to drop against its stop (neutral position) by its own weight.

305°...326°

RAH3 RAH4

Cradle lift returns to neutral.

307°...324°

FHK14

Yarn lift head again moves down somewhat. Option: Yarn end shorter at start-up without transfer tail.

~310°

B33 = 1

320° ~320° 325°

Yarn lift arrives in neutral. M4 = 0

B32 = 1

Cone/sleeve drive switched OFF. Cradle lift arrives in neutral.

M2 = n3


Y3 = 0 Y4 = 1

Feeder hand switched ”OPEN”.

M2 = 0

Cycling dwell. Process: Winding unit start with cradle depression.

327°

327°

M-BUS Winding unit

Cycling linkage waits until the cradle depression time is completed. Value: Cradle depression time.

327° M2 = n1

4 - 98

Winding unit, start winding operation.


148-640 001 8.0 en 6.2003

Autoconer 338

Radial Position

Inputs

Outputs

Cam No.

Function

329°...357°

RAA6

Cradle depressor lever returns to neutral, together with the cone/sleeve drive.

330°...357°

FHK14

Yarn lift head turns back to neutral.

357° ~358°

M2 = n3 B31 = 1

Cycling linkage arrives in neutral. M2 = 0

Cycling drive motor switched OFF; counter for radial position in degrees reset to Zero.

K1 = 0

With a delay, switching from cycling drive motor to patrol drive motor (Power and rotor position sensor).

360° 0°

360°

148-640 001 en 6.2003


M-BUS Winding unit

Logoff from winding unit. End of doffing cycle.

4 - 99

Autoconer 338

4.5.11 Status of Sensors The graph on the next page depicts the monitored statuses of the sensors D during patrol operation, and D during the doffing cycle. In addition, the No. of the applicable failure message (→ 10.5) is indicated, if the status doesn’t match the depicted one. Also, the sensor description includes the allocated indication in menu “Data display“ (→ 4.5.18). Example: Latch engaged B11 (Input 1: 0) In menu “Data display“ the status of sensor B11 listed under position “0“ in “Inputs 1 status“. Note: D Yarn lifter in transfer tail position (B15): valid only if specification “RH winding” had been selected. No monitoring takes place if specification “LH winding” had been selected. D Yarn lifter in neutral/threading position (B33): Deviating statuses of the sensor, depending on selecting of “RH/LH winding”. Legend Status ’Sensor not actuated’

Status ’Sensor actuated’

Status ’Sensor briefly actuated’

Any sensor status Nr. = No. of failure message issued if the sensor status doesn’t match the depicted one (→ 10.5). D 501-07

4 - 100

148-640 001 8.0 en 6.2003

148-640 001 en 6.2003

B12

B13

B14

Guide lever Neutral (Input 1:3)

Guide lever Bypass pos. (Input 1:4)

Cradle opener End pos. (Input 1:9)

B21

B31

B32

Cone/Sleeve magazine Sensor (Input 2:8)

Cycling linkage Neutral (Input 1:1)

Cradle lift Neutral (Input 1:8)

Yarn lift B33 (LH winding) Neutral-/Receiving pos. B33 (RH winding) (Input 1:5)

B20

Package conveyor Sensor (Input 2:6)

Yarn lift B15 Transfer tail pos. (Input 1:7) (for RH winding only)

B11

D 501-40

Latch engaged (Input 1:0)

Doffing Cycle - Radial position of cycling linkage (cam package)

Patrol operation

Autoconer 338

4 - 101

Autoconer 338

4.5.12 Information and Failure Display The display (1) is shown either in English or in German. Selection of the language is determined by the Informator:

1

Informator user guidance in German = German; for all other languages = English.

2

Normally [Turn switch (2) in RH position on“Automatic operation“], the display indicates one of two possible statuses: D Patrol operation, or

3

3

D Cycling operation.

4

In addition, the display indicates information and failure messages.

D 560-01

Patrol operation Display during patrol operation: Automatic Anf: 12

11:56 No.: 22

Automatic; Clock time (Hour : Minute) Requesting wdg. unit (e.g.: 12); current position (e.g. wdg. unit 22) Cycling operation Display during cycling operation:

Automatic A: 128°

4 - 102

11:56 No.: 22

Automatic; Clock time (Hour : Minute) Radial position of cycling linkage (Cam package) (e.g. 128 degrees); current position (e.g. wdg. unit 22).

148-640 001 8.0 en 6.2003

Autoconer 338

4.5.13 Failure Messages For failure messages the two keys (3) flash in RED. The display always begins with: “Failure“. Additional failure message display takes place at the Informator. 1

A listing of failure messages is provided in chapter 10 of the manual.

2

Failure message confirmation should be performed only after the producing failure has been remedied: D Actuate key “ENTER“ (4). 3

3

D Only for failures requiring initialization of the doffer: Set turn switch (2) on “Manual operation“. Manually return doffer linkage to neutral positions (→ 4.5.15).

4

D 560-01

Failure message example: Failure: 60 No compressed air!

No.: 15

Failure No. 60; current position (e.g. wdg. unit 15) Failure message (e.g.: No compressed air!). The text is scrolled on display if the message length exceeds 16 signs.

4.5.14 Information Display Informational displays take place if an external temporary event obstructs the doffer in its functions. Generally these displays begin with “Info“, they are displayed only on the doffer. Info: 2 No cone/sleeve in magazine!

No.: 15

Message structure: Information No.; current position (e.g. wdg. unit 15) Text of information display (e.g. ’No cone/sleeve in magazine!’). The text is scrolled on display if the message length exceeds 16 signs. A listing of all information displays is provided on the next page.

148-640 001 en 6.2003

4 - 103

Autoconer 338

No. -

-

-

1

2

4 - 104

Text of Information Display

Reason / Trigger

Data download not completed!

Data download not completed! Message at program start. Doffer not yet on operation standby.

Doffer without program!

Doffer without program! The display takes place while the program is newly loaded (Program download). Note: If the doffer is switched free of voltage after clearing of the program, or before program transmission is terminated, this message is NOT displayed!

-

Display: Flashing cursor Doffer not on standby. The doffer program must be newly transmitted. Display takes place after clearing of the program, and restarting the machine.

Start delay!

Start delay! A distance sensor has been actuated subsequently the doffer has engaged. Repeated automatic start of the doffer in actuation direction is delayed 5 seconds.

No cone/sleeve in the magazine!

No cone/sleeve in magazine! The doffer fails to detect a cone/sleeve in the magazine. Replenish the magazines! Notes: – If no other doffer request is registered: The doffer remains on this winding unit while displaying the message. When placing an empty cone/sleeve into the magazine the doffing cycle begins within the next minute. – If an other doffer request is registered: The doffer approaches the next winding unit, the message is cleared from the screen. If several winding units are without cones/sleeves in their magazines and no other doffer request is registered, the doffer patrols these winding units cyclically at appr. 1 minute per wdg. unit, checking the status of the magazines. Sensor B21 “Cone/sleeve feeler” is not actuated.

148-640 001 8.0 en 6.2003

Autoconer 338

No.


Reason / Trigger Conveyor belt occupied! Remove packages! 7. Prior to beginning the doffing cycle the doffer has detected a package on the package conveyor belt behind this winding unit: – If no other doffer request is registered: The doffer remains on this winding unit while displaying the message. When emptying the conveyor belt the doffing cycle begins within the next minute.

3

Space on belt occupied!

– If an other doffer request is registered: The doffer approaches the next winding unit, the message is cleared from the screen. If the conveyor belt is occupied on several winding units, and no other doffer request is registered, the doffer patrols these winding units cyclically at appr. 1 minute per wdg. unit, checking the status of the conveyor belt. Sensor B20 Package feeler is actuated. 8. The doffer has started the doffing cycle. During the monitoring width it detects an object on the package conveyor belt. The doffer stops the doffing cycle and displays for 5 seconds the Information “Conveyor belt occupied!“: – The object is removed during this time: The information on display disappears the doffing cycle continues. – The object has not been removed: The doffer assumes Failure status; failure message 45.

148-640 001 en 6.2003

4 - 105

Autoconer 338

No.


Reason / Trigger

4

Conveyor belt not in neutral!

Conveyor belt not in neutral! The doffer is prevented from doffing because the package conveyor belt is not in neutral. Dispatch all full packages from the belt (Return to neutral!).

5

-

vacant.

6

Waiting for doffer release by Informator!

Waiting for doffer release by Informator! The doffer has engaged on the requesting wdg. unit. Before beginning the doffing cycle the doffer awaits release by the Informator. Monitoring the interlock with the package conveyor.

7

-

vacant.

During doffing cycle latch not engaged!

During doffing cycle latch not engaged! The doffer has to perform a doffing cycle initiated “manually“. This information is displayed for 15 seconds if the latch is not engaged. Sensor “Latch engaged” B11 is not actuated. Note: Delay manual doffing until the doffer is engaged.

Machine switched OFF!

Machine switched OFF! After de-energizing the machine on (=A1+P1-S2) a doffing cycle in progress is finished or a patrol journey is terminated. Subsequently this information appears until the machine is free of voltage. During this period of time the doffer is inoperational.

8

9

4 - 106

148-640 001 8.0 en 6.2003

Autoconer 338

No.

10

11

12

13

14


Reason / Trigger

No active winding unit in patrol direction!

No active winding unit in patrol direction! The doffer is to be moved laterally through actuation of a distance sensor. The doffer stops because it fails to detect an active* winding unit in patrol direction (end of service range). * Winding unit has no connection to the machine bus, or it is free of voltage.

Finish doffing cycle manually!

Finish doffing cycle manually! The compressed air had failed (→ 10.5; failure message No. 60 “No compressed air“).This message appears if after compressed air restoration the joining linkage position is between appr. 112° and 274°. The doffing cycle must be completed manually.

Cradle opener not in end position!

Cradle opener not in end position! At monitoring of the cradle opener position this message is issued first. Failure message 35 is issued if the cradle opener fails to reach – end position within 3 seconds. – The information display disappears and the doffing cycle is continued if the cradle opener arrives in end position within the 3 seconds.

Init-patrol to the valid service range!

Init patrol to the valid service range! If the doffer is situated outside of its service range, it travels to its service range at reduced (engaging) speed. This display appears during this travel.

Waiting for doffer release by winding unit!

Waiting for doffer release by winding unit! For a doffing cycle with winding unit (or winding unit function, resp.) the doffer waits until the winding unit assumes status “Doffing“ and subsequently issues the doffer release. This message is displayed during the waiting period.

148-640 001 en 6.2003

4 - 107

Autoconer 338

4.5.15 Entries / Inquiries Entries and inquiries can be performed via keyboard (2) as long as the turn switch (1) is set on “Manual“ (to the left).

e 1

Entries are possible with password only, and they should be made by special-trained personnel only. False handling and/or false entries lead to malfunctions and/or equipment damage!

Operation From left to right, the keys control the following functions: 2

“to the left“; “to the right“; “up“; “down“ and “ENTER“ (entry confirmation).

D 560-01

4 - 108

148-640 001 8.0 en 6.2003

Autoconer 338 Menu control The menu for entries / inquiries is composed of 7 main items, each one of which opens access to an other level. The 7 main items of level 1 are: D Manual operation 1

Menu “Manual operation“ contains entries for manual control of the doffer’s cycling linkage (Toggle operation). D Data display Menu “Data display“ displays the statuses of all inputs and outputs, and other data stored by the doffer. D Parameters In this menu parameters required for package doffing can be reviewed, and, after entry of the key code, they can be altered. The entries are also registered, simultaneously, by the Informator.

D 560-01

D Specification From this menu inquiries can be made concerning the equipment specifications of the doffer. D Key code Entry of password “Master key” – allows changes of entries in master menu “Parameters”, and – activates the major items “Master data”and “Master function”. D Master data This menu can be selected only after entry of the key code. This menu indicates winding unit - related statuses and other position data. D Master function This menu can be selected only after entry of the key code. This menu allows control of individual valves for test purpose. The illustration on the next page depicts the menu layout.

148-640 001 en 6.2003

4 - 109

Autoconer 338

1

Manual doffing with wdg. unit

Main menu Manual operation

3

Manual doffing with wdg. unit XXX

2

4 Main menu Data display

INP1: 1234567890 XXXXXXXXX

Main menu Parameters

Sehne Topsehne Topsehne code XX Topsehne Code XX Topsehne Code XX Code Code XX XX

Main menu Specification

Prog. Prog. TT/MM/JJ TT/MM/JJ V:V:Prog. X.XX TT/MM/JJ V: X.XX X.XX

Main menu Key code

Key code ->> mmmm <<-

Sehne code XX

4

Wdg: BHVFA Rahmenheberverk Rahmenheberverk XX YYYYY Ventil Y1 Ventil Y1==XX

Select position

Change value Wdg: BHVFA XX YYYYY

4 Main menu Master function

5

Change value

Key code ->> MMMM <<-

4 Main menu Master data

Toggle drive

Cradle lift lock Rahmenheberverk Rahmenheberverk Valve Y1 = =X X Rahmenheberverk Ventil Y1 Rahmenheberverk Ventil Y1 Rahmenheberverk Ventil Y1==X X Ventil VentilY1 Y1==XX

Change value

Cradle lift lock Valve Y1 = X

4

ON / OFF

D161-14e

4.5.16 Menu Layout ➀ The doffer has been switched to “Manual operation“,

In menu “Key code”: Direction keys “left“ and “right“ select the entry position. Direction keys “top“ and “bottom“ change the number at the entry position.

the first menu item of the main menu is displayed.

➁

Select a menu using the “up“ or “down“ keys. Then actuate key“to the right“.

➂

The individual dialogs of the selected menu can be selected via the “down“ or “up“ keys.

➃

Activation of the function in the selected dialog:

In menu “Master data”: Direction keys “top“ and “bottom“ change the selection of the winding unit No. Menu “Master function”: Direction keys “top“ and “bottom“ switch the valves ON and OFF.

– Actuate key “ENTER“. The function’s value begins to flash. – Menu “Manual operation”: Using direction key “up“ the doffing cycle can be performed in toggle operation. Menu “Parameters”: Value can be changed via “down“ or “up“ keys. Each change is instantly registered by the Informator.

4 - 110

– Confirm the entry with “ENTER“ key.

➄

Direction key “left“ returns to main menu “Manual operation”.

148-640 001 8.0 en 6.2003

Autoconer 338

4.5.17 Menu “Manual Operation“ “Manual Operation“ allows the manual performance of a doffing cycle: D With winding unit A doffing cycle with all required winding unit functions takes place.

1

D Without winding unit A doffing cycle without the required winding unit functions takes place. The doffing cycle can be performed with or without a delivery package. If a package is in place, the package diameter can be entered under “Diameter setting”.

2

Manual doffing D Turn switch (1) is set on “Manual operation“.

D 560-01

D The doffer is engaged on a winding unit. Pulling the latch releases the doffer (→ 2.5.4). D Through lateral shifting, position the doffer on the winding unit on which the manual doffing cycle is to be performed. Main menu Manual operation

D Select dialog “Manual doffing with winding unit“ or “Manual doffing without (w/o) winding unit“ (explanation below). D Actuate key “ENTER“ (2). The latch is released. D Within 15 seconds, laterally shift the doffer until it engages (latch engaged) on the winding unit. D Proceed to perform the manual doffing cycle (with or without wdg. unit).

Manual doffing with winding unit

Manual doffing with winding unit XXX°

Note: If the winding unit is not stopped with “Yellow light”, this takes place automatically when activating “Manual doffing”. Actuate the “up“ key for a manual doffing cycle in toggle operation. The doffer cycle can be interrupted by releasing the key. Caution: A started doffing cycle must be completed before leaving the dialog. The current radial position of the cycling linkage is indicated under “XXX°“.

Manual doffing without winding unit

Nominal package diameter

Manual doffing without winding unit XXX°

Procedure identical to “...with winding unit“.

Nominal package diameter XXX mm

Here the package diameter can be entered prior to performing “Manual doffing without winding unit”, as the winding unit will not transmit this value. This value influences package guidance.

148-640 001 en 6.2003

4 - 111

Autoconer 338

4.5.18 Menu “Data display“

Main Menu Data display

ON 1:

Menu “Data display“ allows inquiries in respect to the statuses of sensors, light barriers, magnet valves, and of the radial positions of the cycling linkage (cam package). 1234567890 XXXXXXXXXX

Status of inputs 1 The detected statuses are listed under position Nos. 1 ... 0: “X“ = 0: Sensor not actuated “X“ = 1: Sensor actuated

ON 2:

1234567890 XXXXXXXXXX

Position

Sensor

Description

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 0

B31

Linkage in neutral position vacant Package guide in neutral pos. Package guide in bypass pos. Yarn lift in neutral-/receiving pos. vacant Yarn lift in transfer tail pos. Cradle lift in neutral pos. Cradle opener in end pos. Latch engaged

B12 B13 B33 B15 B32 B14 B11

Status of inputs 2 The detected statuses are listed under position Nos. 1 ... 0: “X“ = 0: Sensor not actuated “X“ = 1: Sensor actuated Position

Sensor

Description

1*

H1

2*

H2

3*

H3

4*

L/R

5 6

B20

7 8

B21

9

B30

0

B10

Rotor pos.sensor patrol / cycling motor* Rotor pos.sensor patrol / cycling motor* Rotor pos.sensor patrol / cycling motor* Rotary direction patrol / cycling motor* vacant Package sensor Sensing range 200 ...540 mm: 0 = No object detected 1 = Object detected vacant Cone / Sleeve sensor 0 = Sensor not actuated 1 = Sensor actuated LH Distance sensor 0 = Sensor not actuated 1 = Sensor actuated 2 = Sensor defective 3 = Sensor missing RH Distance sensor same as “9“

* ref. to notes on next page.

4 - 112

148-640 001 8.0 en 6.2003

Autoconer 338 Notes concerning “Status inputs 2“, Position 1 ... 4 D The doffer is in patrol operation: The statuses of patrol drive motor M1 are shown under position 1 ... 4. D The doffer is in doffing operation: (i.e. radial position of cam package more than 0°, yet less than 360°): The statuses of cycling drive motor M2 are shown under position 1 ... 4. Signal sequence for positions 1 ... 3 The following table is passed-through three times for one revolution of the motor shaft. D The motor shaft turns clockwise: The table is passed-through from top to bottom. D The motor shaft turns counter-clockwise: The table is passed-through from bottom to top.

Position Sensor

Signal Signalsequence

148-640 001 en 6.2003

1

2

3

H1

H2

H3

1

0

1

1

0

0

1

1

0

0

1

0

0

1

1

0

0

1

4 - 113

Autoconer 338

Output:

1234567890 XXXXXXXXXX

Status of outputs The detected statuses are listed under position Nos. 1 ... 0: “X“ = 0: Valve solenoid not actuated “X“ = 1: Valve solenoid actuated

US-sensor distance

Position

Sol.

Description

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 0

Y1 Y2 Y3 Y4 Y5 Y6

Cradle lift lock Latch release Feeder hand closed Feeder hand open Yarn lift clamp Yarn lift shears vacant vacant vacant vacant

Supersonic sensor, distance measurement XXX mm

XXX = Length dimension in mm. Shortest distance between supersonic sensor and object. 000 = Object in indefinably close range (< 200 mm). ### = Object in indefinably close range (< 200 mm) or outside of the measuring range (999 mm), or sensor not connected, or defective.

Winding unit-number --> XX <--

Service range beginning: XX

Winding unit number XX =

Winding unit No. detected by doffer.

00 =

Via the Infra-Red receiver the doffer receives no data, or false data from the winding unit.

## =

Received value is more than 99.

Service range beginning Beginning of the doffer’s service range (Entered on the Informator). XX =

Service range ending: XX

Service range ending End of the doffer’s service range (Entered on the Informator). XX =

Measured package diameter XXX mm

First wdg. unit No. of the service range.

Last wdg. unit No. of the service range.

Measured package diameter At the start of a doffing cycle the winding unit reports the package diameter to the doffer. XXX = Diameter in mm.

4 - 114

148-640 001 8.0 en 6.2003

Autoconer 338


4.5.19 Menu “Parameters“ D Parameter changes are permitted only after a valid password has been entered for the master key code in menu “Key code” (→ 4.5.21). D All parameter changes made on the doffer are simultaneously registered by the Informator. D For Multi-Lot Processing (MLP) by one doffer the changed parameters are allotted to the lot being processed by the winding unit on which the doffer is presently engaged. D As the doffer automatically engages on a winding unit, it requests the parameters valid for this winding unit (Lot). With manual shifting and engaging these values are not actualized! D Parameter changes – Actuate the “ENTER“ key; the value to be changed begins to flash. – Change the value on keys “up“ or “down“ as required. – Confirm the change on key “ENTER“.

Sehne Code XX

Sehne code Change of the package rotation angle for placing the yarn on the package face (Higher value = larger angle). Value range = Standard value = Value 0 =

Sehne Tension Code XXX

Sehne tension code An entry change alters the pressure of the tension disc, therefore it influences the rigidity of the Sehne (Higher value = Tighter Sehne). Value range = Standard value = Value 0 =

148-640 001 en 6.2003

1 ...16 8 Yarn end placed on package circumference.

0 ...100 1 Sehne tension is identical to the winding tension adjusted on the Informator.

4 - 115

Autoconer 338

Transfer tail winds XX

Transfer tail winds Entry of the desired No. of transfer tail winds. Value range = Standard value = value 0 =

Sehne tension code tension code XXX

Sehne tension code An entry change alters the pressure of the tension disc, therefore it influences the rigidity of the Sehne (Higher value = Tighter Sehne). Value range = Standard value = Value 0 =

Cradle depression time XX s

0 ...100 30 Transfer tail tension is identical to the winding tension adjusted on the Informator.

Cradle depression time Entry of cradle depression time in seconds after start-up of a newly chucked cone/sleeve. Value range = Standard value =

4 - 116

0, 3 ... 8 6 No transfer tail

0 ... 16 3

148-640 001 8.0 en 6.2003

Autoconer 338

4.5.20 Menu “Specification“

Main menu Specification

Menu Specifications (Bauzustand) displays the program version of the doffer’s electronic circuitry, and the maximum patrol range of the doffer.

Data of the program Progr. V: X.XX

DD/MM/YY

DD/MM/YY = X.XX =

Program generation date Program version

Doffer’s No.

X-Doffer Nr: X

Display of the number assigned to this doffer within the machine. Doffer No.1 is always on the drive end. Setting takes place on PCB ’Operation XW’ (K.Bedienung XW).

Service range beginning: XX

Service range beginning Mechanical max. service range beginning, limited by the length of the doffer’s flextrack (Established on the Informator). XX =

Service range ending: XX

Service range ending Mechanical max. service range end, limited by the length of the doffer’s flextrack (Established on the Informator). XX =

Y X

First winding unit No. of the max. service range

Transfer tail:

Last winding unit No. of the max. service range

Transfer tail Entered specification of the transfer tail mechanics. Y=

Without Cone/sleeve drive and yarn guide plate removed. With Standard package doffer.

X=

LH winding The transfer tail is placed on the LH side of the package cradle. RH winding The transfer tail is placed on the RH side of the package cradle.

148-640 001 en 6.2003

4 - 117

Autoconer 338 Main menu Key code

4.5.21 Menu “Key code“ The password to be entered is identical to the 4-digits password for the master key to be entered at the Informator. The package doffer is released if on the Informator a valid password for the master key has been entered. The following entry can be deleted.

e

After entry of the password for the master key: Uncontrolled entries in released menus lead to machine failures, with corresponding loss of productivity!

Entry of the password D allows changes of entries in main item “Parameters” . D releases main items “Master data” and “Master function”. Entry of password → next page

4 - 118

148-640 001 8.0 en 6.2003

Autoconer 338 Password entry Key code ->>> mmmm <<<-

Upon actuation of key “Enter” the display changes from”mmmm” to “MMMM” (”M” = Master key).

Key code ->>> MMMM <<<-

The cursor flashes at the 1st entry digit. The value for this digit is established with direction keys “Top” and “Bottom”. Subsequently, actuate key “Right”, then enter the value for the 2nd digit as explained before. After entry of the 4th value, actuate the “Enter” key.

Main menu Manual operation

If a wrong password has been entered for the master key, the display returns to main menu “Manual operation”.


If the correct password has beern entered, display changes to main menu “Parameters”. The menu is now released for entries/changes.

Main menu Master data

Also, the main items “Master data” and “Master function” are now released.

Main menu Master function

Main menu Key code

M

Note: Once the package doffer menu has been released for entries/changes, this is indicated in main item “Key code” by letter “M”. The release looses its validity, and has to be newly entered, D if no key has been actuated within 5 minutes, D if the doffer had been switched OFF, or D at each additional branching into menu “Key code”.

148-640 001 en 6.2003

4 - 119

Autoconer 338 Main menu Master data

4.5.22 Menu “Master data“ Main item “Master data” is displayed only if a valid password for the master key (→ 4.5.21) has been entered on the Informator or on the doffer! Winding unit-related statuses and other position data are shown in main menu “Master data”.

Sp.: BHVFA XX YYYYY

Winding unit status Display of the winding unit status. This status is transmitted by the Informator to the package doffer via machine bus. Sp.: XX

Sp.: BHVFA XX YYYYY

=

Winding unit No.

Position

Winding unit status

B= 1 0

Package conveyor activated Package conveyor not activated

H= 1 0

No empty cone / sleeve in magazine Empty cone / sleeve in magazine

V

Display vacant.

F= 1 0

Active request for doffer No request for doffer

A= 1 0

Winding unit active on machine bus. Wdg. unit has no connection to mach.bus

Setting D Upon actuation of key “Enter” number displays “X” and “Y” begin to flash. D Actuation of direction keys “top” or “bottom” changes the winding unit No. in increments of 1. D Actuation of direction keys “right” or “left” changes the winding unit No. in increments of 10.

Package guide lever XXX°

Package guide lever Present position of the package guide lever in angle degrees. The angle is measured from vertical to the rear. XXX° = Position in angle degrees (°)

US Switch threshold:

4 - 120

Ultrasonic sensor, switching threshold XXX mm

Indication of the climate-depending switching threshold of the ultrasonic sensor. If a distance shorter than the switching threshold is established by the sensor, then the package disposal range is evaluated as being occupied. Standard value, without climate compensation, is 525 mm.

148-640 001 8.0 en 6.2003

Autoconer 338

Main menu Master function

4.5.23 Menu “Master function“ Main item “Master function” is displayed only if a valid password for the master key (→ 4.5.21) has been entered on the Informator or on the doffer! The following test possibilities are provided for testing individual sub-assembly functions, and for the remedy of occurring failures.

e

If the statuses of valves are changed while the doffer’s cycling linkage is in neutral, the altered statuses revert to the original output statuses prior to the start of a doffing cycle. If the statuses of valves are changed while the doffer’s cycling linkage is not in neutral, the altered statuses do not revert to the original output statuses before the cycle is completed! Care must be taken that no blockages occur during the progression of the doffing cycle!

Change of valve statuses – Actuate key “ENTER“; the value to be changed begins to flash. – Alter the value on keys “up“ or “down“ as required. – Confirm the change on key “ENTER“. Cradle lift lock Valve Y1 = X

Cradle lift lock Valve Y1 X=

Latch unlocking Valve Y2 = X

Latch unlocking Valve Y2 X=

Feeder hand closed Valve Y3 = X

0 = OFF; 1 = ON

Feeder hand closed Valve Y3 X=

148-640 001 en 6.2003

0 = OFF; 1 = ON

0 = OFF; 1 = ON

4 - 121

Autoconer 338

Feeder hand open Valve Y4 = X

Yarn lift clamp Valve Y5 = X

Feeder hand open Valve Y4 X=

0 = OFF; 1 = ON

Y4

Y3

Feeder hand status

OFF OFF ON ON

OFF ON OFF ON

not defined closed open retain

Yarn lift clamp Valve Y5 X=

Yarn lift shears Valve Y6 = X

Yarn lift shears Valve Y6 X=

4 - 122

0 = OFF; 1 = ON

0 = OFF; 1 = ON

148-640 001 8.0 en 6.2003

Autoconer 338

5 Settings

148-640 001 en 6.2003

5-1

Autoconer 338

5-2

148-640 001 8.0 en 6.2003

Autoconer 338 5.0

General . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

5-7

5.0.1

Gauges and Fixtures . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

5-7

5.0.2

Compressed Air Cylinders . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

5-8

5.0.3

Coupling Rods . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

5-8

5.1

Machine Frame . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

5-9

5.1.1

Air pressure control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

5-9

5.1.2

Pressure guard . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

5 - 10

5.1.3


5 - 11

5.1.4

Sectional tube conveyor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

5 - 12

5.1.5

Package Conyeyor Belt . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

5 - 13

5.1.6

Package conveyor with intermediate storage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

5 - 14

5.1.7

Dust Extraction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

5 - 15

5.1.8


5 - 16

5.1.9

Travelling cleaner “Luwa” . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

5 - 22

5.2

Winding Unit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

5 - 25

5.2.1

Tilting-out of the Winding Unit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

5 - 25

5.2.2

Yarn Guide Drum . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

5 - 27

5.2.3

Traverse Displacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

5 - 28

5.2.4

Drum Lap Brush . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

5 - 29

5.2.5

Drum Lap Guard . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

5 - 29

5.2.6

Cradle Shaft (Standard) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

5 - 30

5.2.7

Cradle Shaft with propack . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

5 - 31

5.2.8

Drive Gear of propack . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

5 - 32

5.2.9

Cradle Pressure Compensation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

5 - 33

5.2.10

Package Cradle (Standard) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

5 - 34

5.2.11

Package Cradle (with taper acceleration) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

5 - 35

5.2.12

RH Package Adapter / Removal – Installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

5 - 37

5.2.13

Disassembly of brake ring . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

5 - 38

5.2.14

Removal of brake lining . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

5 - 38

5.2.15

Disassembly of bearing shaft and bearing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

5 - 39

5.2.16

Assembly of bearing shaft and bearing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

5 - 39

5.2.17

Assembly of brake ring . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

5 - 39

5.2.18

Exchange of the RH package adapter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

5 - 40

5.2.19

Suction Arm and Suction Pipe . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

5 - 40

5.2.20

Suction Arm . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

5 - 41

5.2.21

Suction arm stop . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

5 - 42

5.2.22

Explanations to the Setting Instructions of the Splicer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

5 - 43

5.2.23

Air pressure controller for splicing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

5 - 44

5.2.24

Preparation (opening) of the yarn ends . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

5 - 45

5.2.25

Positioning of Retainer Tubes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

5 - 46

148-640 001 en 6.2003

5-3

Autoconer 338 5.2.26

Splice Inspection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

5 - 47

5.2.27

Splice Testing using the Manual Tensile Strength Tester . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

5 - 48

5.2.28

Splicer Application Possibilities . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

5 - 49

5.2.29

Yarn guide plates on prism . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

5 - 55

5.2.30

Lid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

5 - 56

5.2.31

Feeder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

5 - 56

5.2.32

Shears and clamps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

5 - 57

5.2.33

Temperature Selection on Thermosplicer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

5 - 60

5.2.34

Knotter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

5 - 61

5.2.35

Precleaner . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

5 - 63

5.2.36

Pre-cleaner with hairiness nozzle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

5 - 63

5.2.37

Changing the hairiness nozzle for S- or Z-twisted yarn . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

5 - 64

5.3

Supply Package Change . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

5 - 67

5.3.1

Model RM / Bobbin Peg . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

5 - 67

5.3.2

Model RM / Bobbin Chute . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

5 - 68

5.3.3

Model RM / Unwinding Accelerator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

5 - 69

5.3.4

Model RM / Magazine Indexing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

5 - 70

5.3.5

Model RM / Yarn Clamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

5 - 71

5.3.6

Model RM / Transfer Finger . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

5 - 72

5.3.7

Model E / Package Creel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

5 - 73

5.3.8

Model RC / Magazine indexing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

5 - 74

5.3.9

Model RC / Magazine cylinder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

5 - 75

5.3.10

Model RC / Changing the magazine belt . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

5 - 76

5.3.11

Model RC / Yarn clamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

5 - 80

5.3.12

Model RC / Creel arbor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

5 - 82

5.3.13

Model RC / Creel-out Chute . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

5 - 83

5.3.14

Model RC / Transfer Finger . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

5 - 84

5.5

Package Doffer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

5 - 85

5.5.1

Alignment of the Superstructure for the Package doffer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

5 - 85

5.5.2

Mechanical limitation of patrol ranges, and mounting position of flextrack . . . . . . . . . . . . .

5 - 86

5.5.3

Flextrack . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

5 - 90

5.5.4

Coding of the Package Doffers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

5 - 91

5.5.5

Doffer Engaging Linkage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

5 - 92

5.5.6

Cradle Lift . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

5 - 93

5.5.7

Cone/sleeve drive . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

5 - 94

5.5.8

Cradle Opener . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

5 - 95

5.5.9

Yarn lifter – Neutral position with RH transfer tail . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

5 - 96

5.5.10

Yarn lifter – Neutral position with LH transfer tail . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

5 - 97

5.5.11

Yarn lifter – Yarn catch position for RH transfer tail . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

5 - 98

5.5.12

Yarn lifter – Yarn catch position for LH transfer tail . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

5 - 99

5-4

148-640 001 8.0 en 6.2003

Autoconer 338 5.5.13

Yarn lifter – Cone/Sleeve feed position with RH transfer tail . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

5 - 100

5.5.14

Yarn lifter – Cone/sleeve creeling position with LH transfer tail . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

5 - 101

5.5.15

Yarn lifter – Transfer tail winding position with RH transfer tail . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

5 - 102

5.5.16

Yarn lifter – Transfer tail position with LH transfer tail . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

5 - 104

5.5.17

Cone/Sleeve Feeder for RH Transfer Tail Winding . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

5 - 105

5.5.18

Cone/Sleeve Feeder for LH Transfer Tail Winding . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

5 - 107

5.5.19

Cone/Sleeve magazine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

5 - 109

5.5.20

Cone/Sleeve guides with RH transfer tail . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

5 - 110

5.5.21

Cone/Sleeve guides with LH transfer tail . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

5 - 111

5.5.22

Nose tail . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

5 - 112

5.5.23

Delivery Package Guiding . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

5 - 114

148-640 001 en 6.2003

5-5

Autoconer 338

5-6

148-640 001 8.0 en 6.2003

Autoconer 338

1

2

3 5

6

4 D 998-05

5.0

General

5.0.1

Gauges and Fixtures

For settings, maintenance, and repair we furnish, together with the tool kit, the following gauges and fixtures: 1 Drum puller for removal of the yarn guide drum from its shaft. 2 Round bar to hold the drum while being pulled. 3 Turn key for radial setting of the retainer tubes in the splicer’s distribution block. 4 Cleaning brush for the retainer tubes of the splicer. 5 Retainer rod for limiting the tilted-out position of the winding unit. 6 Pull-out fixture for the drum drive motor housing.

148-640 001 en 6.2003

5-7

Autoconer 338

5.0.2 4

1

Compressed Air Cylinders

This instruction applies to all compressed air cylinders (1) 3

a) Place piston in neutral position: The piston rod (2) is fully withdrawn.

2

L

b) Mount piston rod connector (3) in such fashion that the distance (L) in mm between the center of its hinge bore and the center of the opposite hinge bore of the cylinder is as required for the individual cylinder. 4

1

3

c) Secure this setting with counter nut (4).

2

L D 900-01

5.0.3 2

3

Coupling Rods

Coupling rods (1) as well as their universal joints (2 and 3) are provided with RH and LH thread. On the following pages of this chapter 5 the required lengths (L) are noted individually for each coupling rod.

1 L 2

3

1 L

D 900-02

5-8

148-640 001 8.0 en 6.2003

Autoconer 338

**

1

2

3

5.1

Machine Frame

5.1.1

Air pressure control

a

Maximum permitted input pressure for compressed air supply is 1,2 MPa*.

1. Pressure controllers in Control unit Illustrations for RH machine. For LH machines the pressure controllers are arranged in mirror image.

5

a) Setting of operational pressure on the pressure controllers: Controller (1) for yarn end opening (yellow) Controller (2) for splicing (white) Controller (3) for multijet (blue) Controller (4) for hairiness nozzle (black)

D 110-13

***

1

2

3

Pressure gauge (5) indicates the input pressure; with factory-adjusted pressure guard this input pressure must be at least 0,7 MPa*. Higher pressures (max. 1 MPa*) could be required depending on yarn properties (e.g. for linnen). For any adjustment the input pressure must be at least 0.05 MPa* higher than pre-set on the pressure guard. Customer-specific reduction of the input pressure is permitted (e.g. if compressor rating is limited), as long as the yarn parameters permit such reduction. Minimum input pressure, however, should not be less than 0.6 MPa*.

5

2. Pressure controllers on intermediate frames The pressure controllers located on the intermediate frames are used for pressure adjustments only when processing several lots simultaneously (Multi-lot processing [MPV]). 4 b) Setting of operational pressure on the pressure controllers:

D 110-14

Controller (6) for hairiness nozzle (black) Controller (7) for yarn end opening (yellow) Controller (8) for splicing (white)

6 7 8

D 110-19

148-640 001 en 6.2003

*

0,1 MPa is the equivalent of 1 bar.

**

Without hairiness nozzle

***

With hairiness nozzle

5-9

Autoconer 338

5.1.2

Pressure guard

Note:

1 3 2

5 4 D 110-07

The pressure guard (1) is factory-calibrated by the manufacturer at 0.65 MPa pressure. Depending on yarn properties higher pressures could be required (max. 1 MPa / e.g. for linnen). Customer-specific reduction of pressure is also possible (e.g. if compressor performance is limited) as long the yarn parameters permit such reduction. Minimum adjustable pressure is 0.55 MPa. a) Remove sealing wax from set screw (2). b) Loosen set screw appr. 2 revolutions. c) Turning spindle (3) adjust the desired pressure: Clockwise: Pressure reduction Counter-clockwise: Pressure increase d) Take pressure reading on scale (4). The center of indicator plate (5) must match the desired value on the scale. Note: In order to assure adequate splice quality the pressure adjusted on the pressure guard must be at least 0.05 MPa higher than the pressure shown on the pressure gauges for splicing or opening.

5 - 10

148-640 001 8.0 en 6.2003

Autoconer 338

19

18 20

17

1

9

6

7

10

5 4

D 401-16

5.1.3

15 14 12

16 13

9 3 8 2 11

Continuous Tube Conveyor

Belt tensioning of a new belt

Belt tensioning of a new incline belt

a) Inscribe two measuring marks across the horizontal belt (1) at a distance of 1,000 mm.

e) Inscribe two measuring marks across the incline belt (17) at a distance of 500 mm.

b) Loosen the hex. nut (2) of the tensioning device.

f) Loosen hex. nuts (18).

c) Turning spindle (3), tighten the belt until the distance between the two marks has increased to 1,003 mm, then tighten hex. nut (2).

g) Turn hex. hd. screws (19) until the distance between the two marks has increased to 501 mm, then tighten hex. nuts (18).

d) Inspect all conveyor belt rollers; if belt is not properly aligned:

h) If the incline belt fails to run straight: Correct the alignment of deflection roller (20) on hex. hd. screws (19).

1. Loosen cyl. hd. screw (4) and correct drive roller orientation on threaded bushing (5).

After completed belt alignment tighten fastening screws and counter nuts.

2. Loosen hex. nuts (6) and correct tension roller (7) orientation on set screws (8). 3. Loosen hex. nuts (9) and correct deflection roller (10) orientation on cyl. hd. screw (11). 4. On tensioning plate (12), loosen Hex nuts (13) and cyl. hd. screw (14); correct deflection roller (15) orientation on cyl. hd. screws (16).

148-640 001 en 6.2003

5 - 11

Autoconer 338

1 13

14 7 8

5 4 9

3

3¦ ¦1 mm

11

12

10

6

5 2

D 401-46

5.1.4

Sectional tube conveyor

Tensioning of a new belt a) Two measuring marks are factory-provided on each conveyor belt (1). Also provided are measuring bores in the slide plate of each sectional conveyor. b) Loosen hex. screws (2) and (3), and hex. nut (4). c) Remove cyl. hd. screws (5) and cyl. hd. screw (6), remove support angle (7). d) Place the conveyor belt around deflection roller (8), and re-install the roller with support angle. e) Apply belt tension on tensioning screw (9). Viewed from the drive end, the first two measuring bore rows must match the belt tensioning marks. f) Continue belt tensioning until the RH belt mark matches the third measuring bore row. The belt is now tensioned to 1002 mm.

h) With conveyor belt running, tighten hex. hd. screw (9) until the belt runs correctly aligned. i) Tighten hex. hd. screw (3) and hex. nut (4). j) Loosen hex. hd. screw (10) and set initiator bracket (11) at a distance of 3 ± 1 mm to conveyor belt (12). Tighten hex. hd. screw (1). Inspection: The conveyor belt must be firmly driven by the drive roller. However, for reason of possible premature wear the belt should not be tightened excessively. k) On hand wheel (13) adjust the slot width between tube box bottom and sorting table (14) so that only empty tubes, or tubes with few residual yarn layers can pass through the slot.

g) Tighten hex. Hd. screw (2).

5 - 12

148-640 001 8.0 en 6.2003

Autoconer 338

10

6

7 5

2

9

7 6

11

2 4

3

1 13 15 8

12 16

14 D 401-06

5.1.5

Package Conyeyor Belt

Belt tensioning of a new belt

On drive roller (8):

a) Inscribe two measuring marks across the belt (1) at a distance of 1,000 mm.

g) Loosen hex. nuts (9) and hex. hd. screw (10).

Avoid the belt portion with orifices for marking.

h) Correct belt alignment on cyl. hd. screw (11). i) Tighten first hex. hd. screw (10), and then hex. nuts (9).

b) Loosen cyl. hd. screws (2) and hex. nut (3). c) Turn hex. nut (4) until the distance between the two marks has increased to 1,003 mm, then tighten hex. nut (3).

Limit Switch

d) Tighten cyl. hd. screws (2).

j) Shift bracket (12) on cyl. hd. screws (13) so that the switch roller (14) of the limit switch is centered with the belt orifice.

Belt Alignment (if required)

Light Barrier

On deflection roller (5):

k) Loosen cyl. hd. screws (15) and set light barrier (16) in its slot so that a package is securely detected. Tighten cyl. hd. screws (15).

e) Loosen counter nuts (6). f) Correct belt alignment on cyl. hd. screws (7), then tighten counter nuts (6).

148-640 001 en 6.2003

5 - 13

Autoconer 338 4

3

5.1.6

Package conveyor with intermediate storage

a) Packages are removed from the package conveyor. Intermediate storage spaces are vacant.

b

6 8

7

Switch the machine OFF and secure (padlock) the main breaker switch against unauthorized manipulation (→ 1.1.4).

Compressed air supply is active. Cylinder (1) is located on the LH frame of each section.

a

1 5

Do not reach into the area between bracer plate (2) and roll-off plate (3)!

b) On magnet valve (5) turn turn switch (6) until piston rod (7) of cylinder (1) ejects as shown in the illustration.

D401-40

c) Loosen counter nuts (8). d) On piston rod (7) adjust swivel plate (4) so that it is flush with roll-off plate (3).

2

e) Tighten counter nuts (8). f) Return turn switch (6) to its original position. Piston rod (7) is withdrawn, swivel plate (4) is in uppermost position. g) Machine can be switched ON.

4 3 D401-42

5 - 14

148-640 001 8.0 en 6.2003

Autoconer 338

5.1.7

4

Dust Extraction

a) In fully withdrawn position of the piston rod, adjust the cylinder (1) so that shutter (2) fully covers the orifice (3). b) In fully withdrawn position of the piston rod, adjust the cylinder (4) so that the throttle plate (5) is parallel with mounting plate (6). 1

3

2

D 200-03

6

5

4

D 200-02

148-640 001 en 6.2003

5 - 15

Autoconer 338

5.1.8 7


Energy unit [drive end] (illustration depicts a LH machine) Note: Viewed from the operator’s aisle, initiator bracket (1) must be mounted on the rear track on LH machines. a) Distance (X) of initiator (1) on LH and RH machines: D 2200 mm with continuous empty tube conveyor =

5

Y

D 1690 mm with sectional empty tube conveyor

850 mm

= 1420 mm

b) Set angle (2) in lowest position. c) Switch the machine ON on main breaker switch -Q1, and activate the patrol cycle on the Informator. d) Actuating key -S3, place the travelling cleaner in position to initiator bracket (1).

W

e) Switch travelling cleaner OFF on key -S4. f) Switch the machine OFF and secure (padlock) the main breaker switch against unauthorized manipulation.

1 X

g) Set angle (2) so that there is a distance of 3 ± 1 mm between initiator (3) and lift-out protection (4) of the travelling cleaner. h) Viewed from the operator’s aisle, mount reversal plate (5) on the front track. Distance (Y) between reversal plate (5) and end of track on LH and RH machines: = 750 mm

D272-35

4

3 3¦1 mm 2 D 272-41

5 - 16

148-640 001 8.0 en 6.2003

Autoconer 338 Suction end (illustration depicts a LH machine) i) Viewed from the operator’s aisle, mount reversal plate (6) on the front track. Distance (Z) between reversal plate (6) and end of the track: on a LH machine= 480 mm Note: 8 6 Z

Motor pulley (pos. 7 on previous page) and deflection roller (8) have to be mounted so that the lower belt portion is situated towards the operator’s aisle. On machines equipped with bobbin/tube extractor the reversal point must be adjusted according to the size of the container for empty tubes.

D272-42

148-640 001 en 6.2003

5 - 17

Autoconer 338 Energy unit [drive end] (illustration depicts a RH machine) Note: Viewed from the operator’s aisle, initiator bracket (1) must be mounted on the front track on RH machines.

Y

a) Distance (X) of initiator (1) on LH and RH machines: D 2200 mm with continuous empty tube conveyor = D 1690 mm with sectional empty tube conveyor 5

850 mm

= 1420 mm

b) Set angle (2) in lowest position.

7

c) Switch the machine ON on main breaker switch -Q1, and activate the patrol cycle on the Informator. d) Actuating key -S3, place the travelling cleaner in position to initiator bracket (1). e) Switch travelling cleaner OFF on key -S4. f) Switch the machine OFF and secure (padlock) the main breaker switch against unauthorized manipulation.

W

g) Set angle (2) so that there is a distance of 3 ± 1 mm between initiator (3) and lift-out protection (4) of the travelling cleaner. 1

h) Viewed from the operator’s aisle, mount reversal plate (5) on the rear track. Distance (Y) between reversal plate (5) and end of track on LH and RH machines:

X

= 750 mm

D272-38

4

3 3¦1 mm 2 D 272-41

5 - 18

148-640 001 8.0 en 6.2003

Autoconer 338 Suction end (illustration depicts a RH machine) i) Viewed from the operator’s aisle, mount reversal plate (6) on the rear track. Distance (Z) between reversal plate (6) and end of the track: Z

on a RH machine

= 480 mm

Note:

8

6

Motor pulley (pos. 7 on previous page) and deflection roller (8) have to be mounted so that the lower belt portion is situated towards the machine’s backside. On machines equipped with bobbin/tube extractor the reversal point must be adjusted according to the size of the container for empty tubes.

D272-43

148-640 001 en 6.2003

5 - 19

Autoconer 338 Belt guide The distance of the belt guide has to be adjusted with tensioned belt (1) shortly after start-up of the travelling cleaner. Vertical setting: a) The patrol direction of the travelling cleaner has to be selected so that the belt (1) runs on the larger (upper) pulley diameter (2).

1 3

2

b) After loosening the two fastening screws, set belt guide (3) so that there is a distance of 1 mm maximum between inner guide edge and belt edge. The upper edge of the belt, however, must not touch the belt guide.

3 1 mm

D272-44

Horizontal setting: c) The patrol direction of the travelling cleaner has to be selected so that the belt (1) runs on the larger (upper) pulley diameter (2). d) After loosening the two fastening screws (4), set belt guide (3) so that there is a distance of 1 mm maximum between guide edge and belt edge. 4

1 mm

4 1

e) Double-check both, vertical and horizontal setting, in machine center and on the opposite machine end. Nowhere should the belt contact the belt guide (3).

3

D272-44

5 - 20

148-640 001 8.0 en 6.2003

Autoconer 338 Shift fork The shifting point of the shift fork (1) can be adjusted in relation to the slant angle of suction tubes and blow tubes. a) Setting of the shifting point on shift fork (1): The amount of deflection of blow tubes and suction tubes, required for patrol direction reversal, should be identical for both patrol directions. b) Shifting from the large to the small pulley diameter requires more shifting force. Therefore, for this shift position the distance between screw (2) and shift fork (1) should be smaller. c) For normal reversal, however, automatic reciprocative shifting should not be permitted.

2 1

1

D272-45

Blow tubes and suction tubes The draw spring located in the upper area between suction tubes and blow tubes has to be adjusted: a) Expand spring (3) on nuts (4 & 5) so that the upper end of tensioning bolt (6) protrudes 10 mm above nut (5). b) Tighten counter nuts (4 & 5). c) During operation of the travelling cleaner check whether or not blow tubes and suction tubes are vertically oriented. If required, change the load of spring (3).

6 5 4

3

D272-46

148-640 001 en 6.2003

5 - 21

Autoconer 338

5.1.9

X

Travelling cleaner “Luwa”

Energy unit [drive end] (illustration depicts a LH machine)

5 Y

1

Note: Viewed from the operator’s aisle, initiator bracket (1) must be mounted on the rear track on LH machines. a) Distance (X) between initiator bracket (1) and the end of the track on LH as well as on RM machines is:

510

790

with continuous empty tube conveyor (DHT) = 1300 mm with sectional empty tube conveyor (HT 10) = 510 mm b) Set angle (2) in lowest position.

D 272-22

7

5

6

8

c) Switch the machine ON on main breaker switch -Q1, and activate the patrol cycle on the Informator. d) Actuating key -S3, place the travelling cleaner in position to initiator bracket (1). e) Switch travelling cleaner OFF on key -S4. f) Switch the machine OFF and secure (padlock) the main breaker switch against unauthorized manipulation. g) Set angle (2) so that there is a distance of 3 ± 1 mm between initiator (3) and lift-out protection (4) of the travelling cleaner. h) Viewed from the operator’s aisle, mount reversal plate (5) on the front track. Distance (Y) between reversal plate (5) and end of the track is:

4

on a LH machine = 790 mm Note: 3¦1 mm

3

Motor pulley (7) and deflection roller (8) have to be mounted so that the lower belt portion is situated towards the operator’s aisle. On machines equipped with bobbin/tube extractor the reversal point must be adjusted according to the size of the container for empty tubes.

2

D 272-03

Suction end (illustration depicts a LH machine) 100 mm

i) Viewed from the operator’s aisle, mount reversal plate (6) on the front track. Distance (Y) between reversal plate (6) and end of the track is: on a LH machine = 510 mm

6

Z

D 272-02

5 - 22

148-640 001 8.0 en 6.2003

Autoconer 338 Energy unit [drive end] (illustration depicts a RH machine)

X

Note:

5

Viewed from the operator’s aisle, initiator bracket (1) must be mounted on the front track on RH machines.

Y 1

a) Distance (X) between initiator bracket (1) and the center of the superstructure brace on LH as well as on RM machines is: with continuous empty tube conveyor (DHT) = 1300 mm with sectional empty tube conveyor (HT 10) = 510 mm

510

790

b) Set angle (2) in lowest position. c) Switch the machine ON on main breaker switch -Q1, and activate the patrol cycle on the Informator.

D 272-23

5

8 6

7

d) Actuating key -S3, place the travelling cleaner in position to initiator bracket (1). e) Switch travelling cleaner OFF on key -S4. f) Switch the machine OFF and secure (padlock) the main breaker switch against unauthorized manipulation. g) Set angle (2) so that there is a distance of 3 ± 1 mm between initiator (3) and lift-out protection (4) of the travelling cleaner. h) Viewed from the operator’s aisle, mount reversal plate (5) on the rear track. Distance (Y) between reversal plate (5) and end of the track is:

4

on a RH machine = 790 mm Note: 3¦1 mm

3

2

Motor pulley (7) and deflection roller (8) have to be mounted so that the lower belt portion is situated towards the machine’s backside. On machines equipped with bobbin/tube extractor the reversal point must be adjusted according to the size of the container for empty tubes.

D 272-03

Suction end (illustration depicts a RH machine)

100 mm 6

i) Viewed from the operator’s aisle, mount reversal plate (6) on the rear track. Distance (Y) between reversal plate (6) and end of the track is: on a RH machine = 510 mm

Z

D 272-21

148-640 001 en 6.2003

5 - 23

Autoconer 338

5 - 24

148-640 001 8.0 en 6.2003

Autoconer 338

5.2

Winding Unit

5.2.1

Tilting-out of the Winding Unit

b

Prior to tilting the winding unit housing out care must be taken that the winding unit is free of voltage! It is essential to study the safety precautions in advance!

Required tooling: – Retainer rod (Ref. to Gauges and Fixtures → 5.0) a) Place the retainer rod in an easy-to-reach location.

2

b) Unclips the hood (1). 1

c) Remove cyl. hd. screw (2).

D 301-102

d) Slightly loosen cyl. hd. screw (3). e) Loosen cyl. hd. screw (4) to a point that the winding unit housing can be tilted out.

4

D 301-110

3 f) With your left hand, grab the RH package adapter (5) and carefully tilt the winding unit housing forward. 5

D 301-31

148-640 001 en 6.2003

5 - 25

Autoconer 338 g) Place the double-bent end of the retainer rod (6) into the bore (7) of the wdg. unit housing.

7

6

D 301-32

h) Swivel the retainer rod to the rear until it has entered the fastening slot (8) of the wdg. unit housing.

8

D 301-33

i) Place the opposite end of the retainer rod into bore (9) of the central housing. j) Assembly is performed in reversed sequence.

a

Be sure that none of the cables is squeezed when returning the winding unit housing to operational position.

9

D 301-34

5 - 26

148-640 001 8.0 en 6.2003

Autoconer 338

5.2.2

1

4

Yarn Guide Drum

2 3

Removal 6

Required tooling: – Drum puller Note concerning drum puller: D Always use the drum puller for drum removal. 7

D Never use a hammer to loosen the drum.

8

D 303-01

a) Tilt winding unit out. b) Insert round bar (1) into bore (2); to hold drum while loosening cyl. hd. screw (3). c) Remove plug (4). 5

d) Loosen cyl. hd. screw (3) appr. 2 ... 3 revolutions. e) Place drum puller (5) as shown and loosen the drum (2) on its spindle (6). f) Remove drum puller, remove cyl. hd. screw (3), then pull the drum off its spindle manually. Note: If the drum spindle (6) turns: Remove pressure cap (7) and place a suitable tool on the hex. nut (8) to retain the spindle. Installation of the drum

D 303-12

Proceed in reversed sequence. Comply with the following instruction: g) Using the torque wrench, tighten cyl. hd. screw (3) at 12 Nm.

148-640 001 en 6.2003

5 - 27

Autoconer 338

5.2.3

Traverse Displacement

a) Place cam wheel (1) in neutral position. For this purpose turn the cam wheel clockwise until pawl (2) stops the rotation (Neutral position to unit housing). b) Loosen hex. hd. screw (3) and set pressure roller (4) of setting lever (5) in close contact with pressure cap (6) of drum spindle (7).

1 2

c) Tighten hex. hd. screw (3).

7

6 3 D 303-14

5 - 28

5

4

148-640 001 8.0 en 6.2003

Autoconer 338

5.2.4

Drum Lap Brush

a) Place drum lap brush (1) into its guide slot of bracing plate (2).

1 2 D 313-07

5.2.5

Drum Lap Guard

a) On hex. hd. screw (1) of setting lever (2), adjust a distance of 0.2 ... 0.6 mm between the drum’s circumference (3) and lap feeler (4). Magnet (5) must not actuate sensor (6). b) Otherwise, loosen cyl. hd. screws (7) and adjust the vertical position of the sensor bracket (8) so that the sensor (5) is actuated only if lap feeler (4) has been moved by a developing drum lap.

0.2-0.6 mm 3

4 1

D 313-01

3

6 7 2

5

8

D 313-02

148-640 001 en 6.2003

5 - 29

Autoconer 338

5.2.6 2 3

1

Cradle Shaft (Standard)

a) Insert cradle shaft (1) with damping lever (2) and spacer washer (3) through its bearing in the unit housing. b) Place spacer washer (4) and collar (5) on the shaft, adjust a lateral play of 0.1 mm then tighten cyl. hd. screw (6). c) Install lever (7) in such position that its contour (8) is parallel with contour (9) of damping lever (2).

0,1 mm

Note: On machines with 3″ yarn traverse d) Unhinge spring (10).

6

e) Install hook (11). 5

f) Hinge the spring (10) in the eye of the hook.

4

D 301-01

2

2 7

8 9

11 10

D 301-37

5 - 30

148-640 001 8.0 en 6.2003

Autoconer 338

5.2.7 1

Cradle Shaft with propack

a) Cradle shaft assembly (1) is composed of: – Cradle shaft – Spacer washer – Gear assembly – Six cyl. draw springs – Actuation rod – Retainer ring, and – Retainer washer b) Place spacer washer (2) on the shaft, and tighten cyl. hd. screw (4) of collar (3) so that a distance of 0.1 mm remains between spacer washer and collar.

3 D 301-82

4

2

1

D325-24

148-640 001 en 6.2003

5 - 31

Autoconer 338

5.2.8

Drive Gear of propack

1 Prerequisites D The winding unit and both neighboring winding units have to be switched OFF. D Remove the (blue) air conduit from the Multijet of the winding unit, and plug the resulting opening. a) Lift package cradle (1) as shown in the upper illustration (corresponds to appr. 320 mm package diameter). b) Place drive gear (2) on shaft (3), observing the following items: – Matching of marks on drive gear (2) and cradle shaft (4). – Double-check correct matching through inspection bore (5) of gear (2). D325-32

– Examine the position of magnet (6) relative to calibration sensor (7). – If required, lift or descend cradle (1) until correct matching of the marks is achieved.

4

c) Secure drive gear (2) with washer and retainer ring. d) Return (blue) air conduit to Multijet. 2

7

3 6

5

D325-24

4 5 2

D325-22

5 - 32

148-640 001 8.0 en 6.2003

Autoconer 338

5.2.9

Cradle Pressure Compensation

Winding units with propack Mechanical settings are no longer required on winding units equipped with the electro-mechanical cradle suspension control propack. Data entry of all parameters required for production takes place centrally on the Informator. Entries under: ”Lot...; Preparation...; Quality control...; Ribbon breaker...”

D325-24

Standard winding units Note: The compressed air cylinder must be installed. The draw spring must be removed. a) Loosen hex. hd. screw (1) and cyl. hd. screw (2). b) Set mark M of scale (3) flush with edge (4) of the winding unit housing, tighten cyl. hd. screw (2). c) Insert gauge (5). 1

d) Tighten hex. hd. screw (1).

6

e) Install draw spring (6). f) Remove gauge (5). Select desired cradle pressure: Loosen cyl. hd. screw (2), set scale (3) as required, tighten cyl. hd. screw (2). The scale indicates:

5 90 mm

D 301-03

H = hard

= for hard (high density) packages

M = medium

= for medium density packages

S = soft

= for soft (low density) packages

H 4 3

D 301-04

148-640 001 en 6.2003

2

M

S

5 - 33

Autoconer 338

5.2.10 Package Cradle (Standard) 0,2 mm

5

1

a) Place empty cone/sleeve in cradle (1). b) Loosen cyl. hd. screws (2 & 3), and descend the cradle until the cone/sleeve 1. contacts the yarn guide drum over its entire length, or, 2. if drums with drive ring (4) are used, until the cone/ sleeve contacts the drive ring and is parallel with the drum’s surface.

2

c) Tighten cyl. hd. screws (2 & 3).

3

d) Turn stop screw (5) into the cradle so that a distance of 0.2 mm remains between screw and winding unit housing. Tighten counter nut. Double-check the distance: At start-up the cone/sleeve must be driven by the yarn guide drum without slippage. e) With a cone/sleeve seated in the cradle, adjust stop (6) so that it contacts opening lever (7), then tighten hex. hd. screw (8).

D 325-30

On winding units with propack only f) Activate compressed air supply for this winding unit. The Quality-Cut feature slightly lifts the package cradle. g) For compensation of cone/sleeve length tolerances: Again loosen, and retighten cyl. hd. screw (2). Winding test h) Run a winding test and examine the distance between yarn body and cone/sleeve base: – 150 mm yarn traverse (X): 10 – 11 mm; – 146 mm yarn traverse (Y): 12 – 13 mm. i) If required, again loosen cyl. hd. screw (3), and laterally shift the cradle carrier on the cradle shaft (Varying practical conditions could require changes of the indicated distance dimensions).

4 D 325-03

7

10-11 mm 12-13 mm 0,5-1 mm

8

(X) (Y)

6

D 325-02

5 - 34

148-640 001 8.0 en 6.2003

Autoconer 338

5.2.11 Package Cradle (with taper acceleration) 0.2 mm 1. Basic adjustments 1

a) Place empty cone in cradle (1). b) Loosen hex. hd. screw (2) and set the first mark of setting scale (3) flush with the front edge of support arm (4).

8

c) Loosen cyl. hd. screws (5 & 6), and descend the cradle until the cone 5

6

1. contacts the yarn guide drum over its entire length, or, 2. if drums with drive ring (7) are used, until the cone contacts the drive ring and is parallel with the drum’s surface.

3

d) Tighten cyl. hd. screws (5 & 6).

2

e) Turn stop screw (8) into the cradle so that a distance of 0.2 mm remains between screw and winding unit housing. Tighten counter nut. Double-check the distance: At start-up the cone/sleeve must be driven by the yarn guide drum without slippage.

4

D 325-21

f) With a cone seated in the cradle, adjust stop (9) so that it contacts opening lever (10), then tighten hex. hd. screw (11). On winding units with propack only g) Activate compressed air supply for this winding unit. The Quality-Cut feature slightly lifts the package cradle. h) For compensation of cone/sleeve length tolerances: Again loosen, and retighten cyl. hd. screw (5). Winding test i) Run a winding test and examine the distance between yarn body and cone base:

7

– 150 mm yarn traverse (X): 10 – 11 mm;

D 325-03

– 146 mm yarn traverse (Y): 12 – 13 mm.

10

j) If required, again loosen cyl. hd. screw (6), and laterally shift the cradle carrier on the cradle shaft (Varying practical conditions could require changes of the indicated distance dimensions).

10-11 mm 12-13 mm 0,5-1 mm

11

(X) Y

9

D 325-02

148-640 001 en 6.2003

5 - 35

Autoconer 338 2. Taper acceleration a) For RH winding with taper acceleration: Loosen hex. hd. (1). b) Set the desired scale mark of setting plate (2) flush with the front edge of support arm (3) and tighten hex. hd. screw (1). 1

Note: Each mark on the setting plate corresponds to appr. 1° additional (accelerating) package taper.

2 3

D 325-05

5 - 36

148-640 001 8.0 en 6.2003

Autoconer 338

5.2.12 RH Package Adapter / Removal – Installation Important Note: 2

1

Strictly comply with the setting instructions, in order to prevent destruction of the Elastomer body of the rubbermetal compound buffer (indicated by an arrow)! a) Remove sensor (1). b) Use a screw driver to hold the rubber-metal buffer in place (arrow), then loosen hex. nut (2). The Elastomer body must not be twisted!

D 325-04

c) Remove E-ring (3), remove lever (4). d) Pull the RH adapter assembly (5) out of the cradle arm. e) For installation proceed in reversed sequence. 4 5 3

D 325-07

148-640 001 en 6.2003

5 - 37

Autoconer 338

5.2.13 Disassembly of brake ring a) Pull the complete package adapter (1) including pressure spring (2) out of plastic cylinder (3). 1

5.2.14 Removal of brake lining a) Place lining puller (4) on brake ring (5). 2

b) Insert the two knurled screws (6) into the threaded bores of the brake ring. c) Turning handle (7) pull brake ring (5) off its shaft (8). d) Remove the worn brake lining (9).

3

7

6 4 5 9 8

5

9 D525-54

5 - 38

148-640 001 8.0 en 6.2003

Autoconer 338 8 21 20

14 19 18

5.2.15 Disassembly of bearing shaft and bearing

16

a) If required replace bearing shaft (8). For this purpose remove hex. Hd. screw (10) with seal ring (11).

13

b) Place brake bushing (12) on a supporting surface.

12

c) Place a punch (Ø 5 mm) upon bracer washer (13), and with a short, yet hard hammer blow on the punch remove the complete bearing shaft (14) from its guide bushing (15).

17

Note A shock-like effect is required, as retainer ring (16) must overcome an incline of 15° in the guide bushing. 15 11 10 5

9 21

5.2.16 Assembly of bearing shaft and bearing a) Insert pressure spring (17) and bracer washer (13) into guide bushing (15). b) Fasten bearing shaft (8) with ball bearing (18) in the guide rail. c) Subsequently place spacer washer (19), needle bearing (20), and board ring (21) on the bearing shaft. d) Using a driving tube (Ø 15 mm), press board ring into the guide bushing.

5

5.2.17 Assembly of brake ring

8 a) Place support device (22) on guide bushing (15). Arbor (23) must brace bearing shaft (8). 9

b) Insert brake lining (9) with two drops of silicon applied on 2 cogs facing each other. c) Fasten brake ring (5).

1

d) Remove support device (22). 15 23 22

e) Insert hex. hd. screw (10) with seal ring (11) into guide bushing (15). f) Return adapter assembly (1) with pressure spring (2) into plastic cylinder (3). g) Install adapter assembly in the cradle.

D525-55

148-640 001 en 6.2003

5 - 39

Autoconer 338

5.2.18 Exchange of the RH package adapter a) When changing plastic adapter rings, insert screw driver in the slot (1) between brake ring (2) and adapter ring (3). b) Pry the ring off. c) When changing metal adapter rings, remove cyl. hd. screw (4) and pull the adapter off. 2 1

3 4

D 325-08

5.2.19 Suction Arm and Suction Pipe a) Mesh the gear segment’s teeth (1) with the teeth (2) of the suction arm’s hollow gear in such fashion that the mark on one of the segment’s teeth sits between the two marks of the suction arm gear. b) The same setting applies to gear segment (3) and hollow gear (4) of the suction pipe. 2

1

3 4

D 330-01

5 - 40

148-640 001 8.0 en 6.2003

Autoconer 338

5.2.20 Suction Arm

2

a) Place suction arm (1) in neutral position and loosen clamping ring (2). b) Adjust suction arm tube (3) at a distance of 160.5 ± 1 mm to the unit housing (4). 3

c) Adjust a distance of 95 + 2 mm between suction mouth (1) and front edge of the RH side of threading plate (5), as follows:

160.5¦ ¦1 mm

4

1. Pull suction arm forward beyond the front edge of threading plate (5). 2. Push suction arm back until the distance dimension 95 + 2 mm is achieved. d) Tighten clamping ring (2).

1

e) Double-check these settings. D 330-02

95+2 mm

5

D 330-05

1

95+2 mm D 330-06

148-640 001 en 6.2003

5

5 - 41

Autoconer 338

5.2.21 Suction arm stop

1

3

6 mm

a) Examine whether or not the distance between the internal surface of deflection plate (1) and the surface of yarn guide drum (2) is 1.3 ... 2 mm, or, resp., 0.3 ... 1 mm to the drum’s drive ring. b) Bend, or align, the defection plate accordingly, if required. c) Switch winding unit ON, and simultaneously actuate red and yellow keys. The keys flash alternatingly, the winding unit is now in ”Toggle” mode. Through repeated tapping on the red key, move suction arm assembly (3) to uppermost (pick-up) position.

4

5 2

d) Loosen clamping ring (4). e) Adjust suction nozzle (3) in suction tube (5) so that the nozzle is positioned: 1. 6 mm above the yarn guide drum, and

D 301-93

2. laterally parallel with the yarn guide drum. f) Tighten clamping ring (4). 6

6 mm

g) Place a delivery package (6) of 130 mm diameter into the cradle. h) Loosen clamping block of suction arm stop (7), and have the stop contact clamping ring (4).

8

4 7 D 301--94

i) Regardless of the package taper, adjust a suction distance of 6 mm between suction nozzle (3) and the circumference of cone/sleeve (6), at the lateral point where center screw (8) is located. j) Tighten clamping screw of suction arm stop (7).

8 6

k) Through repeated tapping on the yellow key, return suction arm assembly (3) to lowest (neutral) position.

3

D 301--4 5

5 - 42

148-640 001 8.0 en 6.2003

Autoconer 338

5.2.22 Explanations to the Setting Instructions of the Splicer Based on considerable experience in respect to knotless yarn joining we furnish the splicer factory-adjusted in such fashion that resettings are normally not required, except for special cases. Due to the specific properties of the yarns being wound (Fiber stock, yarn count, yarn diameter, single or plied, fiber thickness, staple, etc.) no universally applicable setting dimensions can be established. Therefore the settings described are to be considered as “Rules of Thumb“, they must be adapted to the individual conditions. The settings of lid, feeder, shears, and clamps must be double-checked only when functional parts are replaced. Note: When winding a new lot it is recommended to keep the settings on record in the splicer settings listing (ref. to sample below) of the lot records.

D 368-61

For lot changes the splicer settings can be taken from this listing. It is recommended, however, to test the first splices made with these settings, in respect to strength as well as to appearance. Company:

Listing of Sp Splicer icer Settings SectionLot

Yarn Count

No.:

Nm, tex, Ne

Fiber stock

Twist

Opening

Splicing

T/m

MPa (bar)

MPa (bar)

Date:

S/Z

Informator Code

Opening

Splicing

Temperature D 368-13

148-640 001 en 6.2003

5 - 43

Autoconer 338 2

1

5.2.23 Air pressure controller for splicing

1

*

Basic setting for single-lot processing Adjust the pressure controller to the pressure value required for the yarn to be wound. Normally this value is between 0.3 and 0.6 MPa (between 3 and 6 bar). 2

1

➀ ➁

**

RH machine LH machine

Yarn end opening pressure a) On controller (1), set opening pressure at 0.4 MPa (4 bar). This value is recommended for initial splicing, it can be altered after examination of the splices. b) Adjust the duration of the opening blast on the Informator (ref. to ”Lot preparation”).

D 110-15 + 16

1

Splicing whirl pressure

2

2

*

c) On controller (2), set splicing pressure at 0.5 MPa (5 bar). This value is recommended for initial splicing, it can be altered after examination of the splices. d) Adjust the duration of the splicing blast on the Informator (ref. to ”Lot preparation”).

1

2

**

e) Examine spliced joint: If the splice is too thick or too thin, change the degree of overlapping of the two yarn ends in the splicing prism (3) accordingly. f) For this purpose, turn worm (4), which alters the parallel relation between feeder (5) and angle (6). g) Read setting from scale (7) and copy this setting to the feeders of all other splicers.

D 110-13 + 14

4 6

5 3 7

* Without hairiness nozzle D 368-20

** With hairiness nozzle

5 - 44

148-640 001 8.0 en 6.2003

Autoconer 338

5.2.24 Preparation (opening) of the yarn ends In the retainer tubes the yarn ends are prepared for splicing through an air blast. The properties of the opened yarn ends are decisive for the quality of the splice. Ideally prepared yarn end

D 368x01

In the area of the splice an even, strong splice joint is visible, the diameter of which is slightly larger than the yarn diameter, yet without protruding fiber bunches.

Preparation duration too long In the area of the splice an even joint appears initially. However the fiber ends protruding up are wound around the splice making the splice appear as a nep. D 368x02

Preparation pressure too high The splice is not sufficiently strong. The splice diameter is less than the yarn diameter.

D 368x03

Preparation pressure too low The splice is nearly sufficiently strong. However its diameter is considerably higher than the yarn diameter.

D 368x04

148-640 001 en 6.2003

5 - 45

Autoconer 338

5.2.25 Positioning of Retainer Tubes Note: The position of the retainer tubes (1 and 2) in the distibution block (3) is essential for yarn end preparation, and for processing S-twisted or Z-twisted yarn. a) Insert the turn key (4) through the retainer tube, shift the protective plastic hose (5) in as far as necessary to protect the tube internally against scratching. b) With a pull/turn motion, have the turn key (4) engage in the recess of the retainer tube (arrow).

D 368-65

Normal condition (factory-setting) 1

4

➀ Z-twisted yarns c) Turn turn key (4) so that its handle points to 3 o’clock in the upper retainer tube (1), and to 9 o’clock in the lower one (2).

1 2

➁ S-twisted yarns

4 4

1

2

d) Turn turn key (4) so that its handle points to 9 o’clock in the upper retainer tube (1), and to 3 o’clock in the lower one (2).

Special application

➂ For Z-twisted as well as S-twisted yarns 2 4

f) Examine prepared yarn ends. If required, slightly change the position of the retainer tubes.

1

3

4

e) Turn turn key (4) so that its handle points to 7 o’clock in the upper retainer tube (1), and to 1 o’clock in the lower one (2).

4

Note:

2

For retainer tubes installed for highly twisted yarns a different turn key, without protective hose, has to be used.

D 368-44

5 - 46

148-640 001 8.0 en 6.2003

Autoconer 338

5.2.26 Splice Inspection Examine appearance and strength of the splices 1. Splices of OK appearance and of sufficient strength.

D 368x08

2. Splices of inferior appearance.

D 368x07

Splice evaluation A By appearance: – Splices must be of equal length, – the center of the splice must be “well mixed“, and – no damages must be visible in the splice area. D 368x05

B By strength: Tear the splices apart using the Schlafhorst-supplied tensile strength tester: – at break the yarn ends must ‘jump‘ away, – the break must not always be in the splice, and D 368x06

148-640 001 en 6.2003

– the splices must not ‘slide‘ apart.

5 - 47

Autoconer 338

5.2.27 Splice Testing using the Manual Tensile Strength Tester Notes: Whenever the splicer settings have been changed, e.g. for lot change, it is recommended to perform tests of the new splices using the Schlafhorst-supplied tensile strength tester. This test incorporates a comparison between splice strength and yarn strength. a) Stop the winding unit immediately at completion of the splicing process. The splice is now located between splicer and delivery package. b) Grab the yarn appr. 25 cm below the splice and clamp it into the tester. D 368-21

Do not let go of the yarn, in order not to loose twist. c) Grab the yarn appr. 25 cm above the splice and hold it, placed across your thumb. d) Now pull the yarn apart, slowly and evenly. e) Read the value on the tester’s scale. Value 3.5 = 3.5 N x 100 = 350 cN tensile strength f) For comparison, repeat the test with a length of yarn without a splice. g) The test scope should include at least 20 ... 30 tests, appr. 2 ... 3 tests per winding unit. For important comparative research at least 5 tests should be made per winding unit. h) As a rule of thumb, the splice strength should be evaluated in relation to yarn strength 100 %. Tensile strength of the lowest splice value should not be less than 50 % (60 % for weaving yarns).

D 368-22

The dispersion of splice values (CV %) should be similar to the yarn. i) Double-check functions and settings if the test values are decisively lower on individual winding units.

5 - 48

148-640 001 8.0 en 6.2003

Autoconer 338

➀

➁

➂

➃

YarnTwist

Thermo or Injection

Range Fiber iber stock Nm

tex

➄

➅ Prism

recomm.

possible

➆

➇

Retainer tube

Retainer tube ”Saw tooth”

Z

S

M

Z

➈ Splicing test requ requ.

S

Z

1 16

1

S

3

M DZ3/16.1E

D 368-50

5.2.28 Splicer Application Possibilities 1. Explanations to the Table Headings of the Tables on the following Pages: Col. ➀ + ➁

Info fiber stock and yarn count.

Col. ➂

Z = Z-twisted yarn; S = S-twisted yarn.

Col. ➃

Info splicer type.

Col. ➄

Prisms recommended by Schlafhorst.

Col. ➅

OK splicing results possible using the prisms listed.

Col. ➆ + ➇

Z = Retainer tube, or “Saw tooth“ r.t., resp., for Z-twisted yarns S = Retainer tube, or ”Saw tooth“ r.t., resp., for S-twisted yarns M = Retainer tube for Z- and S-twisted yarns

Col. ➈

J to be preferred j also possible

Info whether or not splicing test at Schlafhorst is required.

2. Explanation of Prism Types for the Prisms listed on the following Pages: Example of a prism type: DZ3/16.1E D = direct air intake Z = yarn twist Z 3 = Splicing chamber size (not a dimension) 16 = Height of the prism (in mm) 1 = Distance of the air bores to the prism center (not a dimension) E = with venting channel Note: When ordering prisms it is of outmost importance to indicate the prism type(s), e.g. Prism DZ3/16.1E. Ref. also to spare parts catalog under application no. 36801. 148-640 001 en 6.2003

5 - 49

Autoconer 338

Cotton (CO) Cotton Blends Range

YarnTwist

Fiber iber stock Nm

tex

3 – 40

330 – 25 Z

Carded

Combed

Denims

recomm.

possible

DZ1

–

no DZ3

–

3 – 40

330 – 25

DS1

DS1/16 DS1/16.1

DS3

DS3/16 DS3/16.1

DZ1

–

36 – 60

28 – 16.5

24 – 40

42 – 25

no

30 – 2.5

DZ3

–

24 – 40

42 – 25

DS1

DS1/16 DS1/16.1

34 – 400

30 – 2.5

DS3

DS3/16 DS3/16.1

40 – 120

25 – 8.4

DZ3/16.1 E

DZ3/16 DZ3/16.1

no

Z

M

Z

S

j

–

J

–

–

no

j J

–

–

no

J

–

–

no

j J

–

–

no

J

–

–

–

j

–

–

finer 10 tex (Nm 100)

I j i Injection 40 – 120

25 – 8.4

S

10 – 20

100 – 50

Z

Injection depending on use

20 – 40

50 – 25 Z

no

34 – 120

30 – 8.4

20 – 40

50 – 25

Splicing test requ requ.

S

j

no

Retainer Tube “Saw tooth“

Z

–

34 – 400

S

High twisted (>1500 T/m)

Retainer Tube

28 – 16.5

Z

Single yarn

Prism

36 – 60

S

CO 100%

Thermo or Injection

DS3/16.1 E

DS3/16 DS3/16.1

–

DZ1/16.1 E1

DZ12

j

DZ1/16

DZ1/16.1

j DZ3/16

DZ3/16.1

DS1/16

DS1/16.1

DS3/16

DS3/16.1

DS1/16.1 E

DS1

j J

–

–

–

J

–

–

yes

–

J

–

–

no

–

j J

–

–

no

–

J j

–

–

yes

CO-Blends Single yarn S 34 – 120

30 – 8.4

14/2 – 69/2

71(2) – 14.5(2)

CO 100% Ri ttwisted Ring i t d

S 64/2 – 200/2 15.5(2) – 5(2)

no

Injection njection DS3/16.1 E

DS3

1 Recommended: with or without Injection 2 Possible with Injection only

5 - 50

148-640 001 8.0 en 6.2003

Autoconer 338

Woollens (WO) Woollen Blends Range

YarnTwist

Fiber iber stock Nm

tex

8 – 40

125 – 25

Prism

Thermo or Injection

Retainer tube

recomm

possible

DZ1/16.1E

DZ1/16.1

DZ3/16.1E

DZ3/16.1

DS1/16.1E

DS1/16.1

DS3/16.1E

DS3/16.1

DZ1/16.1E

DZ1/16.1

DZ3/16.1E

DZ3/16.1

DS1/16.1E

DS1/16.1

DS3/16.1E

DS3/16.1

DZ1/16.1E

DZ1/16.1

–

–

DS1/16.1E

DS1/16.1

–

DZ1/16.1E

–

J

Z WO 100%

34 – 80

30 – 12.5

Single yarn – Long staple –

8 – 40

125 – 25

34 – 80

30 – 12.5

10 – 40

100 – 25

Thermo,, if for f sizing

30 – 12.5

Single yarn – Long staplee – o g stap

10 – 40

100 – 25

34 – 80

30 – 12.5

28 – 36

36 – 28

Z

S

J

–

j

–

–

J j

–

–

j

–

–

–

no

no –

Z

J j

–

–

–

J1

–

–

–

–

J1

–

–

j1

–

Th Thermo 28 – 36

36 – 28

20/2 – 57/2

50(2) – 17.5(2)

48/2 – 84/2

21(2) – 12(2)

20/2 – 57/2

50(2) – 17.5(2)

WO 100% WO Blends Siro-spun

M

J

S

WO 100% WO Blends Crepe yarn (>950T/m)

S

–

Z 34 – 80

Z

S

Z

Thermo

DZ3/16.1E

–

DS1/16.1E

DS1 DS1/16 DS1/16.1

DS3/16.1E

DS3 DS3/16 DS3/16.1

S 48/2 – 84/2

21(2) – 12(2)

WO 100% WO Blends Single yarn (Multi spun) – Short staple –

3 – 30

330 – 33

5 – 40

200 – 25

WO 100% WO Blends

8/2 – 54/2

125(2) – 18.5(2)

Ring twisted

50/2 – 62/2

Z

S

S

Thermo d depending di on use

DZ1/16.1E

DS1/16.1E

DS1/16.1E

–

DS3/16.1E

–

yes

yes –

J

–

–

j1

J2

–

j

–

–

–

J2 j

–

–

–

J j

–

–

D 5 DI DI 7

Thermo

20(2) – 16(2)


no

S

WO Blends

Retainer tube “Saw tooth“

yes

yes

1 Spacer plate required when using “Saw tooth“ retainer tube! 2 Blow nozzle recommended for coarse counts [<200 tex (Nm 5)]!

Silk (SI) Silk Blends Range

YarnTwist

Fiber iber stock

SI 100% –Single yarn – SSI 100% SI Blends l d – Ring twisted –

148-640 001 en 6.2003

Nm

tex

60 – 140

16.5 – 7.1

Thermo or Injection

Z

Thermo Mostly

S

Thermo Th Mostly

60/2 – 200/2 16.5(2) – 5(2) 180/2 – 340/2

5.6(2) – 3(2)

Prism

Retainer tube



recomm.

possibel

Z

S

M

Z

S

DZ3/16.1

–

–

–

J

–

–

yes

DS1/16.1

– –

J

–

–

–

yes

DS3/16.1

–

5 - 51

Autoconer 338

Rayon (RY) Rayon Blends Range

YarnTwist

Fiber iber stock

RY 100% RY Blends Single yarn – High g twisted – ( 1200 T/m) (> T/ )

Nm

tex

10 – 48

100 – 21

Thermo or Injection

Prism

Retainer tube

recomm.

possible

DZ1/16.1E

–

DZ3/16.1E

–

DS1/16.1E

–

DS3/16.1E

–

DZ1/16.1E

DZ1/16.1

DZ3/16.1E

DZ3/16.1

DS1/16.1E

DS1/16.1

DS3/16.1E

DS3/16.1

DS1/16.1E

–

Z 40 – 80

25 – 12.5

10 – 48

100 – 21

40 – 80

25 – 12.5

20 – 48

50 – 21

S

M

Z

S

–

–

–

J1

–

40 – 80

25 – 12.5

Single S g e yarn ya

20 – 48

50 – 21

40 – 80

25 – 12.5

20/2 – 60/2

50(2) – 16.5(2)

–

–

–

–

J1

j

–

J

–

–

no

yes

S

S 54/2 – 80/2

no2

18.5(2) – 12.5(2)


yes

S

RY 100% RY Blends

Ring twisted

Z

no

Z

RY 100% RY Blends


DS3/16.1E

–

j J

–

–

–

J

–

–

–

yes

–

1 Extension plate required when using retainer tube “Saw tooth“! 2 Injection or thermo splicer permitted for special cases!

Synthetics Synthetics Blends Range

YarnTwist

Fiber iber stock Nm

tex

4 – 40

250 – 25

Thermo or Injection

Prism

Retainer tube

recomm.

possible

DZ1/16.22E

DZ1 DZ1/16 DZ1/16.1

DZ3/16.1E DZ3/16.22E

DZ3 DZ3/16 DZ3/16.1

DS1/16.1E

DS1 DS1/16 DS1/16.1

Z 100% Synthetics Synth.-Blends Synth. Blends – High twisted – (>900 T/m)

34 – 150

20 – 40

Thermo depending on use

30 – 6.6

(Thermo code ±3)

50 – 25 S

34 – 170

30 – 5.9

DS3/16.1E

20/2 – 69/2

50(2) – 14.5(2)

DZ1/16.1E DZ1/16.22E

DZ1 DZ1/16 DZ1/16.1

60/2 – 95/2

16.5(2) – 10.5(2)

DZ3/16.1E DZ3/16.22E

DZ3 DZ3/16 DZ3/16.1

Ring-twisted

9/2 – 69/2

110(2) – 14.5(2)

DS1/16.1E DS1/16.22E

DS1 DS1/16 DS1/16.1

DS3/16.1E DS3/16.22E

DS3 DS3/16 DS3/16.1

Thermo Mostlyy (Thermo code ±3)

5 - 52

16.5(2) – 10.5(2)

M

Z

S

J

–

j

–

–


High g ttwist i t yarn

J j

–

–

–

–

–

–

yes

S 60/2 – 95/2

S

J

Z 100% Synthetics Synth.-Blends

Z

– DS3 DS3/16 DS3/16.1


–

J

–

–

–

148-640 001 8.0 en 6.2003

Autoconer 338

Core Yarn Range

Yarn Twist

Fiber iber stock

Core Yarns (hard) PES/PES PES/CO

Nm

tex

40 and finer

25 and finer

Thermo or Injection

Prism

Retainer tube



recomm.

possible

Z

S

M

Z

S

DZ3/16.1E

DZ3/16

–

–

J

–

–

yes

DS3/16.1

–

–

J J

–

–

yes

no

DZ32

–

–

–

J

–

–

yes

Thermo (recommended)

DZ3/16.1E1

–

–

–

–

J

J

–

Z no

40 and finer

25 and finer

S

Core Yarns (soft) CO/Lycra CV/Lycra 15 and d fi finer

66 and d fi finer

Z

Core Yarns (soft) WO/Lycra WO/PES/Lycra Core Yarns (soft) CO/Lycra CV/Lycra Core Yarns (soft) WO/Lycra WO/PES/Lycra

coarser than 15

Z

Injection (Special appl.)

DZ11

–

–

–

J

–

–

yes

coarser than 20

Z

Thermo (recommended)

DZ1/16.1E1

–

–

–

–

J

J

yes

1 Spacer plate required! 2 Yarn braking plate

148-640 001 en 6.2003

5 - 53

Autoconer 338

Rotor Yarn Range

YarnTwist

Fiber iber stock

CO 100% CO Blends

Nm

tex

8 – 40

125 – 25

Thermo or Injection

Injection depending on yarn character

– Single yarn –

Prism

Retainer tube


recomm.

possible

Z

S

M

Z

S

DZ1/16.1E

DZ1

J

–

j

–

–

Z 100% Synthetics Synth. Blends

10 – 40

100 – 25

12/2 – 20/2

84(2) – 50(2)

Single yarn CO 100% Plied yarn

S


yes Thermo depending on yarn character

DZ1/16.1E DZ3/16.1E

–

J

–

j

–

–

Injection depending on yarn character

DS1/16.1E

DS1 DS1/16 DS1/16.1

–

J

–

–

–

yes

Ramie (RA) Range Fiber stock

RA 100% – Single Yarn –

Nm

tex

12 – 40

84 – 25

12 – 40

84 – 25

YarnTwist

Thermo or Injection

Z S

Injection njection recomm.

Prism Blow nozzle/Retain. nozzle/Retain tube recomm. DZ1/16.22E

Retaining tube Z

DS1/20-1-2E

Blow nozzle

Splicing test requ.

yes

Linnen (LI) Linnen Blends, Range Fiber stock Nm

tex

YarnTwist

Thermo or Injection

Prism recomm.

Blow nozzle Retain. tube

Splicing test requ.

yes

yes

yes

yes

wet spun LI 100% L Blends LI

18 – 40

– Single yarn –

13 – 20*

63 – 21

DS1/20.1-2E Z

I j i Injection

145 – 71

DS1/20.1-2E dry spun

LI 100% – Single yarn –

5 - 54

4 – 24

250 – 42

Z

Injection

DZ1/20.1-2E

148-640 001 8.0 en 6.2003

Autoconer 338

5.2.29 Yarn guide plates on prism 1

Required tooling: – Turn key Basic setting 2

1

The factory setting of the guide plates (1 and 2) is such that their outer contours are precisely on the center line of the splicing channel. (Splicing channel center 1.75 mm +0.2 mm). This setting is applicable for appr. 80 % of the yarn types to be spliced.

2 3

Note: Slight resetting of the guide plates towards the outside of the channel center effects strength as well as appearance of the splices. If resetting is required, be sure the distance between the guide plates’ contours and the channel center is identical on top and bottom.

3 1

Setting hint: The splicing channel width of prisms D DZ1 and DS1 is 3.5 mm, and of 2

D 368-25

D DZ3 and DS3 2.5 mm. The diameter of turn key (3) for setting of the retainer tubes is 1.75 mm. The turn key can therefore be used to gauge setting of the guide plates. Have the turn key contact one internal flank of the channel, then let the contour of the opposite guide plate contact the turn key, and fasten the guide plate. The contour of the guide plate is now flush with the splicing channel center. With a feeler gauge adjust the guide plates of all other prisms.

148-640 001 en 6.2003

5 - 55

Autoconer 338

5.2.30 Lid a) Check 2

1. if the lid (1) is seated symmetrically between the two guide plates (2), and 2. if lid and prism (3) are in contact in their entirety (no lighted line visible).

3

Otherwise the part(s) must be replaced!

1

2

D 368-18

5.2.31 Feeder Required tooling: – Test instrument

a 4

SC 2.1

It is essential to thoroughly study the instrument’s operation manual in advance (→ 10.0).

a) Using the test instrument, turn the cam package until cam follower (SC2.1) rides on the highest point (275° ... 310°) of cam (SC2.1). b) Check if the distance between the feeder’s (1) functional contour and the mounting plate (2) is 9 ± 0.25 mm. c) If required, turn worm (3) until the setting b) is obtained. d) Place yarn joining assembly in neutral position.

SC 2.1

e) Have indicator (4) point to the longest mark of the feeder scale, secure the cyl. hd. screw (5) with sealing lacquer. D 368-19

2 3 5

1 4

9± ±0.25 mm

D 368-20

5 - 56

148-640 001 8.0 en 6.2003

Autoconer 338

5.2.32 Shears and clamps 1

Required tooling: – Test instrument

a 2

Caution: Comply with instructions issued for the test instrument (→ 10.0)!

a) Set the fixed blades of upper (1) and lower (2) shears all the way out front, they are now positioned in the back of their slots. b) Insert upper- and lower end, crank cycling drive and inspect whether or not both shears cut their respective ends simultaneously (max. allowed difference 1°). c) On the shears cutting first, set the fixed blade back so that both shears cut their ends simultaneously.

D 368-15

d) Inspect whether or not the shears cut their ends between 231° – 234° radial cam package position. While cranking the cycling drive, read cutting moment from test instrument. e) Subsequently, have winding unit perform a complete automatic splicing cycle, for repeated inspection of the settings. Note: Compressed air for yarn end opening must be present before the shear cut their ends.

1 2 D 368-16

148-640 001 en 6.2003

5 - 57

Autoconer 338 Setting of shears plates on Standard splicer On standard splicer, the distance between the shears plates is 65 mm.

1

a) Remove E-ring (1).

4

b) Slightly loosen cyl. hd. screw (2). 3

c) Carefully lift shears plate (3). d) Insert spacer bushing (4) as shown. e) Shift shears plate (3) back until centering pins (5) engage in their centering bores (6).

7

f) Tighten cyl. hd. screw (2). g) Install E-ring (1). h) Repeat procedure on shears plate (7). i) Inspect correct cutting of ends.

6

5

3

65 mm

7

2 3

D386-54

5 - 58

7

148-640 001 8.0 en 6.2003

Autoconer 338 Setting of shears plates on Elasto splicers The distance between shears plates on Elato splicers is 73 mm.

1

a) Remove E-ring (1).

4

b) Slightly loosen cyl. hd. screw (2). 3

c) Carefully lift shears plate (3). d) Insert spacer bushing (4) as shown. e) Shift shears plate (3) out until centering pins (5) engage in the outer centering bores (6).

7

f) Tighten cyl. hd. screw (2). g) Install E-ring (1). h) Repeat procedure on shears plate (7). i) Inspect correct cutting of ends.

6

5

3

73 mm

7

2 3

D386-53

148-640 001 en 6.2003

7

5 - 59

Autoconer 338

5.2.33 Temperature Selection on Thermosplicer Note: Mechanical settings according to manual pages 5.2.22 – 5.2.32 must have been completed. Table of air temperature approximations 1

D 368-66

Depending upon fiber stock the air temperature code (→ 3.2) has to be entered on the Informator:

Code

°C

1

58

2

66

3

75

4 5

83 92

6

100

7

108

8 9

117 125

10 11 12

133 142 150

Fiber stock 100% Synthetics

Animal fibers blended with Synthetics

Animal fibers

The temperatures listed above are those of the air exiting from the prism (1). “0“ should be entered if air heating is not desired. The splice qualitiy is best if in most of the tensile strength tests the yarn breaks somewhere away from the splice. The air temperature should be selected so that no discoloration or hardening of the yarn in the splice area takes place. If required, perform a dye test on a small amount of yarn containing several splices. During the heating-up period (4 ... 10 min.), and when resetting the air temperature by at least 10 % the winding unit is inoperative.

Important Note concerning the use of Thermosplicers: When splicing with heated air we draw your attention to the possibility that the dye liquor absorption properties of the splices in yarns composed of synthetic fibers, whole or blends, could be different from the properties of the yarn between splices. Schlafhorst can not be held liable for secondary damages. These limitations do not apply to woollen yarns, nor to other animal fibers.

5 - 60

148-640 001 8.0 en 6.2003

Autoconer 338

5.2.34 Knotter 2 KC3

Neutral position of yarn guide plates a) Adjust push rod (1) to the length of 75.4 +0.2 mm.

75.4 +0.2

1

6

b) Rotate the cam package until control lever (2) controlling the knotter cartridges rests on the lowest point (0_ ... 224_) of its cam (KC3). c) Adjust stop screw (3), limit stop for clamping block (5) of crown gear (4), so that the points of yarn guide plates (6) are aligned vertically to each other. The cam roller of control lever (2) is lifted appr. 1.5 mm from the lowermost point of cam (KC3). This is correct and required for compensation of possible tolerances.

4 6 D365-01

d) Tighten counter nut (7) of stop screw (3). Tooth play between knotter cartridges and crown gear e) Loosen clamping screw (8). f) Slighly turn crown gear (4) and cam roller back towards the cam package, allowing the cartridges (9 and 10) to be fastened.

1

7

5

11

g) Radially adjust cartridges (9 and 10) so that their points are parallel pointing out.

3

h) Shift the crown gear out (towards the cartridges) until its teeth mesh with the teeth of the cartridges (9 and 10). For this purpose slightly move the cartridge beaks back and forth in order to allow correct gear meshing. i) Loosely tighten clamping screw (8). Minute gear play should be present when carefully moving the beak points back and forth. j) On the clamping block, turn crown gear and cartridges back and forth: Unobstructed rotation is mandatory. Note: Too much gear play results in sluggish rotation.

D365-02

9

10

k) Tighten clamping screw (8) when correct (slight) gear play is established. l) Double-check gear play whenever cartridges are exchanged. Neutral position of cartridges m)On turn buckle (11) of push rod (1) adjust the cartridges so that their points point forward and slightly towards each other.

8

D365-03

148-640 001 en 6.2003

5 - 61

Autoconer 338 Length and position of the ejector fork n) Turn cam package until ejector fork control lever (12) rests on the lowest point (0_ ... 224_) of cam (KC2). 4

o) Turn ejector fork (13) in linkage head (14) until there is a distance of 1 ... 1.5 mm between the lower edge of the fork’s head and the bottom of the crown gear (4).

KC2

p) Loosely tighten counter nut (15). 13

q) Turn ejector fork (13) until its fork head is at right angle to the center line between the cartridges (illustrated left center).

1 ... 1,5

r) Securely tighten counter nut (15). s) Inspection: Turn clamping block and double-check if there is sufficient distance between ejector fork and cartridges. 14 D365-04

Ejector fork stroke 15

12

Note: The length of the ejector fork’s stroke depends on yarn count and yarn type! t) On setting rod 1 (16) adjust the 1st stroke portion of the ejector fork so that the individual knot halves are securely tightened. u) For this purpose set the setting lever (17) on the lowest point (Neutral position: 0_ ... 100_) of cam (KC1). v) Setting rod (16) appears in the housing orifice: D Setting rod (16) has to be turned-in to obtain a longer stroke. D Setting rod (16) has to be turned-out to obtain a shorter stroke. w)On setting rod 2 (18) adjust the 2nd stroke portion of the ejector fork so that the individual knot halves are tightly pushed to eachother, forming a fisherman’s knot: D Setting rod (18) has to be turned-in to obtain a longer stroke

D365-05

D Setting rod (18) has to be turned-out to obtain a shorter stroke. KC1

17

16

18

D365-06

5 - 62

148-640 001 8.0 en 6.2003

Autoconer 338

5.2.35 Precleaner Basic adjustment a) If required, close the tension discs. 3

b) Engage No. ’1’ of setting wheel scale (1). c) Using a screw driver, turn setting rod (2) so that with closed precleaner there is a distance of 0.5 ± 0.2 mm between the mark in guide plate (3) and guide lever (4).

4

Adjustment for yarn count d) Corresponding with the diameter of the yarn to be wound, set the setting wheel on a value between 1 and 8 (Scale value 5 = Standard setting). The width of the precleaner slot changes 0.3 mm from one scale value to the next one. 2

1

0.5 ±0.2 mm

D 360-12

5.2.36 Pre-cleaner with hairiness nozzle 3 Basic adjustment a) If required, close the tension discs. b) Engage No. ’1’ of setting wheel scale (1). c) Using a screw driver turn setting rod (2) so that with closed pre-cleaner there is a distance of 0.5 ± 0.2 mm between stop plate (3) and the nose of guide lever (4). 4

1 2

3 0.5 ± 0.2 mm

Adjustment for yarn count d) Corresponding with the diameter of the yarn to be wound, set the setting wheel on a value between 1 and 8 (Scale value 5 = Standard setting). The width of the precleaner slot changes 0.3 mm from one scale value to the next one.

4 D 360-13

148-640 001 en 6.2003

5 - 63

Autoconer 338

5.2.37 Changing the hairiness nozzle for S- or Z-twisted yarn a) Pull tube (1) from magnet valve (2). b) Loosen screw (3), remove tensioner (4). c) Loosen screw (5) and remove hairiness nozzle (6) from yarn tensioner (4).

1

2

4 6

3

5 D360-014

d) Position the hairiness nozzle as shown in the illustration. e) Remove screw (7), and disassemble the hairiness nozzle into D Connector block (8), D Nozzle DJ31 (9), and D Clamping block (10). Note: Be sure that one O-ring remains in nozzle DJ31 (9), and two O-rings remain in connector block (8)!

8

7

9 D360-015

5 - 64

10

148-640 001 8.0 en 6.2003

Autoconer 338 Assembly for Z-twisted yarn f) Set screw M5x6 (11) is secured with Loctite 542! Remove the set screw. g) Insert the set screw M5x6 flush in position (12), secure it with Loctite 542. h) Turn nozzle (9) so that the mark “Z“ is visible as shown in the illustration.

11

8

7

i) In this positioning assemble connector block (8), nozzle DJ31 (9), and clamping block (10) with screw M5x25 (7).

12 9 10

D360-016

Assembly for S-twisted yarn j) Set screw M5x6 (13) is secured with Loctite 542! Remove the set screw. k) Insert the set screw M5x6 flush in position (14), secure it with Loctite 542. l) Turn nozzle (9) so that the mark “S“ is visible as shown in the illustration. 14

7

8

m)In this positioning assemble connector block (8), nozzle DJ31 (9), and clamping block (10) with screw M5x25 (7).

13 9

D360-017

10 Installation of hairiness nozzle Ref. also to the first illustration of the previous page. n) Place hairiness nozzle (6) on yarn tensioner (4) and secure it with screw M3x16 (5). o) Install the assembled yarn tensioner (4), fasten it with screw (3). p) Insert tube (1) on magnet valve (2) (prev.page). 6

3

4

5

D360-018

148-640 001 en 6.2003

5 - 65

Autoconer 338

5 - 66

148-640 001 8.0 en 6.2003

Autoconer 338

5.3

Supply Package Change

5.3.1

Model RM / Bobbin Peg

Required tooling: – Setting arbor Note: The setting gauge can not be used when bobbin peg extension plates are installed.

4 1

a) In neutral position, i.e. in unwinding position of the bobbin, place setting arbor (1) on bobbin peg (2). b) Turn setting wheel (3) so that the point of the setting arbor points to the center of the ceramic yarn guide eyelet (4).

6 3

2

c) Double-check if number “0” of setting scale (5) is in line with the lobe (6). d) Otherwise, disengage (clips) the setting scale and turn it according to paragraph c) above. Note: This setting applies only to 22 mm internal lower tube diameter, it is factory-adjusted using a setting gauge. e) For internal tube base diameters other than 22 mm (up or down) pull setting wheel and turn the setting cam (7) so that the bobbin points to the eyelet as explained in b) above.

D 377-05

6

7

3 5 D 377-06

148-640 001 en 6.2003

5 - 67

Autoconer 338

5.3.2

4

Model RM / Bobbin Chute

a) On the flywheel of the step motor for bobbin change, turn the cam package so that the bobbin peg (1) is in creeling position, and the chute doors (2) are closed. b) Examine if the centering guides (3), when closed, securely envelop the bobbin peg (1).

5

c) Otherwise, loosen cyl. hd. screws (4 and 5) and reset the chute so that the setting according to b) above is achieved.

2 6

d) Through hinging the springs (6), select the spring pressure for the centering guides (3) so that the bobbin peg safely receives the bobbins.

3 1

D 377-07

1 3

D 377-04

6

6

3

3

D 377-31

5 - 68

148-640 001 8.0 en 6.2003

Autoconer 338

30 mm

5.3.3

Model RM / Unwinding Accelerator

a) Loosen cyl. hd. screw (1) of the unwinding accelerator (2).

2 1

b) Set the bottom edge of the unwinding accelerator according to the bobbin length at the corresponding value of the setting scale. This is the equivalent of at least 30 mm distance between the tip of the bobbin (3) and the bottom edge of the unwinding accelerator.

3

c) Differentiate between p-wound and q-wound bobbins. If required, pull accelerator forward and turn 180°. Note: When using bobbin peg extensions, the value on the setting scale must be increased by the dimension at which the bobbin sits higher. D 377-xx

2 1

D 377-xx

2

148-640 001 en 6.2003

5 - 69

Autoconer 338

5.3.4

3

Model RM / Magazine Indexing

Required tooling:

4

– Screw driver a) Place cam package in neutral position. b) Have bevel gear (1) mesh with bevel gear (2) so that the mark on driver (3) is exactly in line with the mark on gear (4).

D 377-14

4 3

1

2 D 377-15

5 - 70

148-640 001 8.0 en 6.2003

Autoconer 338

5.3.5 4

Model RM / Yarn Clamp

a) On the flywheel of the step motor for bobbin change turn the cam package so that the roller of cam follower (1) sits on the highest point of cam (2).

1

3

This is the time of return motion of the transfer finger. 2

5 8

b) Double-check if the suction orifice (3) of the swivel plate (4) is aligned with the suction tube (5). c) Otherwise, loosen cyl. hd. screw (6) and reset the indexing lever (7) contacting the indexing roller (8) until setting b) above is achieved.

7

d) In neutral position, insert allen wrench through the suction orifice and loosen set screw (9). e) Place swivel plate assembly flush with the bobbin tips (10), and retighten set screw (9). The swivel plate could be seated somewhat lower than the bobbin tips, yet not any higher.

D 377-01

Note: 4

10 6

When winding from mule bobbins the swivel plate (clamping the leading yarn end) should be slightly higher than the bobbin tip.

7 8

7

D 377-02

9

D 377-03

148-640 001 en 6.2003

5 - 71

Autoconer 338

5.3.6

Model RM / Transfer Finger

Required tooling:

1

– Long T-type Allen wrench 4 mm 3 a) In neutral position, loosen cyl. hd. screw (1). 2

b) Have transfer finger (2) contact the recess in the chute bracket (3). c) Tighten cyl. hd. screw (1).

D 377-10

5 - 72

148-640 001 8.0 en 6.2003

Autoconer 338

5.3.7

Model E / Package Creel

a) Place semi-circle recess of the setting gauge (1) on shaft (2), and have the spacer plate (3) of the setting gauge contact the balloon separator (4). b) Loosen cyl. hd. screw (5) of setting rod (6). c) Set the setting rod to the level of the creel spindle (7), then tighten cyl. hd. screw (5). d) Loosen cyl. hd. screw (8) and align the creel spindle bracket (9) so that the creel spindle is positioned in center with centering pin (10).

1

e) Tighten cyl. hd. screw (8), remove setting gauge.

6 4 3 10

2 D 384-03

5

6 7 10

1

9

2 D 384-04

148-640 001 en 6.2003

8

5 - 73

Autoconer 338

5.3.8

3

X

Model RC / Magazine indexing

Required tooling: – Scew driver

4

a) Place supply package change linkage in neutral position. b) For this purpose, have bevel gear (1) mesh bevel gear (2) so that the mark on driver (3) is exactly above the mark of gear (4). Note: It will ease assembly and setting if the mark of bevel gear (1) is extended (in line) to the surface of driver (3). This also applies to tooth (X) of gear (4).

D 377-14

4 3

1

2 D 377-15

1

3

D 376-08

5 - 74

148-640 001 8.0 en 6.2003

Autoconer 338

5.3.9

4

Model RC / Magazine cylinder

Required tooling: – Long T type 5 mm Allen wrench. 2

a) Loosen set screw (1) in neutral position.

3

b) Remove nozzle (2) and cover (3). c) Loosen fastening screws of cover (4) and remove the cover. d) Loosen screw (5) and remove collar (6) including slide ring. e) Remove the complete magazine cylinder. 1

f) Loosen hex. nuts (7) and preset the three coupling screws so that the balls (X) protrude towards the bottom surface of the magazine plate (8) with a distance of 2.5-0.3mm.

D 376-13

g) Install and engage magazine cylinder with slide ring. h) Install collar (6) and fasten it with screw (5), without allowing any play.

8 10

i) Fill magazine pockets with creel-out packages. Inspection: – After transfer (drop-down) of creel-outs the magazine must not slide forward or backward.

7

9 7

– In case of a blockage the magazine cylinder must continuously lift out of the ball-type overload coupling.

9

If these conditions are not fulfilled the distance of 2.5 mm, as described in item f above, has to be increased accordingly.

6 7

9 5

8

X

2,5-0,3

j) Loosen the three hex. nuts (9) and turn coupling plate (10) in its slot so that the internal housing edge of the transfer pocket (11) is flush with the edge of the upper chute portion (12). k) Tighten hex. nuts (9).

D 376-15

12

11

D 376-16

148-640 001 en 6.2003

9

10

7

5 - 75

Autoconer 338

5.3.10 Model RC / Changing the magazine belt

3

This setting has to be made only in case of a belt breakage

1 2

Required tooling: – Long T type 5 mm Allen wrench. a) In neutral position, remove nozzle (1), covers (2 and 3), and the entire magazine. b) Remove slotted screws (4), and plate (5). c) Remove cyl. hd. screws (6) and pull-off ring (7). d) Loosen hex. nut (8) of tensioning lever (9) located on the bottom of plate (13), replace the damaged gear belt (10) by a new one.

D 376-13

6 7

4 5 13

D 376-17

8 9

10

13 D 376-12

5 - 76

148-640 001 8.0 en 6.2003

Autoconer 338 e) Install ring (7) and fasten it with cyl. hd. screw (6).

12

11

f) Install plate (5) and fasten it with slotted screws (4). g) Install and engage the magazine cylinder. Install and fasten slide ring and collar. h) Rotate the magazine so that the edge of transfer pocket (11) is flush with the edge of the upper chute portion (12). i) Push tensioning lever (9) located on the bottom of plate (13) until it stops, tighten hex. nut (8). Inspection: Double-check setting as described under h). If a difference is found: j) Loosen hex. nuts (14) and turn magazine cylinder until the required setting is obtained.

14

D 376-16

k) Tighten hex. nuts (14). l) Install covers (2 and 3), and nozzle (1).

8 9

13 D 376-18

3

1 2

D 376-13

148-640 001 en 6.2003

5 - 77

Autoconer 338 This setting has to be made only if it is necessary to work on the magazine indexing linkage

3

a) In neutral position, remove nozzle (1), covers (2 and 3), and the entire magazine.

1

b) Remove slotted screws (4), and plate (5).

2

c) Remove cyl. hd. screws (6) and pull-off ring (7). Note: For the gear belt exchange the large gear belt pulley (15) must not be rotated under any circumstance, as this would alter the required transfer position of the magazine cylinder. To be sure apply a mark for radial positioning of gear belt pulley (15). d) Loosen hex. nut (8) of tensioning lever (9) located on the bottom of plate (13), and remove the gear belt (10). D 376-13

6 7

4 5

D 376-17

8 9

10

15

13 D 376-12

5 - 78

148-640 001 8.0 en 6.2003

Autoconer 338 e) After completion of the work carefully install gear belt (10), push tensioning lever (9) until it stops, and tighten hex. hd. nut (8) on the bottom of plate (13).

8 9

f) Install ring (7) and fasten it with cyl. hd. screws (6). g) Install plate (5) and fasten it with slotted screws (4). h) Install and engage the magazine cylinder. Install and fasten slide ring and collar. 10

Inspection: Counter-clockwise rotate the magazine one increment. The internal edges of transfer pocket (11) and upper chute portion (12) must be flush. i) Otherwise, loosen the three hex. nuts (14) and rotate the magazine cylinder so that the internal housing edge of the transfer pocket (11) is flush with the edge of the upper chute portion (12).

13 D 376-18

j) Tighten hex. nuts (14). k) Install covers (2 and 3), and nozzle (1). 6 7

4 5

D 376-17

12

11

3 2 D 376-20

148-640 001 en 6.2003

1

14

5 - 79

Autoconer 338

5.3.11 Model RC / Yarn clamp Required tooling: – Long T type 5 mm Allen wrench. 1

a

2

This setting has to be made while the machine is switched ON. Switch the winding unit OFF on the winding unit switch. No other activities are permitted than those described as follows! Prior to leaving or starting the winding unit all settings and assemblies must be completed.

a) Engage magazine. b) Remove nozzle (1) and cover (2). c) Loosen cyl. hd. screws (3) and remove cover (4).

D 376-13

d) Loosen cyl. hd. screws (5) and set cam (6) in its slot allthe-way forward. Tighten cyl. hd. screws (5). 4

e) Turn hex. hd. screw (7) so that there is a distance of appr. 1 ± 0.5 mm between nose (8) of the yarn clamp and the end of slot (9), when the hex. hd. screw’s end is seated on cover (4).

3

D 376-21

9

8 5 6

4

7

D 376-06

5 - 80

148-640 001 8.0 en 6.2003

Autoconer 338 f) Install cover (4), and adjust it so 4

– that the upper surface of the cover is appr. 130 ± 1.5 mm above magazine plate (10), – that cam (6) of the yarn clamp contacts magazine bolt (10), and – that there is a distance of appr. 15 + 2 mm between the upper surface of cover (4) and the upper edge of nose (8) of the yarn clamp. g) Tighten cyl. hd. screws (3) and install cover (2) and nozzle (1). 130± ±1.5 Inspection:

a 10 D 376-22

3

Do NOT start the winding unit! Inspection of functions only with toggle operation! See 4.2 etc. “Toggle drive”.

Vertically the yarn clamp has to be positioned so that after yarn cut by the splicer / knotter the residual yarn end is securely drawn-in and evacuated by nozzle (1). When wrongly positioned the yarn clamp sits too deep in slot (9), the residual yarn end remains in the clamp instead of being drawn-off and evacuated.

6

11

D 376-23

4

8

1

2 9

15+2

D 376-07

148-640 001 en 6.2003

5 - 81

Autoconer 338

5.3.12 Model RC / Creel arbor a) In neutral position, place a creel-out package (1) on the creel arbor. b) Turn setting wheel (2) so that the center of the cone/ sleeve top points to the center of eyelet (3) of yarn tensioner (4).

4

c) Be sure that ”0” of setting wheel (5) is in line with nose (6). 3

d) Otherwise, unclips, rotate, and reclips the setting wheel as explained under c) above.

1

2

D 376-24

6

2 5 D 377-06

5 - 82

148-640 001 8.0 en 6.2003

Autoconer 338

5.3.13 Model RC / Creel-out Chute 2

1

Note: Prior to chute setting, slide plate (1) and upper portion (2) of the chute have to be removed. a) On the fly wheel (3) of the creel’s stepper motor, turn the cam package until creel arbor (4) is in ejecting/creeling position, und the chute’s trap doors (5) are fully closed. b) Be sure the centering flaps (6), when fully closed, securely embrace creel arbor (4). c) Otherwise, loosen cyl. hd. screws (7) and (8), and reset the chute so that the setting explained under b) above is obtained.

3

d) Through repositioning torsion springs (9), if required, select the spring pressure for centering flaps (6) so that the creel-out can securely slide onto the arbor. D 376-25

7

8

5 9 6

4

4

D 376-26

9

9

6

6

D 376-27

148-640 001 en 6.2003

5 - 83

Autoconer 338

5.3.14 Model RC / Transfer Finger Required tooling: – Long T type 5 mm Allen wrench. a) In neutral position, loosen cyl. hd. screw (1). b) Have transfer finger (2) contact ring (3). c) Tighten cyl. hd. screw (1).

2 3

1 D 376-28

5 - 84

148-640 001 8.0 en 6.2003

Autoconer 338 5.4

6

5.5

Package Doffer

5.5.1

Alignment of the Superstructure for the Package doffer

a) On each section, remove cover (1) from the 5th winding unit, and insert fixture (2) into bore (3). 8

5 4

2

3

b) Using a drop cord (4), examine whether or not the point of the drop cord suspended from the RH side of latch bolt (5) is flush with the edge of the fixture (maximum tolerance ± 1.5 mm). c) Otherwise, loosen cyl. hd. screws (6) and (7), and relocate the complete magazine carrier (8) per section. Tighten cyl. hd. screws.

5

1

6

32 mm

8 7

D 270-11

1

Superstructure and doffer stops The following descriptive symbols are noted on the following pages:

3

Stop angle (1) TOP for package doffer Stop angle (2) BOTTOM for package doffer

2

Stop bolt (3) TOP for superstructure Stop bolt (4) BOTTOM for superstructure

4 D 501-50

148-640 001 en 6.2003

5 - 85

Autoconer 338

RH machine

LH machine

RH machine

XW2

XW1

XW2

XW1

XW2

XW1

XW2

LH machine

XW1 D 501-44

5.5.2

Mechanical limitation of patrol ranges, and mounting position of flextrack

One or Two Package doffer(s) The stop bolts are modified latch bolts, installed on the superstructure in lieu of the latter. In order to allow overlapping of the patrol ranges of two neighboring doffers it is required that the stop bolts in the superstructure are bolted relative to the stop angles of the doffers as shown in the illustration.

5 - 86

148-640 001 8.0 en 6.2003

Autoconer 338

Stop for doffer XW 2&3 RH machine

XW3

XW3

XW2

XW1

XW2

XW1

LH machine

XW1

XW2

XW1

XW2

XW3

XW3

Stop for doffer XW 2&3

D 501-45

For three package doffers per machine The stop bolts are modified latch bolts, installed on the superstructure in lieu of the latter. In order to allow overlapping of the patrol ranges of two neighboring doffers it is required that the stop bolts in the superstructure are bolted relative to the stop angles of the doffers as shown in the illustration.

148-640 001 en 6.2003

5 - 87

Autoconer 338

LH machine

XW1

XW1

XW2

XW2

XW3

XW3

XW4

XW4

D 501-46

LH machine with four package doffers The stop bolts are modified latch bolts, installed on the superstructure in lieu of the latter. In order to allow overlapping of the patrol ranges of two neighboring doffers it is required that the stop bolts in the superstructure are bolted relative to the stop angles of the doffers as shown in the illustration.

5 - 88

148-640 001 8.0 en 6.2003

Autoconer 338 RH machine

XW1

XW2

XW2

XW3

XW3

XW4

XW1

XW4

D 501-47

RH machine with four package doffers The stop bolts are modified latch bolts, installed on the superstructure in lieu of the latter. In order to allow overlapping of the patrol ranges of two neighboring doffers it is required that the stop bolts in the superstructure are bolted relative to the stop angles of the doffers as shown in the illustration.

148-640 001 en 6.2003

5 - 89

Autoconer 338

5.5.3

266± ±10 mm

Flextrack

1. Fastening Position in the Guide Channel a) Move the doffer to that end of its service range, where the reversal bend (1) of the flextrack (2) is located, and have it engaged on this winding unit. b) Shift the loose end of the flextrack in its guide channel so that the distance between the outer contour of the reversal bend and the outside edge of the mounting angle (3) is 266 ± 10mm. 3

c) Fasten the flextrack in its guide channel with cyl. hd. screws (4) and clamping plate (5).

2

1

D 501-04

2. Routing of Conduits inside / outside of the Flextrack

100 mm

a) Fasten cables and compressed air hose at the clamping point of the guide channel with clamp (6) in such fashion that the conduits are positioned in the center of the reversal bend (1) of the flextrack.

100 mm 4

6

b) Route the conduits as shown in the illustration, in order to prevent conduit damages. c) Double-check positioning of the conduits after appr. one day of operation, and correct the settings if required.

5

5

5

D 501-05

5

5

5

6

150 mm D 501-39

5 - 90

148-640 001 8.0 en 6.2003

Autoconer 338

5.5.4

Coding of the Package Doffers

Prior to initial start, or after exchange of a doffer on machines provided with more than one package doffer is it necessary to specify a code No. for each doffer: – The doffer operating closest to the drive end carries No. 1. – Continued assignment of Nos. in sequence, beginning at the drive end. At shipment of machines all doffers are coded as No. 1! Note:

1

For initial start the machine orientation (LH / RH) must be entered on the Informator (Menu: Machine settings...; Machine configuration...; Basic settings...). From these entries the package doffer is provided with the information concerning patrol direction and allocated winding unit numbers.

D 501-24

4 Package Doffer Coding Procedure S7

2

b

Switch the machine OFF and secure (padlock) the main breaker switch against unauthorized manipulation prior to performing the following work!

a) Remove cover (1) after loosening its 4 fastening screws. b) On control console (2), loosen the two bottom screws (3). c) After removal of fastening screw (4), pull the control console out. Be sure not to overstretch the flat cable. d) Select code No. on switch S7 according to the listing below. e) Assembly in reversed sequence.

D 560-02

3

3

Coding of switch S7 Package doffer No.1 (Factory-set)

1 2 ON 1 2

Package doffer No.2 ON 1 2

Package doffer No.3 ON 1 2

Package doffer No.4 ON D 560-03

148-640 001 en 6.2003

5 - 91

Autoconer 338

5.5.5

=A6

Doffer Engaging Linkage

a) For inspection in test operation, select under ‘Test’ in the main menu ‘Magnet valve (+C1-Y2)‘ and set it on “1“. b) Examine whether or not there is a distance between latch bolt (1) and latch strip (2).

+C1-B11

Note: 3

Initial length setting of air cylinder (3) is 189 ± 0.5 mm.

1

c) Set magnet valve (+C1-Y2) on “0“. d) Examine whether or not the Hall sensor (+C1-B11) is actuated when the doffer is engaged. The sensor is actuated if in the main menu “Data display“, sub-menu ‘Input 1‘, a “1“ is displayed under the upper value “0”. e) Adjust lateral play of latch rail bearing (4) with washers (5) so that there is a distance of 0.5 + 0.5 mm between side wall (6) and bow (7).

2

D 501-51

7

6

5

4 +C1-Y2

D 501-52

5 - 92

148-640 001 8.0 en 6.2003

Autoconer 338

5.5.6

=A6

Cradle Lift

a) In 0° cam package position, the ‘Hall‘ sensor (+C3-B32) must be actuated. The sensor is actuated if in the main menu “Data display“, sub-menu ‘Input 1‘, a “1“ is displayed under the upper value “8“.

3

b) Chuck an empty cone/sleeve (1) into the package cradle. c) Open sub-menu “Cradle lift lock” in main menu “Master function”, and set the value of valve Y1 on “0”. Now list the cradle (2) manually until it gets locked.

4

d) Loosen counter-nut (3), and on set screw (4) adjust the cradle lift so that there is a distance of 21±1 mm between the surface of cone/sleeve (1) and yarn guide drum (5). Tighten counter-nut (3). e) Open sub-menu “Cradle lift lock” in main menu “Master function“, and reset the value of valve Y1 on “1”. f) With the cam package in 170° radial position, check if there is a distance of 185 ± 2 mm between the center of the LH package adapter and the surface of the yarn guide drum (5). Otherwise, establish this distance on push rod (6) (standard length 189 mm).

2 1

21 ± 1 mm D 521-41

5

+C3-B32

6

185 ± 2 mm

5

D 521-42

148-640 001 en 6.2003

5 - 93

Autoconer 338

5.5.7

=A6

Cone/sleeve drive

a) At 320° radial cam package position, and readily chucked cone/sleeve (1), on eccentric (2) adjust drive lever (3) so that drive wheel (4) is at a distance of 5 + 2 mm to the cone/sleeve. b) Be sure that cable (5), routed along drive lever (3), is at a distance of appr. 35 mm between clamp (6) and the reversal bow. Note With distinctively ribbed cones/sleeves (8) drive wheel (4) should be aligned with the center of a rib (9). The drive wheel can be shifted accordingly when loosening screws (10).

D 521-38

2 3 4 1 7

6 4 10 5

8 9

D 521-51

5 - 94

148-640 001 8.0 en 6.2003

Autoconer 338

5.5.8

=A6

Cradle Opener

a) In 25° cam package position, examine if the cradle opener bow (1) sits at right angle to the doffer housing. If required, correct the length of coupling rod (2) (initial length is 97 mm). b) With the cam package in 140° radial position, on cyl. hd. screw (3), set magnet bracket (4) in direction of the arrow at 4 + 1 mm in such fashion that Hall sensor (+E1-B14) is actuated. c) Hall sensor (+E1-B14), located behind the housing wall, is actuated, if in main menu “Data display“, in sub menu ‘Input 1‘, a “1“ is displayed below value “9“. +E1-B14

3 4

2

1

4+1 mm D 521-01

3”/4”

1

5”/6”

90°°

D 521-52

148-640 001 en 6.2003

5 - 95

Autoconer 338

5.5.9 1 3

Yarn lifter – Neutral position with RH transfer tail

a) With the cam package in 0° radial position, on stop screw (1), adjust a distance of 14 ± 2 mm between yarn lift housing (2) and support angle (3). b) With the cam package in 0° radial position Hall sensor (+C3-B33) must be actuated by magnet (4) in “0-position“. Hall sensor (+C3-B33) is actuated if in sub-menu input 1 of main menu”Data display“ a “1“ is visible below the upper value “5“.

2

c) Loosen and remove cyl. hd. screw (5). Using a punch of 4 mm diameter, separate gear (7) from the tapered portion of shaft (6). Loosely insert cyl. hd. screw (5). d) Have yarn lift head (8) contact stop (9) towards the operator’s aisle. 14 ± 2 mm

D 520-01

=A6

e) Use a screw driver to turn gear (7) in arrow direction against gear segment (11) to remove gear play, then tighten cyl. hd. screw (5). f) Inspect the length of linkage rod (12) (standard dimension 388 mm) for yarn lift head (8), if required. g) Inspect the length of linkage rod (13) (standard dimension 398 mm) for the lateral motion, if required.

13 398 mm

4

+C3-B33

D 520-03

12

5 6

7 11

9

D 520-02

5 - 96

8

148-640 001 8.0 en 6.2003

Autoconer 338

5.5.10 Yarn lifter – Neutral position with LH transfer tail

1 3

a) With the cam package in 0° radial position, on stop screw (1), adjust a distance of 14 ± 2 mm between yarn lift housing (2) and support angle (3). b) With the cam package in 0° radial position Hall sensor (+C3-B33) must be actuated by magnet (4) in “0-position“. Hall sensor (+C3-B33) is actuated if in sub-menu input 1 of main menu “Data display“ a “1“ is visible below the upper value “5“.

2

c) Loosen and remove cyl. hd. screw (5). Using a punch of 4 mm diameter, separate gear (7) from the tapered portion of shaft (6). Loosely insert cyl. hd. screw (5). 14± ±2 mm D 520-30

=A6

d) Have yarn lift head (8) contact stop (9) towards the operator’s aisle. e) Use a screw driver to turn gear (7) in arrow direction against gear segment (11) to remove gear play, then tighten cyl. hd. screw (5). f) Inspect the length of linkage rod (12) (standard dimension 388 mm) for yarn lift head (8), if required. g) Inspect the length of linkage rod (13) (standard dimension 398 mm) for the lateral motion, if required. Note: Position X: Hinge point of link lever (13) for 3”, 4”, 5”, and 6” cones/sleeves.

13 398 mm 4

Pos. X

+C3-B33

D 520-42

12

5 6

7 11

9

D 520-02

148-640 001 en 6.2003

8

5 - 97

Autoconer 338

5.5.11 Yarn lifter – Yarn catch position for RH transfer tail

2

a) At 40° radial cam package position (yarn search dwell), on stop screw (1) adjust a distance of 517 ± 1 mm between cradle opening shaft (2) and center of W connection (3). b) On set screw (4) adjust an initial distance of 236 ± 2 mm between shears bracket (5) and support angle (6). 1 6

c) Check whether or not catch plate (7) reliably catches the traversing yarn (8); if required, reset on set screw (4).

3

4

5 7 236± ±2 mm 8 D 520-04

5 - 98

148-640 001 8.0 en 6.2003

Autoconer 338

5.5.12 Yarn lifter – Yarn catch position for LH transfer tail

2

a) At 40° radial cam package position (yarn search dwell), on stop screw (1) adjust a distance of 517 ± 1 mm between cradle opening shaft (2) and center of W connection (3). b) On set screw (4) adjust an initial distance of 236 ± 2 mm between shears bracket (5) and support angle (6). 1 6

c) Check whether or not catch plate (7) reliably catches the traversing yarn (8); if required, reset on set screw (4).

3

4

5 7 8

236± ±2 mm

D 520-32

148-640 001 en 6.2003

5 - 99

Autoconer 338

5.5.13 Yarn lifter – Cone/Sleeve feed position with RH transfer tail a) In 206° cam package position, loosen counter nut (1).

1

b) On hex. hd. screw (2), adjust a distance of 12 + 2 mm between yarn guide plate (3) and yarn guide drum (4), then tighten counter nut (1).

2

c) In 214° cam package position, loosen cyl. hd. screw (5) and set eccentric (6) of angular lever (7) to maximum position; tighten cyl. hd. screw (5). Note: Double-check the hinge point of link rod (15): For 5” and 6” cones/sleeves on position X, for 3” and 4” cones/sleeves on position Y.

3 12+2 mm

d) On set screw (10), set stop (9) so that the required distance (a) (see table below) between yarn lifter shears (11) and brake bushing (12) is obtained.

4

Drum stroke

Distance (a)

6″

5 ± 1 mm

5″

17.5 ± 1 mm

4″

5 ± 1 mm

3″

17.5 ± 1 mm

e) Loosen cyl. hd. screw (13) and set magnet bracket (14) centered with Hall sensor (+C3-B33), so that the sensor is reliably actuated. Hall sensor is actuated if in the main menu “Data display“, sub-menu ‘Input 1‘ a “1“ is displayed under the upper value “5“. Tighten cyl. hd. screw (13).

5 15 7 6 Pos.X Pos.Y

D 520-40

13

14 +C3-B33

(a)

11

=A6

D 520-50

5 - 100

12

10 9

148-640 001 8.0 en 6.2003

Autoconer 338

5.5.14 Yarn lifter – Cone/sleeve creeling position with LH transfer tail

1 2

a) At 206° radial cam package position, loosen counter nut (1). b) On hex. Hd. screw (2) adjust a distance of 12 + 2 mm between yarn guide plate (3) and drum surface (4), then tighten counter nut (1).

3

12+2 mm

6

4 7

c) On stop (5) of the deflection plate, set screw (7), adjust yarn lifter head (6) so that there is a distance of 0 - 3 mm between shears bracket (8) and LH adapter (9). d) Loosen cyl. hd. screw (10) and set magnet plate (11) centered with Hall sensor (+C3-B33) so that the sensor is actuated. The Hall sensor is actuated if in the main menu “Data display“ in sub-menu input 1 a “1“ appears under value “5“. Tighten cyl. hd. screw (10).

D 520-33

=A6

10

11 +C3-B33

0-3 mm 5 8 9 D 520-35

148-640 001 en 6.2003

5 - 101

Autoconer 338

5.5.15 Yarn lifter – Transfer tail winding position with RH transfer tail a) In 232° cam package position, loosen cyl. hd. screw (1). b) Now turn the eccentric (2) of angular lever (3) towards minimum, until there is a distance (a) as shown in the table below between yarn lift shears (4) and brake bushing (5). Tighten Allen hd. screw (1). 1

c) At radial cam package position 250°, with readily chucked cone/sleeve, adjust distance (a) between yarn lift shears (4) and brake bushing (5) on Allen hd. screw (6).

3 2

D 520-46

4

Drum stroke

Distance (a)

6″

5 ± 1 mm

5″

17.5 ± 1 mm

4″

5 ± 1 mm

3″

17.5 ± 1 mm

(a) 5

6

D 520-47

5 - 102

148-640 001 8.0 en 6.2003

Autoconer 338 d) Examine if initiator (+C1-B15) is actuated. It is actuated if in the main menu “Data display“, sub-menu Input 1 a “1“ is displayed under the upper value “7“.

=A6

e) With chucked cone/sleeve, on cyl. hd. screws (7) and (8), adjust a distance of 5 ± 1 mm between the bottom of yarn lift shears (4) and cone/sleeve, or adapter, at the closest place. f) Loosen cyl. hd. screw (9) and align guide slot (10) of guide plate (11) with the transfer tail groove of the cone/ sleeve (12); tighten cyl. hd. screw (9). Note: For cones/sleeves without transfer tail groove the yarn guide slot of the yarn guide plate should be adjusted to standard dimension 8 mm from the bottom rim of the cone/ sleeve. For overwinding of the transfer tail the yarn guide plate must be set further to the left (standard dimension 10 ... 12 mm from the bottom rim of the cone/sleeve).

+C1-B15

D 520-08

4

7

5± ±1 mm

8

D 520-05

12

Changing the transfer tail position has to be done on cyl. hd. screw (9) only!

8 mm

10

11

9

D 520-18

148-640 001 en 6.2003

5 - 103

Autoconer 338

5.5.16 Yarn lifter – Transfer tail position with LH transfer tail a) At 250° radial cam package position, with chucked cone/sleeve, on cyl. hd. screws (1) and (2) adjust a distance of 5 ± 1 mm between lifter shears (3) and cone / sleeve, or package adapter, at the closest place.

1 3

b) Loosen cyl. hd. screw (4), and precisely align guide slot (5) of yarn guide plate (6) with transfer tail groove (7) of the cone/sleeve. Tighten cyl. hd. screw (4).

5± ±1 mm

2

Note: The yarn guide plate has to be set further to the right (appr. 10-12 mm from the rim of the cone/sleeve) if the transfer tail is to be overwound by the yarn body. Correction of the lateral transfer tail position must be made only on cyl. hd. screw (4).

D 520-05

8 mm

7

5

6

4

D 520-36

At 282° ... 283° radial cam package position, with transfer tail for 3” and 4“, turn eccentric (8) until the distance between stop (9) on the deflector plate and setting handle (10) at the housing is 2 ... 4 mm.

8 10

9 9 D 520-48

5 - 104

2-4 mm

148-640 001 8.0 en 6.2003

Autoconer 338

5.5.17 Cone/Sleeve Feeder for RH Transfer Tail Winding a) At 0° position of the cycling linkage, loosen clamping block (2) seated on shaft (1). b) With loosely tightened cyl. hd. screw M6 x 10 (3), fasten feeder housing (4) and gripper housing (5) in correlation to eachother.

2 5

c) Tighten clamping block (2) on shaft (1), and remove cyl. hd. screw (3). d) At 0° position of the cycling linkage, use 4 mm Allen wrench (7) to turn eccentric (6) from working position (a) 90° to setting position (b).

1 4

e) Set finger (8) all the way back, in arrow direction, and reset stop plate (9) (observe position of stop plate (9) relative to the cone/sleeve diameter).

3 D 521-45

(a)

(b)

6 7

D 521-46

∅52-105 mm

∅25-70 mm 9

8

D 521-44

148-640 001 en 6.2003

5 - 105

Autoconer 338 f) At 242° of the cycling linkage, manually place a cone/ sleeve (10) in the cradle. g) Loosen cyl. hd. screw (11). Set retainer plate (12) against the cone/sleeve so, 1. that the bottom edge of the retainer plate is parallel with, and with a slight distance (X) to the bottom edge of the cone/sleeve, and 15

12

11

2. that there is a lateral distance of at least 5 mm between stop plate (9) and yarn lifter shears (13).

9 5 mm

10

Tighten cyl. hd. screw (11). 13

X

X

h) Loosen cyl. hd. screw (14), place stop plate (9) against the cone/sleeve, then tighten cyl. hd. screw (14). Double-check retainer plate (12) and reset if required. i) Loosen cyl. hd. screw (15) of finger (8), place the finger against the cone/sleeve, and tighten cyl. hd. screw (15).

8

j) Return eccentric (6) from setting position (b) to working position (a).

14

D 521-03

6

(b)

(a)

D 521-47

5 - 106

148-640 001 8.0 en 6.2003

Autoconer 338

5.5.18 Cone/Sleeve Feeder for LH Transfer Tail Winding a) At 0° position of the cycling linkage, loosen clamping block (2) seated on shaft (1). b) With loosely tightened cyl. hd. screw M6 x 10 (3), fasten feeder housing (4) and gripper housing (5) in correlation to eachother.

2 5

c) Tighten clamping block (2) on shaft (1), and remove cyl. hd. screw (3). d) At 0° position of the cycling linkage, use 4 mm Allen wrench (7) to turn eccentric (6) from working position (a) 90° to setting position (b).

1 4

e) Set finger (8) all the way back, in arrow direction, and reset stop plate (9) (observe position of stop plate (9) relative to the cone/sleeve diameter).

3 D 521-45

(a)

(b)

6 7

D 521-46

∅52-105 mm

∅25-70 mm 9

8

D 521-44

148-640 001 en 6.2003

5 - 107

Autoconer 338 f) At 242° of the cycling linkage, manually place a cone/ sleeve (10) in the cradle. g) Loosen cyl. hd. screw (11). Set retainer plate (12) against the cone/sleeve so, 1. that the bottom edge of the retainer plate is parallel with, and with a slight distance (X) to the bottom edge of the cone/sleeve, and 15

12

11 9

13 5 mm

2. that there is a lateral distance of at least 5 mm between stop plate (9) and yarn lifter shears (13). Tighten cyl. hd. screw (11).

10

X

X

h) Loosen cyl. hd. screw (14), place stop plate (9) against the cone/sleeve, then tighten cyl. hd. screw (14). Double-check retainer plate (12) and reset if required. i) Loosen cyl. hd. screw (15) of finger (8), place the finger against the cone/sleeve, and tighten cyl. hd. screw (15).

8

j) Return eccentric (6) from setting position (b) to working position (a).

14

D 521-33

6

(b)

(a)

D 521-47

5 - 108

148-640 001 8.0 en 6.2003

Autoconer 338

9

2

1

3

4

2

9

1

9

9 3

2

1

4 5

11

12 6

5

7 3 mm D 270-14

8

10

5.5.19 Cone/Sleeve magazine a) Compress leaf spring (1) and set marks (3) of clamping plate (2) according to cone/sleeve length flush with marks (4) of the superstructure. Release the leaf spring. Drum stroke

Cone/Sleeve length

6″

180 mm

6″

175 mm

6″

170 mm

5″

145 mm

4″

120 mm

3″

95 mm

148-640 001 en 6.2003

b) At 112° radial cam package position, while cone or sleeve (5) is ”grabbed”, lift feeder gripper (6). c) For setting the distance of 3 mm, insert an open-end wrench 3 mm between feeder housing (7) and bushing (8) of feeder gripper (6). d) Compress leaf springs (1) and shift magazine necks (9) towards the cone/sleeve so that the rubber profile (10) slightly contacts the cone or sleeve. e) Read the resulting value from scale (11) on the inside of the magazine necks, and from the marking noses (12) of the clamping plates, and transfer the settings to all other magazines.

5 - 109

Autoconer 338

5.5.20 Cone/Sleeve guides with RH transfer tail a) Set the following standard distances (a) and (b) on Allen hd. screws (1) for the guides (2) and (3): 1

(a)

(b)

2

3

Drum stroke

Cone/sleeve length

Distance (a)

Distance (b)

6″

170 mm

70 - 72 mm

100 mm

5″

145 mm

83 mm

112 mm

4″

120 mm

97 mm

125 mm

3″

95 mm

110 mm

139 mm

Inspection: If required, correct the distance settings, if dimension 5 + 2 mm between the LH package adapter and cone/ sleeve is incorrect while the feeder holds the cone/sleeve in the opened package cradle. Note: Value 5 + 2 mm could change for cone/sleeve lengths above 170 mm. D 521-04

5+2 mm D 521-22

5 - 110

148-640 001 8.0 en 6.2003

Autoconer 338

5.5.21 Cone/Sleeve guides with LH transfer tail a) Set the following standard distances (a) and (b) on Allen hd. screws (1) for the guides (2) and (3): 1

(a)

(b)

2

3

Drum stroke

Cone/sleeve length

Distance (a)

Distance (b)

6″

170 mm

72 mm

96 - 98 mm

5″

145 mm

95 mm

104 mm

Inspection: If required, correct the distance settings, if dimension 5 + 2 mm between the LH package adapter and cone/ sleeve is incorrect while the feeder holds the cone/sleeve in the opened package cradle.

D 521-04

5+2 mm

D 521-34

148-640 001 en 6.2003

5 - 111

Autoconer 338

5.5.22 Nose tail a) With 0° radial cam package position, on hex. hd. screw (1) adjust distance (a) between guide lever (2) and housing (3): Drum stroke

Distance (a)

6″ 47±1 mm 5″ 4″ 73±1 mm

2

3″

3

1 (a)

D 520-43

b) With 31° radial cam package position, loosen the two cyl. hd. screws (4). c) Adjust a distance of 5-8 mm between guide lever (2) and deflection plate (5).

4 4

d) Tighten the two cyl. hd. screws.

2

5-8 mm 5

D 520-45

5 - 112

148-640 001 8.0 en 6.2003

Autoconer 338 e) With 94° radial cam package position, on threaded bushing (6) adjust distance (a) between guide lever (2) and housing (7): 6

Drum stroke

Distance (a)

6″

180 mm

5″

168 mm

4″

156 mm

3″

144 mm

2

(a)

7

D 520-44

148-640 001 en 6.2003

5 - 113

Autoconer 338

5.5.23 Delivery Package Guiding

=A6

a) With the cam package in 0° adial position, loosen cyl. hd. screw (1), and disengage gear (2) from the tapered shaft portion. b) Push the package guide arm (3) with package guide lever (4) against intermediate lever (5), simultaneously neutralizing the gear play in arrow direction; tighten cyl. hd. screw (1).

1 2

c) In 0° cam package position, loosen cyl. hd. screw (6) and adjust a distance of 1.5 ± 0.5 mm between the bottom edge of actuator plate (7) and bottom edge of the bracket of Hall sensor (+C1-B12).

10

d) Tighten cyl. hd. screw (6). e) Examine if Hall sensor (+C1-B12) is actuated. It is actuated, if in main menu “Data display“ , in sub menu “Input 1“ a “1“ is displayed below value “3”.

D 521-53

3+1 mm

f) In 260° cam package position, examine if deflection sensor (+C1-B13) is actuated. It is actuated if in the main menu “Data display“ , sub menu “Input 1“ a “1“ is displayed under the upper value “4”. g) With the cam package in 325° radial position doublecheck whether or not there is a distance of 3 + 1 mm between package guide lever (4) and opener shaft (9). If not, repeat setting according to c) above.

9

4

Note:

3 5

The package diameter correction factor entered in the Informator should be double-checked if packages fail to securely roll onto the package conveyor. Alter the entry in the corresponding menu in order to have the real actual diameter of completed packages transmitted to the package doffer.

D 521-13

+C1-B13

6

7

1,5± ±0,5 mm

+C1B12

D 521-14

5 - 114

148-640 001 8.0 en 6.2003

Autoconer 338

6 Maintenance

148-640 001 en 6.2003

6-1

Autoconer 338

6-2

148-640 001 8.0 en 6.2003

Autoconer 338 6.0

General Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

6-5

6.0.1

Applicable lubricants . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

6-5

6.1

Maintenance intervals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

6-7

6.1.1

Daily maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

6-7

6.1.2

Weekly Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

6-9

6.1.3

Monthly Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

6 - 13

6.1.4

Quarterly Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

6 - 17

6.1.5

Semi-Annual Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

6 - 19

6.1.6

Annual Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

6 - 23

6.1.7

Maintenance intervals of more than 1 year . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

6 - 25

148-640 001 en 6.2003

6-3

Autoconer 338

6-4

148-640 001 8.0 en 6.2003

Autoconer 338

6.0

General Information

a

Comply with safety precautions (1.0.11 / 1.0.12). For maintenance: D Use plastic nozzles for cleaning of housings. D Avoid the use of sharp-edged tools for maintenance work.

Preventive maintenance augments quality assurance! Its application has to be adapted to the variuous operational conditions, depending on the materials to be processed, and on the loads exerted on functional parts. Utilizing the experience made during an initial trial it can be decided whether or not, and which factory-recommended maintenance intervals should be changed (factory-recommendations are based on a machine run time of 16 h per day). Noted interval differentiations are based on timing criteria: Daily – Weekly – Monthly – Semi-annually – Annually, and longer.

6.0.1

Applicable lubricants

The lubricants listed below can be obtained world-wide from branches of the companies listed in the last column. “Technical consultation departments“ of these Oil Companies will furnish advice at no charge. The order of products listed below is of no consequence concerning their quality.

e

Do not mix products of different provenience! Dispose of used lubricants under consideration of environmental protection!

Symbols

Specifikation

Products

1

Roller bearing grease, lithium-saponified, worked penetration grade 2 (265-295) at 25° C.

BP-ENERGREASE LS2 CHEVRON-DURA-LITH CHEVRON-GREASE 2 ESSO BEACON 2 ESSO UNIREX N 3 MOBIL MOBILUX-GREASE NO. 2 SHELL Alvania R 2

Lithium grease with MoS2

SHELL Alvania EP (LF) 2

Schlafhorst Maintenance Spray RS 400,

Part No. for ordering: 8.24 894-023

Silikonöl - pur,

Part No. for ordering: 8.24 817-050

2 2 3

148-640 001 en 6.2003

6-5

Autoconer 338

6-6

148-640 001 8.0 en 6.2003

Autoconer 338

6.1

Maintenance intervals

6.1.1

Daily maintenance

Suction drive Remove fiber finish deposits from screen (1). Remove yarn waste from chamber (2). Note:

2

The yarn chamber can be cleaned from both, front or rear of the machine.

1

D101-27

2

D101-28

Suction pipe shutter Inspect (and clean) suction pipe shutter (1) for snarled yarn ends.

1 D330-07

148-640 001 en 6.2003

6-7

Autoconer 338 ’Wet’ splicer Clean splicer head as well as adjoining components: Spray with a soapy solution, wait for penetration, then blow-off with compressed air. Subsequently spray with maintenance spray RS 400.

e

Attention! Protect yarn tension sensor against spray liquid!

Requirements for soapy water: The water must be de-mineralized. Characteristic

Requirement

pH value

between 5 and 7

Electrical conductivity

below 2 uS/cm

Chloride content

under 1 ppm

free Chlorine

0.01 mg/l

D368-67

6-8

Remarks Important: “Oxidation“

148-640 001 8.0 en 6.2003

Autoconer 338

6.1.2

Weekly Maintenance

Package conveyor Switch the package conveyor belt OFF on turn switch (1). Clean light barriers (2). 4 3

Remove accumulated yarn waste, especially from the deflection point between end plate (3) and conveyor belt (4). Check drive roller (5) for soiling, and clean if required.

1

D101-28

5 2

D401-18

Dust removal (DR) On turn switch (1), switch dust removal OFF. Open inspection window (2) and remove dust and fiber finish accumulations from screen (3).

3 2

1 D200-10

148-640 001 en 6.2003

6-9

Autoconer 338 Control compartment

b

Only while the machine is switched OFF should the control compartment be opened. Prior to opening the control compartment, the machine has to be keyed OFF, and the main breaker switch has to be set in position ”0”. Protect (padlock) the main breaker switch against unauthorized manipulation. (→ 1.1.6)

Utilize vacuum cleaning to clean the transformer compartment (shown shaded in the illustration).

D161-43

Drum lap brush Clean drum lap brush (1) as required. For this purpose push bracket (2) up, and take it out.

1

D313-08

2 Splicer Clean splicer head (1) with compressed air. Spray shears (2) and (3) with maintenance spray.

2

Check secure and complete cutting of the yarn.

2

e

Protect yarn tension sensor against spray liquid!

3

1

D368-15

6 - 10

148-640 001 8.0 en 6.2003

Autoconer 338 Waxing device Lift depressor fork (2) and remove the wax roll. Remove the square shaft from its drive shaft. Clean the entire waxing device and remove yarn laps from square shaft (1) and drive shaft.

2 1 D360-04

For re-assembly turn the square shaft until shaft (3) seats itself in the bushing of the waxing device. Then engage it using slight manual pressure.

3

1 D360-05

Yarn trap Remove yarn trap (1), and replace it with a clean one. Use a bottle brush and a mild detergent to remove fiber finish deposits.

1 D360-04

148-640 001 en 6.2003

6 - 11

Autoconer 338 Travelling Cleaner ”Neuenhauser”

1

Inspect blow (1) and suction (2) hoses for clogging or damages and clean them if required.

2

1 2

D270-17a

On gripping recesses (3) remove lid (4). Inspect the cleaner’s interior including filter screen (5) and fan wheel and remove dust and fiber finish accumulations.

3 5 4

D272-31

Travelling cleaner ”Luwa”

1

Remove cover (1), then remove dust and fiber finish deposits from screen (2) of the travelling cleaner.

2

D272-05

6 - 12

148-640 001 8.0 en 6.2003

Autoconer 338

6.1.3

Monthly Maintenance

Continuous empty tube conveyor (DHT) On turn switch (1) switch DHT OFF. If required, remove yarn waste accumulations, especially from deflection roller (2) of the incline. Sectional empty tube conveyor HT 10 Remove dirt and yarn waste accumulations from all belt rollers.

1 2 D401-19

Remove cover from belt tensioner (3) of the DHT and remove yarn waste accumulations, if required.

3 D401-20

RH package adapter Inspect RH package adaptor for unobstructed rotation. In case of sluggishness proceed as required (→ semi-annual maintenance of RH package adapter).

D325-10

148-640 001 en 6.2003

6 - 13

Autoconer 338 Yarn tension sensor Use only a soft-haired brush for cleaning of yarn tension sensor (1).

e

Do not attempt to clean the yarn tension sensor (1) with compressed air! Do not use cleaning detergents!

1

Do not touch measuring eyelet (2) or membrane (3) with hard, pointed objects!

2 3

D301-53

Splicer Remove the complete splicer head for cleaning, incl. cams and cam rollers.

2

After re-installation: – Clean splicer head (1) with compressed air.

2

– Spray shears (2) and (3) with maintenance spray. – Check secure and complete cutting of the yarn.

3

e

Protect yarn tension sensor against spray liquid!

1

D368-15

Important requirements when working on the cam package:

1

– The end of cyl. hd. screw (1) has to be machined flat. – Tighten cyl. hd. screw (1) at 5 Nm. – Tighten hex. nut (2) of the cam package at 60 Nm.

2

D368-68

6 - 14

148-640 001 8.0 en 6.2003

Autoconer 338 Tension device Remove yarn guide plate (1). Remove accumulation of fly and yarn waste from behind the RH tension disc (2). In toggle mode, place yarn tensioner in ’open’ position. Unclips LH tension disc (3). After cleaning, reclips the LH tension disc, and install yarn guide plate (1). 3

D360-04

1

2 Hairiness nozzle Remove dust and yarn waste accumulations from hairiness nozzle (1). Inspect the yarn channel of nozzle DJ31 (2) for deposits. If required clean nozzle with a brush, or with maintenance spray RS 400, resp. If required remove the complete hairiness nozzle assembly for cleaning (Removal and installation → part 5 “Settings”). 2

2

1 D360-018

Yarn shears

2

Spray yarn shears (1) with maintenance spray. Functional inspection, if shears – close and open without obstruction, and – cut the yarn securely and completely.

1

D360-05

148-640 001 en 6.2003

6 - 15

Autoconer 338 Suction drive

b

Only while the machine is switched OFF should the suction end be opened. Prior to opening the suction end, the machine has to be keyed OFF, and the main breaker switch has to be set in position ”0”. Protect (padlock) the main breaker switch against unauthorized manipulation. (→ 1.1.6)

Vacuum-clean the area of drive motor (1) and choke (2). 1

2

D101-27

Distribution unit 2

Filter (1) replacement.

6

3

a

*

e 1 5

4

Turn-off compressed air supply on turn knob (2). Wait until pressurized air is released from the conduit system. The filter element must not be cleaned and used over again! Under NO circumstances should an existing lid (3) be loosened!

Pull conduit (4) off the filter housing (5). Using a tension tape wrench, turn filter housing counter-clockwise for removal. Install new filter element (1). Assemble everything in reversed sequence. Activate compressed air supply. Note:

2

3

The filter element (1) must be renewed as soon as the intake pressure drops below the pressure adjusted on pressure guard (6).

6

** 1 5

4

* Without hairiness nozzle D110-13 + 14

6 - 16

** With hairiness nozzle

148-640 001 8.0 en 6.2003

Autoconer 338

6.1.4

Quarterly Maintenance

Frequency converter’s cooling block Remove screen (1), and clean cooling block (2).

1

D101-73

2

D101-28

148-640 001 en 6.2003

6 - 17

Autoconer 338

6 - 18

148-640 001 8.0 en 6.2003

Autoconer 338

6.1.5

Semi-Annual Maintenance

2 Package conveyor Remove yarn laps from drive roller (1), if required. Check conveyor belt (2) for wear and tear.

1 D401-18

Suction arm Clean suction arm (1) of internal accumulations of fiber finish, and check for possible damages of the suction arm. Inspect suction distance between suction arm mouth and cone/sleeve (see setting instructions).

1 D301-54

’Wet’ splicer Remove splicer head from winding unit. Wash off deposits of fly, fiber finish, etc. Check cutting of ceramic shears. Spray all parts with maintenance spray RS 400.

e

Attention! Protect yarn tension sensor against spray liquid!

Depending on the degree of soiling this procedure should be repeated every 3 months.

D368-67

148-640 001 en 6.2003

6 - 19

Autoconer 338 Central housing Remove cover. Remove soiling and relubricate as shown.

2

D301-55

Linkage housing of circular magazine (RM) Remove cover and internally clean the entire housing.

e

Do not lubricate the gears, cleaning only required!

D377-30

Only the gears’ bearing points are to be lubricated as shown.

D377-17

6 - 20

2

148-640 001 8.0 en 6.2003

Autoconer 338 LH package adapter

1

Place grease gun nozzle in center bore (1) of the LH package adapter and lubricate by one stroke of the grease gun.

1

D325-27

RH package adapter

3

Remove cradle opener lever (1) (see setting instructions). Remove the complete RH package adapter assembly (2) and apply a thin film of ’Silicone oil pure’ on the inside of guide bushing (3).

2 3

Visually inspect function and effectiveness of the package brake. 1

D325-28

148-640 001 en 6.2003

6 - 21

Autoconer 338 Suction drive Relubricate all grease nipples with 20 g of grease (SHELL Alvania R 2).

a

After each relubrication, ”Maintenance operation” (fixed speed 1500 mpm) must be entered on the Informator for 5 minutes: For this purpose Select menu ”Service” under ”Maintenance”, ”Maintenance status suction drive HDS”, and enter passwort and select ”ACTIVE”. At expiration of the programmed status time the machine returns to normal operation (→ Informator 3.5).

1

e

Over-lubrication can cause bearing damage!

Note: Procedure to be followed in annual frequency when using ’ESSO UNIREX N3’.

1

D101-21

Compressed air connections Check compressed air connections on the distribution units, and on the machine rear, for audible air leakages.

D161-73

6 - 22

148-640 001 8.0 en 6.2003

Autoconer 338

6.1.6

Annual Maintenance

Delivery package doffer Compressed air free of oil and moisture has to be used for cleaning. Visually inspect all functional parts. Inspect drive rollers and spur rollers for wear and soiling.

D501-49

Energy unit (Drive end) Remove internal accumulations of dust and fly from the drive end. Inspect electrical plug connections for thermal discoloration and hardened lead ends. Replace if required.

D161-42

Autoconer 338 Use compressed air for basic cleaning of the entire Autoconer.

D101-29

148-640 001 en 6.2003

6 - 23

Autoconer 338

6 - 24

148-640 001 8.0 en 6.2003

Autoconer 338

77

66 55

6.1.7

Maintenance intervals of more than 1 year

Delivery package doffer After 12,800 hours of operation, or every 2.5 years, whichever occurs first, relubricate the delivery package doffer.

44 33 22

D501-48

1

1 1 2

D501-29

22

2

D501-34

148-640 001 en 6.2003

6 - 25

Autoconer 338

33

2 D501-33

44

2 D501-32

5 5

2

D501-30

6 - 26

148-640 001 8.0 en 6.2003

Autoconer 338

66

2

D501-31

7

2 D501-28

Yarn guide drum After 16,000 hours of operation, or every 5 years, whichever occurs first, remove yarn guide drum (1) (→ 5.2). Place grease gun nozzle into the bore for lubrication, lubricate drum shaft (2) with 6 or 7 strokes of the gun. Observe overlubrication orifice (3) and remove surplus grease.

3

1

D325-29

2

148-640 001 en 6.2003

1

6 - 27

Autoconer 338 Damping cylinder in winding unit housing Only if required! With the piston fully submerged, the oil level, measured from the bottom edge of the cylinder, should be 95 mm. This corresponds to appr. 82 ml of oil.

D301-98

6 - 28

148-640 001 8.0 en 6.2003

Autoconer 338

7 Clearer (Optional)

148-640 001 en 6.2003

7-1

Autoconer 338

7-2

148-640 001 8.0 en 6.2003

Autoconer 338

8 Technology

148-640 001 en 6.2003

8-1

Autoconer 338

8-2

148-640 001 8.0 en 6.2003

Autoconer 338 8.0

General . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

8-5

8.0.1

Lot slip . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

8-5

8.1

Delivery Package . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

8-7

8.1.1

Cobwebs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

8-7

8.1.2

Transfer Tail . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

8-9

8.1.3

Nose Tail . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

8 - 10

8.1.4

External Package Damage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

8 - 10

8.1.5

Cauliflower . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

8 - 11

8.1.6

Alternating Hard and Soft Yarn Layers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

8 - 12

8.1.7

Package Density . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

8 - 13

8.1.8

LH or RH End on Flank . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

8 - 14

8.1.9

Overwound Ends on Flank . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

8 - 15

8.1.10

Loose End . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

8 - 15

8.1.11

Ribbons (Patterns) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

8 - 16

8.1.12

Upper end Pick-up failure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

8 - 16

8.1.13

Yarn Guiding Failures (Yarn Traverse Restrictions) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

8 - 17

8.1.14

Counter Wraps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

8 - 18

8.1.15

Loops . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

8 - 19

8.1.16

Drum Laps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

8 - 20

8.1.17

Double Ends . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

8 - 21

8.1.18

Sloughing Yarn Layers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

8 - 22

8.2

Winding Unit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

8 - 23

8.2.1

Correct Yarn Waxing

8 - 23

148-640 001 en 6.2003

.........................................................

8-3

Autoconer 338

8-4

148-640 001 8.0 en 6.2003

Autoconer 338

8.0

General

8.0.1

Lot slip

The recommended lot slip has been developed to assist the user in systematically establishing production groups with all lot parameters. The lot slip has to be filled-out for each machine before the beginning of production. Urgent: Settings of major importance for production must be double-checked prior to lot setup! This also applies to clearer settings! Informator Instructions for Informator settings are found in chapter 3 of the operation manual: D Yarn guide drum drive (→ 3.2.3) D Splicer (→ 3.2.4) D Delivery package (→ 3.2.6) D Quality assurance (→ 3.2.7) D Package doffer (→ 3.2.13) D Pneumatics / Dust removal (→ 3.3.12) Mechanical settings Instructions for mechanical settings are found in chapter 5 of the operation manual: D Package cradle (→ 5.2.10) D Suction arm (→ 5.2.20) D Splicer (→ 5.2.22 ff) D Tension assembly (precleaner → 5.2.35)

148-640 001 en 6.2003

8-5

Autoconer 338

Machine name Drum model Splicer type Informator

Fiber stock Package weight

Drum drive

Ribbon breaker

Lot name

Package doffer

Lot No.

Transfer tail winds

Winding speed

g %

Transf. tail tension Code

mpm/ypm

Drum reversal

Slow

Trav. displ. drive

Med.

Without

Slow start Code

Low

Med.

Fast With High

Cradle depression time

s

Nose tail Code Nose tail tension Code

C acceleration Code

Pneumatics / Dust removal

X acceleration Code

Operat. sub--pressure

Loop brake Code

Dust removal/self cleanging

Splicer

Trav. cleaner/operation mode

--hPa[--mbar]

min

End opening Code Splicing Codes

Mechanical

Thermosplicer Code

Package cradle

Delivery package

Cradle suspension

Nominal diameter

m[yds]

Length correct. factor OFF

ON

No. of ends (Plied y.)

Yarn guide angle

LH

RH

Yarn guide plate

No

Yes

No

Yes

RH Adapter LH Adapter Cone/sleeve material

Nm[Ne,tex]

Yarn tension (Regulated)

Cone/sleeve color

cN

Yarn tenion Code (Controlled)

Drum with drive ring

Quality assurance

Suction arm components Waxing device

Autospeed yarn tension Autospeed/tension reduction

Center support

%

Bobbin yarn length

Without

Wax roll stop (0; 0.2; 0.4 mm)

Autospeed/yarn length

Retainer tube: Z; S; M; Saw tooth Quality package No

Yes

bar[MPa]

Splicing pressure

bar[MPa]

m[yds]

Feeder arm position

Minimum / maximum Ø

mm[in]

Retainer tube position Extension plate

Clearer cuts per bobbin Maximum clearer cuts

D170-19e

Opening pressure

Minimum / max. length

Guide plate position

Stop at overstepping

40

Prism type (e.g. DZ3)

%

Sorting out

20

Splicer

%

Autospeed beginning

0

With

Wax type

m[yds]

Autospeed/tension reduction

8-6

L

Package format

Waxing Yarn count

M

Taper acceleration

mm[in]

Diam. correct. factor Nominal length

H

No

Yes

%

Knotter

Maximum percentage

%

FK1 cartridge (4 types)

S M

Saw tooth

Without

With

Without

With

mm

Injection splicer

Minimum percentage

Z

Cycles

FK1 Ejector fork

Repeater cycles in sequence

FK1 Mini knotter

Suction arm nodding motions

FK4 cartridge (5 types)

Start--up cuts /Supply packg. change

Tension ass’y. (Precleaner/Tension gate)

Splicing failures / Supply packg. change

Bobbin peg extension

V

S

148-640 001 8.0 en 6.2003

Autoconer 338

8.1

Delivery Package

Conceivable delivery package faults could be visible on the package’s outside, or hidden within the package’s yarn body. Hidden faults can be recognized only through testing. Description of faults, cause of faults, and hints for their prevention is the purpose of this manual chapter. The following tables are based on practical experience, they could possibly be incomplete.

8.1.1

Cobwebs

Problem

Cause

The term “Cobweb” defines: A yarn ’chord’ on the LH or RH flank of the delivery package; or a length of yarn exiting from the p g flank being g LH or RH package wound around the protruding end of the cone/sleeve, and re-entering the package flank at a different place.

Cradle pressure of cradle suspension Insufficient cradle pressure, causing excessive slippage between yarn guide drum and delivery package.

Increase cradle pressure. Examine cradle suspension and cradle damping.

Cone or Sleeve

Only dimensionally stable cones/sleeves should be used. One-way cones/sleeves should be used one time only. Check package adapters and cradle opening motion for smooth rotation/shifting. Replace worn parts. Inspect brake cylinder.

The cone/sleeve runs erratically, due to damage(s), or because of eccentricity.

Yarn guide drum Defects and/or unevennesses at the reversal points of the drum’s guide groove. Guide groove soiled by fiber finish. Deflector plates D 820-01

‘Ends on flank’ at package start after a yarn joining cycle. Tension device function The yarn tension deviates from the nominal setting. Yarn path in the yarn tension sensor

Remedy

Clean, or replace resp., the yarn guide drum.

Inspect deflector plates for proper type, and for possible damages.

Inspect contacts; exchange tension device, if required.

Replace the yarn tension sensor.

Guide elements are inaccurate. Yarn guide eyelets

Clean, or replace, resp., the eyelets.

Eyelets soiled, damaged, or missing. Traverse displacement

148-640 001 en 6.2003

Set traverse displacement to “0”.

8-7

Autoconer 338

Problem The term “Cobweb” defines: A yarn ’chord’ on the LH or RH flank of the delivery package; or a length of yarn exiting from the LH or RH package flank, being wound around the protruding end of the cone/sleeve and re-entering the package flank at a different place.

Cause Yarn guide angle False setting.

At the reversal point the yarn should touch the angle contour.

Tension disc

Clean the tension disc.

The tension disc is soiled. Yarn path in tension device Uneven rotation of tension disc. Yarn not threaded correctly into tension device and precleaner (transfer failure). Unwinding accelerator (Triangular) (only with circular magazine [RM]) Bobbin moisture Different moisture levels cause different tension levels.

D 820-01

Bobbin build Sloughing-off yarn layers, tension differences.

8-8

Remedy

Clean tension device. Inspect yarn tension and correct if required. Inspect blow direction of travelling cleaner. Inspect transfer elements.

Check bobbin wind direction (p or q). Inspect vertical position of accelerator. Store bobbins for a sufficient period of time between spinning and winding. Select winding speed according to bobbin build quality. Optimize bobbin build in spinning. Inspect positioning of bobbin and setting of accelerator.

148-640 001 8.0 en 6.2003

Autoconer 338

8.1.2

Transfer Tail Problem

Transfer tail is missing or wrongly positioned, or its length is wrong.

Cause Pinched-off yarn Yarn being severed between adapter and rim of cone/sleeve. Transfer tail overwound Transfer tail is wrongly positioned. Yarn tension The yarn tension of the transfer tail could be too high or too low. Suction arm distance

D 820-02

Distance between suction arm and package is too small. Cones/Sleeves

Remedy Use polyurethane rings on RH adapter.

Inspect settings cradle-drum and yarn guide plate on doffer-cradle to eachother. Inspect yarn tension for transfer tail. Change, if required, in doffer menu, or in the Informator code. Perform setting according to instruction.

Deformed or damaged cones/sleeves being used.

Remove defective cones/sleeves. Do not use cones/sleeves with yarn catch notch.

Sub-pressure (Suction) in suction arm

Inspect sub-pressure level and reset if required.

Transfer tail being drawn-off during cycle. Transfer tails of wrong lengths.

148-640 001 en 6.2003

Inspect setting in doffer menu or on the Informator and correct No. of winds if required.

8-9

Autoconer 338

8.1.3

Nose Tail Problem

Missing, or wrongly positioned.

Cause Travelling cleaner blows the correctly placed nose tail off the delivery package Nose tail

Nose tail wrongly positioned

8.1.4

Package cradle

Adapt code in doffer menu or Informator. Inspect relative positioning of yarn guide drum to package cradle. Reduce taper acceleration.

External Package Damage Problem

Package with visible damages of the yarn body

8 - 10

Double-check position, blow direction and air flow of the blow nozzles. Inspect setting of nose tail positioning lever on doffer. Adapt code in doffer menu, or Informator accordingly.

missing

D325-13

Remedy

Cause

Remedy

Package deposit onto the package conveyor belt incorrect automatic doffing

Inspect the diameter correction factor and reset it on the Informator, if required.

manual doffing

Avoid if possible. Precise positioning of the package on the conveyor belt is essential.

148-640 001 8.0 en 6.2003

Autoconer 338

8.1.5

Cauliflower Problem

On the nose flank of the package next to the cone/sleeve yarn layers are pushed out and tend to “curling”. g This is due to high g pressure off the th outer t yarn layers l upon the package core. This fault can be more or less obvious depending on

Cause Cradle pressure

Select lower cradle pressure.

Alignment

A soft package core on the LH side develops if there is a gap between cone/sleeve and drum surface on the RH side.

of cone/sleeve on the yarn guide drum

– Yarn properties – Yarn type – Degree of moisture – Yarn elasticity Especially packages of rotor-spun yarn, woollens, and crepe yarn tend to develop p “Cauliflower”.

Remedy

Initial layers on cone/sleeve

The RH flank of the package should be as far to the right as possible.

Bending in the middle of cone/sleeve

Use only dimensionally stable cones/sleeves.

Cone/sleeve taper

Examine the combination of cone/sleeve - yarn - yarn guide drum.

Taper acceleration

Reduce taper acceleration, if feasible. If possible, use cones of less taper.

Yarn tension too low

Optimize yarn tension through tension regulation and/or Autospeed.

Winding start from a full bobbin D 820-03

148-640 001 en 6.2003

8 - 11

Autoconer 338

8.1.6

Alternating Hard and Soft Yarn Layers

Problem Protruding yarn layer rings (”welts”) are visible on the package flanks.

Cause Package cradle

Remedy Inspect for proper function.

Cradle lift Package adapters

Adhere to maintenance instructions.

revolving sluggishly Bobbins

Remedy spinning malfunctions.

Non-twisted yarn lengths bobbin hardness. Yarn path in tension device

D 820-04

Uneven rotation of tension disc. Yarn not threaded correctly into tension device and precleaner (transfer failure). Yarn tension differences “Bobbin rings” Bobbin hardness

Clean tension device. Inspect yarn tension and reset, if possible. Inspect blow direction of travelling cleaner. Inspect transfer elements. Utilize yarn tension regulation and/or Autospeed. Remedy spinning malfunctions.

Different hardnesses of bobbins. Moisture of bobbins Different degrees of moisture causes different degrees of yarn tension.

Store bobbins for a sufficient period of time between spinning and winding.

Bobbins in circular magazine (RM)

Distribute such bobbins evenly on all winding units.

Piece- bobbins of various sizes (creel-outs).

8 - 12

148-640 001 8.0 en 6.2003

Autoconer 338

8.1.7

Package Density Problem

Large-scale density variations detected during manual examination of the packages.

Cause

Remedy

Cradle pressure

Select cradle pressure as required.

Cradle motion

Inspect easy rotation on cradle shaft. Examine motion of piston in damping cylinder. Replenish oil, if required.

sluggish

Moisture of bobbins Different degrees of moisture causes different degrees of yarn tension.


Yarn tension

Select yarn tension corresponding to conditions. Tension must be identical on all winding units. Optimize setting. Functional examination: Tension regulation Autospeed.

Tension disc pressure

Must be free of obstructions.

D 820-16

Closing- and revolving motion Bobbins in circular magazine (RM)

Distribute such bobbins evenly on all winding units.

Piece-bobbins of various sizes (creel-outs)

148-640 001 en 6.2003

8 - 13

Autoconer 338

8.1.8

LH or RH End on Flank Problem

At bobbin run-out or at yarn break, the upper yarn end is thrown beyond the package edge; occasionally the end is caught between cone/sleeve and adapter sometimes wound around the cone/sleeve’s protruding p g end.

Cause Deflector plate Too much distance to yarn guide drum (Deflector plate warped). Yarn guide angle false setting. Suction arm distance Distance between suction arm and package is too large.

Sub-pressure (suction) too low. Suction arm clogged. D 820-05

Inspect distance according to manual instructions. Replace deflector plate if required. At the reversal point the yarn should touch the angle contour. Adjust according to manual instruction. Be sure that at small package diameter the transfer tail is not disturbed by the needle comb (0.5 mm; 0.3 mm or special applications). Examine sub-pressure level. Clean yarn waste chamber. Check and clean suction arm. Examine needle comb.

Electro-static load

Improvement through higher air humidity. Change to a different type of cone/sleeve (paper).

Bobbin

Select winding speed according to bobbin build. Optimize bobbin build in spinning. Examine bobbin positioning and accelerator setting.

Bobbin build; yarn snared on bobbin; damaged spinning tube; yarn tension breaks.

8 - 14

Remedy

148-640 001 8.0 en 6.2003

Autoconer 338

8.1.9

Overwound Ends on Flank Problem

Ends on flank not properly and completely removed by the needle comb, or ends on flank having caused a double-end cut in the clearer, have been wound into the delivery package.

Cause Suction arm’s needle comb Soiled, covered, missing or damaged.

Remedy Clean or replace the needle comb. Remove cover strip, or install needle comb.

D 820-06

8.1.10 Loose End Problem A loose yarn end has been wound into the delivery package.

Cause Splicer shears Cutting reliability, false setting, dull shear blades. Cutting device (Clearer)

Remedy Inspection through Informator print-out (nCSK). Replace shears.

Replace cutting knife.

Dull cutting knife. Electro-static load

Improvement through higher air humidity.

Delivery package

Examine sub-pressure level.

Suction arm draws a ‘loop‘ from the package (”Counter-wrap”). D 820-07

Suction arm’s needle comb acts too aggressive

148-640 001 en 6.2003

Examine settings. Install cover strip, or remove needle comb.

8 - 15

Autoconer 338

8.1.11 Ribbons (Patterns) Problem Rhombus-forming yarn ribbons visible on the circumference of the package, resulting from an integer-numbered ratio between package and yarn guide drum in respect to diameter and drum pitch.

Cause Troublesome ribbons The ribbon interferes with package build “especially for dye packages”; impaired unwinding properties.

Package adapters

Remedy To abate ribbons: Change yarn length, diameter, or cradle pressure of the package. Activate traverse displacement. Utilize taper acceleration. Change yarn tension. Install yarn guide drums of higher pitch, moving critical ribbons to larger package diameters.

Adhere to maintenance instructions.

revolving sluggishly

Ribbon breaker device Insufficient intensity

Optimize ribbon breaker setting on Informator. Change the percentage value.

D 820-08

8.1.12 Upper end Pick-up failure Problem Without obvious reason the suction arm fails to draw the upper end off the package.

Cause Suction arm distance Wrong distance between suction arm and package. Suction arm clogged. Sub-pressure too low. Yarn condition Suction arm accessories.

D 820-09

Upper end sensor Degree of soiling, functionality.

8 - 16

Remedy Select the most effective distance corresponding to setting instructions. Check and clean suction arm. Examine needle comb. Clean yarn waste chamber. Examine sub-pressure level. Check needle comb and cover strip. Optimize, through entry on the Informator: – No. of ‘nodding‘ motions – Reversed drum drive speed Clean upper end sensor; replace if required.

148-640 001 8.0 en 6.2003

Autoconer 338

8.1.13 Yarn Guiding Failures (Yarn Traverse Restrictions)

Problem The yarn is not evenly placed across the entire width of the yarn body.

Cause Guide groove of yarn guide drum

Remedy Replace yarn guide drum; soiled guide grooves must be cleaned.

Damages and/or unevenesses on the reversal and cross-over points of the yarn guide drum. Soiled guide grooves. Small drum lap

Remove the drum lap.

Yarn tension

Regulate yarn tension.

Steadying plate and yarn guide angle

Inspect setting. Add-on of parts, if required.

false setting D 820-10

Yarn path in tension device Tension disc turning sluggishly. Yarn not threaded in tension device and precleaner (transfer failure).

Winding speed

Clean tension device. Inspect yarn tension and reset, if possible. Inspect blow direction of travelling cleaner. Inspect transfer elements. Reduce winding speed.

too high for package type Bobbin build Sloughing-off yarn layers, yarn tension differences

Select winding speed according to bobbin build. Optimize bobbin build in spinning. Examine bobbin positioning and accelerator setting.

Note: Yarns of high friction levels, yarns spun from brittle fibers, and yarns generating high levels of static electricity present problems in yarn guiding. A different type of yarn guide drum could improve this situation.

148-640 001 en 6.2003

8 - 17

Autoconer 338

8.1.14 Counter Wraps Problem During reversed package rotation the suction arm draws the upper yarn end from the package. A short stretch after pick-up the yarn can be trapped (snared) by a fiber of the next yarn layer, to a point that the suction arm’s sub-pressure can not overcome this resistance.

Cause Needle comb in suction arm mouth Soiled, covered, damaged, or missing

Remedy Clean or replace the needle comb. Remove cover strip and/or perform add-on of the needle comb. The most effective remedy is utilization of a needle strip [0.5 (0.3) mm] without cover strip.

During continued reversed package rotation the yarn end already drawn off is pulled out of the suction arm and placed on the package circumference in opposite (hook shaped) direction. (hook-shaped) direction The only way to precisely determine this failure is to lift the package off the yarn guide drum instantly at termination of reversed drive prior to the start-up of the yarn guide drum in forward direction.

Yarn Winding yarn immediately after spinning.

Sub-pressure (suction) too low


Clean yarn waste chamber. Examine sub-pressure level.

D 820-11

8 - 18

148-640 001 8.0 en 6.2003

Autoconer 338

8.1.15 Loops Problem After bobbin run-out, a length of yarn lays loosely on the package and can be drawn into the suction arm in form of a large yarn loop.

Cause

Remedy

Needle comb acts too aggressively.

Use a cover strip covering the middle portion of the needle comb.

Suction arm distance

Inspect setting.

Suction arm

too small. Sub-pressure (suction)

Select lower sub-pressure level.

too high. Cutting device (Clearer)

Replace knife.

Dull cutting knife. Bobbin Yarn snared on bobbin.

Examine and optimize bobbin build in spinning. Inspect spinning tubes for damages.

Repeater cycles excessively high.

Examine: – No. of splicing failures (nCSK). – Function and start-up cuts of clearer. – Reversed drum drive speed. – Lower end pick-up (Lower end sensor, Suction pipe, Yarn clamp of circular magazine). – Threading failures. – Upper end sensor.

D 820-12

148-640 001 en 6.2003

8 - 19

Autoconer 338

8.1.16 Drum Laps Problem A yarn break takes place in the guide groove of the yarn guide drum and the yarn is wound around the drum.

Cause Guide groove damaged, or soiled Yarn tension too high

Remedy Replace drum, or clean guide groove. Select lower tension setting. With yarn tension control the tension can be set at 10 ... 13 % of the yarn’s tensile strength. With yarn tension regulation this limit can be slightly exceeded. Inspect accelerator setting. Utilize Autospeed. Check bobbin positioning.

Winding speed

Select applicable winding speed.

too high, causing thin place breaks D 820-13 820 13

Bobbin build and Yarn properties

Optimization required in spinning.

Thin places, Foreign fibers, separating piecings from spinning, Low-twisted yarn portions. Yarn trap

Clean yarn traps.

clogged Notes: The drum lap brush (released for Add-on) reduces the occurrence of drum laps. The mechanical drum lap guard prevents secondary failures. The electric drum lap guard prevents secondary failures. The electric drum lap guard detects drum laps early and prevents secondary failures. Sticky or moist yarn, as well as static loads, enhance the tendency towards drum laps. Optimized winding environment (Climate), without air drafts, is essential. A so-called package lap develops if the broken end is not wound on the drum, but on the delivery package. This fault can be determined only during unwinding in the subsequent manufacturing process. The remedies listed above apply to this fault also.

8 - 20

148-640 001 8.0 en 6.2003

Autoconer 338

8.1.17 Double Ends Problem “Double ends” means multiple yarn strands being wound on the package. Double ends can originate on the bobbin, or result from faulty upper end pick-up.

Cause Suction arm The suction arm draws two or more ends from the package, as a result of ends on flank, loops, or loose yarn layers.

Double ends from supply package

Remedy Refer to Ends on flank, loops, Sloughing yarn layers. Optimize clearer settings.

Optimize bobbin build in spinning. Optimize clearer settings.

Two ends are unwound from the supply package (e.g. from a piece bobbin).

Double ends from spinning Yarn count deviations

Optimize the spinning process. Optimize clearer settings.

D 820-14

148-640 001 en 6.2003

8 - 21

Autoconer 338

8.1.18 Sloughing Yarn Layers Problem At start-up of a new package, or during winding, whole yarn layers slough towards the small cone or package diameter, or towards the middle of the sleeve or cheese; subsequently such yarn layers are overwound overwound.

Cause Winding speed

Remedy Select applicable winding speed.

too high (centrifugal force) Yarn friction High friction between yarn and drum, yet low friction yarn-yarn Cradle pressure

Increase cradle pressure. Select applicable winding speed.

too low

Increase cradle pressure. Inspect cradle damping.

Package cradle

Inspect free motion of cradle.

not lowering to contact drum Yarn path in tension device Yarn not threaded in tension device and precleaner.

Clean tension device. Inspect tension device closing motion. Inspect blow direction of travelling cleaner. Inspect yarn transfer elements.

Traverse displacement

Activate, if feasible.

Yarn tension

Assure even tension. Utilize yarn tension regulation and/or Autospeed. Increase yarn tension.

D 820-15

Acceleration characteristics - After package doffing

Select slower acceleration after package doffing. Increase cradle depression time (Doffer). Check drive tire and settings.

- After bobbin change

Select slower acceleration after bobbin change.

Cone/Sleeve and adapters

Use only dimensionally stable cones/sleeves (Chapter “Cone/sleeve”). Avoid using cones/sleeves with smooth surfaces. If applicable, use cones of lower taper. Check adapters for sluggishness. Check bonding of brake lining.

Taper acceleration

Reduce taper acceleration setting.

too high Yarn properties

Avoid non-twisted yarn portions in spinning.

Wrong winding room climate

Optimize environmental conditions.

Note: Package diameters tending to ribbon winds are especially prone to sloughing yarn layers. Recommendation: Use drums of higher pitch values.

8 - 22

148-640 001 8.0 en 6.2003

Autoconer 338

8.2

Winding Unit

8.2.1

Correct Yarn Waxing

Use Paraffin wax of the following specifications only! The various types of wax can be distinguished by four principal properties:

A

ID. Color

5 mg Ceresine (yellow) 3 G per 1 kg of Paraffin

Oil content

Structure

Oil content or other additives

very coarse

existg. Oil = 0.5%

cristallic

addit’l. oil = none

yellow

B

1 mg Ceresine (blue) GN + 1 mg Ceresine (yellow) 3 G per 1 kg Paraffin

1 mg Ceresine (red) BB per 1 kg Paraffin

coarse

existg. Oil = 0.5 %

cristallic

addit’l. oil = 4.0 %

Remarks

These dyes have no effect on the appearance of the finished product.

Solidification point

Penetration (25°C)

Wax roll

Base particles

Wax roll

60° ... 62° C

60° ... 62° C

10 ... 11

10 – 11

56° ... 58° C

fine cristallic

Ruhr wax*= 4.0 % SP 1002

coarse cristallic

existg. Oil = 0.5 % Emulsifier additive 15 ... 20 % (Emulphor AF) BASF

Coarse cristallic structures en-hance even distribution of wax particles on the yarn.

12 ... 13

59° ... 61° C

Applicable for wool, cotton, re-

19 – 20

92° ... 96° C

56° ... 58° C

Normally paraffin contains only 0.5 % oil. The stated per centage of colorless Paraffin oil (liquidum paraffinum) must be added in order to obtain the total oil content.

2–3

56° ... 58° C

The normal-Paraffin content should be ≥ 90 %, as otherwise the Paraffins tend to smearing and soiling. (n = normal paraffin content).

12 – 13

22 – 25

e. g. for wool, bleached yarns, etc.**

Recommended for products to be bleached or dyed after winding.***

PENETRATION describes a dimension of Paraffin hardness. Measuring unit is the penetration depth of a test needle (in 1/10 mm) into the Paraffin sample (DIN 51579). The above values (e. g. 12 ... 13) are based on the penetration of the Paraffin as Base Material! Additives increase the penetration value resulting in higher measurement results from the finished Paraffin roll . Paraffins with flat penetration characteristics are to be preferred, in order to prevent softening of the Paraffin at higher ambient temperatures.

2r

38 mm 15.2 mm + 0.2 45 mm – 2 45 g

2r 15,2 +0,2

outside diameter inside diameter length weight

The face edges must be rounded. The bore must be exactly in center and perpendicular to the faces. (The roll must not run out-of-round!) The drive disc is interchangeable. The roll should be free of blow holes.

45-2

148-640 001 en 6.2003

Nearly universally applicable for cotton, wool, synthetics and blends thereof. Recommended especially for fine counts and for high ambient temperatures (around 30° C).**

yons and blends thereof. Recommended for high wax application

*Ruhr wax Sp 1002 (Fischer-Tropsch-Synthesis) = Scholven Chemie AG, D-45894 Gelsenkirchen-Buer/Germany Paraffin roll dimensions:

Application

Base particles

Oil total = 4.5 %

red For discrimination purpose the wax types are dyed in various colors with oil-soluble dyes made by BAYER, Leverkusen/Germany.

Penetration (25°C)

Oil total = 0.5 %

green

C

Solidification point

38

Type

Structure

D363-03

**

These paraffin types are soluble in finishing through emulsification additives during washing.

***

directly soluble due to emulsification additive in the Paraffin.

8 - 23

Autoconer 338

8 - 24

148-640 001 8.0 en 6.2003

Autoconer 338

9 Assembly

148-640 001 en 6.2003

9-1

Autoconer 338

9-2

148-640 001 8.0 en 6.2003

Autoconer 338 9.0

General . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

9-5

9.0.1

Erection Accessories . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

9-5

9.0.2

Establishing, or inspecting, resp., of alignment lines . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

9-6

9.1

Mechanical Assembly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

9-9

9.1.1

Alignment of sections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

9-9

9.1.2

Joining two sections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

9 - 13

9.1.3

Preparation of the suction end . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

9 - 14

9.1.4

Alignment of the suction end . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

9 - 16

9.1.5

Preparation of the drive end . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

9 - 18

9.1.6

Superstructure assembly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

9 - 20

9.1.7

Flextrack / Profile angles . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

9 - 25

9.1.8

Assembly of travelling cleaner tracks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

9 - 27

9.1.9

Delivery Package Doffer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

9 - 28

9.1.10


9 - 34

9.1.11

Travelling cleaner “Luwa” . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

9 - 44

9.1.12

Continuous tube conveyor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

9 - 50

9.1.13

Bobbin box rail . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

9 - 55

9.1.14

Delivery package conveyor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

9 - 56

9.1.15

Dust removal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

9 - 58

9.1.16

Compressed air connections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

9 - 59

9.1.17

Setting of cone/sleeve magazines . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

9 - 60

9.2

Electrical Installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

9 - 61

9.2.1

General . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

9 - 61

9.2.2

Power rails / BUS connection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

9 - 61

9.2.3

Suction drive . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

9 - 66

9.2.4

Signal lamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

9 - 67

9.2.5

Travelling cleaner . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

9 - 68

9.2.6

Continuous empty tube conveyor (DHT) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

9 - 69

9.2.7

Power supply connection of the machine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

9 - 71

148-640 001 en 6.2003

9-3

Autoconer 338

9-4

148-640 001 8.0 en 6.2003

Autoconer 338

9.0

General

Before beginning the erection of the machine be sure that all required preparations on the customer’s premises have been made. The orientation line for the machine should have been prepared by the customer. Even if this is so, double-check the position of floor orifices and connections for electrical power and compressed air. The floor plan pertaining to the machine is shown in the appendix.

9.0.1

Erection Accessories

The following accessories must be available: Measurements

Doffer assembly

D 1 chalk line, 50 m long

D 1 Flange plate

D 1 measuring tape, 30 m long

D 1 Support tube D 1 Outrigger

Assembly of sections D 4 Bracing jacks, with 3 rectangular tubes D 2 Outriggers D 3 Levelling blocks for spirit levels D 2 Square spirit levels D 2 Plumb lines Superstructure assembly D 1 Alignment angle D 1 Tensioner

148-640 001 en 6.2003

D 2 Connection bolts and 2 Spring plugs D 1 Roller bracket D 2 Spur rollers D 2 Roller bolts D 1 Rope winch D 1 Eye hook D 1 Coupling frame These erection accessories are Schlafhorst property, they are furnished temporarily for each machine erection.

9-5

Autoconer 338

ST1

ST2 W Y

Y’

E

SA

X2

X1 Y1

Y2

L

X

D 101-31

9.0.2

Establishing, or inspecting, resp., of alignment lines

The procedure for this inspection, including cases ordered by a customer (e.g. machine relocations), is described on the following pages, using one example. From the customer, request a building plan, and/or a machine layout depicting the desired positioning of the machine(s) to be installed. The customer should also furnish instructions concerning fixed starting points, such as walls, pillars, or machinery already in place.

Definition: ST

= Pillar

W

= Wall

E

= Energy unit (Drive end)

SA

= Suction end

Center line Example based on 3 starting points (ST1, ST2, and W): D Point Y1 for distance Y, point Y2 for distance Y‘ D Extend alignment string through points Y1 and Y2. D Mark point X1 at distance X, and mark point X2 according to machine length L.

9-6

148-640 001 8.0 en 6.2003

Autoconer 338 X0 ST W

Y

E X2

SA Y1

Y2

X1

Y0 Y’ D=Ax1.414

L

D 101-32

X

X0

Center line Example based on 2 starting points (ST und W): Determine dimension X0 (e.g. to pillar center). Mark point Y1 for distances Y and X0. Mark additional point Y0 for distances A and X0 (A = freely selectable; however, should be more than 2 m). Scribe radius A around point Y1. Scribe radius D (D = Dimension A x 1.414) around point Y0. The intersection of the two radii is point Y2. Extend alignment string through points Y1 and Y2, then mark points X1 and X2.

148-640 001 en 6.2003

9-7

Autoconer 338

W

E X2

P2

X1

P1

700 mm

C

B L

Machine center

A2

Machine center

A A1 X

D 101-35

Alignment line

Auxiliary alignment line for the 1st section

D Mark points A1 and A2 under 90°, and at a distance of 700 mm from the center line, towards the operator’s aisle.

Depending on local conditions the starting point for machine installation can be on either end of the machine(s).

D Extend alignment string through points A1 and A2. Scribe alignment line A. Parallel with this alignment line, and at the required distances, scribe the alignment lines of additional machines.

D From point X1, mark point P1 (Center of last frame), corresponding to the dimension of the suction end. D From point X2, mark point P2 (Center of 1st frame), corresponding to the dimension of the drive end. D Repeat these markings for the first and the last machine to be installed. D Extend an alignment line from point P1 of the first machine to point P1 of the last machine. In the area of the center lines of additional machines, mark auxiliary line B. This procedure applies also to point P2, for auxiliary line C. Note: Prior to beginning the installation, if required, doublecheck the position of floor orifices (for dust removal, underfloor exhaustect.) compared to the layout plan, as well as the connection points for power supply and supply of compressed air.

9-8

148-640 001 8.0 en 6.2003

Autoconer 338

9.1

Mechanical Assembly

9.1.1

Alignment of sections

1. Prior to assembly start, examine whether or not the floor is sloped, in order to take the required floor clearance of the machinery into consideration.

2

2. Insert square tubings (1) through the transportation frames (2) of the section to be aligned first. Insert outriggers (3) of the bracing jacks into the square tubings and secure with safety handle (4). Note: The support arms of the bracer winches are provided with set screws, for setting a 90° angle (under load) between winch and square tubing.

d100x101

4

3. Via bracing jacks, lift the section and remove remaining transport pallets. 4. Remove covers from the E-channels (5).

1

3

d100x102

5

d100x109

148-640 001 en 6.2003

9-9

Autoconer 338 Using the alignment line 1. Install brackets (1) with cyl. hd. screws (2) on the winding units. When tightening the screws, pull brackets towards the operator’s aisle to neutralize play. Location of brackets on RH machines: On winding units: 2; 4; 7; 10 Location of brackets on LH machines: On winding units: 1; 4; 7; 9 2. Place plumb line (drop cord) into notch (3) of bracket (1) (on at least two brackets). 3. Align the section so that the plumbs are exactly above the alignment line, and that foot (4) is flush with the auxiliary line for the first section to be aligned.

3

1 2 d100x252

Using the center line 4. Place notches (5) in base (4) of the frame half on the center line. Set base edge (4) flush with the auxiliary line. 5. Via bracing jacks, lower the section until it almost contacts the base plates. For joints with other sections, always use base plates with two resting points.

5

4 d100x108

d100x155

9 - 10

148-640 001 8.0 en 6.2003

Autoconer 338 6. Between the 5th and 6th winding unit, on the suction beam, install level bracket (1) from the outside on the blind-rivet nuts, and place a square spirit level on the level bracket. 7. On both frame walls, insert level brackets (2) into their bores, and place a square spirit level on the brackets. 8. Align the section via bracing jacks. 9. Have the set screws contact their floor plates (with some pressure). 10. Dismantle bracing jacks and remove square tubes. 11. Remove transport frames. Enter hex. hd. screw (3) and tighten with hex. nut (4). 12. On the levelling screws, precision-level the section, then tighten the levelling screws’ counter nuts.

1 d100x640

2 d100x105

3

4

d100x108

148-640 001 en 6.2003

9 - 11

Autoconer 338 13. Install spacer bolts (1) on the frame half, fasten with hex. hd. screws. 14. Install transport frame (2) for usage of the bracing jacks on the frame half of the next section to be joined to the frame half already in level. On the other frame half, insert the square tube through the transport frame. Note: If required, remove the dust removal device in order to simplify the installation of the transport frame (2).

1

d100x187

2

d100x102

9 - 12

148-640 001 8.0 en 6.2003

Autoconer 338

9.1.2

Joining two sections

1. As described before, move the next section on its jacks to the alignment position. 2. Clips a frame (1) on either protruding suction beam portion; be sure the sealing strip is seated correctly. 3. Using the bracing jacks, vertically adjust the section so that – joining pin (2) slides into its bore, and joining pin (3) slides into its positioning bushing; 2

– the notch is flush with the center line, or the plumb is exactly above the alignment line, resp.

3

4. Shift the section towards the one already in level. Insert cable (4) into the E-channel (5), and install rubber sleeve (6). 1

5. Have a small slot remain between the two frame halves, insert hex. hd. screws.

d100x107

6. Install levelling blocks for the spirit level in their bores, on both frame halves, and on the suction beam between the 5th and 6th winding units.

5

7. Initially, level the section on the bracing jacks. 4

8. Have levelling screws contact their respective base plate sockets. On the levelling screws, precision-level the section, then tighten the levelling screws’ counter nuts. 9. Tighten the hex. hd. screws joining the two frame halves.

6

10. Remove jacks, square tubes and other joining fixtures. Proceed identically for joining additional machine sections.

d100x109

d100x110

148-640 001 en 6.2003

9 - 13

Autoconer 338

9.1.3

Preparation of the suction end

1. Remove base cover and vertical covers (1).

1

d100x153

2. Remove safety bolts (2) from the yarn waste chamber doors, remove the doors and store them temporarily.

2 d100x104

3. Remove front covers (3) and (4).

3

4

d100x115

9 - 14

148-640 001 8.0 en 6.2003

Autoconer 338 4. Loosen hex. nuts (1).

1

d100x103

5. Insert square tubes (2) through the orifices below the transport frame, install bracing jacks (3) and secure with safety handles (4). On the bracing jacks, lift the suction end until the transport frame (5) can be removed.

3

4

2

5 d100x151

6. Place rubber gasket (6) on the protruding end of the suction duct.

6

d100x111

148-640 001 en 6.2003

9 - 15

Autoconer 338

9.1.4

Alignment of the suction end

1. Move the suction end to the section(s) already aligned, and initially level the suction end on the jacks. 2. Have positioning bolt (1) slide into bore (2) of the last frame. 2

1

3. The suction duct (3) of the suction end must be at a distance of 3 ... 4 mm to, and parallel to the protruding end of the suction beam (4) of the last section. Note: If this distance is more than 6 mm, remove the positioning bolt and the two spacer bolts from the suction end. Remove the spacer washer(s) and return positioning bolt and spacer bolts to their original places.

d100x150

1

d100x157

4

3

d100x112

9 - 16

148-640 001 8.0 en 6.2003

Autoconer 338 4. Have levelling screws contact their respective base plate sockets. 5. Remove jacks and alignment accessories. 6. Using the levelling screws, precision-level the suction end on the 3 reference points (marked on the base plate). 7. Arrange rubber seal (1) so that its welt is seated in the slot between the two suction duct portions. 8. On the end plate (2), mount a spacer bolt and secure it with hex. hd. screws on frame (3). 9. Install the doors on the yarn waste chamber.

d100x117

1

d100x112

2

3

d100x207

148-640 001 en 6.2003

9 - 17

Autoconer 338

9.1.5

2

1. Insert square tubes (1) through the orifices below the transport frame, position the bracing jacks (2), and secure with safety handles (3). On the bracing jacks, lift the drive end until the transport frame (4) can be removed.

1 2

Preparation of the drive end

3

1 4

3

d100x201

2. Clips frame (5) (furnished one time only) in place; make sure that the sealing strip is correctly seated.

5

6

d100x204

3. Move the drive end to the section(s) already aligned, and initially level the suction end on the jacks. 4. Have the positioning pin slide into its bore, and positioning bolt (6) slide into the bore of the drive end. Manually bolt the frame halves to eachother.

d100x203

9 - 18

148-640 001 8.0 en 6.2003

Autoconer 338 5. Have levelling screws contact their respective base plate sockets. 6. On the frame half of the drive end, mount the levelling block (1) in its bores (for support of the square spirit level). 7. Place square spirit level on the horizontal contour (2) of the drive end, then use levelling screws for precise levelling. 8. Bolt frame halves to eachother. 9. Remove jacks and all other assembly accessories.

1 d100x206

2

d100x205

148-640 001 en 6.2003

9 - 19

Autoconer 338

9.1.6

Superstructure assembly

1. Insert bolts (1) and (2) through the frame walls (observe correct orientation). 2. Seat and pivot-up the superstructure brace.

1 d100x210

3. With hex. hd. screws fasten the superstructure brace, on both sides, at positions (3), (4), and (5). 4. Be sure the counter screw is correctly placed in position (5).

5 4 2

3 1 d100x211

5. Install support angle (6) for the flextrack channel. On all superstructure braces, be sure to neutralize play through pushing down (direction of arrow).

6

d100x382

9 - 20

148-640 001 8.0 en 6.2003

Autoconer 338 6. Fasten brackets (7) for supporting the track rails of the travelling cleaner.

7

d100x383

7. Fasten bracing angles (8) on the suction end. 8

d100x384

8. Place spacer plate (9) on support angle (6).

6

9

d100x385

148-640 001 en 6.2003

9 - 21

Autoconer 338 9. Fasten profile angle (10); the superstructure brace is oriented vertically, the profile angle horizontally. Also, the profile angle has to be in line with the flextrack’s profile angles to be mounted later. Note: Viewed from the operator’s aisle, alignment and fastening of the first superstructure brace always has to begin on the left (regardless whether RH or LH machine). 10

d100x386

10. Using a spirit level, align and fasten support plate (11). Note: Prior to installation of the superstructure plates, initial fastening of the cone/sleeve magazines can begin, in order to avoid unnecessary overhead work (see next page). 11

d100x387

9 - 22

148-640 001 8.0 en 6.2003

Autoconer 338

3 2

1

4 1 3 4

D 270-16

Assembly of cone/sleeve magazines 11. Insert leaf spring (1) through the orifice in clamping plate (2). Compress the leaf spring, and together with the clamping plate place it into the recess of the superstructure. Release leaf spring. 12. Compress the leaf spring and shift it, depending upon the length of the cone or sleeve, to the value and mark (3) to match the mark (4) on the superstructure. Release leaf spring. Exact setting will take place later, after installation of the delivery package doffer. Drum stroke

Cone/Sleeve length

6″

180 mm

6″

175 mm

6″

170 mm

5″

145 mm

4″

120 mm

3″

95 mm

148-640 001 en 6.2003

9 - 23

Autoconer 338 13. Regardless whether RH or LH machine, always begin the installation of support plates (12) on the left.

12

d100x388

14. Prior to installing more support plates be sure the support angles (13) point to the outside (see arrows). 15. Install the support plates, they have to contact each other.

13

15

13

16. Loosen the 4 cyl. hd. screws (14), shift the angles towards the superstructure braces, and tighten cyl. hd. screws (14). 17. On eccentrics (15) adjust the vertical level of the support plates to each other.

14

18. With cyl. hd. screws and washers (broken arrows depict the fastening position) fasten angles (13) on the superstructure braces.

d100x389

19. Fasten angles (16), and install the end piece of the support plate, and the profile angle with spacer plate, for the flextrack channel.

16

d100x390

9 - 24

148-640 001 8.0 en 6.2003

Autoconer 338

9.1.7

Flextrack / Profile angles

1. Insert profile angles (1) between braces, and align them parallel with the lateral center of the machine. 1

2. Place and fasten profile angles (1) on angles (2) with cyl. hd. screws (3) and washers. Note: On machines of more than one section, temporarily do not install one of the profile angles, in order to allow room for installation of the delivery package doffer. On machines of one section the profile angle has to be installed. Also, the support plate has to be mounted on the operator’s side after the doffer has been swung-in. Subsequently the doffer can be placed on its patrol track rails.

2

d100x221

3

d100x122

148-640 001 en 6.2003

9 - 25

Autoconer 338 3. Place spacer plates (1) and (2) on the angles of the braces. 4. Install both profile extensions, from brace to drive end and from brace to suction end.

1

d100x221

2

d100x177

9 - 26

148-640 001 8.0 en 6.2003

Autoconer 338

9.1.8 5

Assembly of travelling cleaner tracks

3 1. Place hex. nuts (1) on bracer rods (2), and install the bracer rods on the suction end. 2. Install hex. nut (3), insert a washer, and mount braces (4) and U profile (5). 6 2

4

1

3. Insert washer and fasten the U profile (5) with hex. nuts. Fasten braces (4) on the suction end. Note:

2

Before the installation of the patrol tracks, adjust all U profiles to identical level with the superstructure braces. 4. To ease the assembly, insert nut blocks with already installed cyl. hd. screws (6) into the track sections, than fasten the tracks.

d100x432

5. Insert the track sections (7) into their fastening brackets, and align them so that the joint is centered on the brace. Tighten cyl. hd. screws.

7

Track section lengths: short

= on suction end

medium = on drive end long 8

= remaining machine section(s)

6. From the operator’s aisle, continue to install the remaining track sections for the travelling cleaner, 7. Above the flextrack channel, stop mounting the track sections at the brace where the crane for doffer installation is to be mounted. Note: On machines of 5 or 6 sections a bearing bracket with deflection rollers (8) must be mounted in the center of the machine.

d100x179

148-640 001 en 6.2003

For this purpose, prior to mounting the track sections, insert the bracket with pre-assembled nut blocks into the tracks. After completion of the patrol track assembly, fasten the bearing bracket in the middle of the section.

9 - 27

Autoconer 338

9.1.9

e

2 1

Delivery Package Doffer Prior to placing the doffer on the superstructure, again inspect whether or not flextrack profile angles, travelling cleaner track sections, and superstructure plates are firmly fastened on drive end, suction end, and on the intermediate frames.

1. Fasten crane bracket (1) on the superstructure brace. 2. Insert crane (2) in its bracket. 3. Place crane outrigger (3) into the crane, insert bolts (4), and secure the bolts with spring pins (5). 4. Place crane trolley (6) on the outrigger, and attach safety screw (7) on the outrigger’s end.

d100x223

d100x224

6 4 3

4 5

d100x393

7 6

d100x394

9 - 28

148-640 001 8.0 en 6.2003

Autoconer 338 5. Fasten angles (8) on both sides of the doffer’s shipping crate. Insert square tubings (9), install travelling winches, and move the crate towards the crane. Note: If cone/sleeve magazines are installed already, shift them all the way to the top in the area where the doffer is to be installed. 9

8

d100x392

12 11

6. Insert coupling frame (10) into the doffer, place wooden shims (11) as shown, and tighten safety screw (12). Actuate manual release. 7. Place doffer on front rail, shift sideways onto the rear rail, simultaneously inserting spur rollers (13). 8. Have the manual release engage on the first winding unit next to the superstructure brace.

10

d100x163

9. Carefully remove the coupling frame. 10. Actuate the manual release, and shift the doffer further down the machine, and again engage it on a winding unit. 11. Install the not yet installed flextrack angle. 12. Remove the mounting crane.

13 d100x166

148-640 001 en 6.2003

9 - 29

Autoconer 338 13. Place flextrack into its profile angle, and fasten bow (14) on connection angle (15). Note: If 3 doffers are furnished with 1 short flextrack and 2 long flextracks, be sure that the short flextrack is always allocated to the 3rd doffer. 15

With the flextrack connected on the right, on the connection angle (not shown) route cable and compressed air conduit straight to the plug bracket.

14

d100x267

14. With the flextrack connected on the left (viewed from the machine’s rear), on the connection angle route cable and compressed air conduit in a reversing arc to the plug bracket. Loosely fasten the conduits on connection angle (15), using cable wrap (16). 16

d100x270

15. Remove the lid from plug bracket (17). Close plug connections of voltage supply =A6+C1-X79 and maschine bus =A6+C1-X75.

=A6+C1-X79

17

=A6+C1-X75

d100x269

9 - 30

148-640 001 8.0 en 6.2003

Autoconer 338 16. Close compressed air coupling. Fasten lid (18), while observing that the cables are securely embedded in the foam layers. 17. Fasten compressed air conduit (19) on the lid with cable wrap, then tighten the cable wrap already loosely placed on connection angle (15).

19 18

d100x271

15

d100x270

266 ± 10 mm 15

18. Shift the doffer to that end of its patrol range on which the flextrack’s reversal bow is located. 19. In the profile angle, shift the loose end of the flextrack so that the distance between the outer edge of the reversal bow and the outside edge of the connection angle (15) is 266±10 mm. 20. In the adjoining superstructure brace, route cable and conduit as shown in the illustration, in order to prevent squeezing and/or breakage of the supply conduits.

D 501-04

148-640 001 en 6.2003

9 - 31

Autoconer 338 Note: When routing the supply conduits be sure the conduits are situated in the profile angle below the flextrack, without protruding. 100 mm

100 mm 20

22

21. In the profile angle, securely fasten the flextrack with clamping plate (21) and cyl. hd. screws (20). 22. At the connection point in the flextrack’s profile angle, secure cable and compressed air conduit with clamp (22) so that the conduits in the reversal bow are situated in the center of the flextrack links.

21

21

21

D 501-05

23. Remove transport retainers (cable wrap) from the doffer. 24. Double-check routing of cable and compressed air conduit one day after intital start-up, and correct routing if required.

21 21

D 501-22

21

22

150 mm

D 501-23

9 - 32

148-640 001 8.0 en 6.2003

Autoconer 338 25. On the 5th winding unit of each section, insert alignment angle (23) into bore (24).

26

26. Using a drop cord (25), check whether or not the drop cord’s tip, when coming from the RH side of latch bolt (26), points to the edge of the alignment angle (permitted lateral tolerance ±1.5 mm).

25

23

24

26

32 mm

D 270-01

27. Otherwise, loosen the 5 cyl. hd. screws (27), and shift the profile angle (28), carrying the latch bolts, accordingly.

27

28. Tighten cyl. hd. screws (27).

d100x522

27

28

d100x523

148-640 001 en 6.2003

9 - 33

Autoconer 338

9.1.10 Travelling Cleaner ”Neuenhauser” 1. LH machine: On the front rail, install one each reversal stop on suction end (1) and drive end (2): D Flat slant (3) towards the travelling cleaner. D Settings according to manual.

1

RH machine: On the rear rail, install one each reversal stop on suction end (1) and drive end (2):

4

3

D Flat slant (3) towards the travelling cleaner. D Settings according to manual. Note Serially the flat slant (3) must point towards the travelling cleaner in order to obtain smooth reversal of the patrol direction.

d100x601

The steep slant (4) can be utilized if reversal on the suction end is unnecessarily delayed.

2

3

d100x602

9 - 34

148-640 001 8.0 en 6.2003

Autoconer 338 2. Basic prerequisite for mounting the travelling cleaner: Always have fan wheel (5) point towards the drive end. Orifice (6) always points towards the suction end. 3. Remove upper portion (7) from the travelling cleaner. Place bottom portion on (8) on its tracks. Return upper portion to the travelling cleaner, orifice (6) pointing towards the suction end. 4. On the suction end, install mounting plate (9) at a distance of 100 mm to the end of the rails on the suction end. Belt pulley (10) must slope as shown. LH machine: Lower belt portion towards the machine front; RH machine: Lower belt portion towards the machine rear.

5

5. Align suction tube (11) with the center of orifice (6) of the travelling cleaner. If required, correct vertical adjustment on hex. hd. screws (12) and on the fastening screws of the support bracket.

d100x632

7

6. Install connection tubes / elbows (13) leading to the suction drive, as illustrated.

6

7. Shift travelling cleaner so that the suction tube enters the cleaner’s top through orifice (6). Inspect whether or not there remains a distance of 50 ... 100 mm between the end of suction tube (11) located in hood (7) and end plate when reversal stop (14) actuates the reversal bow. Note: Be sure D that there is a slot width of appr. 2 mm between lid (15) and the suction tube, and D that the membrane seals the suction tube when subpressure is present.

8

d100x600

11

10

15

13

14 12

9

13 d100x188

148-640 001 en 6.2003

9 - 35

Autoconer 338 8. Move the travelling cleaner to the approximate center of the machine.

17

9. Install motor console (16) on the patrol tracks above the drive end. The motor is slanted down – towards the machine front on RH machines, and – towards the machine rear on LH machines. The angles for the tensioning screws point towards the drive end. 10. Place end plate (17) on the superstructure, while inserting the tensioning screws into the angles (the screw ends with nuts point towards the end of the superstructure). 16

d100x603

11. Place drive belt around deflection pulley (18) and motor pulley. 18

d100x171

12. Place the drive belt around belt pulleys (19) of the travelling cleaner, while a helper at the belt tensioner prevents the belt from falling off.

19

d100x604

9 - 36

148-640 001 8.0 en 6.2003

Autoconer 338 13. Apply belt tension until motor console (16) contacts end plate (17). Alternatingly tighten the tensioning screws against the end plate. Do not remove the end plate.

17

16

d100x605

14. Adjust shift fork (20) at distance to the drive belt as described in the manual. Note: On RH machines the shift fork is mounted on the rear, on LH machines on the front of the machine. The shift fork is factory-adjusted. Inspect whether or not for normal reversal the travelling cleaner travels in reciprocating manner. If it does, reset the plate according to instruction in the manual.

20

d100x606

15. Only for machines of 40 or more winding units: Install belt brace (21) on the patrol tracks in the center of the machine.

21

d100x633

148-640 001 en 6.2003

9 - 37

Autoconer 338 16. Blow tube (22): – Installed on LH machines. – On RH machines a plug closes the orifice.

22

d100x607

17. Plug (23): – Installed on LH machines. – RH machines are provided with a blow tube.

23

d100x608

18. Plug (24) and blow tube (25): – Installed as shown on LH maschines. – Installed in reversed fashion on RH machines. 25

24

d100x609

9 - 38

148-640 001 8.0 en 6.2003

Autoconer 338 19. Install blow (26) and suction (27) tubes on both machine sides, secure them with hose clamps.

27

26 d100x610

27

26 d100x611

26

27 d100x612

148-640 001 en 6.2003

9 - 39

Autoconer 338 20. The following instructions concern both machine sides. 21. The tube suspensions are furnished pre-assembled. For further assembly, first remove M6 screws (28), M8 screws (29), and hinge screw with draw spring (30).

29

29

28

28

28 28 28

28 30

d100x613

32

22. Fasten pre-assembled tube suspension (31) with screw (32) and bolt (33). For further assembly observe the orientation of sleeves (34) (bores on top).

33

34

34

31 d100x614

23. Install pre-assembled blow and suction tubes (35). Vertically adjust floor suction nozzles according to floor level. → Illustration on next page.

35

35

d100x615

9 - 40

148-640 001 8.0 en 6.2003

Autoconer 338

d100x634

d100x635

148-640 001 en 6.2003

9 - 41

Autoconer 338 24. Install flexible tubings (36) and secure them with hose clamps (37).

37 36

36

37

d100x618

25. Apply tension on draw springs (38) according to manual.

38

d100x619

38

d100x620

9 - 42

148-640 001 8.0 en 6.2003

Autoconer 338 26. Double-check blow direction of blow nozzles and correct according to drawing, if reqired.

D272-52

148-640 001 en 6.2003

9 - 43

Autoconer 338

9.1.11 Travelling cleaner “Luwa” 1. Install end angle (1) on drive end. 2. Install U profile (2) on end angle.

2

1

d100x272

3. Install bracer rods (3) on suction end. 4. Install U profile (4) on bracer rods. 4

6

6

Note: Align U profiles vertically to match the level of the superstructure braces, in preparation for track rail installation.

3

3

d100x177

5

5. Loosely install connection strip (5) with strip (6) on braces and U profiles.

5

6

6

d100x230

9 - 44

148-640 001 8.0 en 6.2003

Autoconer 338

1

2 2

6. Place rail section (1) under connection strips (2), and position the rail section so that its end matches the center of the brace. Tighten cyl. hd. screws (3). Rail lengths: short

3

3

= on suction end

medium = on drive end long

= above section(s)

d100x230

Note: On machines of 5 or 6 sections, at the machine center, insert link blocks in the rail section. At the machine’s center, fasten bracket (4) with spur wheels on these link blocks. 4

d100x179

7. Remove angle (5) with initiators =A8+C2–B1 and –B2 (for cleaner positioning and direction) from the recess in the drive end, where it had been stored for transportation. 8. Insert angle (5) and reversal bow for the travelling cleaner into the rail section. LH machine: towards operator’s aisle, RH machine: towards machine rear. Settings according to manual. Electrical connection will take place later-on. 5

d100x186

148-640 001 en 6.2003

9 - 45

Autoconer 338 9. Install motor console (1) above drive end, flush with the ends of the track rails. The motor slopes as shown. LH machine: lower belt portion towards the operator’s aisle, RH machine: lower belt portion towards the machine’s rear.

1

d100x170

10. Lift top portion (2) off the travelling cleaner, place bottom portion (3) on the track rails with connection muffs (4) and (5) pointing to the machine’s rear. Return upper portion (2) to the travelling cleaner, opening (6) pointing towards the suction end. 6 2 4

5 3

d100x169

9 - 46

148-640 001 8.0 en 6.2003

Autoconer 338 11. LH machine: Insert reversal flag (1) into the rail on the operator’s aisle. Settings according to manual. RH machine: Insert reversal flag (1) into the rail on the machine’s rear. Settings according to manual.

3

12. Above the suction end, install mounting plate (2) at a distance of 100 mm to the end of the rails. Belt pulley (3) slopes as shown. LH machine: lower belt portion towards the operator’s aisle, RH machine: lower belt portion towards the machine’s rear.

2

d100x171

13. Align suction tube (4) with the center of orifice (5) of the travelling cleaner. If required for vertical adjustment, loosen hex. hd. screws (6) and fastening screws in the support bracket.

4

1 6

d100x188

14. Remove cover (7). Shift travelling cleaner so that the suction tube enters the housing. Double-check whether or not there remains a distance of 50–100 mm between tube and end plate when the reversal flag (1) actuates the reversal bow.

7

5

d100x169

148-640 001 en 6.2003

9 - 47

Autoconer 338 15. Install blow tubes (1) and (2), and suction tube (3). Align revolving blow nozzles 4 5 2

– (4) and (5) pointing towards the suction end, and – (6) pointing towards the upper surface of the track rails.

3 1

6

6

1

D 101-49

16. Place the travelling cleaner at the approximate center of the machine. 17. Insert belt tensioner (7) into the rail ends above the drive end.

7

d100x170

18. Place drive belt (8) around deflection pulley (9), and into the tensioning segment on the belt tensioner side.

9 8

d100x171

9 - 48

148-640 001 8.0 en 6.2003

Autoconer 338 19. Place the drive belt around belt pulleys (1) of the travelling cleaner, while a helper at the belt tensioner prevents the belt from falling off.

1

d100x172

20. Apply belt tension until tensioning segment (2) can be inserted into the belt groove, beyond the pulley rim. Release the tensioning segment. Manually move the drive belt lengthwise, in order to remove the tensioning segment.

2

d100x173

21. Adjust switch fork (3) at distance to the drive belt. Note: On RH machines the switch fork has to be mounted on the machine’s rear.

3

d100x172

148-640 001 en 6.2003

9 - 49

Autoconer 338

9.1.12 Continuous tube conveyor 1. Remove spacer bolt (1) from the end piece of the cont. tube conveyor, and mount it on the console of the drive end.

1

d100x231

2. Install gear motor (2) and bracket (3). 3. Inspect whether or not the wick at the screw plug (4) for gear box venting has been removed; if not, take the wick out.

3 2 4

6

d100x232

4. Mount end piece (5) on spacer bolts (1) and (6). Install connection plates (7) on the edges of the chute elements. 7

5

d100x233

9 - 50

148-640 001 8.0 en 6.2003

Autoconer 338 5. Remove end plate (1). 1

6. Remove brackets (2) and (3) and pull the tensioner (4) including tension roller (5) out.

d100x185

7. Remove tensioning plate (6) and thread the conveyor belt between spacer bolts (7) and (8).

10

9

8. Mount the tensioning plate (6) with 2 cyl. hd. screws on spacer bolt (7), and install angle (9) on deflection roller (10) with a cyl. hd. screw. 9. Form a belt loop, and insert deflection roller (5) and tensioner (4) through the slot in the tensioning plate and into the belt loop.

5 6

10. Install both, brackets (2) and (3) on the tensioning plate (6).

2

11. Apply belt tension according to manual instructions.

4 3 d100x235

7

4

d100x236

7

5

5

4

8

10

D 401-24

148-640 001 en 6.2003

9 - 51

Autoconer 338 12. Assemble the sorting table (1). Use Loctite to secure screw connections. 13. Loosen cyl. hd. screw (2) at the drive end frame, move sorting table to the drive end. 14. Assemble sorting table with connection plate (not shown) above the cooling block of the drive end, flush with the machine’s rear side. Also, pre-assemble cover plates with cyl. hd. screws on the drive end. Note: The connection plate is provided with slots, for horizontal adjustment of the sorting table’s final position. 15. Use a spirit level to properly align the sorting table; tighten all screw connections, and install the spacer bolt (3).

1 d100x242

d100x246

2

d100x247

3 d100x250

9 - 52

148-640 001 8.0 en 6.2003

Autoconer 338 16. Prior to mounting the inclined portion of the cont. tube conveyor, relax the belt tension on the belt tensioner (1). 17. Place incline assembly (2) on spacer bolts (3), and on the spacer bolt of the sorting table. Simultaneously, place the incline belt around deflection roller (4). 18. Fasten the incline with hex. hd. screws (5).

1

19. Apply belt tension on tensioner according to manual instructions.

5 2 d100x253

3 4 d100x232

5

d100x254

148-640 001 en 6.2003

9 - 53

Autoconer 338 20. Install tensioner cover (1). 21. Install joining plates (2) and (3) between end piece (4) of the cont. tube conveyor and the incline (5). 22. Fasten guide plate (6) and catch plate (7) on the incline.

1

d100x256

2

4

d100x257

3

5

d100x258

6

7

d100x263

9 - 54

148-640 001 8.0 en 6.2003

Autoconer 338

9.1.13 Bobbin box rail 1. Install outriggers (1) on drive end and on suction end. 2. Unless already installed (ref. to page 9.1.2), install brackets (2) on the respective winding units, using cyl. hd. screws (3). Pull brackets towards the operator’s aisle to neutralize play. Location of brackets on RH machines: On winding units No.: 2; 4; 7; 10 of each section Location of brackets on LH machines:

1

On winding units No.: 1; 4; 7; 9 of each section 3. Mount tube deposit plates (4) on brackets (2). 7 d100x176

4. Place bobbin box rail sections (5) on the brackets and tighten screws. Note: For ’Combi’ machines: Mount a spacer piece (ref. to arrow in the illustration) between rail and bracket of the sections with continuous tube conveyor.

5

5. Place bobbin box trolley(s) (6) on the bobbin box rail before installing the last rail section. 6. Install buffer bushings (7) at beginning and end of the bobbin box rail. 7. Hinge bottom plate(s) (not shown) on the trolley(s), adjust stops according to bobbin box size.

2

3

d100x252

6

4 d100x264

148-640 001 en 6.2003

9 - 55

Autoconer 338

9.1.14 Delivery package conveyor 3 1. Unroll the conveyor belt (1) on conveyor channel (2), threading the lower belt portion into the channel. 2. Unroll electric cables (3) and (4), and place them into their trough. 1 2

d100x118

3 4 d100x416

9 - 56

148-640 001 8.0 en 6.2003

Autoconer 338 3. Install belt tensioner (5) under the conveyor channel. 4. Place deflection roller (6) into the belt loop and insert it into roller bracket (7). 9

5. Mount limit switch (8) on roller bracket, plug the plug connection of sensor (9). Fasten cables on both sides of the belt tensioner as shown.

8

6. Tension the conveyor belt, and adjust sensor bracket and limit switch according to manual instructions.

5

6 7

d100x145

7. If specified, install package gate (10), table (11), bracket (12), and roll-off plates (13).

11

12

10

13 d100x417

148-640 001 en 6.2003

9 - 57

Autoconer 338

9.1.15 Dust removal 1. Fasten the pre-assembled dust removal section (1) on the suction beam (2). 2

2. Connect compressed air conduit (3) on the supply line of the Multi-jet (4). 3. Install muff on tube (5). Place connection tube (not shown) between muff and tube (6).

1

d100x160

6

3

4

5

d100x161

9 - 58

148-640 001 8.0 en 6.2003

Autoconer 338

9.1.16 Compressed air connections 1. Join air conduits (1) to the supply lines (2). 2. Place connection muffs (3) on conduit ends; make sure there is an O-ring on each conduit. Secure with clamps (4). 2

3. Connect compressed air hose (5) of the package doffer on the supply line.

1

d100x146

5

3

4

d100x147

148-640 001 en 6.2003

9 - 59

Autoconer 338

9.1.17 Setting of cone/sleeve magazines Note: 2

1

Do not execute the following work before the ”Electrical intial start” is completed, including subsequent functional inspection of the sub-assemblies. 1. Install rubber profiles (1). 2. Engage doffer above a winding unit. 3. According to the manual’s setting instructions for cone/ sleeve magazines of the doffer, adjust the magazines in correspondence with the cone/sleeve format to be processed. 4. Install covers (2).

d100x524

9 - 60

148-640 001 8.0 en 6.2003

Autoconer 338

1 3

9.2

Electrical Installation

9.2.1

General

b

The work described as follows has to be performed by special-trained electricians.

9.2.2

Power rails / BUS connection

Definition: The beginning of a section is always the end towards the drive end of the machine. 1. Remove the covers from all E channels (→ Top ill.). 2. Connect the E channel’s power rails with the connection leads: D Loosen the screws and remove protection plate (1).

d100x309

D Connect connection leads of the power rails (2): 1

→

+275 V

2

→

0V

Ground →

SL

3. Connect the individual Bus sections to eachother: D The leads are found loosely at the beginning of the sections. D Remove cable bushing from the end of the section. 2

D Insert connection leads, install cable bushing, and connect the plug at the end of the Bus leads (3). D Depending on the No. of sections, the following E channels, at the end of the Bus leads, must be provided with an end resistor:

No. of sections

Resistor at the end of the E channel’s Bus leads

1

1

2

2

3

2 and 3

4

2 and 4

5

2, 4 and 5

6

2, 4 and 6

d100x311

148-640 001 en 6.2003

9 - 61

Autoconer 338 4. Connection of delivery package conveyor D The leads for connecting the package conveyor (BUS and 275 V-) are located (loosely) in the suction end. D Remove cable bushing from the plug-in position provided in the E channel (according to diagram). 1

D Insert leads, install cable bushing, and connect plug, according to diagram (1): 275 VDC →

=A2+C1–X19

→

=A2+C1–X39

BUS

D Affix the corresponding labels (furnished with the accessories) on plug and cover plate.

d100x320

9 - 62

148-640 001 8.0 en 6.2003

Autoconer 338 5. Bus connection from the E channels to PCB ’Machine control’ (M-Steuerung) located in the control compartment: D From the beginning of the section(s), route leads 1, 3, 5 via cable trough (1) to the control compartment. D Insert leads through the sponge rubber strip (2) into the compartment. Leave sponge rubber open for further leads to be entered.

1

D Through the cable channels, route leads to PCB ’Machine control’ (M-Steuerung), and plug-connect (3) them according to labeling: X19

→

Section 1 and 2

X20

→

Section 3 and 4

X21

→

Section 5 and 6

d100x321

2

d100x135

3

d100x132

148-640 001 en 6.2003

9 - 63

Autoconer 338 6. Connection of 275 VDC of the sections Supply of the 275 VDC from GZK (Intermediate DC circuit) takes place via 2 leads:

1

Lead 1

→

sections 1 thr. 3

Lead 2

→

sections 4 thr. 6

D Install cable protection (2), then route the leads of the E channels 1 and 4 via cable trough (1) to the control compartment.

2

D Cable routing at the drive end (3). D Route leads through the sponge rubber strip (4) into the control compartment. D Connection on GZK (Intermediate DC circuit) according to labeling: Connection of sections 1 ... 3: – + 275 V-1 GZK (5) d100x321

– 0 V-1 GZK (6) – Connect protective lead (7). Connection of sections 4 ... 6: – + 275 V-2 GZK (8) – 0 V-2 GZK (9) – Connect protective lead (10).

4 3

d100x323

6

5

7

10

8

9

d100x528

9 - 64

148-640 001 8.0 en 6.2003

Autoconer 338 7. Connection of package doffer(s) The connection leads of the package doffer are routed through the brace to the E channel (1). Note: Connection of a doffer can be made either at the beginning or at the end of each E channel. Connection at the end should be preferred. Two sections each are connected to PCB ’Machine control’ (M-Steuerung) via a common Bus connection (called “strand”): Sections 1 and 2, 3 and 4, 5 and 6. Only one or two doffers can be connected to one “strand”!

1

D Remove cable bushings in E channel. D Insert connection leads, install cable bushings, andconnect plug at a vacant plug position (2), according to diagram: d100x275

275 VDC →

=A2+C1–X17

→

=A2+C1–X37

BUS 3

D Affix the corresponding labels (furnished with the accessories) on plug and cover plate. D Surplus cable lengths can be stowed in the cable trough above the E channel (3). 8. Lead routing D Double check the routing of all leads. Fasten them with cable wrap.

2

d100x320

148-640 001 en 6.2003

9 - 65

Autoconer 338

9.2.3

Suction drive

The cable harness for connection of the suction drive has been routed from suction end to control compartment during the installation of the package conveyor (1). 1. Insert cable into control compartment through the foam rubber cushions (2). 2. Route cable through cable channels to motor switch =A1+E1-Q1 (3), and connect the leads according to their markings.

1

3. Close the sponge rubber strip (4).

d100x323

4 2

d100x135

3

d100x183

9 - 66

148-640 001 8.0 en 6.2003

Autoconer 338

9.2.4

2

1

Signal lamp

1. After removal of the sponge rubber strip, route the connection leads through the orifice into the control compartment. → Behind illustrated plate (1). 2. Install the sponge rubber strip. 3. Mount lamp bracket with signal lamp (2). 4. Route connection lead through the cable channels, and plug-connect the lead ends on PCB ’Machine control’ (M-Steuerung) according to labeling (ref. to diagram) (3).

d100x189

3

d100x132

148-640 001 en 6.2003

9 - 67

Autoconer 338

9.2.5 3

Travelling cleaner

1. Angular bracket (1) with initiators =A8+C2–B1 and –B2 (Position and direction) is readily installed and adjusted. 2. Insert edge protection profiles (2) from below into the C profiles (3). 3. Route motor cable from cleaner motor (4) =A8+C1–M1 to the control compartment, and connect it on relay =A1+E1-K2 (see diagram). 4. Insert and fasten initiator leads and motor leads with foam rubber blocks into the C profile! Use cable wrap (5) for fastening where required.

5

d100x134

4

3

2

d100x530

2

3

1 4

d100x531

9 - 68

148-640 001 8.0 en 6.2003

Autoconer 338

9.2.6

Continuous empty tube conveyor (DHT)

1. Connection of motor =A7+C1–M1: 1

D Remove cover (1) from WR-module DHT. D Route connection cable of motor =A7+C1–M1 through the back panel and plug-connect it according to labeling on =A7+C1–X1 (2). Double-check secure latching of the cable lugs through careful pulling!

2

D Install cover (1). 2. Install WR-module DHT (3). 3. Install initiator =A7+C1–B2 (4). Secure cable with cable wrap (5) so that the cable can not be damaged by moving parts. d100x638

3

d100x639

4

5

d100x140

148-640 001 en 6.2003

9 - 69

Autoconer 338 4. Underneath the sorting table, install stick-on cable retainers, and route the cables D Connection of motor =A7+C1–M1, 1

D Connection of initiator =A7+C1–B1, and D 2 cables for E-channel (1 x 275 V-, 1 x BUS) to the drive end (1). 5. Route the connection cable of initiator =A7+C1–B1 along all E-channels via cable channel (2) to the suction end. 6. At the suction end, open channels (3 and 4). Channel (4) contains connection plug =A7+C1–X3. Connect the leads. Prior to closing the covers, be sure to correctly place the foam rubber strip for dust protection. 7. Connection of WR-module DHT: D Route 2 cables (1 x 275 V-, 1 x BUS) from WR-module DHT to the E-channel of the 1st section.

d100x190

D Remove cable sleeves from E-channel. D Insert connection cables, place cable sleeves, and connect plug as indicated: 275 V- → 2

BUS

→

A2+C1–X5 A2+C1–X25

D Excessive cable lengths are to be stored in the cable channel above E-channel.

d100x309

3

4 d100x141

9 - 70

148-640 001 8.0 en 6.2003

Autoconer 338

9.2.7

Power supply connection of the machine

Attention!

2

Connection of the machine to the customer’s power supply line must be made by a customer-appointed electrician! Underfloor power supply 1. Remove frame and plate (1) from main breaker switch =A1+P1–Q1 (2).

1

2. Retain plate (1) in the recess (ref. to arrow 3). 3

3. Depending on the size of customer’s line supply cable D retain existing cable fitting PG 36 (4), or D Replace blind plug PG 29 by cable fitting PG 29, and replace cable fitting PG 36 by blind plug PG 36 (accessories).

d100x321

4. Route leads behind cover plate (5), and through cable fitting (4) into the control compartment to the main switch =A1+P1–Q1 (2). 5. Connect leads on main switch =A1+P1–Q1 (2). Do not install frame and plate (1), to allow measurements.

b

4

The machine’s power supply line remains free of voltage, and is secured against unauthorized manipulation.

The machine is now ready for “Initial electrical start” of the Autoconer. This instruction has been placed into the book of diagrams of the machine.

d100x312

148-640 001 en 6.2003

5

9 - 71

Autoconer 338

7

6

D 272-06

Overhead power supply 1. Remove frame and plate (1*) from main breaker switch =A1+P1–Q1 (2*).

b

The machine’s power supply line remains free of voltage, and is secured against unauthorized manipulation.

2. Retain plate (1*) in the recess (ref. to arrow 3*).

The machine is now ready for “Initial electrical start” of the Autoconer.

3. Route connection leads from the top through the sponge rubber strip (6) and the upper control compartment to main switch (2*).

This instruction has been placed in the book of diagrams of the machine.

Note: Initially the connection leads must be routed horizontally (7) (same as the compressed air conduit), in order to prevent contact with the package doffer. 4. Connect leads on main switch =A1+P1–Q1 (2*). Do not install frame and plate (1*), to allow measurements.

* ref. to previous page

9 - 72

148-640 001 8.0 en 6.2003

Autoconer 338

10 Messages and Diagnostics

148-640 001 en 6.2003

10 - 1

Autoconer 338

10 - 2

148-640 001 8.0 en 6.2003

Autoconer 338 10.0

Tester . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

10 - 5

10.0.1

General . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

10 - 5

10.0.2

Outline . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

10 - 6

10.0.3

Control Keys . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

10 - 7

10.0.4

Winding unit – Connection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

10 - 8

10.0.5

Winding unit – Menu Layout . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

10 - 9

10.0.6

Winding unit – Listing of Menu Items . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

10 - 11

10.0.7

Winding unit – Basic Display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

10 - 15

10.0.8

Winding unit – Inquiries/Entries . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

10 - 16

10.0.9

Winding unit – Service Mode Activation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

10 - 17

10.0.10 Winding unit – Entries concerning Drive Motors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

10 - 18

10.0.11 Winding unit – Entries for Magnet Valves, Red Light and Yellow Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

10 - 19

10.0.12 Winding unit – Test of Radial Motor Position and Sensors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

10 - 20

10.0.13 Winding unit – Testing the Yarn Tension Device . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

10 - 21

10.0.14 Winding unit – Testing the Thermosplicer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

10 - 22

10.0.15 Winding unit – Messages in Dialog 61 “Process Status“ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

10 - 23

10.0.16 Winding unit – Messages in dialog 62 ”Blockage“ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

10 - 25

10.0.17 Machine Control – Connection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

10 - 28

10.0.18 Maschine Control – Menu layout . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

10 - 29

10.0.19 Machine Control – Listing of menu items . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

10 - 32

10.0.20 Machine Control – Basic Display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

10 - 41

10.0.21 Machine Control – Inquiries/Entries . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

10 - 42

10.1

Machine Frame . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

10 - 43

10.1.1

Signal lamps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

10 - 43

10.1.2

Informator messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

10 - 51

10.2

Winding Unit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

10 - 65

10.2.1

Red Light Flashing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

10 - 65

10.2.2

Yellow Light Flashing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

10 - 65

10.2.3

propack Failure Reasons . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

10 - 66

10.5

Package Doffer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

10 - 69

10.5.1

General . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

10 - 69

10.5.2

Listing of Failure Messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

10 - 70

148-640 001 en 6.2003

10 - 3

Autoconer 338

10 - 4

148-640 001 8.0 en 6.2003

Autoconer 338

D 301-13

10.0 Tester 10.0.1 General Structure and Function

Type and Scope of Tests and Diagnoses

The tester

D Winding Unit

D is connected via a data cable to – PCB ’Winding unit computer’ (Spulstellenrechner) of the winding unit to be tested, or – PCB ’Machine control’ (Maschinensteuerung) This cable includes voltage supply leads as well as data exchange leads. D represents a display- and control unit. The program proper for test control and inquiries is located on the PCBs to be tested. This display appears in German or English only! D allows extensive tests and diagnostics in the area of winding unit and machine control.

1. With producing (winding) winding unit – Continuous display of the radial position of the cam package (Functional progression of yarn break cycle and bobbin change cycle) – Display of the initiators’ statuses (actuated/not actd.) – Failure messages 2. After activation of the Servicemode – The displays take place as described above, plus: – Entries / Nominal parameters can be entered, such as: Production start of winding unit at predetermined winding speed, or turning the cam package to any desired radial position. D Machine control Display of statuses of the inputs- and outputs of PCB ’Machine control’ (Maschinensteuerung).

148-640 001 en 6.2003

10 - 5

Autoconer 338

2

3 1

D 301-13

10.0.2 Outline ➀ Data leads Data exchange as well as voltage supply take place via this cable, which is firmly bolted onto the winding unit tester.

➁

Display After initially switching ON, the basic display appears on two display lines.

10 - 6

➂

Control keys The 4 control keys (→ next page) allow – selection of a menu item, or – entry or change of parameters if provided for the selected menu item (winding speed, radial position of cam package, etc.).

148-640 001 8.0 en 6.2003

Autoconer 338

10.0.3 Control Keys DOWN D For leafing DOWN within one work block, or within the index, resp. D If applicable, for reduction of an entered value. UP D For leafing UP within one work block, or within the index, resp. D If applicable, for increasing an entered value. ENTRY D Reversal to a lower level; e.g. from basic display to index. D If possible, reversal of an output’s function. RETURN D aborts an entry; D reversal to the next higher level; D returns to the basic display; or D terminates entry mode. D 301-20

148-640 001 en 6.2003

10 - 7

Autoconer 338

10.0.4 Winding unit – Connection

=A3+C1

The tester can be connected while the machine is in production, as follows:

b a

S1

b

The PCBs of the winding unit carry voltage! With the machine switched ON, the front cover of the winding unit should be removed only for the purpose of plugging the tester into its receptacle. No other interventions are permitted! Orderly closing of the front cover must be assured before leaving the winding unit.

D Switch winding unit switch S1 to “OFF“.

2

D For access to the PCBs remove cover (1) from the winding unit housing.

1

D Plug the tester’s data/voltage supply cable into the receptacle (2) located on the front of PCB ”Winding unit computer” (Spulstellenrechner). Be absolutely sure of proper plug coding. Note: With the tester connected, switching ON or OFF of the winding unit is permitted at any time. Upon switching the winding unit ON it starts from any radial position of the cam package.

D 301-22

e

10 - 8

Route the tester’s cable so that it can not be caught by a suction arm tilting up.

148-640 001 8.0 en 6.2003

Autoconer 338

D301-25

10.0.5 Winding unit – Menu Layout ➀ The test instrument is connected and shows the basic ➁ ➂ ➃

➄

display (→ 10.0.7).

An arrow pointing to the right in the first line denotes that through actuation of ENTER

Actuation of ENTER changes to menu level 1.

– moving to yet an other level is possible, and

Upon selection of a work block through actuation of keys UP or DOWN the work block is activated through ENTER.

– the status shown in the dialog can be changed.

The individual dialogs of menu level 2 are then selected again on the UP or DOWN keys.

➅

Key RETURN – aborts an entry, – switches to the next higher level, or – returns to the basic display.

Complete listing of menus → on next page.

148-640 001 en 6.2003

10 - 9

Autoconer 338 Basic display AC338 RM-Typ -> Wdg.Unit No..: X

Menu level 1

Menu level 2

Menu level 3

1 Winding

->

11 Drivers

->

2 Cycling

->

12 Sensors

->

3 BobbinTransf.

->

13 PnPBrLift Off

->

4 Clearer

->

5 Operation

->

6 Diagnostics

->

14 Tdisk Press -> On 40 cN 15 Tens.Amplif. 102 % (4K76) 16 Cradle Comp -> Off 18 Tens Sen Magn Off 19 Harry Jet

7 Configuration -> 8 Service

->

111 Drum Motor -> Off 112 DrmDisplMot -> Off 113 Waxer Mot Off

114 Tension Mot -> Off

121 Drum Pulse -> On /On 0RpM 122 PackagePuls -> Off 0RpM 123 DrmLapSensor Off 124 TensionSens 0.0 (40) cN 127 Waxer Sensor Off

21 Cam Package -> 22 Splicing

161 Diam.Comp. -> A 85.0 Step xxx 162 Diam.Ribb. -> A 85.0 0 95.0 163 Diam Min Max 100.0 110.0 10.0 164 PackDensity -> 28 19g 648 165 CrKompSensor Aus S 34

->

23 UpperEndSens. On 24 Yarn Trap -> Off 25 Brake Gate -> Off

* Displayed only for certain Program versions

31 BobTransfMot -> Off 32 BobTr 0 Sen -> On 33 BobTrTrSens. -> Off 34 Lower End Sen On 35 Loop Gate -> Off

51 Wdg.U.Switch Off 52 T-D.Open Key Off 53 Red Light Key Off 54 Yel.Light Key Off 55 Red Light -> Off 56 Yellow Light -> Off

61 ProcStatus S05 Switch Off 62 Blockage -> B00 None 63 Cycle Pos. Degree XXX 64 Mload Drm/Cyc 0% / 0%

81 Service Mode -> Off

41 Yarn Sensor No Yarn 42 Cut -> ---( 0DrRev) 43 Alerts -> ---( 0DrRev) 44 Clearing Off 45 Tuning Off 46 Test Cut Unlocked

-> ->

->

* * *

166 Craddle Mot -> Hold 167 Bildabstand 200 [.01] 0R 168 Bildbreite -> 450 [0.01 mm] 169 Variopack Feld 200 xx xx

211 Cycle Motor -> Off 212 CycMotPulse -> 100 0PpM 213 CycZeroSens -> Off

221 Open Valve -> Off 222 Splc.Valve -> Off 223 Thermospl. -> OK 0/ 23Deg.

->

47 EvalUnProSt. CommunicationBlk 48 EvalUnitVers. xxxxxxxx 0.01 49 Surface Index SFI 0 4A Dampness Index DI (15-41) No Data

71 Wdg.Unit No. -> Actual : 1 72 Wdg.UnitType -> Actual: RM-Typ

82 Board Infor T 1BF8 Bot3 BV0 83 Reset Prog. ->

73 ThermoSpl. -> No 77 Waxer SenCrtl -> No

84 Board Date m/y 10/00 12/00

78 YaLock/BrkRa -> No 79 Hairy Jet -> No 7A Tens Sen Magn-> No

D301-118

10 - 10

148-640 001 8.0 en 6.2003

Autoconer 338

10.0.6 Winding unit – Listing of Menu Items Display

Description

1 Winding

Winding- and central housing – Winding

11 Drivers

Electrical description

Achievable operation(s) *

Drive motors

111 Drum Motor

Drum drive motor

=A3+C1-M75

Entries

112 DrmDisplMot

Traverse displ. drive motor

=A3+C1-M14.1

Entries

113 Waxer Mot

Waxing device drive motor

=A3+C1-M66

Entries

114 Tension Mot

Tension device drive motor

=A3+C1-M69

Entries

12 Sensors

Sensors

121 Drum Pulse

Test

Drum pulses Sensor drum RPM 1 Sensor drum RPM 2

=A3+C1-B14.2 =A3+C1-B14.3

122 PackagePuls

Sensor package pulses

=A3+C1-B14.5

Test

123 DrmLapSensor

Sensor drum laps (status ON/OFF)

=A3+C1-B14.4

. /.

124 TensionSens

Yarn tension sensor (Meas’d. value)

=A3+C1-B67

. /.

127 Waxer Sensor

Wax roll sensor

=A3+C1-B66

. /.

Pneumatic package brake Magnet valve package lift/braking

=A3+C1-Y80

OFF/ON

Tension disc pressure Magnetic coil tension disc

=A3+C1-L77

Entries

13 PnPBrLift 14 Tdisk Press 15 Tens.Amplif.

Zero-calibration of tension device

. /.

16 Cradle Comp

Cradle pressure compensation

. /.

Status of the propack ribbon breaker A xxx.x Step xxx: A = Ribbon breaker activated N = Ribbon breaker deactivated E = Ribbon breaker active W = propack in doffing mode xxx.x = Diameter Step xxx = No. of actual steps

. /.

161 Diam. Comp

* Achievable actions – Entries

:

Miscellaneous entries are possible, such as: Motors ON in clockwise/counter-clockwise rotation; thermosplicer heating up.

– Test

:

ENTER initiates a test of the selected assembly.

– ON/OFF

:

ENTER reverses the status of the components (Magnet valves).

– . /.

:

Information display only, entries are not possible.

–

:

Through these entries the status can be changed so that further production is no longer possible! After test completion the original setting must first be restored.

e

148-640 001 en 6.2003

10 - 11

Autoconer 338

Display

Description



162 Diam. Ribb

Setting steps of the propack ribbon breaker A xxx.x xxx xxx.x: A = Ribbon breaker not active E = Ribbon breaker active xxx.x = Aktual diameter xxx = Setting steps required for the ribbon XXXXX xxx.x = Ribbon to be broken-up.

. /.

163 DiamMinMax

Minimum and maximum values of the propack ribbon breaker xxx.x xxx.x xx.x: xxx.x = Minimum recognized diameter xxx.x = Maximum recognized diameter xx.x = Difference between max. and min.

. /.

164 PackDensity

Values of the propack ribbon breaker xxx xxxxg xxxxxx: xxx = Density xxxxg = Weight xxxxxx = Length

. /.

165 CrKompSensor

Values of the propack ribbon breaker OFF xx xxx: OFF/ON = Status of the neutral position sensor (OFF/ON) xx = Cradle pressure xxx = Yarn count

. /.

166 Cradle Mot

Motor status

. /.

167 Distance between ribbons


. /.

168 Ribbon width


. /.

169 Variopack


. /.

18 Tens Sen Magn

Magnetic lift-off of yarn tension sensor

ON/OFF

19 Harry Jet

Hairiness nozzle

ON/OFF


:


– Test

:


– ON/OFF

:


– . /.

:


–

:


e

10 - 12

148-640 001 8.0 en 6.2003

Autoconer 338

Display

Description

2 Cycling

Winding- and central housing – Yarn joining

21 Cam Package



Cam package for yarn joining cyle

211 Cycle Motor

Cycling drive motor

=A3+C1-M71

Entries

212 CycMotPulse

Cycling drive motor, rotor position sensor

(S1, S2, S3)

Test

213 CycZeroSens

Cycle zero position sensor

=A3+C1-B72

Test

22 Splicing

Splicing

221 Open Valve

Opening valve

=A3+C1-Y81

OFF/ON

222 Splc.Valve

Splicing valve

=A3+C1-Y81

OFF/ON

223 Thermospl.

Thermosplicer Thermo output stage

=A3+C1-D2

Entries

23 UpperEndSens.

Upper end sensor

=A3+C1-B4

OFF/ON

24 Yarn Trap

Yarn trap

=A3+C1-Y79

OFF/ON

25 Brake Gate

Tension gate, or Yarn lock

=A3+C1-Y55

OFF/ON

3 BobbinTransf.

Supply package change

e

31 BobTransfMot

Supply packg. change drive motor

=A3+C1-M75

Entry

32 BobTr 0 Sen

Zero position sensor

=A3+C1-B74

Test

33 BobTrTrSens.

Bobbin transfer sensor

=A3+C1-B73

Test

34 Lower End Sen

Lower end sensor

=A3+C1-B70

. /.

35 Loop Gate

Loop gate

=A3+C1-Y78

OFF/ON

4 Clearer

Clearer

41 Yarn Sensor

Yarn sensor

. /.

42 Cut

Cut

. /.

43 Alerts

Alerts

. /.

44 Clearing

Clearing

. /.

45 Tuning

Calibration

. /.

46 Test Cut

Test cut

. /.

47 EvalUnProSt.

Production status of evaluation unit

. /.

48 EvalUnitVers.

Manufacturer and version of evaluation unit

. /.

49 Surface Index

Surface index

. /.

4A Dampness Index

Dampness index

. /.


:


– Test

:


– ON/OFF

:


– . /.

:


–

:


e

148-640 001 en 6.2003

10 - 13

Autoconer 338

Display

Description

5 Operation

Operation



51 Wdg.U.Switch

Winding unit switch (ON/OFF)

=A3+C1-A3 (S4)

. /.

52 T-D.Open Key

Key for tension opening (ON/OFF)

=A3+C1-A3 (S2)

. /.

53 Red Light Key

Red light key (ON/OFF)

=A3+C1-A3 (S3)

. /.

54 Yel.Light Key

Yellow light key (ON/OFF)

=A3+C1-A3 (S1)

. /.

55 Red Light

Red light

=A3+C1-A3 (H1.1 ... H1.4)

OFF/ON

56 Yellow Light

Yellow light

=A3+C1-A3 (H2)

OFF/ON

6 Diagnostics

Diagnostics

61 ProcStatus

Process status (→ 10.0.15)

. /.

62 Blockage

(last) Blockage (→ 10.0.16)

. /.

63 Cycle Pos.

Radial position of cycling linkage (cam package)

. /.

64 Mload Drm/Cyc

Motor load in %; drum motor/cycling motor

. /.

7 Configuration

Configuration

e Entries e Entries e

71 Wdg.Unit No.

Winding unit No.

72 Wdg.UnitType

Winding unit type

73 ThermoSpl.

Thermosplicer (Entry Yes/No)

75 Korrelator

vacant

OFF/ON

77 Waxer Sen Crtl

Wax roll sensor

Entry

78 Ya Lock/Br Ra

Tension gate, or Yarn lock

Entry

79 HairyJet

Hairiness nozzle

Entry

7A Tens Sen Magn

Magnetic tuning of yarn tension sensor

OFF/ON

8 Service

Entries

Service

81 Service Mode

Service mode (Entry ON/OFF)

Entry

82 Board Infor

Components of PCB ’Informator’

./.

83 Reset Prog.

Program reset

Entry

84 Board Date

Manufacturing and inspection date (m = Month; y = year)

./.


:


– Test

:


– ON/OFF

:


– . /.

:


–

:


e

10 - 14

148-640 001 8.0 en 6.2003

Autoconer 338

10.0.7 Winding unit – Basic Display After plugging the data cable’s plug connector into the receptacle of PCB ’Winding unit computer’ (Spulstellenrechner) the basic display appears on the display screen of the winding unit tester, showing the following information: AC338 RM-Typ Wdg.Unit No.:

→ X

1st line: Maschine model RM (Typ RM) recognized 2nd line: Winding unit No. (Spulstellennummer) (X) Notes

AC338 RM-Typ 00089

→ S1.05

Immediately after plugging the data cable into the PCB ’Winding unit computer’ the second display line indicates, for appr. 1.5 seconds, the number of operation hours of this winding unit (89 hours in this example), and the version No. of the winding unit program. This instruction is valid beginning with version S1.05.

J

If only a “cursor“ appears on screeen, the tester receives supply voltage, yet fails to receive data from the winding unit. Possible failures: – Contact failures; de- and re-plug the tester’s data cable. – The winding unit is not loaded with a program.

148-640 001 en 6.2003

10 - 15

Autoconer 338

10.0.8 Winding unit – Inquiries/Entries From the basic display (→ 10.0.7) the control keys are used to select individual menu items, for review as well as for new or altered entries, resp.

Entries or entry alterations are allowed only if “Servicemode“ is activated on the tester (→ 10.0.9). Example: The function of the Red light is to be tested.

AC338 RM-Typ Wdg.Unit No.:

→ 1

Basic display

1 Winding

→

Menu level 1; Block 1 “Winding“

→

Menu level 1, Block 5 “Operation“

4x

5 Operation

51 Wdg.U.Switch Off

Dialog 51 “Winding unit switch“

4x

55 Red Light Off

→

Dialog 55 “Red Light“ Actuation of ENTRY switches the Red light ON, the display changes from OFF to ON.

55 Red Light On

→

After test completion: Return to basic display

→ 1

Basic display

2x AC338 RM-Typ Wdg.Unit No.:

10 - 16

148-640 001 8.0 en 6.2003

Autoconer 338

10.0.9 Winding unit – Service Mode Activation Only after activation of the Servicemode is it possible to perform entries, such as: Switching the drum drive ON, or turning the cam package to any desired radial position.

e

Through some of the entries in menu 7 “Configuration“ or 8 “Service“ the status of the winding unit can be changed to a point that further production is no longer possible! After test completion the original settings must first be restored, then be sure to deactivate the Service mode! Service mode activation: AC338 RM-Typ Wdg.Unit No.:

→ 1

Basic display

1 Winding

→

Menu level 1; Block 1 “Winding“

→

Menu level 1; Block 8 “Service“

7x

8 Service

81 Service Mode Off

81 Service Mode On

Dialog 81 “Servicemode“ Upon actuation of ENTRY the Service mode is activated, the display changes from “OFF“ to “ON“.

→

Service mode is now activated. If winding unit switch S1 is switched ON, “Active“ appears on screen, and the Yellow light flashes. Return to basic display.

→ 1

Basic display.

2x

AC338 RM-Typ Wdg.Unit No.:

148-640 001 en 6.2003

10 - 17

Autoconer 338

10.0.10

Winding unit – Entries concerning Drive Motors

The motors can be controlled to run forward or backward. Also, they can be held in position, and advanced in increments (the latter not in respect to 111 “Drum drive motor“).

– Service mode (→ 10.0.9) must be activated. If the Service mode is not activated, a brief display “Service Mode!“ appears as prompt for Servicemode activation.

The entry example for Dialog 112 also applies to Dialogs 111, 113, 114, 211 and 31.

10 - 18

112 DrmDisplMot Off

→

Dialog 112 “Traverse displacement motor“ Actuation of ENTRY changes the display to Entry mode.

112 DrmDisplMot Off

?

After repeated actuation of ENTRY, menu item Running appears.

112 DrmDisplMot Run

? Off

Upon actuation of the UP or DOWN keys the motor turns, at the indicated speed, either forward or backward (Prefix “-“for backward).

112 DrmDisplMot Run

? 120RpM

Actuate UP and DOWN keys until the motor stops (Display: “Run OFF“).

112 DrmDisplMot Run

Off

Actuate the ENTRY key. The display changes to “Step“; (This entry not allowed for Dialog 111).

112 DrmDisplMot Step

? Hold

The motor is held in its radial position (Display: “Hold“). At each actuation of the UP or DOWN key the motor rotates one increment (forward or backward). The display changes briefly to “Forward“ or “Backward“.

148-640 001 8.0 en 6.2003

Autoconer 338

10.0.11

Winding unit – Entries for Magnet Valves, Red Light and Yellow Light

Switching the selected component ON or OFF.

The entry example for Dialog 221 also applies to Dialogs 13, 222, 23, 24, 35, 55 and 56. – Servicemode (→ 10.0.9) must be activated. If the Servicemode is not activated, a brief display: “Service Mode!“ appears as prompt for Servicemode activation.

221 Open Valve Off

→

221 Open Valve On

→

148-640 001 en 6.2003

Dialog 221 “Open Valve“ Actuation of ENTRY reversed the signal status. Display: “Off“ or “On“.

10 - 19

Autoconer 338

10.0.12

Winding unit – Test of Radial Motor Position and Sensors

Performance of an automatic test of the selected radial motor positions and sensors.

The entry example for Dialog 212 is also valid for Dialogs 121, 122, 213, 32 and 33. – Der Servicemode (→ 10.0.9) must be activated. If the Servicemode is not activated, a brief display “Service Mode!“ appears as prompt for Servicemode activation. – For this test the winding unit switch S1 (→ 10.0.4) must be switched ON, the Yellow light flashes. If the winding unit switch is not switched ON, a brief display “Wdg.Unit Switch!“ appears as prompt for switching ON.

10 - 20

212 CycMotPulse 000

→ 0RpM

Dialog 212 “Cycling drive motor, Radial motor position sensor“ Actuation of ENTRY reverses the display to test.

2121 TestCycPls Never Tested

→

If this test has not been conducted since the last power restoration (Machine OFF/ON), the display indicates “Never Tested“ Otherwise (if a test had been conducted), one of the next displays appears, showing the last test result. The test is performed upon actuation of ENTRY.

2121 TestCycPls Test Active

→

During the test the display shows “Test Active“.

2121 TestCycPls Test OK

→

”Test OK“: The test has been successfully completed.

2121 TestCycPls Test Failure

→

”Test Failure“: Faulty test performance. The rotor position sensor could be defective.

2121 TestCycPls Test Timeout

→

”Test Timeout“: The test could not be completed during the prescribed time.

148-640 001 8.0 en 6.2003

Autoconer 338

10.0.13

Winding unit – Testing the Yarn Tension Device

Test for yarn tensioner and quick clamp

Servicemode (→ 10.0.9) must be activated. If the Servicemode is not activated, a brief display “Service Mode!“ appears as prompt for Servicemode activation.

14 Tdisk Press On

→ 40cN

Dialog 14 “Tension disc pressure“ Actuation of ENTRY reverses the display to entry mode.

14 Tdisk Press On

? 40cN

The tension disc pressure changes through actuation of the UP and DOWN keys (Range of values: 255 cN ... Off).

14 Tdisk Press On

? 40cN

New actuation of ENTRY briefly triggers the yarn ’quick’ clamp. Display shows: “Clamp“.

14 Tdisk Press Clamp

?

148-640 001 en 6.2003

10 - 21

Autoconer 338

10.0.14

Winding unit – Testing the Thermosplicer

Test of thermo output stage and heating cartridge.

Servicemode (→ 10.0.9) must be activated. If the Servicemode is not activated, a brief display “Service Mode!“ appears as prompt for Servicemode activation.

223 Thermospl. OK

→ 80/ 79 Deg.

Dialog 223 “Thermosplicer“ Nominal and actual value for core temperature is displayed in °C. Actuation of ENTRY reverses the display to entry mode (?).

223 Thermospl. OK

? 80/ 79 Deg.

New actuation of ENTRY switches the splicing valve ON for appr. 4 seconds. The display remains unchanged. Attention: Make a note of the indicated nominal value (80 °C, LH value illustration).

223 Thermospl. ? Val. 120/ 79 Deg.

Actuating the UP or DOWN keys increases or reduces the heating cartridge’s temperature. The thermo output stage controls the heating cartridge so that the desired temperature is obtained. As long as the deviation (Nominal-/Actual) is more than ± 10° C, the display shows “Val.“ instead of “OK“.

223 Thermospl. ? OK 120/118 Deg.

Attention: Restore the original nominal value before leaving this dialog! The following displays are failure indications:

223 Thermospl. Blk

10 - 22

? Prism

The display shows “Blk“ for blockage, and “Prism“ for prism: Prism heating could be defective.

223 Thermospl. ? Blk ThermoElem.

The display shows “Blk“ for blockage, and “ThermoElem.“ for thermo element: The thermo element could be defective.

148-640 001 8.0 en 6.2003

Autoconer 338

10.0.15

Winding unit – Messages in Dialog 61 “Process Status“

The current process status of the winding unit is displayed in Dialog 61.

61 ProcStatus S05 Switch Off

Display

Dialog 61 “Process Status of Winding unit“

Process Status

S01

Service Mode

Wdg. unit is in Servicemode and the wdg. unit switch S1 is switched ON.

S05

Switch Off

Winding operation interrupted, and the wdg. unit switch S1 is switched OFF.

S06

Off/Infor

Winding operation interrupted, the Informator has rendered the winding unit inoperative.

S07

Off/Waiting For Manual

Winding operation interrupted, winding unit waits for manual start-up.

S08

Off/ThemSplTestMode

Winding operation interrupted, thermosplicer has been switched to test mode.

S09

Off/Clearer Not Ready

Winding operation interrupted, the clearer is not operative.

S10

Off/Tens Opener Active

Winding operation interrupted, the tension device opener key has been actuated.

S11

Off/Red Light Key Active

Winding operation interrupted, the Red light key has been actuated.

S12

Off/Yellow Light Key Active

Winding operation interrupted, the Yellow light key has been actuated.

S13

Off/No Bus Connect

Winding operation interrupted, connection to the machine bus is interrupted.

S14

Off/PowerFail

Winding operation interrupted, signal received from machine control: Voltage supply discontinued.

S15

Off/Brief Clearer Block.

Winding operation interrupted, short-term clearer blockage.

148-640 001 en 6.2003

10 - 23

Autoconer 338

Display

Process Status

S25

Cycle/Active

Cycling process active.

S26

Cycle/Active Upper End Pulse

Cycling process active, upper end search.

S27

Wait/Test Mode

Waiting status because of test mode.

S28

Wait/Cycle Lock

Waiting status because of activated cycling lock.

S29

Wait/Thermospl. Not Ready

Waiting status because of thermosplicer not ready.

S30

Wait/Doffing Not Zero

Waiting status because of doffer in cycle.

S31

Wait/No Caddy Res Pos1

On model D and V only: No caddy in reserve position 1.

S32

Cycle/Active No Clearer

Cycle is active, clearer is no longer required.

S33

Wait/K-Type Not Release

On model K only: Status ’waiting’ for model K release.

S43

Block/Red Light Confirm

Blockage; waiting for Red light confirmation.

S44

Block/Inf.Go

Blockage; waiting for release by Informator.

S45

Block/Bobbin Transfer Zero Pos

Blockage; Circular magazine not in neutral position.

S46

Block/Cycle Zero Pos

Blockage; Cycling linkage not in neutral position.

S51

Run/Start-Up

Winding process in start-up phase.

S52

Run/Accelaration

Winding process in acceleration phase.

S53

Run/Winding

Winding in process at final (nominal) winding speed.

S54

Run/AutospeedReduct

Winding in process at Autospeed speed reduction.

S57

Xw/PackgFull

Message to Informator: Delivery package is completed.

S58

Xw/Waiting For Doffer

Wdg. unit waiting for doffer.

S59

Xw/Doffing

Doffer performing a doffing cycle.

S70

Lot Start Chan

On model D and V only: Supply package change can start.

S71

Lot End Change

On model D and V only: Supply package change completed.

S72

Lot/StopperOnBandForward

On model D and V only: Supply p. Zero position, belt advancing.

S73

Lot/StopperOnBandBackward

On model D and V only: Supply p. Zero position, belt reversing.

S74

Lot/StopperOnBandOff

On model D and V only: Supply p. Zero position, belt OFF.

S75

Lot/StopperOffBandForward

On model D and V only: Supply p. neutral position.

S76

Lot/BobbinTransferBandFormat

On model D and V only: Executing supply p. change, belt advancing.

S77

Lot/BobbinTransferBandOff

On model D and V only: Executing supply p. change, belt OFF.

S78

Lot/BobbinTransfer

On model D and V only: Supply package change.

10 - 24

148-640 001 8.0 en 6.2003

Autoconer 338

10.0.16

Winding unit – Messages in dialog 62 ”Blockage“

The last blockage occurrence of the winding unit is displayed in Dialog 62. 62 Blockage B10 Drum No Stop

→

62 Blockage B00 None

→

Display

Dialog 62 ”(last) blockage of the winding unit“ Actuation of ENTER clears (erases) registration of the last failure; display: ”B00 None“.

Blockage

B00

None

No blockage registered.

B01

Bobbin Transfer No Zero

Bobbin change linkage not in neutral position.

B02

Bobbin Transfer No Transfer

Bobbin change linkage, transfer position not reached.

B03

Bobbin Transfer Change Time Too Long

Bobbin change linkage, runtime surpassed.

B04

Cycle No Zero Pos

Cycling linkage, neutral position not reached.

B05

Cycle No Pulses

Cycling linkage, no pulses from sensor.

B06

Cycle Time Too Long

Cycling linkage, runtime surpassed.

B07

Cycle Wrong Pos

Cycling linkage, neutral position not reached.

B08

Drum Speed Regulator

Speed regulation of yarn guide drum.

B09

Drum No Pulses

No pulses from drum RPM sensor(s) 1 and /or 2.

B10

Drum No Stop

Package fails to stop.

B11

Package No Pulses

No pulses from package RPM sensor.

B12

Package No Stop

Package fails to stop.

B13

Clearer Knife Blockage

Clearer: Knife blockage.

B14

Drum Lap

Drum lap recognized.

B15

Ribbon Breaker 1

Ribbon breaker, stroke length can not be reached.

B16

Start Failure

Joining failure, no running yarn after package doffing.

148-640 001 en 6.2003

10 - 25

Autoconer 338

Display

Blockage

B17

Cycle Counter

Cycle counter

B18

No Lower End

No lower end after bobbin change.

B19

Thermosplicer Temp

Thermosplicer, prism heating or thermo element defective.

B20

Bobbin Quality

Quality control detects inferior bobbin quality.

B21

Cycle No Stop

Cycling linkage fails to stop.

B22

Clearer Techn. Blockage

Clearer, technical blockage.

B23

Drum Drive Overload

Drum drive overload.

B24

Cycle Drive Overload

Cycling linkage drive overload.

B25

No Signal Tense.Sensor

No signal from yarn tension sensor.

B26

No Bus Connect

No CAN bus connection.

B27

Clearer Interface Blockage

Clearer, interface blockage.

B28

Clearer Yarn Count Alert

Clearer, yarn count alert.

B29

Clearer Yarn Fault Alert

Clearer, yarn fault alert.

B30

Clearer Moire Alert

Clearer, Moiré alert.

B31

Clearer CV Alert

Clearer, CV alert.

B32

Clearer Foreign Fibre Alert

Clearer, foreign fiber alert.

B33

Drum Sensor Wrong Pulses

False pulses from drum RPM sensor.

B34

No Lower End Sensor

No signal from lower end sensor.

B35

ThSplPrism

Thermosplicer; defective prism.

B36

ThSplThElement

Thermosplicer; defective thermo element.

B38

Yarn Not In Tens. Disk

Only with Autotense: Yarn runs outside of tension device.

B39

Too Many Bobbin Transfers

Too many consecutive bobbin change cycles.

10 - 26

148-640 001 8.0 en 6.2003

Autoconer 338

Display

Blockage

B40

Tension Device Not Opening

Only with Autotense: Yarn outside of tension device at start-up, 3 times consecutively.

B41

No Bobbin Carrroin Control Pos

Typ K only: No sled arrived on transverse track.

B42

Clearer Surface Index Alert

Clearer; upper end index alert.

B43

Clearer IPI Al.

Clearer; imperfection alert.

B44

Clearer CMT Al.

Clearer; yarn fault classification alert.

B45

Clearer GFA Al.

Clearer; yarn fault alert.

B46

Clearer FFSA Al.

Clearer; foreign fiber cluster alert.

B47

ProPack No Zero

propack; no neutral position.

B48

No Wax

Waxing device; wax roll depleted.

B50

Wrong Board for this Wdg. Unit Type

False PCB in winding unit; this is a PCB for model K.

B51

Wrong Board for this Wdg. Unit Type

False PCB in winding unit; this is not a PCB for model K.

B52

Too little water

Wet splicer, insufficient water supply (Uster).

B53

Too much water

Wet splicer, excessive water supply (Uster).

B54

TensSenZeroError

Only for models E and K: Yarn not being removed from sensor.

148-640 001 en 6.2003

10 - 27

Autoconer 338

1

b

2

D 161-30

10.0.17

Machine Control – Connection

With the machine in production, the tester can be connected as follows:

b a

Under the cover plate, PCB ’Machine control’ (Maschinensteuerung) is subjected to a voltage of appr. 310 VDC. With the machine in operation, the compartment door may be opened exclusively for plugging the bushing of the tester on PCB ’Machine control’ (Maschinensteuerung). No other manipulations are permitted! The compartment door must be closed securely prior to leaving the compartment area.

D For access to PCB ’Machine control’ (Maschinensteuerung) open compartment door (1) of the energy unit (drive end). D Plug the bushing of the tester’s data cable in the sideplug (2) of PCB ’Machine control’ (Maschinensteuerung). Important: Watch for correct coding.

10 - 28

148-640 001 8.0 en 6.2003

Autoconer 338

3 1 AC338 RM-Typ MST S:X.XX

4

2 1 Machine

->

->

11 Status Main switch OFF

151 Supply 1:<50% 121 Mach. ON E00 = OFF

21 Status P. conv. not ini.

221 Lift A00 = OFF 211 P. conv. OFF E01 = OFF

331 Belt monit. DHT E01 = OFF

3 Cont. T. Conv

->

31 Status CTC CTC not init.

4 Sect. tube c

->

41 Section 1

->

461 Status STC no STC_6 411 Status STC no STC_1

5 Dust removal

->

51 Section 1

->

561 Sta. dust r. DR6 not init. 511 Sta. dust r.. DR1 not init.

5 6 Suction drive

->

61 Status FC FC bus off

7 Service

->

71 Service mode ? OFF

8 Storage view

->

80 General view EU - . - . - I - . - . - SD

3

681 Yarn champ. Yarn champ. clos.

6

D 301-129

10.0.18 Maschine Control – Menu layout ➀ The test instrument is connected and shows the basic ➄ display (→ 10.0.20).

➁ ➂ ➃

Actuation of ENTER changes to menu level 1. Upon selection of a work block through actuation of keys UP or DOWN the work block is activated through ENTER. The individual dialogs of menu level 2 are then selected again on the UP or DOWN keys.

➅

An arrow pointing to the right in the first line indicates that through ENTER an other menu level can be selected. Key RETURN – aborts an entry, – switches to the next higher level, or – returns to the basic display.

Complete listing of menus → on next page.

148-640 001 en 6.2003

10 - 29

Autoconer 338

Basic display AC338 RM-Type -> MST S: XXX

Menu level 1

Menu levels 2 thr. 4

1 Machine

->

2 Packg.conv

->

11 Status Main switch OFF 12 Inputs ->

3 Cont.t.conv

->

13 Outputs

4 Sect.tube c

->

14 Interface

->

5 Dust removal

->

15 Mat.Flow

->

6 Suction drive

->

7 Service

->

8 Storage track

->

121 Mach. ON E00 = OFF 122 Mach. OFF E01 = OFF 131 GZK rel. K1 A00 = OFF 132 Tr. Cl. r. K2 A01 = OFF 133 Yel. sign. l. A02 = OFF

->

123 Tr. clean. ON E02 = OFF 124 Tr. clean. OFF E03 = OFF 125 Fail. B-met. E04 = OFF 126 Main switch E05 = OFF 127 Monit. GZK E06 = OFF

134 Red sign. L. A03 = OFF 135 Green s. l. A04 = OFF 136 Time countr A05 = OFF 137 S. gate up A06 = off 138 S. gate down A07 = OFF

next page 141 Int. Inputs -> E0=00000000=E7 142 Int. Outputs -> A0=00000000=A7

151 Supply Range -> 1: <50% 70> 88% 152 Supply Range -> 1: <50% 70> 88% 153 Supply Range -> 1: <50% 70> 88% 21 Status P. conv. not ini. 22 Inputs

->

23 Outputs

->

24 Bus WR XTR

->

128 Power fail E07 = OFF

1411 Int. Inputs -> LI-BETR E0 = 0 1412 Int. Inputs -> LI-XANF E1 = 0 1413 Int. Inputs -> ZGE-A E7 = 0

231 Lift A00 = OFF 232 Dir. lift A01 = OFF 233 Swivel gate A06=OFF A07=ON

Aus000Hz000/000W

->

321 Belt monit. CTC E01 = OFF 322 Incl. monit. CTC E02 = OFF 323 CTC switch CTC E08 = OFF

12D Tr. cl. dir. E19 = OFF

1421 Int. Outputs -> KR-Pos A0 = 0 1422 Int. Outputs -> LAUF-XTR A1 = 0 1423 Int. Outputs -> B-ZGE A7 = 0

WR 1. Status

31 Status CTC CTC not init. 32 Inputs CTC

129 Press. quard E08 = OFF 12A P. Conv. zero E16 = OFF 12B P. C. monit E17 = OFF 12C Tr. cl. patk. E18 = OFF

WR 2. Eingang 0-8 E0=00000000=E8 WR 3. Ausgang 0-3 A0=0 A1=0 A3=0 WR 4. Typ & Init Init = 0 Typ = 00 WR 5. U Power Uzk=000V Up=00V WR 6. Ulog & Error Ulog=00V U/l=000

221 P. conv. OFF E01 = OFF 222 P. conv. ON E00 = OFF 223 2nd lite s. E02 = OFF 224 Rem. pos E03 = Aus 225 Lift zero E04 = OFF 226 Lift top E05 = OFF 227 Neutr. pos. E16 = OFF 228 Monitoring E17 = OFF

D 301-130

10 - 30

148-640 001 8.0 en 6.2003

Autoconer 338

Basic display AC338 RM-Type -> MST S: XXX

Menu level 1

Menu levels 2 thr. 4

1 Machine

->

2 Packg.conv

->

3 Cont.t.conv

->

4 Sect.tube c

->

41 Section 1

->

5 Dust removal

->

42 Section 2

->

411 Status STC no STC_1 412 Inputs STC

6 Suction drive

->

43 Section 3

->

413 Bus WR STC

7 Service

->

44 Section 4

->

8 Storage track

->

45 Section 5

->

46 Section 6

->

see previous page

->

4121 Monitor. sect STC_1 E01 = OFF 4122 Switch s. STC_1 E08 = OFF WR 1. Status

Aus000Hz000/000W

Aus000Hz000/000W

Identical menus for sections 2 ... 6. 5121 Switch dust DR1 E08 = OFF


52 Section 2

->

511 Sta. dust r. DR1 not init. 512 Inputs DR

53 Section 3

->

513 Outputs DR ->

WR 1. Status

54 Section 4

->

514 Bus WR DR ->

55 Section 5

->

56 Section 6

->


51 Section 1

->

->

5131 Throttle DR1 A00 = OFF Aus000Hz000/000W

Aus000Hz000/000W

Identical menus for sections 2 ... 6. 71 Service mode ? OFF 72 Dauertest ? OFF 73 Status / Index 1:x / xxx 2:x / xxx 74 Schritte

80 General view EU- . - . - I - . - . - SD 81 Section 1 ST_1 OFF 82 Section 2 ST_2 OFF 83 Section 3 ST_3 OFF 84 Section 4 ST_4 OFF 85 Section 5 ST_5 OFF

Zu 1 0 VC 0 Rue 1 <- 0

2 3 0 0 Alle 0 2 3 0 0

4 5 6 0 0 0 Ver 0v 4 5 6 0 0 0

86 Section 6 ST_6 OFF 87 Step 1: 0 2: 0 88 Min. Runtime 20/ 20 20/ 20

813 Cross Trans. S1: 8888888888

811 Drive ST_1 OFF 812 Section Lock Sl1 UP B08=ON

61 Status FC FC bus OFF 62 Sub-pressure 0 hPa 63 Frequency FC 0 Hz 64 Current FC 0A 65 Perform. PC 0 kW 66 Int. Temper. 0 °C 67 Cool bl. temp 0 °C 68 Inputs ->

681 Yarn champ. Yarn champ. clos. 682 Spl. water MT E07 = OFF 683 Repl. spl. w. E06 = OFF

Identical menus for sections 2 ... 6.

88 CT Borders 15/ 0 0/ 0

D 301-132

148-640 001 en 6.2003

10 - 31

Autoconer 338

10.0.19

Machine Control – Listing of menu items

Display

Description

1 Machine

Machine

11 Status

Machine status: - Main switch OFF: - Informat.bus OFF: - no data download: - Machine OFF: - Waiting for OFF: - Machine operat.: - Machine ON:

12 Inputs

10 - 32

electrical Description

Main switch OFF recognized No bus connection to Informator. Control is without parameters Machine keyed OFF Machine is keyed OFF, waiting for OFF release (once doffers and winding units are in neutral position). Machine in ”operational” status Machine keyed ON

Inputs of PCB ’Machine control’

=A1+C8-D1

121 Mach. ON

Machine ON, Input E00 = Ein/Aus (ON/OFF)

=A1+P1-S1

122 Mach. OFF

Machine OFF, Input E01 = Ein/Aus (ON/OFF)

=A1+P1-S2

123 Tr. Clean ON

Travelling cleaner ON, Input E02 = Ein/Aus (ON/OFF)

=A1+P1-S3

124 Tr. Clean OFF

Travelling cleaner OFF, Input E03 = Ein/Aus (ON/OFF)

=A1+P1-S4

125 Fail. B-met.

Failure bimetals, Input E04 = Ein/Aus (ON/OFF)

=A1+E1-Q1, -Q2

126 Main switch

Main switch, Input E05 = Ein/Aus (ON/OFF)

=A1+P1-Q1

127 Monit. GZK

Monitoring of intermediate DC circuit (GZK), Input E06 = Ein/Aus (ON/OFF)

=A1+C8-K1

128 Power fails.

Voltage monitoring, Input E07 = Ein/Aus (ON/OFF)

129 Press.guard

Compressed air monitoring, Input E08 = Ein/Aus (ON/OFF)

=A1+C11-S3

12A P. conv. zero

Neutral position package conveyor, Input E16 = Ein/Aus (ON/OFF)

=A2+C6-S1

12B P. C. monit

Monitoring package conveyor, Input E17 = Ein/Aus (ON/OFF)

=A5+C1-B2

12C Tr. cl. patk.

Parking position travelling cleaner, Input E18 = Ein/Aus (ON/OFF)

=A8+C2-B1

12D Tr. cl. dir.

Direction travelling cleaner, Input E19 = Ein/Aus (ON/OFF)

=A8+C2-B2

148-640 001 8.0 en 6.2003

Autoconer 338

Display

Description

13 Outputs


Outputs of PCB ’Machine control’

=A1+C8-D1

131 GZK rel. K1

Intermediate DC circuit (GZK), relay K1, Output A00 = Ein/Aus (ON/OFF)

=A1+C2-K1

132 Tr. cl. r. K2

Travelling cleaner, relay K2, Output A01 = Ein/Aus (ON/OFF)

=A8+E1-K2

133 Yel. sign. l.

Yellow signal lamp Output A02 = Ein/Aus (ON/OFF)

=A1+C14-H2

134 Red sign. l.

Red signal lamp Output A03 = Ein/Aus (ON/OFF)

=A1+C14-H3

135 Green sign. l.

Green signal lamp (vacant on model RM) Output A04 = Ein/Aus (ON/OFF)

=A1+C14-H4

136 Time countr

Operation time counter Output A05 = Ein/Aus (ON/OFF)

=A1+P1-P1

137 S. gate up

Swivel gate package conveyor Swivel out Output A06 = Ein/Aus (ON/OFF)

=A2+C02-Y1

138 S. gate down

Swivel gate package conveyor Swivel in Output A07 = Ein/Aus (ON/OFF)

=A2+C02-Y2

Interface PCB

=A9+C4-A07

14 Interface 141 Int. Inputs

1411 Int. Inputs

142 Int. Outputs

148-640 001 en 6.2003

Status of all inputs (E0 ... E7) of the interface PCB Display example:E0 = 10000000 = E7 -0= Input OFF -1= Input ON In the example only input E0 (LI_BETR) = ON The individual inputs E0 ... E7 with description and status Inquiry of input status with key “Enter” one-after-the-other. - LI_BETR E0 = 1 (ON) - LI_XANF E1 = 0 (OFF) - LI_XZYKL E2 = 0 (OFF) E3 = 0 (OFF) E4 = 0 (OFF) E5 = 0 (OFF) E6 = 0 (OFF) -ZGE_A E7 = 0 (OFF) Status of all outputs (A0 ... A7) of the interface PCB Display example:A0 = 00100100 = E7 -0= Output OFF -1= Output ON In the example only the outputs A2 (NULL-XTR) and A5 (MA_BETR) = ON

10 - 33

Autoconer 338

Display

Description 1421 Int. Outputs

15 Mat. Flow

151 Supply Range

2 Packg. conv 21 Status

10 - 34


The individual outputs A0 ... A7 with description and status Inquiry of output status with key “Enter” one-after-the-other. - KR-POS A0 = 0 (OFF) - LAUF-XTR A1 = 0 (OFF) - NULL-XTR A2 = 1 (ON) -STOE-XTR A3 = 0 (OFF) -XWS-LI A4 = 0 (OFF) -MA-BETR A5 = 1 (ON) A6 = 0 (OFF) -ZGE_A A7 = 0 (OFF) Status of materials flow - OK No failure of materials flow detected. - Failure Failure of the external caddy circulation detected (Return track, Distribution track, Tube inspector, Passage, Feed track, or Connection track). - Short supply: 123 Supply shortage of the supply range(s) detected (range 2 or 3; resp., only with MPV). Degree of supply of a supply range. On machines with MPV (Multi-lot processing) actuate key “Enter” to reverse to other supply ranges. Display example: 1: <50%70> 88% 1: Supply range 1 (with MPV reversible to 2 or 3, resp.) <50%70> Programmed lower and upper limit in % at which supply shortage or over-supply is to be recognized, or cancelled, resp. 88% Actual supply degree of the supply range in % (This indication flashes if a supply shortage is detected). Package conveyor Status package conveyor: - P. conv. bus OFF No bus connection to package conveyor. - P. conv. not ini. Package conveyor not yet initialized. - P. conv. blockage Package conveyor, blockage recognized. - P. conv. ON Package conveyor switched ON. - P. conv. OFF Package conveyor switched OFF. - P. conv. cycling Package doffer in cycle. - P. conv. zero Package conveyor in neutral position. - P. conv. non zero. Package conveyor not in neutral position. - P. conv. waiting Package conveyor waiting for swivel gate. - P. conv.noLI_XANF. Package conveyor waiting for LI_XANF signal of the external interface.

148-640 001 8.0 en 6.2003

Autoconer 338

Display

Description

22 Inputs


Inputs of module ’Frequency converter’

=A5+C1-A2

221 P. conv. OFF

Package conveyor OFF Input E00 = Ein/Aus (ON/OFF)

=A9+E1-S2

222 P. conv. ON

Package conveyor ON Input E01 = Ein/Aus (ON/OFF)

=A9+E1-S2

223 2nd lite s.

Package on 2nd light sensor Input E02 = Ein/Aus (ON/OFF)

=A9+C2-B3

224 Rem. pos

Package in removal position Input E03 = Ein/Aus (ON/OFF)

=A9+C2-B5

225 Lift zero

Package lift-off in neutral position, Input E04 = Ein/Aus (ON/OFF)

=A9+C2-B6

226 Lift top

Package lift-off in “upper” position Input E05 = Ein/Aus (ON/OFF)

=A9+C2-B7

227 Neutr. pos.

Neutral position package conveyor Input E16 = Ein/Aus (ON/OFF)

see 12 ”Inputs“

228 Monitoring

Package conveyor monitoring Input E17 = Ein/Aus (ON/OFF)

see 12 ”Inputs“

23 Outputs

Outputs of module ’Frequency converter’

=A5+C1-A2

231 Lift

Package lift-off ON Output A00 = Ein/Aus (ON/OFF)

=A5+C1-A6

232 Dir. lift

Rotary direction package lift-off Output A01 = Ein/Aus (ON/OFF)

=A5+C1-A6

233 Swivel gate

Swivel gate package conveyor Output A06/A07 = Ein/Aus (ON/OFF)

=A2+C2-Y1/Y2

24 Bus WR XTR


WR 1.Status

Operation mode of the motor, frequency (in Hz), nominal wattage, mean wattage value (in W).

WR 2.Eingänge 0-8

Indicates the actual status of Inputs E0 ... E8 of the frequency converter (WR).

WR 3.Ausgang 0-3

Indicates the actual status of Outputs A0 ... A3 of the frequency converter (WR).

WR 4.Typ & Init

Indicates type and initialization status of the frequency converter (WR).

WR 5.U Power

Indicates actual power voltages.

WR 6.Ulog & Error

Indicates logics voltages and No. of failure occurrences.

148-640 001 en 6.2003

10 - 35

Autoconer 338

Display

Description

3 Cont. t.conv

Continuous tube conveyor (DHT)


31 Status CTC

Status of cont. tube conv. (DHT): - No CTC No DHT installed. - CTC bus OFF No bus connection to DHT. - CTC not ini. DHT not yet initialized. - CTC ON DHT switched ON. - CTC OFF DHT switched OFF. - CTC blockage DHT, blockage recognized.

32 Inputs CTC


=A7+C1-A1

321 Belt monit.

Belt motion monitoring Input E00 = Ein/Aus (ON/OFF)

=A7+C1-B1

322 Incl. monit.

Belt incline monitoring Input E01 = Ein/Aus (ON/OFF)

=A7+C1-B2

323 CTC switch

ON/OFF switch Input E08 = Ein/Aus (ON/OFF)

=A7+C1-S1

4 Sect.tube c 41 Section 1

Section 1 (STC_1)

411 Status STC

Status sectional tube conveyor (HT10): - no STC_1 No tube conveyor in section 1. - STC_1 bus OFF No bus connection to HT10 in section 1. - STC_1 not ini. HT10 in section 1 not yet initialized. - STC_1 blockage HT10 in section 1, blockage recognized. - STC_1 ON HT10 in section 1 switched ON. - STC_1 OFF HT10 in section 1 switched OFF.

412 Inputs STC


=A7+C1-A1

4121 Monitor. sect

Belt motion monitoring STC_1 Input E00 = Ein/Aus (ON/OFF)

=A7+C1-B1

4122 Switch s.

ON/OFF switch STC_1 Input E08 = Ein/Aus (ON/OFF)

=A7+C1-S1

413 Bus WR STC

10 - 36

Sectional tube conveyor (HT10)

Information concerning bus frequency converter

WR 1.Status


WR 2.Eingänge 0-8


WR 3.Ausgang 0-3


WR 4.Typ & Init


WR 5.U Power


WR 6.Ulog & Error


148-640 001 8.0 en 6.2003

Autoconer 338

Display

Description

42 Section 2

Section 2 (STC_2), sub-menus same as ”41 section 1“

43 Section 3


44 Section 4


45 Section 5


46 Section 6


5 Dust removal 51 Section 1


Dust extraction (Dust Removal) (DR) Section 1 (DR1)

511 Sta. dust r.

Status dust removal (DR): - DR1 not init. DR1 not yet initialized. - DR1 bus OFF No bus connection to DR1. - DR1 ON DR1 switched ON. - DR1 OFF DR1 switched OFF.

512 Inputs DR


=A4+C1-A1

ON/OFF switch DR1 Input E08 = Ein/Aus (ON/OFF)

=A4+C1-S1


=A4+C1-A1

5131 Throttle

Valve throttle baffle DR1 Output A00 = Ein/Aus (ON/OFF)

=A4+C1-Y1

5132 Shutter

Valve shutter DR1 Output A01 = Ein/Aus (ON/OFF)

=A4+C1-Y2

5121 Switch dust

513 Outputs DR

514 Bus WR STC

Information concerning bus frequency converter

WR 1.Status


WR 2.Eingänge 0-8


WR 3.Ausgang 0-3


WR 4.Typ & Init


WR 5.U Power


WR 6.Ulog & Error


52 Section 2

Section 2 (DR2), sub-menus same as ”51 Section 1“

53 Section 3


54 Section 4


55 Section 5


56 Section 6


148-640 001 en 6.2003

10 - 37

Autoconer 338

Display

Description

6 Suction drive

Sauganlage (FU/FC)

61 Status FC


Status suction drive:

=A9+C1-A1

- FC bus OFF - failure XXXX

No bus connection to FC. Failure of frequency converter (XXXX = 4-digits failure code, listing → 10.1) - Yarn champ open Yarn-/dust chamber open. - Suct. drive accel Suction drive accelerating. - ON->Nom.: XX hPa Suction drive switched ON, nominal value is XX -hPa (-mbar). - HPS Maintenance Suction drive switched to maintenance operation. - Suct. drive OFF Suction drive switched OFF 62 Sub-pressure

Sub-pressure in -hPa (-mbar)

63 Frequency FC

Frequency for motor control in Hz

64 Current FC

Emitted current of FC in A

65 Perform. PC

Wattage of FC in kW

66 Int. temper.

Internal temperature of FC in °C

67 Cool bl. temp

Cooling block temperature in °C

68 Inputs

Inputs of the FC

681 Yarn chamb.

=A9+C2-M1

Status of doors of yarn chamber and dust chamber: - Yarn chamb. open - Yarn chamb. clos.

Yarn-/dust chamber open. Yarn-/dust chamber closed.

=A9+C1-B2 =A9+C1-B1

682 Spl. water MT

Splicing water tank empty (wet splicer only) Input E07 = Ein/Aus (ON/OFF)

=A9+C3-S1

683 Repl. spl. w.

Replenish splicing water (wet splicer only) Input E06 = Ein/Aus (ON/OFF)

=A9+C3-S2

7 Service

Service

71 Service mode ? 72 Dauertest ?

Service mode Ein/Aus (ON/OFF)

e Only with multi-lot processing (MPV):

Mixing of bobbins from different supply types is possible when activating the long-term test while bobbins are present on the storage track. Long-term test Ein/Aus (ON/OFF)

73 Status / Index

Status and Index of bobbin types 1 and 2.

74 Schritte

Indication of steps at bobbin change.

Zu 1 2 3 4 5 6

Auxiliary indication for monitoring the flow of material within the machine.

VC

same

Alle

Ver

Rue 1 2 3 4 5 6

10 - 38

same

148-640 001 8.0 en 6.2003

Autoconer 338

Display

Description

8 Storage track

Storage track

80 General view


Symbolic outlay of storage track drives and section locks. Example display: EU ← .  . ←  → . → . → SD “EU” Drive end (Energie unit) ”SD” Suction drive Symbol “←” Drive switched ON, direction drive end. Symbol “→” Drive switched ON, direction suction end. Symbol “” Drive switched OFF, or not installed. Symbol “ ” Section lock not installed. Symbol “.” Section lock installed and in lower position. Symbol ”” Section lock installed and in upper position. Symbol blinkt Flashing: Section lock failure detected.

81 Section 1

Section 1:

811 Drive

Status of storage track drive: ST_1 no drive No drive installed. ST_1 bus OFF No bus connection with drive. ST_1 blockage Blockage detected. ST_1 ON Drive switched ON. ST_1 OFF Drive switched OFF. ST_1 ON← Service Drive in service mode switched ON, direction drive end. ST_1 ON→ Service Drive in service mode switched ON, direction suction end. ST_1 OFF Service Drive in service mode switched OFF.

812 Section Lock

Status of section lock: SL1 UP B08=ON Section lock in ‘out’ position. The monitoring sensor is ON (= OK). SL1 UP B08=OFF Section lock in ‘out’ position. The monitoring sensor is OFF (= Blockage). SL1 Down B08=OFF Section lock in ’in’ position. The monitoring sensor is ON (= OK). SL1 Down B08=ON Section lock in ’in’ position. The monitoring sensor is OFF (= Blockage). DR1 bus OFF No bus connection with the bus frequency converter of the section’s dust extractor.

148-640 001 en 6.2003

10 - 39

Autoconer 338

Display 813 Cross Trans.

Description


Symbolic layout of status of transverse tracks/winding units: Display example: S1: 8888888888 S1: (Einheit 1) Caddys in reserve position in section 1 (one symbol per winding unit/transverse track). Symbol “8” One caddy each in position 1 and 2. Symbol “o” One caddy in position 1. Symbol “_” One caddy in position 2; one wrongly coded caddy in position 1. With key “Enter” the display can be reversed to: S1: (Einheit 1) Status of winding unit of section 1 (one symbol per winding unit/transverse track). Symbol “v” Winding unit in bobbin change cycle, transverse track forward. Symbol ”∧” Winding unit in bobbin change cycle, transverse track backward. Symbol “?” Winding unit OFF, or unknown status. Symbol “8”,“o”,“_” Winding unit in production. Meaning of symbols same as above.

82 Section 2

Section 2 (ST_2), sub-menus as ”81 Section 1”.

83 Section 3


84 Section 4


85 Section 5


86 Section 6


87 Step

Storage track step for bobbin ranges 1 and 2.

88 Min. Runtime

Minimum runtime of storage track in direction drive end / suction end for bobbin ranges 1 and 2. or:

88 CT Borders

10 - 40

Transverse track limits (Wdg. Unit No.) for the control of the storage track, via filling level of the transverse tracks for supply ranges 1 and 2.

148-640 001 8.0 en 6.2003

Autoconer 338

10.0.20

Machine Control – Basic Display After plug-in of the tester’s bushing of the data cable on PCB ’Machine control’ (Maschinensteuerung) the basic display appears on screen of the tester, rendering the following information:

AC 338 RM-Type MST S:X.XX

→

1st line: Machine model RM (Typ RM) recognized 2nd line: Machine control (MST), Version No. This instruction is valid beginning with version S1.04

J

If only the “cursor“ appears on screen, the tester receives power allright, however, no data from the machine control is visible. Possible failures: – Contact failures; de- and replug the tester’s data cable. – The machine control is not provided with a program.

148-640 001 en 6.2003

10 - 41

Autoconer 338

10.0.21

Machine Control – Inquiries/Entries

From the basic display (→ 10.0.20) control keys are used to select individual menu items. Example: The function of the Red lamp is to be tested. AC 338 RM-Type MST S:X.XX

→

Basic display

1 Machine

→

Menu level 1; Block 1 “Machine“

5 Dust removal

→

Menu level 1, Block 5 “Dust removal“

51 Section 1

→

Menu level 2, Block 1 “Dust removal of section 1“

→

Menu level 2, Block 3 “Dust removal of section 3“

4x

2x 53 Section 3

Dialog 531 “Status of dust removal“ 2nd line: DR3 = Dust removal of section 3. ON/OFF = Switched ON- or OFF, resp. not init. = not initialized bus OFF = No bus connection

531 Sta. dust r. DR3 not init.

3x

AC 338 RM-Type MST S:X.XX

10 - 42

→

Basic display

148-640 001 8.0 en 6.2003

Autoconer 338

10.1 Machine Frame

=A1+C3 H3 H2

10.1.1 Signal lamps Signal lamps H2 (yellow) and H3 (red) indicate various machine statuses, calling the operator to take action on the machine. The signal lamps light up either with flashing or with steady light. Flashing light is of higher priority than steady light. A lamp can change from steady to flashing light if the during steady light a message is issued requiring a flashing light. The causes for lighting of yellow or red lamp is indicated on the Informator (→ Tables on the following pages). Note: Remedy of the cause for lighting must be confirmed on the Informator. With switched-OFF machine the signal lamps are also OFF. Red signal lamp (H3) Functional failures are signaled by the red lamp only. D Flashing Failures related to the functions of the basic machine, e.g. a motor overload switch was triggered.

D 161-67

D Steady Failures related to the basic machine, e.g. absence of compressed air. Failures related to the package doffer(s). Yellow signal lamp (H2) D Flashing Signal for wet splicer: Splicing water to be replenished. D Steady Materials flow deficiencies, e.g. package conveyor needs to be started.

148-640 001 en 6.2003

10 - 43

Autoconer 338 Listing of Informator messages Red lamp flashing No.

Message text

Origin

1

SAFETY CHAIN GZK INTERRUPTED !

Motor overload switch =A1+C2-Q1 of the intermediate DC circuit (GZK), located in the drive end, was triggered. False load limit setting, or true overload?

2

MOTOR OVERLOAD SWITCH OF THE MACHINE TRIGGERED

Motor overload switch =A1+C1-Q1 (Suction drive), located in the drive end, was triggered. False load limit setting, or true overload?

3

FAILURE PACKAGE CONVEYOR, PACKAGE LIFTER

Package lifter or package conveyor failure. Mechanical blockage of package lifter? Defective sensor =A05+C02-B06, sensor =A05+C02-B07, motor =A05+C01-M02, or stepper increment =A09+E01-A06?

4

SPLICING WATER EMPTY

Only on machines with wet splicer: Empty splicing water tank, or defective sensor =A09+C03-S01.

5

TRANSFORMER OVERHEATING !

Check supply voltage on all phases. Current must be identical on all phases: Inspect thoroughly.

6

FAILURE FREQUENCY CONVERTER (FU) OF SUCTION DRIVE MOTOR. CODE: ####

Failure message related to the frequency converter of the suction drive. See listing of codes → Table, under “Frequency converter (FU) failure codes”. Sectional tube conveyor failure in section x.

7

FAILURE SECTIONAL TUBE CONVEYOR HT10 – SECTION X

- Mechanical blockage of drive. - Motor =A07+C01-M01 defective. - Check monitoring sensor =A07+C01-B01/-B02 Continuous tube conveyor failure.

8

FAILURE CONTINUOUS TUBE CONVEYOR DHT

- Mechanical blockage of drive. - Motor =A07+C01-M01 defective. - Check monitoring sensor =A07+C01-B01/-B02

10 - 44

148-640 001 8.0 en 6.2003

Autoconer 338 Red signal lamp ON steadily For extinguishing the red signal lamp the Informator message must be confirmed.

No.

Message text

Origin

1

WARNING : FREQUENCY CONVERTER (FU) OF SUCTION DRIVE MOTOR. CODE: ####

Failure message related to the frequency converter of the suction drive. Listing of codes → Table beginning on the page after the next one.

2

NO COMPRESSED AIR

Absence of compressed air, or pressure drop below the permitted minimum. Sensor =A1+C11-S01 defective?

3

NO SUCTION

The programmed sub-pressure level can not be reached. Transmitter =A09+C02-B21 defective?

4

WASTE CHAMBER IS OPEN

Yarn or dust chamber door is open. At closing the machine starts automatically. Sensors =A09+C01-B01 und B2, not being actuated, or defective?

5

PACKAGE CONVEYOR FAILS TO REACH NEUTRAL POSITION

Failure during package removal by the package conveyor. Belt not running. Defective sensor =A02+C06-B02, motor =A05+C01-M01, or bus FU (FC) =A05+C01-A02? All messages beginning with “xx:xx:xx” are related to the package doffer(s):

6

xx:xx:xx: NO COMPRESSED AIR !

xx:xx:xx.= Failure No. : Winding units : Radial position of cam package Explanation of failure Nos. in part 10.5. The Test mode (Test operation) is switched ON for one or more winding units.

7

Test mode winding unit(s) active

148-640 001 en 6.2003

When switching the test mode ON: The winding unit(s) continue winding until the next cycle is required, then stop(s); red as well as yellow winding unit lamps flash at identical frequency.

10 - 45

Autoconer 338 Yellow lamp flashing No.

Message text

Origin

1

AUTOFEED : MAGAZINE X IS DEPLETED !

Only on machines with Autofeed: Magazine No. (x) is depleted.

2

REPLENISH SPLICING WATER

Only on machines with wet splicer: Replenish splicing water tank, or defective sensor =A09+C03-S01.

Yellow ligh ON steadily No.

Message text

Origin

1

AUTOFEED : MAGAZINE X IS BEING DEPLETED !

Only on machines with Autofeed: Magazine No. (x) is nearly depleted.

2

HDS IN MAINTENANCE STATUS

Suction drive is in maintenance status. Deactivate the maintenance status on the Informator.

3

Break thermosplicer

Winding unit waits for heating-up of the Thermosplicer.

4

EMPTYING WASTE CHAMBER

The suction drive motor runs at peak load. Yarn and/or dust chamber must be emptied.

5

PACKAGE CONVEYOR OFF NEUTRAL POSITION

The package conveyor belt is not in neutral position. Remove all packages. Sensor =A02+C06-B02 defective?

6

NUMBER OF PACKAGES COMPLETED. START PACKAGE CONVEYOR

The required number of packages on the conveyor belt is complete, or the belt position for depositing an other package is occupied. Remove all packages from the belt.

7

CONTINUOUS TUBE CONVEYOR OFF !

The continuous tube conveyor is switched OFF.

8

SECTIONAL TUBE CONVEYOR - SECTION X OFF !

The sectional tube conveyor of section No. x is switched OFF.

Note More Informator messages, not requiring lighting of a signal lamp, are listed beginning with 10.1.2.

10 - 46

148-640 001 8.0 en 6.2003

Autoconer 338 Warning concerning frequency converter FU (FC) codes The warning code has 4 digits. Warning code

Origin

0001

Warning IxT: For an extended period of time the frequency converter has been operated at 80% of the maximum current.

0002

Warning IxT bottom: The maximum current has been surpassed at motor start with 2.5 Hz.

0004

Warning IxT top: For an extended period of time the frequency converter has been operated at 80% of the maximum current.

0008

Warning Tk: Cooling block overheating; examine and clean the cooling block.

0016

Warning T i: The compartment temperature of the FC is too high.

0128

Warning motor temperature: Overheating sensed by the temperature sensor in motor =A9+C2-M1.

Failure codes concerning frequency converters FU (FC) The failure code has 4 digits, composed of failure type and failure specification. Example: Supply voltage 24 V too low = Code 0801 (Failure type 08; failure spezification 01). Failure type

01

02

Failure specification

00

I*t Permitted duration of overload has been surpassed. Decrease the nominal value for sub-pressure in -hPa (-mbar) if the failure occurs during normal operation.

01

I*t DC The permitted current in the lower frequency range (D.C.) has been surpassed.

00

Cooling block overheating Examine ambient temperature and cooling performance, clean cooling block. Decrease the nominal value for sub-pressure in -hPa (-mbar) if the failure occurs during normal operation.

01

Cooling block- sensor Temperature sensor is defective, or the FC is too cold.

Ixt monitoring

Cooling block temperature

148-640 001 en 6.2003

10 - 47

Autoconer 338

Failure type

03

05

06

07

08

10 - 48

Failure specification

00

Excessive temperature The compartment temperature has surpassed the permitted limit. Cool the compartment if feasible.

01

Temperature too low The compartment temperature is below the permitted limit. Warm-up of the compartment if feasible.

00

Phase LX current monitoring

02

dynamic phase LX current limit

04

Current boundary value regulation Due to overload the drive has been decelerated to reversal (Stator frequency = 0).

00

invalid value 0 selected

01

invalid value F selected

02

Tolerance failure

03

False measurement occurrence

04

undefined device selected

00

Ud too high (> 750 V)

01

Ud too low (< 300 V)

03

Phase failure

00

+/- 15 V too low

01

24 V too low

02

Communication mode

Internal compartment temperature

Overcurrent switch-OFF

Power part recognition

Intermediate circuit voltage

Supply voltage

148-640 001 8.0 en 6.2003

Autoconer 338

Failure type

Failure specification 00 01 02

10

EEPROM Failure 03 04 05 00 01 02 03 04 05 06 07 08

Please contact Schlafhorst, field service dept if one of these failure codes is dept., displayed.

09 10 11

CPU (Central Processing Unit) failures 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 32

148-640 001 en 6.2003

10 - 49

Autoconer 338

Failure type

Failure specification 00 01 02 03 04 05 06 07 08 09 10 11

12

Configuration failures

12 13

Please contact Schlafhorst, Schlafhorst field service dept., if one of these failure codes is di l d displayed.

14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24

19

32

10 - 50

00

Ground-short.

01

Asymmetric load; the frequency converter output is under uneven load.

32

CAN-Bus Stop. Non, or defective bus connection to the FC.

Load failure

Communication failures

148-640 001 8.0 en 6.2003

Autoconer 338

1

inf00113e

10.1.2 Informator messages

=A1+C3 H3 H2

The Informator issues corresponding messages D concerning false entries, D upon triggering a function, e.g. “Lot start“, or D or related to machine statuses or failures (→ ill. above), on its display screen. The message windows either close automatically after several seconds, or after actuation of symbol icon “Message confirmation“ (→ ➀). Note Messages also accompanied by lighting of one of the signal lamps (H1 or H2) are listed beginning on page 10.1.1.

D 161-67

148-640 001 en 6.2003

10 - 51

Autoconer 338 Informator messages D Messages to be confirmed Message

Remarks

WRONG CODING BUS-FREQUENCY CONVERTER

Bus-Frequency converters have to be coded according to location. Codes are noted in the electrical diagrams. One of the Bus FCs is wrongly coded: - Dust removal - Package conveyor - Empty tube conveyor

SUCTION DRIVE ACCELERATION (NO SUCTION)

The suction drive is in acceleration mode. The nominal degree of sub-pressure (suction) has not yet been reached. Message: No suction.

POSITION OCCUPIED. DOFFER UNABLE TO DOFF

The doffer is unable to doff a full package, because the deposit position on the conveyor belt is occupied. Deplete the conveyor belt, or remove the package manually.

REJECTED: GROUP IS VACANT

The entry is rejected because the selected group is not in status VACANT.

REJECTED: GROUP IS DEFINED

The entry is rejected because the selected group is not in status DEFINED.

REJECTED: LOT IS IN PRODUCTION

The entry is rejected because the selected group is a “Lot in PRODUCTION”.

REJECTED: LOT IS IN LOT CHANGE.

The entry is rejected because the selected group is a “Lot in lot change”.

REJECTED: LOT CHANGE IN PROGRESS

The entry is rejected because the selected group is in status “Lot change”.

REJECTED: CHANGE OF RANGE IN PROGRESS

The entry is rejected because the selected group is presently subjected to a “Change of range”.

LOT STARTED

The lot has been started.

LOT STOPPED

The lot has been stopped.

DELIBERATE LOT END ACCEPTED

The deliberate lot end has been accepted.

Incorrect parameters. Enter either doffer number or group number, but not both !!!

The transfer parameters have been wrongly entered: Enter either the doffer No. or the group No., but not both.

10 - 52

148-640 001 8.0 en 6.2003

Autoconer 338

Message

Remarks

Selected transfer tail of group x not possible due to doffer specification !

The selected transfer tail for group x can not be wound, due to the specification of the allocated doffer.

Transfer tail device of doffer does not match cradle of wdg. unit of the group x !

The selected transfer tail winding device of the doffer does not match the cradles established in the specification of the winding units in group x.

Service range of doffer x must contain at least four winding units !

The entered service range of doffer x must cover at least 4 winding units.

Doffer’s x service range must be entered in ascending order !

The range of winding units to be serviced by doffer x must be entered in ascending order.

Overlapping ranges of doffers x and y !

The entered service range of doffer x overlaps the service range of doffer y.

Doffer X: Service range includes winding units with different types of yarn guide drums !

The service range of doffer x includes winding units with differently specified yarn guide drums.

All windeing units in the service range of doffer X must be of identical cradle type !

All winding units in the service range of doffer X must be of identical cradle type.

Nominal winding speed, group X may not exceed #### due to drum type.

The nominal winding speed of group x must not surpass #### mpm due to the installed type of yarn guide drums.

The specification of all winding units of group X must be identical !

The specification of all winding units of group X must be identical.

ABORT PROGRAM DOWNLOAD : READ ERROR DOFFER PROGRAM !

Program transmission from the PC-Card to the doffer has been aborted.

DOFFER NUMBER INCORRECTLY SET !

Coding on PCB “Doffer electronics“ (Wechslerelektronik) is wrongly set.

DOFFER FAILS TO RECOGNIZE VALID WINDING UNIT NUMBER !

Possibly data transmission (Infrared) failure between winding unit and doffer.

DOFFER WITHOUT PROGRAM !

Doffer waiting for data transmission Informator -> Doffer from the PC-Card.

148-640 001 en 6.2003

10 - 53

Autoconer 338

Message

Remarks

DOFFER PARAMETERS REJECTED. LOT NOT STARTED !

The message is issued during entry of doffer parameters on doffer x, presently located on a producing winding unit.

Testmode not practicable !

Type of testmode not possible.

Testmode OFF. There are some winding heads not in PRODUCTION.

Attempt to activate testmode on winding units not in production.

ABORTION OF PROGRAM TRANSMISSION: NO PROGRAM IN EXISTENCE !

The winding unit program to be transmitted is not stored on the PC-Card.

Abortion of program transmission: Faulty program!

An error has occurred during transmission of the winding unit program.

ABORT PROGRAM DOWNLOAD : BUS-ERROR !

No connection with participant via data bus.

ABORT PROGRAM DOWNLOAD : SWITCH OFF WINDING UNIT XX !

For program transmission all winding units must be switched OFF.

ABORT PROGRAM DOWNLOAD : NO RECEIVING WINDING UNITS !

Bus connection to the winding units is interrupted, winding units without supply voltage, wiring error.

ABORT PROGRAM DOWNLOAD : NO CONNECTION WITH WINDING UNIT XX !

Bus connection with winding unit XX is interrupted, winding unit without voltage, wiring error.

ABORTION OF PROGRAM TRANSMISSION: NO STORAGE PC CARD IN PC CARD DRIVE !

Program transmission has been aborted, as no PC-Card (Memory card) is inserted into the PC-Card drive.

ABORTION OF PROGRAM TRANSMISSION: NO PROGRAM IN EXISTENCE !

Program transmission has been aborted, as no valid program for transmission is available.

!!! Send default value to winding unit, or switch the machine OFF/ON !!!

This message is a warning if values have been omitted from auxiliary initialization (-1).

Status of target lot is not VACANT or DEFINED. Copying not practicable !

The status of the group named as target group must be either VACANT or DEFINED. Copying of the group is not possible.

Group X cannot be divided into quality classes because no nominal diameter or length has been entered.

Quality classification of group X is not possible, because neither nominal diameter nor nominal length has been defined. One of the two has to be entered.

10 - 54

148-640 001 8.0 en 6.2003

Autoconer 338

Message

Remarks

An invalid group number was entered while copying the group data: Source-group : X; .Target-group : Y.

An invalid group number was entered for copying of group data: Source group: x; Target group: y.

Machine specification ranges X and Y overlap at winding unit ZZ.

Entry not being accepted: The ranges of specification types y and x overlap each other at winding unit No. zz.

Continuous tube conveyor must be uninterrupted, to always begin at section 1

Allocation of entries for the continuous tube conveyor is wrong; e.g.: The contnuous tube conveyor (DHT) can not be interrupted by a sectional conveyor (HT10) on one of the sections.

Check machine specifications X. Winding units YY to ZZ are beyond machine range.

Indicated specifications (x) to be corrected, as winding units No. yy to zz are beyond machine range.

Winding units XX to YY are not associated with any specification !

The specification has not been entered for all winding units of the group.

CAUTION!! Confirmation of entries will generate RESTART with erasure of actual data!!

Entries/Changes in menu “Machine setup“ always trigger a Restart of the Informator, erasing production data, and erasing those settings which are related to the change!

??? DO YOU WANT TO REJECT THE CURRENT MACHINE SPECIFICATION DATA ???

Safety inquiry, if changes in menu “Machine setup“ are to be aborted.

Machine specification OK. !!! WAIT !!! System restarting !

Change in menu “Machinen configuration“ has been confirmed, the Informator performs a Restart.

Patrol range of doffer X larger than the No. of winding units YY.

Double-check entry of patrol range. Informator or machine are NOT to be switched OFF.

Informator buffer batteries discharged !!! Do not switch the Informator OFF, replace batteries immediately.

Lot data and production data are powerfail-proof stored in the Informator through battery buffering. The batteries are discharged, to be replaced immediately (see 3.1.etc, Battery buffer).

Yarn tension drops with variopack at increasing diameter from xx cN to yy cN

With increasing diameter the yarn tension drops, with variopack, from xx cN to yy cN.

Cradle pressure drops with variopack at increasing diameter from xx N to yy N

With increasing diameter the cradle pressure drops, with variopack, from xx cN to yy cN.

Caution: Yarn tension must not drop below 4 cN ! Curve of variopack being adapted.

Attention: Yarn tension must not drop below 4 cN. The entered curve for variopack is adapted correspondingly, automatically.

148-640 001 en 6.2003

10 - 55

Autoconer 338

Message

Remarks A winding unit without No. has been detected..

Winding unit without No. registered !

The correct winding unit No. has to be registered in the electronics board of the winding unit.

Type of start-up is unknown, will not be executed.

The type of Initial start is unknown, the start is not executed.

Testmode not practicable !

Activation of testmode is not possible, e.g. because “Lot” had not been started in this winding unit.

Setup of a new group not practicable ! xx winding heads are defined. Maximum yy are allowed !

Setup of a new group is not possible. All groups are occupied. xx winding heads are defined. Maximum yy are allowed ! No code for release of propack available !

NO CODE AVAILABLE FOR ENABELING propack !

A release code (release code, 14-digits numerical code) must be entered in order to release the Propack feature.

WRONG CODE ! propack CANNOT BE ENABLED !

The wrong release code (14-digits numerical code) has been entered! Release of Propack not possible!

TOO MANY WDG.UNITS WITH propack LISTED IN SPECS. ! ONLY XX WDG.UNITS ARE ENABLED !

The machine specification lists too many winding units with Propack. Only a xx No. of winding units with Propack has been released.

ERROR AT COPYING OF GROUP DATA. VALUES INCOMPLETE !!!

An error has occurred during copying of group data. The entered values are incomplete. Repeat entry, if required.

ERROR AT COPYING OF DOFFER DATA. VALUES INCOMPLETE !!!

An error has occurred during copying of doffer data. The entered values are incomplete. Repeat entry, if required

ERROR AT COPYING OF GENERAL DATA. VALUES INCOMPLETE !!!

An error has occurred during copying of general data. The entered values are incomplete. Repeat entry, if required.

Release already activated

Release can not take place, as it is in effect already.

Max. Anzahl Freischaltungen erreicht.

Release can not be changed, as the maximum No. of releases is in effect already.

Variopack not possible without propack

Release of “Variopack” without “Propack” is not possible.

10 - 56

148-640 001 8.0 en 6.2003

Autoconer 338

Message Release expires in xx hours ! Diese Eingabe löscht die Freischaltung aller Leistungsmerkmale!

Release of all performance characteristics completed! Enter a valid code!

AUTOFEED : STOPPED !

Remarks Temporary release expires xx hours from now. At expiration the release of all performance characteristics is terminated. Temporary release of all performance characteristics is expired. Release of all performance characteristics has been erased. Enter the valid release code (14-digits numerical code) for the release of the performance characteristics. Cone/sleeve supply Autofeed: Cone/sleeve feed has been stopped.

AUTOFEED : FALSE CORRELATION WDG.UNIT/MAGAZINE !

Cone/sleeve supply Autofeed: False coordination of winding unit to magazine type.

AUTOFEED : FALSE WINDING UNIT ALLOCATION !

Cone/sleeve supply Autofeed: Winding unit allocation is wrong.

AUTOFEED : EMERGENCY-OFF !

Cone/sleeve supply Autofeed: “Emergency-OFF” of cone/sleeve feed has been recognized.

AUTOFEED : CONTROL ERROR !

Cone/sleeve supply Autofeed: A control error of cone/sleeve feed has been recognized.

AUTOFEED : FREQUENCY CONVERTER XX !

Cone/sleeve supply Autofeed: Failure message from frequency converter xx of cone/sleeve feed.

AUTOFEED : BAR DRAGGING FAILURE !

Cone/sleeve supply Autofeed: A bar dragging error has been recognized.

AUTOFEED : SLED DRAGGING FAILURE !

Cone/sleeve supply Autofeed: A sled dragging failure has been recognized.

AUTOFEED : NEUTRAL POSITION SURPASSED !

Cone/sleeve supply Autofeed: Cone/sleeve feed has surpassed its neutral position.

AUTOFEED : NO SLED IN NEUTRAL POSITION !

Cone/sleeve supply Autofeed: Cone/sleeve feed in neutral position; no sled has been recognized.

AUTOFEED : GRIPPER FAILURE !

Cone/sleeve supply Autofeed: A cone/sleeve gripper failure has been recognized.

148-640 001 en 6.2003

10 - 57

Autoconer 338

Message

Remarks

AUTOFEED : WRONG SPECIFICATION RH / LH !

Cone/sleeve supply Autofeed: False specification RH/LH machine has been recognized.

AUTOFEED : FALSE NO. OF MAGAZINES !

Cone/sleeve supply Autofeed: False No. of magazines detected during entry of specifications.

DUST REMOVEL SECTION X OFF

Dust removal drive of section x is switched OFF.

WRONG PROGRAM IN WINDING UNIT !

WRONG PROGRAM IN MACHINE CONTROL !

WRONG PROGRAM IN DOFFER !

The winding unit has a wrong program (PCB Winding unit control [SP-Steuerung]). The program has to be newly transmitted (see 3.4.etc., Program transmission). The machine control has a wrong program (PCB Machine control [M-Steuerung]). The program has to be newly transmitted (see 3.4.etc., Program transmission). The doffer has a wrong program (PCB Doffer control [Wechsler-Steuerung]). The program has to be newly transmitted (see 3.4.etc., Program transmission).

CHANGE OF AREA IS RUNNING

The entered “Range reduction” being executed.

CHANGE OF AREA IS RUNNING

The entered “Range increase” being executed.

DELIBERATE LOT END ACCEPTED

Entry “Deliberate lot end” has been accepted.

NO WINDING UNITS IN PRODUCTION

Entry can not be processed: No winding units are in production status.

WINDING UNIT X IN PRODUCTION

Entry can not be processed: Winding unit x is in production.

WINDING UNITS X AND Y IN PRODUCTION

Entry can not be processed: Winding units x and y are in production.

WINDING UNITS X, Y AND Z IN PRODUCTION

Entry can not be processed: Winding units x, y, and z are in production.

WINDING UNITS X, Y, Z ... IN PRODUCTION

Entry can not be processed: Winding units x, y, z, ... are in production.

10 - 58

148-640 001 8.0 en 6.2003

Autoconer 338

Message Timetable is empty! Automatic shift change will happen at midnight.

Remarks The entered shift calendar is vacant, i.e. shift change times are not defined. Therefore an automatic shift change will take place at 00:00 (Midnight).

Yarn tension control and Autospeed regulation is not possible.

Simultaneous entries for “Yarn tension control” and “Autospeed regulation” are not possible.

According to specifiacations, the wdg. units of the group are not equipped with yarn tension sensors for Autospeed

Entry “Autospeed” is not possible for the winding units of the group, as they are not specified with yarn tension sensors.

Foreign fiber cluster cuts (nCFFS)

Foreign fiber cluster cuts (nCFFS) recognized.

Foreign fiber cluster alert (nFFSA)

Foreign fiber cluster alerts (nFFSA) recognized.

Clearer alerts (nRA)

Clearer alerts (nRA) recognized.

Yarn count alert

Yarn count alert recognized by the clearer.

Failure cluster alert

Failure cluster alert recognized by the clearer.

Moiré alert

Moiré alert recognized by the clearer.

CV alert

CV alert recognized by the clearer.

Foreign fiber alert

Foreign fiber alert recognized by the clearer.

Surface index alert IPI alert

Surface index alert, IPI alert, recognized by the clearer.

CMT alert

CMT alert recognized by the clearer.

Yarn fault alert

Yarn fault alert recognized by the clearer.

Foreign fiber cluster alert

Foreign fiber cluster alert recognized by the clearer.

PRINT-OUT NOT POSSIBLE ! PRINTER ACTIVE.

The selected print-out is not possible, as the printer is active.

NO PRINT-OUT POSSIBLE. NO DATA AVAILABLE

The selected print-out is not possible, as no data is available.

Key not matching Informator serial No. !

The entered release code for the optional function is wrong. It does not match the serial No. of the Informator.

148-640 001 en 6.2003

10 - 59

Autoconer 338

Message

Remarks

Attention: Yarn tension must not surpass 80 cN ! Curve of variopack will be adapted.

Attention: With Variopack the yarn tension must not surpass 80 cN. The entered curve is automatically adapted for Variopack.

Attention: Cradle pressure must not surpass 45 N ! Curve of variopack will be adapted.

Attention: With Variopack the cradle pressure must not surpass 45 N. The entered curve is automatically adapted for Variopack.

C/S magazines of winding units in group x replenished

The cone/sleeve magazines of the winding units of group No. x are full. The lot can be started.

THERMOSPLICER IN GROUP X NOT YET AT NOMINAL TEMPERATURE

Attention: Cradle pressure must not drop below 5 N ! Curve of variopack will be adapted.

Network connection setting changed - active after restart of Informator !

Part No. on PC card not legible - insert PC card with part No.! ConerPilot has transmitted new data to group x !

ERROR AT COPYING OF SPECIFICATION FILE. VALUES INCOMPLETE !!!

10 - 60

The winding units of group No. x do not yet begin production. The thermosplicers are not yet heated-up to nominal temperature. Attention: With Variopack the cradle pressure must not drop below 5 N. The entered curve is automatically adapted for Variopack. The settings for Network connection have been changed via entry. The changes become effective only after Restart of the Informator. The part No. of the inserted PC-Card is not discernible. Insert an other PC-Card with the correct part No. New data has been transferred to group No. x by the superior data acquisition system “ConerPilot”. An error has occurred during copying of the specification data. The transmitted values are incomplete. Repeat copying if required.

148-640 001 8.0 en 6.2003

Autoconer 338 D Messages not to be confirmed (Window disappears automatically after 3 s)

Message

Remarks

REJECTED: NOT ALL WINDING UNITS ARE VACANT

A part of the noted winding units belongs to an other lot presently in production or in lot change status.

REJECTED: LOT ACCOUNTING STILL IN PROGRESS

Lot status can not be changed, accounting of the lot has not yet been finished.

REJECTED: LOT CHANGE NOT in PROGRESS

Entry permitted only during lot change.

INVALID RANGE CHANGE

The entered winding unit range has to be double-checked.

NO WINDING UNITS IN PRODUCTION

Entry can not be made, e.g. because all winding units are switched OFF.

WINDING UNIT XX IN PRODUCTION

Entry can not be made, because the winding unit is (still) in production.

WINDING UNITS ... IN PRODUCTION

Entry can not be made, because the listed winding units are (still) in production.

Winding unit not producing !

Inquiry for actual data possible only for a producing winding unit range.

Winding unit range has not been producing !

The winding unit range has not been producing during the previous shift.

Winding unit range must be in one group !

The entered winding unit range is not part of a production group.

Winding unit range exceeds group limits of previous shift !

The entered winding unit range was not part of a production group during the previous shift.

Invalid winding unit range for group X

The winding units defined for the entered group are not of identical specification.

X DOFFER READY TO RECEIVE DOFFER PROGRAM !

Doffer X waits for data transmission Informator -> doffer from the PC-Card.

Card in PC-Card drive is not a SRAM-card.

Insert PC-Card type SRAM into the PC-Card slot.

Card in PC-CARD drive is write-protected.

Write protection has to be cancelled before attempting to write on the card. (→ part 3.1; PC-Card settings/battery change)

148-640 001 en 6.2003

10 - 61

Autoconer 338

Message

Remarks

Card in PC-Card drive is not a SRAM-card.

Check whether or not the correct card has been inserted.

Card in PC-Card drive contains no data file.

No data is stored on the card, or the card is defective.

No more space on Card in PC-Card drive.

The card can not store more data, a new card has to be inserted.

Error during card access in PC-Card drive.

Inspect the PC-Card.

SRAM CARD BUFFER BATTERY DISCHARGED !!! Replace battery immediately, DANGER OF DATA LOSS !!!

Description → part 3.1; PC-Card settings/battery change.

Copy not possible. Target group must be either VACANT or DEFINED.

The data can not be copied to a group presently in “Production“ or in “Lot change“ status.

Group data being copied.

The group’s data being copied.

Error: Group data not copied.

This message is issued, e.g., when removing the PC-Card from its slot during data transmission.

Access denied ! - Wrong password.

Enter the correct password.

Access given ! - ...

The correct password of the selected level has been entered.

Operator key recognized ! Access requires ...

Enter correct password of the selected level.

Foreman key recognized ! Access requires ...


Service key recognized ! Access requires ...


Technician key recognized. Access requires engineer key !

Enter correct password for engineer key.

This code is already in use !

Enter an other password, the attempted password is already stored.

Password must contain 4 characters !

False password entry. A password of four digits must be entered.

CODE OK ! XX WDG.UNITS OF YY RELEASED FOR propack !

Clearer not yet ready! Wait!

The entered release code to release Propack is correct. A number of xx winding units, of a maximum of yy winding units have been released for Propack. The action can not be started, as the clearer is not yet ready. Wait until the clearer is ready.

10 - 62

148-640 001 8.0 en 6.2003

Autoconer 338

1

inf00247e

D Window indicating filling level (Bargraph, → ➀) Messages not to be confirmed, they disappear automatically.

Message DELETING DOFFER-PROGRAM ! PROGRAM BEING CLEARED !

148-640 001 en 6.2003

Remarks The indicated program is being cleared (erased). A filling level display documents the progression of the action.

10 - 63

Autoconer 338

Message

Remarks

PROGRAM BEING CLEARED !

The selected program is cleared. A filling level display documents the progression of the action.

PROGRAM TRANSFER TO X DOFFER IN PROGRESS ! PROGRAM TRANSFER TO XX WINDING UNIT(S) IN PROGRESS !

The selected program is transmitted. A filling level display documents the progression of the action.

PROGRAM TRANSFER FOR MACHINE CONTROL IN PROGRESS ! DATA BEING COPIED. DO NOT REMOVE PC-CARD.

The data is copied. Do not remove the PC-Card from its slot.

WAIT. INITIALIZATION IN PROGRESS

Wait until display disappears. Initialization of the system is in progress.

10 - 64

148-640 001 8.0 en 6.2003

Autoconer 338

10.2 Winding Unit General operation of the winding unit is described in chapter 2.2. Red light: 1 Yellow light: 2

10.2.1 Red Light Flashing 1

This indicates a technical blockage, or a repetitious winding failure which can be remedied by qualified personnel only:

2

D 1Hz flashing frequency: Repetitious winding failure. The number of allowed repeater cycles entered on the Informator, for joining failure, upper end failure, or lower end failure has been reached (→ “No. of repeaters to Red light for“ 3.2). Inspect delivery package, lower end, and splicer. If required, switch to toggle operation (→ 4.2) for this purpose. D 2Hz flashing frequency: Electrical defect (e.g. program decayed) or technical blockage. Inspect winding unit for blockages; if required, switch to toggle operation (→ 4.2) for this purpose. D 1/4 Hz flashing frequency: No winding unit program. The winding unit program must be transmitted from the PC-Card to the winding unit (→ 3.4).

D 301-21

D 3 seconds ON, briefly OFF, 3 seconds ON, etc.: Hardware defect of the wdg. unit’s electronic circuitry. Note: Inquiry/display of last Red light → 3.5.3

10.2.2 Yellow Light Flashing D Appr. 1 Hz flashing frequency: A program transmission from the PC-Card in the Informator to the winding unit(s) with flashing Yellow light is in progress.

148-640 001 en 6.2003

10 - 65

Autoconer 338

10.2.3 propack Failure Reasons

=A3+C1

On winding units equipped with the electro-mechanical cradle suspension propack failures can occur if package cradle (1) fails to exert the cradle pressure required to produce the desired package diameter and package weight. This pressure is produced by step motor M60.

1 2

The cradle D either presses the package too hard upon yarn guide drum (2), or D lifts the cradle, having the package suspended above the yarn guide drum. Failure description on next page. M60 D325-23

3 4 5

D301-40

10 - 66

148-640 001 8.0 en 6.2003

Autoconer 338

Failure description Manual interference

Failure remedy

The cradle was moved forcibly so that the a) Newly activate cradle pressure compensapackage no longer contacts the yarn guide tion: drum. Simultaneously briefly actuate tension device opening key (3) and yellow light key (4). Cradle (1) ascents, propack is initialized. Subsequently the cradle returns the package to contacting the yarn guide drum. A package of different diameter has been b) Manually press the cradle down placed in the cradle. Proceed as described under a) above. The package has been removed manually, an c) Switch winding unit OFF on winding unit empty cone/sleeve has been inserted, and switch (5). only the yellow light key has been actuated. Actuate and hold yellow light key (4). SiResult: The winding unit assumes Red light multaneously, switch the winding unit ON. status. The cradle descents.

Yellow light extinguished Step motor M60 attempts to descent the d) The winding unit performs calculations without removal of the cradle. based on the empty cone/sleeve. package. Step motor M60 slips if the package is larger The large package should remain in the than 180 mm. cradle: same as b). When inserting an empty cone/sleeve: same as a) False Informator entries

148-640 001 en 6.2003

Wrong yarn count entered on the Informator. e) Correct entry of yarn count on the InforThe winding unit calculates a wrong yarn mator. Then proceed as described under weight from the yarn length, and propack b). fails to correctly compensate the diameter.

10 - 67

Autoconer 338

10 - 68

148-640 001 8.0 en 6.2003

Autoconer 338 10.3 10.4

10.5 Package Doffer 10.5.1 General Display (1) takes place exclusively in German or in English. Language selection is made on the Informator: Informator user guidance in German = German; all other languages = English. 1

4

Note: D Simultaneously, the failure messages are also displayed at the Informator, in the pre-selected language. D Inquiry / Display of doffer’s operational status → 3.5.12.

2

2

3 Failure messages For failure messages the two keys (2) flash in RED. The display always begins with “Failure“.

D 560-01

Example: Failure No.: 60 No compressed air!

No.:15

Failure No. 60; present doffer position (e.g. winding unit No.15) Failure message (e.g. ’No compressed air!’). The text is scrolled on display if the message length exceeds 16 signs. Failure message confirmation Only after failure remedy should the failure message be confirmed: D Failure Type 1: Actuate key “ENTER“ (3), or D Failure Type 2 (Harmful failure): Set turn switch (4) on ”Manual operation“, then actuate key “ENTER“ (3).

148-640 001 en 6.2003

10 - 69

Autoconer 338

10.5.2 Listing of Failure Messages

No.

1

2

3

4

5

6

7

8

Displayed Message Text

Trigger

Overload cycling drive motor!

Cycling drive motor overloaded! Motor M2 being operated above nominal load for several seconds (long-term overload).

Overload patrol drive motor!

Patrol drive motor overloaded! Motor M1 being operated above nominal load for several seconds (long-term overload)

Blockage cycling drive motor!

Blockage of the cycling drive motor! With switched-ON cycling drive motor M2 its RPM are monitored (short-term blockage monitoring). Note: In order to “relax“ the linkage after failure confirmation the cam package can be turned back appr. 5°. Actuate the “DOWN“ key accordingly.

Blockage patrol drive motor!

Blockage of the patrol drive motor! With switched-ON patrol drive motor M1 its RPM are monitored (short-term blockage monitoring).

Over-RPM cycling drive motor!

Cycling drive motor’s RPM too high! With switched-ON cycling drive motor M2 its RPM are monitored (Safety stop at control failure).

Over-RPM patrol drive motor!

Patrol drive motor’s RPM too high! With switched-ON patrol drive motor M1 its RPM are monitored (Safety stop at control failure).

Excessive torque cycling drive motor!

Torque of cycling drive motor too high! Cycling drive motor M2 being briefly operated very high above nominal load (short-term overload).

Excessive torque patrol drive motor!

Torque of patrol drive motor too high! Patrol drive motor M1 being briefly operated very high above nominal load (short-term overload). vacant

9 10

During patrol cycling linkage not in neutral!

During patrol the cycling linkage is not in neutral position! Sensor ’Cycling linkage in neutral’ B31 not actuated.

11

During patrol cradle lift not in neutral!

During patrol the cradle lift is not in neutral position! Sensor ’Cradle lift in neutral’ B32 not actuated.

10 - 70

148-640 001 8.0 en 6.2003

Autoconer 338

No.


Trigger

12

During patrol yarn lift not in neutral!

During patrol the yarn lift is not in neutral position! Sensor ’Yarn lift neutral/receiving’ B33 not actuated.

13

During patrol package guide not in neutral!

During patrol the package guide is not in neutral position! Sensor ’Package guide’ B12 not actuated.

14

During patrol latch engaged!

During patrol the latch is engaged! Sensor ’Latch engaged’ B11 actuated.

Requesting winding unit not found!

Doffer fails to find the requesting winding unit! The winding unit’s IR transmitter is defective or wdg. unit Nos. have been allotted in false sequence. Result: Five times the doffer passes the range between a higher and a lower wdg. unit No., then it stops and issues this message.

16

Doffer engaged on wrong winding unit!

Doffer has engaged on the wrong winding unit! The winding unit No. recognized at the instant of engaging doesn’t match the No. recognized prior to engagement (False IR data transmission).

17

RH distance sensor missing!

The RH distance sensor is missing! Sensor ’RH distance’ B10 is not actuated, not transmitting any test pulses.

18

RH distance sensor defective!

The RH distance sensor is defective! Sensor ’RH distance’ B10 is not actuated, not transmitting failure pulses.

19

LH distance sensor missing!

The LH distance sensor is missing! Sensor ’LH distance’ B30 is not actuated, not transmitting any test pulses.

20

LH distance sensor defective!

The LH distance sensor is defective! Sensor ’LH distance’ B30 is not actuated, and transmitting failure pulses.

15

148-640 001 en 6.2003

10 - 71

Autoconer 338

No.


Trigger The wdg. unit No. received by the doffer is not within the doffer’s service range. - Doffer has been manually shifted into an other doffer’s service range, or - wdg. unit No. has been wrongly programmed, or - the doffer No. set on PCB ’Operation’ (Bedienung XW) does not include the recognized winding unit No. (allotted service range).

21

Doffer beyond its service range!

22

Doffer service range not entered on Informator!

Doffer service range has not been entered on the Informator! The service range entered on the Informator is 0 ... 0.

Doffer could not engage!

Doffer not able to engage! The latching linkage is blocked (Latch rail fails to drop in direction latch bolt). Result: The doffer has recognized the requesting wdg. unit and attempts to engage. Five times the doffer passes the range between a higher and a lower wdg. unit No. then it stops and issues this failure message.

Latch could not engage!

Latch not able to engage! The latching linkage is blocked (Latch rail fails to drop in direction latch bolt). Result: During initialization, or during manually started patrol operation the doffer patrols with released latch for 10 seconds. If the latch fails to engage during this period of time the doffer stops and issues this failure message.

Sequence of wdg. units Nos. incorrect !

Each time the voltage supply is switched ON, the doffer examines whether or not the sequence of two adjoining winding unit numbers is conform with specification “LH“ or “RH machine“. Note: Upon appearance of this message the machine specification as well as the sequence of winding unit numbers must be double-checked.

23

24

25

26

vacant

27

vacant

28

vacant

29

vacant

10 - 72

148-640 001 8.0 en 6.2003

Autoconer 338

No.


Trigger

During cycle latch not engaged!

During the doffing cycle the latch is not engaged! When initiating a “Manual doffing cycle with package“ without engaged doffer, the latch is released automatically. Information message “During cycle latch not engaged!“ is issued for 15 seconds. The failure message is issued if the doffer fails to engage during this period of time. Sensor ’Latch engaged’ B11 not actuated.

31

Failure at transfer tail winding!

Failure during winding of the transfer tail! Via package RPM sensor the winding unit counts the No. of transfer tail winds wound by the doffer At the start of the cone/sleeve drive and winding of the transfer tail the doffer expects to receive a signal from the winding unit that the No. of winds has been completed. If this signal is not received within 10 seconds this message is issued.

32

Cradle lift not in neutral!

Cradle lift is not in neutral position! Sensor ’Cradle lift in neutral’ B32 not actuated.

33

Yarn lift not in transfer tail position!

Yarn lift is not in transfer tail winding position! Sensor ’Yarn lift in transfer tail position’ B15 not actuated.

34

Yarn lift not in neutral!

Yarn lift is not in neutral position! Sensor ’Yarn lift in neutral/receiving B33 not actuated.

35


Cradle opener is not in end position! Sensor ’Cradle opener end pos.’ B14 not actuated.

36

Yarn lift not in threading position!

Yarn lift is not in threading position! Sensor ’Yarn lift neutral/receiving’ B33 not actuated.

37

Cradle lift remains in neutral!

Cradle lift remains in neutral position! Sensor ’Cradle lift in neutral’ B32 is actuated.

38

Yarn lift remains in transfer tail position!

Yarn lift remains in transfer tail position! Sensor ’Yarn lift transfer tail pos.’ B15 is actuated.

39

Yarn lift remains in neutral!

Yarn lift remains in neutral position! Sensor ’Yarn lift neutral/receiving’ B33 is actuated.

30

148-640 001 en 6.2003

10 - 73

Autoconer 338

No.


Trigger

40


Cradle opener not in end position! Sensor ’Cradle opener end pos.’ B14 is actuated.

41

Yarn lift not in threading position!

Yarn lift not in threading position! Sensor ’Yarn lift neutral/receiving’ B33 is actuated.

Failure during nose winds winding!

Failure during winding of nose winds! With its RPM counter the wdg. unit counts the number of nose winds wound by the doffer. At start of the cone/sleeve drive and winding of nose winds the doffer excepts a signal from the wdg. unit that the No. of winds is completed. This message is issued if the signal fails to be received within 10 seconds.

43

Failure during winding of residual tail!

Failure during winding of residual tail! The wdg. unit counts the number of winds wound by the doffer. At start of the cone/sleeve drive and winding of the residual end the doffer excepts a signal from the wdg. unit that the No. of winds is completed. This message is issued if the signal fails to be received within 10 seconds.

44

DURING INITIALIZING LATCH NOT ENGAGED !

During initialization the doffer detects missing engagement of the latch.

45

Package deposit not vacant!

The place for package deposit is not vacant! Sensor ’Package conveyor check’ B20 detects an object at a distance between 200 mm and 540 mm.

46

NO PACKAGE DEPOSITED !

After doffing the doffer detects that no package has been deposited on the package conveyor belt.

47

Cycling linkage remaining in neutral!

The cycling linkage remains in neutral position! Sensor ’Cycling linkage neutral’ B31 is actuated.

48

Cycling linkage not in neutral!

The cycling linkage is not in neutral position! Sensor ’Cycling linkage neutral’ B31 not actuated.

42

10 - 74

148-640 001 8.0 en 6.2003

Autoconer 338

No.


Trigger

49

During cycle cycling linkage in neutral!

During a cycle the cycling linkage is in neutral position! Sensor ’Cycling linkage neutral’ B31 is actuated.

50

Doffer without bus connection!

The doffer attempts to transmit data to a bus participant, yet fails to contact the participant. Failure of the machine bus.

51

Program and Hardware not compatible!

The current doffer program is not compatible with the present hardware (PCB).

52

Doffing possible without winding unit only!

Doffing is possible only without winding unit! A “Manual doffing cycle with package“ has been initiated, yet the doffer receives a message that the wdg. unit is not ready for doffing (Wdg. unit switched OFF, or in failure position, or missing bus connection).

53

DOFFER NOT IN NEUTRAL ! INITIALIZATIONREQUIRED !

At start the doffer is not in zero (neutral) position, it has to be manually returned to zero (neutral) positon.

54

Winding unit not accessible!

The winding unit is not accessible! After several attempts to transmit data to the winding unit the doffer receives no confirmation of completed transmission.

55

Reset actuation (HC11) detected!

A reset actuation (HC11) has been detected! Defective PCB ’Operation’ (Bedienung) of the doffer.

56

Connection to PCB ’Operation’ interrupt!

During operation the doffer-internal connection to PCB ’Operation’ (Bedienung XW) has been interrupted (e.g. loose plug connection or wiring interrupted).

57

Package guide not in bypass position!

The package guide is not in bypass position! Sensor ’Package guide bypass pos.’ B13 not actuated.

58

Package guide not in neutral!

The package guide is not in neutral position! Sensor ’Package guide neutral’ B12 not actuated.

Drum remains running!

The yarn guide drum continues to run! After switching the drum drive OFF the doffer expects a confirming message from the wdg. unit. The doffer stops the doffing cycle if the message is not received within 5 seconds.

59

148-640 001 en 6.2003

10 - 75

Autoconer 338

No.

60


Trigger

No compressed air!

No compressed air (or insufficient pressure)! The doffer receives this message via the machine bus. The doffer remains stopped with this message on display until restoration of the required air pressure. This message does not require confirmation! Note: – This message can only be confirmed after restoration of compressed air pressure! – At disappearance of adequate air pressure if the radial cam package position is between 112° and 274°, the continuous functional progression is no longer assured. At pressure restoration the doffing cycle must be completed manually. Informative display No. 11 appears “Complete doffing cycle manually!“.

61

62

Cycling linkage not in neutral! Initialization required!

Cycling linkage not in neutral! Initialization required!

Cycling linkage is not in neutral pos.! Initialization required! After a voltage failure during doffing cycle is sensor ’Cycling linkage neutral’ B31 not actuated. The radial position of the cycling linkage has been memorized prior to the power failure. Note: Return doffer to neutral via toggle operation. Cycling linkage is not in neutral pos.! Initialization required! When switching the voltage supply ON, sensor neutral position B31 is not actuated and the stored radial position is 0°. I.e., the doffer has left the neutral position in switched-OFF status. Note: Return the doffer linkage to neutral position in toggle operation.

a 63

10 - 76

The doffer’s cycle control can not function correctly! Manual interferences could be required!

vacant

148-640 001 8.0 en 6.2003

Autoconer 338

No.

64


Package guide not in neutral! Initialization required!

Trigger The package guide is not in neutral pos.! Initialization required! When switching the doffer’s voltage supply ON, sensor in neutral position B31 is actuated while sensor package guide neutral B12 is not actuated. I.e., the doffer has left neutral position while being switched-OFF Note: Return doffer to neutral via toggle operation.

a 65

66

vacant

Cradle lift not in neutral! Initialization required!

The cradle lift is not in neutral pos.! Initialization required! When switching the doffer’s voltage supply ON sensor neutral position B31 is actuated while sensor cradle lifter neutral B32 is not actuated. I.e., the doffer has left neutral position while being switched-OFF. Note: Return doffer to neutral via toggle operation.

a 67

68

Cycle progression can not be controlled correctly! Manual interference could be required!


vacant

Yarn lift not in neutral! Initialization required!

The yarn lift is not in neutral pos.! Initialization required! When switching the doffer’s voltage supply ON, sensor neutral position B31 is actuated while sensor yarn lift neutral B33 is not actuated. I.e., the doffer has left neutral position while being switched-OFF. Note: Return doffer to neutral via toggle operation.

a

148-640 001 en 6.2003


10 - 77

Autoconer 338

No.

69


Trigger

No valid doffing parameters!

Absence of valid doffing parameters! With arrival on the requesting wdg. unit the doffer asks for the doffing parameters for this wdg. unit from the Informator. If these parameters are not received within a prescribed time, the doffer stops, displaying this message.

a 70

71

Switch winding unit ON, confirm with ENTER !

Switch winding unit OFF, confirm with ENTER !

Confirmation of this message triggers doffing cycle continuation using the older parameters, possibly invalid!

Winding unit should be switched ON, and “ENTER” confirmed! This message is displayed if a “Manual doffing cycle with wdg. unit“ is initiated while the wdg. unit is switched OFF. Switch the wdg. unit ON and actuate the “ENTER“ key. The manual cycle can now be started. Winding unit should be switched OFF and “ENTER” confirmed! The doffer can not determine the wdg. unit’s status if a “Manual doffing cycle without wdg. unit“ is initiated.

a

Prior to message confirmation be sure that the wdg. unit is switched OFF!

72

Doffing aborted!

A doffing cycle, or an initializing procedure, has been aborted through pulling out of the engaging latch, or sensor B11 is defective. Sensor ’Latch engaged’ B11 not actuated.

73

INITIALIZATION PROCESS ABORTED !

Initialization of the doffer has been aborted. If necessary it has to be manually returned to zero (neutral) positon, and started anew.

74

Package guide remains in neutral!

Package guiding remains in neutral position! Sensor package guide neutral B12 remains actuated.

75

vacant

76

vacant

77

vacant

78

vacant

79

vacant

10 - 78

148-640 001 8.0 en 6.2003

Autoconer 338

No.


Trigger

80

Position sensors on cycling motor missing!

None of the position sensors S1, S2, S3 (motor position sensors) of cycling drive motor =A6+C2-M2 is actuated. Sensor(s), cable, or plug could be defective.

81

Position sensors on patrol motor missing!

None of the position sensors S1, S2, S3 (motor position sensors) of patrol drive motor =A6+C2-M1 is actuated. Sensor(s), cable, or plug could be defective.

82

WINDING UNIT HAS NOT ADJUSTED YARN TENSION DEVICE !

Winding unit has failed to adjust the yarn tensioner. Yarn tensioner adjustment to be double-checked.

83

Yarn lift not in front of drum!

The yarn lifter head has been blocked while tilting towards the yarn guide drum. Yarn lifter sensor =A6+C2-B33 not actuated.

84

Yarn lift remains in front of drum!

The yarn lifter head has been blocked while tilting towards the yarn guide drum. Yarn lifter sensor =A6+C2-B33 is actuated.

ADJACENT DOFFER INACCESSIBLE !

The package doffer has no access to the neighboring doffer via data bus. This would be required in order to assure that no other doffer, stationary or moving, is present at the reversal position.

85

148-640 001 en 6.2003

10 - 79

Autoconer 338

10 - 80

148-640 001 8.0 en 6.2003

Autoconer 338

11 Electrical Operation Instructions

148-640 001 en 6.2003

11 - 1

Autoconer 338

11 - 2

148-640 001 8.0 en 6.2003

Autoconer 338 11.0

General . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

11 - 5

11.0.1

Circuit Diagrams . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

11 - 5

11.1

Machine Frame . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

11 - 11

11.1.1

Intermediate DC Circuit (GZK) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

11 - 11

11.1.2

PCB Main board GZK (Intermediate DC Circuit) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

11 - 13

11.1.3

PCB Control GZK . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

11 - 16

11.1.4

PCB (Printed Circuit Board) M-Control (M-Steuerung) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

11 - 17

11.1.5

Module BUS frequency converter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

11 - 21

11.1.6

Frequency Converter (FC) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

11 - 24

11.2

Winding Unit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

11 - 27

11.2.1

PCB SP-Control (SP-Steuerung) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

11 - 27

11.2.2

PCB Thermosplicer Output Stage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

11 - 32

11.2.3

PCB Clearer Evaluation Unit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

11 - 34

11.5

Delivery Package Doffer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

11 - 37

11.5.1

PCB (Printed Circuit Board) ‘XW (Doffer) Control’ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

11 - 37

11.5.2

PCB MB-Adapter-XW . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

11 - 42

11.5.3

Module Operation-XW (Bedienung-XW) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

11 - 44

148-640 001 en 6.2003

11 - 3

Autoconer 338

11 - 4

148-640 001 8.0 en 6.2003

Autoconer 338

11.0 General 11.0.1 Circuit Diagrams Designation of operational devices according to DIN 40719 Electrical operational devices, called operational devices, can be represented by individual parts, assemblies, functional units,etc., being noted by an electrical symbol in electrical diagrams. Designation of Operational Devices consists (according to DIN) of a designation block composed of a series of letters and numbers. Designation Blocks are provided with prefixes for identification purpose: D Assembly

D Location

Designation block ‘Assembly‘ is similar to ’Functional Electrical Assembly’ used previously; it carries prefix (=) (sign of equality). Assembly is always noted with capital letter ‘A‘; for sequential numbering two digits numerical are available after the ‘A‘ allotted as follows:

Ass‘bly

Allocation

Designation block ‘Location‘ denotes the location of the operational device; it carries prefix (+). The following code letters are used for:

Location

Allocation

C

Compartments

E

Control Compartments Control Panels

A01

Control Compartment

A02

Section

L

Boxes

A03

Winding Unit

P

Control Instruments

A04

Dust Removal

S

Others

A05

Package Conveyor

A06

Package Doffer

For sequential numbering of the location two digits are provided after the code letter.

A07

Tube Conveyor

Example: =A04.2+C01: Assembly Dust removal device of section 2, location dust removal chamber.

A08

Travelling Cleaner

A09

Sub-pressure Unit

The assembly’s code structure can be divided by a Separation Sign ( . ) Example: =A01: Power Supply; =A04.2: Dust removal device of section 2.

148-640 001 en 6.2003

11 - 5

Autoconer 338 Structure of Diagrams

D Device The code block “Device“ carries prefix (-) and indicates the type of device. The code letters used for the devices correspond to DIN 40719:

D Project Your Autoconer corresponds to a certain project, e.g. model “RM”.

Denotation

All diagrams required for learning the type of performance and the functional interrelationship of electrical control elements and devices are combined under the term “Project” (e.g. 148-830 xxx).

A

PCB (Printed Circuit Board)

The project is divided into several assemblies.

B

Light barrier, Sensor, Initiator

C

Capacitor

F

Fuse, Bimetal relay

G

Generator, Tacho-generator

H

Signal lamps

K

Relays, Time relays

L

Choke, Coil

M

Motor

P

Counter

Q

Motor overload switch

R

Resistor

S

Switch, contactor

T

Transformer

V

Rectifier

X

Plug connector

Y

Magnet coil (Solenoid)

Device

D Assembly An assembly represents all machine elements combined in a diagram. D Segments of Pages All diagrams are subdivided by an identical scheme. Fixed, always identical abbreviations are provided for each subdivision. Example: The Listing of installation components is always found under ”AGE“; current value tables are always found under ”STW“. Each segment of pages begins with a new numbering sequence (Page 1 thr. page n).

Three numeral digits are provided after the code letter for numbering of the device. Example: -K02: Relay; =A04.1+C01-Y02: Assembly “Dust removal” 1st section, Location dust removal chamber, Device “Magnet valve” Y02.

11 - 6

148-640 001 8.0 en 6.2003

Autoconer 338 Listing of Page Ranges for D Project (=A00) Category

Abbr.

Remarks

Index

INH

Layout table incorporating all operational devices of the project; listing of all diagram pages.

Machine layout

MAS

Graph of machine (project); all operational devices are noted.

Project block diagram

PBS

Schematic illustration of the project’s function.

Potentials names

POT

Listing of all potentials abbreviations.

Signal abbreviations

SIG

Listing of all signal abbreviations.

Auxiliary project information

ZPI

Additional project information.

D Device group (=A01 ... =A09) Category

Abbr.

Remarks

Installation layout

ABI

Graphic illustration of the location of operational device

Listing of installation components

AGE

Incorporates: Installation, location, position in circuit diagram (STR), name/function.

Block diagram

BSB

Schematic illustration of the device’s function.

Circuit diagram

STR

Circuit diagram

Table of current ratings

STW

Listing of fuse ratings and/or setting ranges and standard values for motor overload switches, resp., for all line voltages. Be sure to read the values in correspondence to the prevailing line voltage.

Technical function diagram

TFU

Also called “Flow diagram”; divided by function.

Diagram of terminals

VKL

Shows major terminal strips.

Diagram of plug connections

VST

Shows major plug connections.

Auxiliary help

ZHI

Additional project information.

148-640 001 en 6.2003

11 - 7

Autoconer 338

D170-02e

Example for the complete description of the throttle flap valve Y01 of the bobbin dust extractor of section 2.

11 - 8

148-640 001 8.0 en 6.2003

Autoconer 338

Diagram Number

Diagram Heading

Page No.

ENTSTAUBUNG

Assembly Location

Range of pages (shown in table) Depicted Function

D170-01

Footnotes of a diagram page. Range of pages: Abbr.

Category

ABI

Installation illustration

AGE

Listing of installation components

BSB

Block diagram

STR

Circuit diagram

STW

Table of current ratings

TFU

Technical function diagram

VKL

Terminal diagram

VST

Plug connection diagram

ZKI

Additional help

148-640 001 en 6.2003

11 - 9

Autoconer 338

11 - 10

148-640 001 8.0 en 6.2003

Autoconer 338

1

2

270 V 0 V

D160-04

11.1 Machine Frame 11.1.1 Intermediate DC Circuit (GZK) The intermediate DC circuit (GZK) is composed of:

➀ ➁

PCB ’Main board GZK’, with PCB ’Control GZK’.

148-640 001 en 6.2003

11 - 11

Autoconer 338

Sicherungen F4 bis F9 m?ssen vom selben Typ und Hersteller sein! The fuses F4 to F9 have to be of the same type and from the same manufacturer!

Sicherheitshinweise im BedienungsHandbuch beachten! Please pay attention to the safety instructions in the Operating Manual!

Achtung Achtung! Vor dem Entfernen der Schutzscheibe Maschinen-Hauptschalter

GZK-ON

ausschalten. Kondensatoren m?ssen entladen sein. Vor Herausnahme des Einschubes Sicherungsschrauben l?sen. Nach Einsetzen des Einschubes Sicherungsschrauben wieder festziehen.

Caution! Turn off machine main switch prior to removing protection

blocked 330V 310V 300V 220V Supply O.K.

screen. Capacitors should be discharged. Untighten safety screws before removing slide-in pack. After insertion of slide-in pack retighten safety screws.

+275V

0V

DC-Voltage

D160-05

Safety cover For safety reason against excessive contact voltage (275 VDC) module ’GKZ’ is provided with a safety cover.

b

The GKZ cover should be removed only – after the machine has been switched OFF on main breaker switch =A1+P1-Q1 and protection (padlock) against unauthorized manipulation is in place, AND – if the load voltage on the measuring bushings (ref. to the labeling on inspection window “DCVoltage”) has dropped below ≤30 V. Loosen retainer screws prior to pulling the module. Retighten retainer screws after re-inserting the module. Fuses F4 ... F9 must be of identical type and supplier.

11 - 12

148-640 001 8.0 en 6.2003

Autoconer 338

270 V 0 V

D160-04

11.1.2 PCB Main board GZK (Intermediate DC Circuit) This PCB incorporates the components for the semi-controlled three-phase bridge circuit, for fusing of the sections, for the discharge resistors, and for the 24 VDC supply voltage. The PCB is mounted on thyristor stages V1 ... V3, the latter, in turn, being mounted on a cooling block. Three-phase bridge circuit The supply voltage (3 x 230 VAC) is rectified on PCB GZK to the operational voltage of 275 VDC, and regulated and monitored via the semi-controlled three-phase bridge circuit V1 ... V3.

148-640 001 en 6.2003

Function The input voltage, supplied via transformer for the purpose of galvanic separation, is fused and controlled by a relay at entry into the intermediate DC circuit (GZK). The required control voltages are generated by simple AC transformers with adjoining rectifying components. For swift discharge of the intermediate circuit two discharge resistors are switched ON/OFF, if required. These discharge rectifiers are located between PCB and cooling block.

11 - 13

Autoconer 338

2

1

1

1

5 270 V 0 V

3

3

4

4

D160-04

Voltage supply

Fuse ratings:

Via fuses, the 275 VDC voltage supplies the sectional electronics channels.

– Supply leads 3 x 230 V

Via individual fusing within the electronics channels, voltage is supplied to D the winding units, D the tube conveyor, D the dust removal device, D the package doffer(s) D the package conveyor, and

➀

F4 ... F9; 30 A

– Control leads of machine control

➁

F1 ... F3; 6.3 A

– Supply leads of auxiliary devices

➂

F12 ... F15; 10 A

– Supply leads +275 VDC

➃

F11 and F16; 50 A Sectional fusing: F11: Sections 1 ... 3 F16: Sections 4 ... 6

D auxiliary devices.

➄

F10; 20 A Fusing of the discharge resistors.

11 - 14

148-640 001 8.0 en 6.2003

Autoconer 338

=A1+C2 230 V~ L1

F4

230 V~ L2

F5

F6

230 V~ L3

F7

F8

F9

F1 … 3 +275V

F10

3~

=

1~

1~

=

+275V +275V

+275V

+275V

+275V

+275V

=

F11

PCB (Printed circuit board) ’Control set assembly’

Section 1 ... 3

F16

Section 4 ... 6

F12

F13

F14

F15

Auxiliary devices

D160-06

Schematic block diagram of GZK main board

148-640 001 en 6.2003

11 - 15

Autoconer 338

11.1.3 PCB Control GZK PCB GZK regulates and monitores the 275 VDC voltage of the intermediate DC circuit (GZK). Provided are two versions of the control PCB: One each for 50 Hz and 60 Hz current frequency. H1 Activation/Regulation

H2 H3 H4 H5 H6 H7

For activation of the GZK a signal is transmitted to the control PCB. PCB ’Control’ examines the phase position of the three voltages (clockwise rotary field). If found OK, the PCB is activates the voltage to thyristor stages V1 ... V3. Simultaneously an other relay separates the discharge resistors from the output. The control PCB deliberately, and linearly, accelerates the output voltage. The acceleration time is monitored. When reaching the lower threshold voltage of +220 V a signal is transmitted to the machine control. The machine can be started. Minimum/Maximum voltage

H8

The minimum voltage required for orderly operation of the winding units and of the doffer(s) is +220 V, maximum voltage is +330 V. Monitoring

D160-07

When surpassing a defined threshold voltage a transistor activates the relay which in turn activates the discharge resistors. If the output voltage fails to drop within 5 seconds GZK is switched OFF, blocking (H2, red = ON). Reactivation of the GKZ can be performed only after OFF/ON switching of the machine’s main breaker switch. LEDs (light-emitting diodes) Eight LEDs indicate the following operational statuses: H1 GZK_ON H2 blocked H3 H4 H5 H6 H7

= Signal ”Release of GZK” activated. = Blockage of the GZK. Reactivation possible only after OFF/ON switching of the machine. > 330 V = Maximum voltage 330 V exceeded. > 310 V = upper limit voltage 310 V exceeded. > 300 V = lower limit voltage 300 V exceeded. > 220 V = Minimum voltage 220 V exceeded. Supply o.k. = Clockwise rotary field recognized.

H8 Supply o.k. = Control PCB’s supply voltage activated. LEDs H1, H6, H7, H8 are lit during normal winding operation.

11 - 16

148-640 001 8.0 en 6.2003

Autoconer 338

11.1.4 PCB (Printed Circuit Board) M-Control (M-Steuerung) PCB ‘M-Control‘ (M-Steuerung) (Machine control) is provided one time for model RM machines, or up to five times for automated models. This PCB controls the electrical processes of the machine, and of the materials flow devices; it incorporates a power supply part for generation of the internal voltage supply. Power supply The power supply part is represented by a primary clocked, free-swinging B.O.type converter, with secondary stabilized output voltage, which generates a voltage of 24 VDC from the 275 VDC of the energy-bus. The 24 VDC are used as main supply voltage for the preparation of the auxiliary voltage, for the 24 V outputs and inputs, and for other electrical components (such as the Informator and the intermediate DC circuit). All output branches of the power supply part are short circuit-proof and open circuit-proof. At Power-ON of the supply voltage (> 220 VDC) the power supply part begins to oscillate automatically. Automatic restart takes place after a short circuit occurrence. The power supply part is designed for a continuous load of 5.5 A (Fuse F2: 6.3 A M). Open-circuit voltage is 27 V maximum. Auxiliary voltage preparation This circuit generates 15 VDC, 12 VDC and 5 VDC. 15 VDC:

Analogous voltage supply (PCB-internal).

12 VDC:

12 V Outputs, Test instrument interface, Programming voltage (PCB-internal).

5 VDC:

Voltage supply for the logics circuits (PCB-internal).

Computer unit The computer unit is based on a micro-controller, which is provided with a 64 kB SRAM with 16 Bit data bus. During the booting phase the controller and its periphery are initialized, and the user program is loaded into the application flashs, if required.

Voltage monitoring The power supply part furnishes a signal to the micro-controller, the clocking frequency of which matches the clocking frequency of the power supply. This clocking frequency is load-dependent. The power supply part switches OFF if it detects insufficient voltage of the supply circuit (275 VDC energy bus). Due to the absence of pulses the micro-controller registers the voltage failure. Recognition of mounting location Via the coding of plug X25 PCB M-Control recognizes the mounting location. The code is read by the micro-controller when the control is in the initialization phase (Boot). CAN Bus PCB M-Control supports two independently operating CAN buses, and one CAN star coupling. Via software this star coupling can, selectively, be allocated to one of the two CAN buses. Logics Periphery Bus The Logics Periphery Bus provides the following functional devices: D Strobe generation with strobe functional device; the periphery bus supports 15 plug positions. D Interrupt-capable MISO/MOSI interface; standard synchronous serial interface. D Interrupt-capable unidirectional 8 Bit Port; through this port the micro-controller can only read data. D Input Capture signals D PWM signals D Timer/Counter signals Test instrument interface This interface controls the data exchange with the test instrument, or, for software development, with the programming adapter. Connection is made via plug X1.

Remanent data management Remanent data management is performed by a serial EEPROM controlled by the micro-controller via the serial bus.

148-640 001 en 6.2003

11 - 17

Autoconer 338 24 V Outputs

Technical data

The 12 outputs A0 ... A11 (X80 ... X91) are designed for a maximum output current of 400 mA (short-term inrush currents of appr. 2 A). The positive-actuating outputs are provided with an electronic fuse, which trips when the load current exceeds 400 mA.

D Power supply part Input voltage: Residual rippl: Frequency: Output voltage Output current: Efficiency: Fuse:

The micro-controller registers tripping of one or more of these fuses. 24 V Inputs 20 inputs E0 ... E19 (X40 ... X59) for 24 V negative-actuating sensors. Each input plug position provides supply voltage, 0 VL, and an input for the sensor signal lead. Each input is RC-connected, and is loaded with 10 mA maximum. 12 V Inputs 4 inputs E20 ... E23 (X60 ... X63) for 12 V negative-actuating sensors. Each input plug position provides supply voltage, 0 VL, and an input for the sensor signal lead. Each input is RC-connected, and is loaded with 5 mA maximum.

D Aux. voltage preparation Output voltage:

240 VDC minimum 400 VDC maximum ≤5 % 70 kHz ... 130 kHz 24 VDC +15%/-5% 5.5 A ≥80 % F2: 6.3 A M +5 V L; 1 A; 1.8 A max. +12 V; 0.15 A +15 V; 1 A; 2.4 A max.

D Inputs 12 V Inputs: 24 V Inputs: D Outputs Output voltage: Output current: Peak current:

Actuation current 5 mA Actuation current 10 mA 24 V 400 mA appr. 2 A

Analogous inputs PCB M-Control provides 2 analogous inputs. Prerequisite for utilizing these inputs is the provision of a reference voltage. LED indications The switch status of the inputs and outputs is indicated on the PCB by one LED (Light-emitting diode) each: D 12 outputs 24 V (A0 ... A11) LED red LED ON = Output actuated D 20 inputs 24 V (E0 ... E19) LED yellow LED ON = Initiator actuated D 4 inputs 12 V (E20 ... 23) LED green LED ON = Initiator actuated An LED H24 is located in the center of the PCB M-Control. This LED flashes as long as the power supply part is supplied with the permitted voltage (240 ... 400 VDC).

b

11 - 18

If this LED fails to flash, the PCB could nevertheless be under voltage! Absence of voltage must always be established by the use of a measuring instrument!

148-640 001 8.0 en 6.2003

Autoconer 338

D161-31e

148-640 001 en 6.2003

11 - 19

Autoconer 338

D161-35

11 - 20

148-640 001 8.0 en 6.2003

Autoconer 338

11.1.5 Module BUS frequency converter Module BUS frequency converter is used in various sub-assemblies, depending on machine configuration (e.g. dust removal, delivery package conveyor). This module controls the electrical routines, it is composed of power supply, processor, inverted rectifier, nine inputs, and four outputs. Power supply The power supply part is composed of a primary-clocked, self-oscillating B.O. type converter with secondary stabilized output voltage, generating a voltage of 24 VDC, and internal auxiliary voltages, from the 275 VDC of the energy bus. The 24 VDC voltage supplies the outputs, and possibly peripheral components, if required. The voltage is short-circuit-proof and open-circuit-proof. The power supply automatically begins to oscillate when the supply voltage (> 220 VDC) is switched ON. An automatic restart takes place after a short circuit. The power supply is designed for 1,6 A (40 W) max. continuous load. Open-circuit voltage is 27 V max.

Frequency converter The frequency converter is a voltage changer without internal intermediate DC circuit, which by means of pulse width modulation (PWM) generates the voltage allowing stepless velocity (RPM) control of AC motors. The frequency converter is current-limited, and it is provided with overvoltage protection. Galvanic insulation to the CAN bus is constituted via optocoupler by a synchronous serial interface. Coding Coding (Setting) of switch S1 located on the front panel of the module describes the mounting location. Transmission and receiving registry of the module changes in correspondence with its coding. Correct coding is noted on the front panel, or in the diagram. Switch up Switch down

= =

1 (ON) 0 (OFF)

24 V outputs CAN-Bus Module SP control is provided with a CAN Bus connection. The CAN Bus allows data exchange with further components of the machine, such as machine control.

Die four p-switching outputs A00 ... A03 are designed for a maximum output current of 400 mA (short-term inrush current of appr. 2 A), they are not current-limited. Inputs 9 inputs E00 ... E08 for n-switching sensors. Each input’s plug position provides the supply voltage, the 0 V L, and an input for the sensor signal lead. Each input is RC-switched, and is subjected to a load of 10 mA, max. The 24 VDC can be set to supply the inputs.

148-640 001 en 6.2003

11 - 21

Autoconer 338 LED indications On the PCB, the switching status of inputs and outputs is indicated by one LED per input/output.

BUS_OK WR_ON E00.00 E00.01 E00.02 E00.03 E00.04 E00.05 E00.06 E00.07 E00.08 A00.00 A00.01 A00.02 A00.03

LED sequence from top to bottom: D BUS-OK: LED (green) is ON during normal function of the CAN bus. D WR-ON: LED (green) is ON as long as the frequency converter is activated. D BUS-OK and WR-ON: Both LEDs flash for appr. 10 s after switch-ON, or after reset. D A00 ... A03: 4 outputs 24 V red LED LED ON = output active D E00 ... E08: 9 inputs yellow LED LED ON = initiator actuated

b S1

All LEDs OFF does not indicate that the module is free of voltage! Prior to working on BUS frequency converters the machine must be switched OFF and protected (padlocked) against unauthorized manipulation! Always use a measuring instrument to assure absence of voltage in the GKZ (intermediate DC circuit)!

Technical data D Power supply Input voltage:

D101-74

Residual ripple: Frequency: Output voltage Output current: Efficiency:

240 VDC minimum 400 V DC maximum ≤5 % 70 kHz ... 130 kHz 24 VDC +15%/-5% 1 A (25 W) ≥80 %

24 V inputs:

Switch current 10 mA

D Inputs D Outputs Output voltage: Output current: Peak current:

11 - 22

24 V 400 mA appr. 2 A

148-640 001 8.0 en 6.2003

Autoconer 338

D161-32e

148-640 001 en 6.2003

11 - 23

Autoconer 338

11.1.6 Frequency Converter (FC)

=A9+C1

b

Safety Precautions Comply with applicable safety precautions before performing any work on the frequency converter! Input side, output side, and intermediate circuit are not potentially separated (insulated). Voltages of the intermediate circuit can be appr. 540 V.

b S2 S1

H2 H1

Prior to working on the frequency converter the machine must be switched OFF on main breaker switch =A1+P1-Q1 (Switch position “0“, secured [padlocked] for protection against unauthorized switching ON). The discharge time of the capacitor battery of appr. 5 minutes must be considered. Absence of voltage must be tested using a measuring instrument.

D161-25

11 - 24

148-640 001 8.0 en 6.2003

Autoconer 338 General The frequency converter (FC) is maintenance-free. The device can be damaged or destroyed by external conditions, such as short circuits, ground shorts, or false settings. Function The frequency converter is wired ahead of the AC asynchronous motor M1 of the suction drive. AC asynchronous motors provide fixed RPM, determined by number of pole pairs and power line frequency. The frequency converter provides a separate network with a variable frequency range for motor operation. The supply voltage of the frequency converter is 380 ... 460 VAC. A transformer is provided for other power supply voltages. Line voltage fluctuations of +10/–15 % are permissible. In operation the output is short circuit-proof and ground short-proof. All required settings of the frequency converter are factoryset, they do not require alteration.

Internal Functional Progression of the Frequency Converter An AC bridge rectifier furnishes an intermediate circuitvoltage of constant level. This intermediate circuit voltage is smoothened by a battery of capacitors. The ensuing current inverter transmits the intermediate circuit voltage in pulses as 3-phase voltage to the motor M1 of the suction drive. The level of the voltage pulses is constant, it corresponds to the intermediate circuit voltage. Through alteration of the pulse widths, level and frequency of the output voltage are steplessly adjustable. Due to the process of pulse width modulation with regulation of the magnetic flow it is possible to generate a nearly ideal sine-shaped current. The variation of the pulse widths within one sine-halfwave is regulated by a computer program with a reaction frequency of 4 kHz. Thus is generated for all load conditions D an ideal sine-shaped current, and D excellent rotation properties, even at low frequencies. Displays D LED H1 (green): Flashing: The FC is ready for operation. Steady ON: The FC is in operation. D LED H2 (red): Lights up in case of a failure (→ Failure messages). Failure Messages If the FC recognizes a failure, it transmits via machine bus a failure message to the Informator. The messages displayed by the Informator are listed in Chapter 10.1. In case of a failure it is necessary to consult Schlafhorst’s customer service dept. with a description of the encountered failure.

148-640 001 en 6.2003

11 - 25

Autoconer 338 Initial Start-up

Installation and Start-up of the Frequency Converter:

For Add-On, or for Replacement the frequency converter is delivered factory-set and ready for operation.

Caution: Prior to installation of the frequency converter!

Safety Precautions

a

Comply with applicable safety precautions before performing any work on the frequency converter! Input side, output side, and intermediate circuit are not potentially separated (insulated). Voltages of the intermediate circuit can be appr. 540 V.

b

D Examine the position of hexadecimal switches S1 and S2 (→ Ill. 11.1.7): – S1 in position “3“ – S2 in position “0“ D The machine is switched OFF and protected (padlocked) against unautorized manipulation; absence of voltage has been assured. D Installation and wiring of the FC acc. to diagram. D Connect output of the FC to the motor (M1).

Prior to working on the frequency converter the machine must be switched OFF on main breaker switch =A1+P1-Q1 [Switch position “0“, and secured (padlocked) for protection against unauthorized switching ON].

D Device remains free of voltage, i.e. main breaker switch =A1+P1-Q1 in “0“position and padlocked against switching ON.

The discharge time of the capacitor battery of appr. 5 minutes must be considered. Absence of voltage must be tested using a measuring instrument.

D Inspect power supply connection; protective lead must be connected. Make sure all clamp connections are securely tightened.

The displays are legible only as long as the frequency converter is under voltage.

D Switch main breaker switch =A1+P1-Q1 ON (”I”).

Therefore covers are to be removed by authorized personnel only, for the purpose of reading from the displays.

D The FC performs an automatic self-test:

All applicable safety precautions must be strictly complied with for such undertakings.

D Visual inspection for possible mechanical damages.

D Do not start the machine on key (=A1+P1-S1)! – after appr. 2 s: Preload relay is activated. LED H1 (green) = flashing ON. Operation standby is attained. The frequency converter can be started. D Start machine on key =A1+P1-S1. Now the FC starts, provided yarn and dust chambers are closed (=A1+C1-B1 and B2 actuated). LED H1 (green) changes from flashing to steady ON. D Stop machine on key (=A1+P1-S1) and switch the main breaker switch =A1+P1-Q1 to position “0“, and secure (padlock) it against unauthorized manipulation. D Install covers. Initial start-up is completed, machine can be started.

11 - 26

148-640 001 8.0 en 6.2003

Autoconer 338

11.2 Winding Unit 11.2.1 PCB SP-Control (SP-Steuerung) This PCB is used one time per winding unit and one time per package doffer. It controls all electrical processes, and it incorporates a power supply part for generation of the internal voltage supplies. Description of the PCB used on the doffer → 11.5. Power supply The power supply part is represented by a primary clocked, free-swinging B.O.type converter, with secondary stabilized output voltage, which generates a voltage of 36 VDC from the 275 VDC of the energy bus. The 36 VDC are used as main supply voltage for the preparation of the auxiliary voltage, for the 24 V outputs, the 12 V inputs, and for other electrical components (such as the thermosplicer). All output branches of the power supply part are short circuit-proof and open circuit-proof. At power-ON of the supply voltage (> 220 V DC) the power supply part begins to oscillate automatically. Automatic restart takes place after a short circuit occurrence. The power supply part is designed for a continuous load of 150 W. Open-circuit voltage is 37 V maximum.

Voltage monitoring The power supply part furnishes a signal to the microcontroller, the clocking frequency of which matches the clocking frequency of the power supply. This clocking frequency is load-dependent. The power supply part switches OFF if it detects an insufficient voltage of the supply circuit (275 VDC energy bus) Due to the absence of pulses the micro-processor registers the voltage failure. Recognition of mounting location Via the serial interface of plug X8 PCB SP-Control recognizes the mounting location. If via this interface the micro-controller recognizes the operation unit of the package doffer, the doffer’s software is assumed to be ready to perform normally. If the doffer’s operation unit is not recognized, only the winding unit’s software remains operational. This recognition process takes place during the initializing phase (Boot). CAN Bus PCB SP-Control supports a CAN bus connection. Data exchange with other machine components, such as machine control or package doffer, takes place via this CAN bus.

Auxiliary voltage preparation From the 36 VDC this circuit generates 24 VDC, +12 VDC, -12 VDC, and 5 VDC. 24 V DC:

24 V outputs, current output stages of the LEDs.

+12 V DC:

12 V inputs, test instrument interface, programming voltage (PCB-internal).

-12 V DC:

Voltage supply for PCB Clearer evaluation unit.

5 V DC:

Voltage supply for the logics circuit (PCB-internal).

Test instrument interface This interface controls the data exchange with the test instrument, or, for software development, with the programming adapter. Connection is made via plug X1.

Computer unit The computer unit is based on a micro-controller, which is provided, depending on application, with a 32 ... 64 kB SRAM with 8 or 16 Bit data bus. During the booting phase the controller and its periphery are initialized. Remanent data management Remanent data management is performed by a serial EEPROM controlled by the micro-controller via the serial bus.

148-640 001 en 6.2003

11 - 27

Autoconer 338 Outputs

Output stage drum drive motor

The 24 V outputs are negative-actuated. This is possible because of the galvanic insulation of the power supply part.

Via a current end stage the winding unit computer regulates the RPM of drum drive motor =A3+C1-M16.

The interface for tension device control is pulse width-modulated.

The integrated difference amplifier of the current output stage registers the absolute value of the current taken by the motor.

Inputs

The RPM of the motor is established by the signals from the rotor position sensors integrated in the motor.

The inputs are provided for 12 V negative-actuated sensors. Each input plug position provides the supply voltage, 0 V L, and an input for the sensor signal lead. Each input is RCconnected, and is loaded with 5 mA maximum.

A PI regulator controls, pulse width-modulated, the output stage transistors. An excessive voltage stop circuit trips at appr. 390 V, and releases the component at appr. 370 V.

Analogous inputs PCB SP-Control provides analogous inputs integrated in the interfaces of the individual sub-assemblies. Clearer interface Communication with PCB clearer evaluation unit takes place via an asynchronous serial interface. Special ’quick’ occurences, such as “Power failure“ and drum pulses, however, are transmitted on separate signal leads. Thermosplicer Data exchange with PCB Thermosplicer output stage takes place via a PWM input and two short circuit-proof digital outputs. The digital outputs activate the splicing chamber and air heater.

Output stage cycling drive motor Regulation of the speed of cycling drive motor =A3+C1-M71 is similar to the drum drive motor. In addition, there is the function “Stop“, which retains the brake-decelerated rotor in its radial position through application of a permanent field. Rotor (radial) position sensors Cycling drive and drum drive motors are provided with 3 position sensors each. Their transmitted signals correspond with the motors’ RPM. For each revolution of the motor shaft the following table is passed-through three times. D The motor shaft turns clockwise:

Tension device For controlling the tension disc pressure the plunger coil =A3+C1-L77 is voltage-controlled. Basic tuning takes place via a tuning resistor integrated in the plunger coil.

The table is passed-through from top to bottom. D The motor shaft turns counter-clockwise: The table is passed-through from bottom to top.

Input

H1

H2

H3

Sensor

S1

S2

S3

1

0

1

1

0

0

1

1

0

0

1

0

0

1

1

0

0

1

Signal sequence

11 - 28

148-640 001 8.0 en 6.2003

Autoconer 338 Output stage of step motors

Technical data

The control logic of the step motor is generated by software, in the micro-controller, and transmitted to the output stages via shift registers.

D Power supply part

The output stages control the step motors via a sequence from 4 signals. The currents of the output stages are limited to a peak value: The 3 output stages for tension device, waxing device, and circular magazine motors are provided with integrated current limitations, the current limitation for the traverse displacement motor is provided separately. LED indication LED 1 located on PCB SP-Control flashes as long as the power supply part is supplied with the permitted voltage (240 ... 385 VDC).

b


Input voltage:

240 VDC minimum 385 VDC maximum

Residual ripple:

≤5 %

Frequency:

70 kHz ... 130 kHz

Output voltage

24 VDC +15%/-5%

Output current:

5.5 A

Efficiency:

≥80 %

D Aux. voltage preparation Output voltage:

+5 V L; 1 A; 1.8 A max. +12 V; 0.15 A +15 V; 1 A ; 2.4 A max.

D Inputs 12 V Inputs

Actuatg. current 5 mA

Yarn tension sensor

PWM signal; frequency modulation 45 ... 250 Hz

Temperature Thermosplicer

Analogous signal

D Outputs 24 V Outputs: Yarn trap, opening valve, splicing valve:


Multijet, packg. lifting and braking loop gate:


Current output stage for yellow/red lamps:


Tension disc control:

5 V, PWM signal

Current output stage of IR diode:

60 mA, modulated

Drum drive motor:

275 VDC; 0 ... 4.2 A; 7 Bit resolution

Cycling drive motor:

275 VDC (chopped); 0 ... 650 mA; 6 Bit resol.

Circ. magazine motor:

36 V; 1 A maximum Full-step operation

Motors tension dev., waxing dev., drumchangierung:

36 V; 0.35 A maximum Half-step operation

D Clearer Voltage supply:

148-640 001 en 6.2003

36 VDC; 300 mA +/-12 VDC; 130 mA 5 VDC; 280 mA

11 - 29

Autoconer 338

D361-01e

11 - 30

148-640 001 8.0 en 6.2003

Autoconer 338

LED 1

D301-29

148-640 001 en 6.2003

11 - 31

Autoconer 338

D161-36

11.2.2 PCB Thermosplicer Output Stage This PCB is piggy-backed on PCB SP-Control (Winding unit control), provided the machine is equipped with thermosplicers. PCB Thermosplicer output stage regulates the core temperature of the air heater and controls the prism heater. The splicing temperature, selected on the Informator, is attained after a heating time of appr. 4 ... 10 minutes. Acquisition of the actual value A thermoelement (Fe-CuNi) is integrated in the air heater. An amplifier converts the output voltage of the thermoelement in such fashion that +6.825 mV/°C are available as actual value. Ambient temperature is compensated. Failure recognition At recognition of a failure (Break of thermo lead, defektive prism, etc.) the actual value is altered involuntarily, enabling PCB SP-Control to localize this failure.

Air heater The air heater is directly operated by the 275 VDC of the energy bus. The two-points regulation is controlled, galvanically insulated via opto coupling, by PCB SP-Control. Prism heater The prism heater raises the temperature of the splicing ambience to a desired level. Regulation of the temperature is made by a chopped transistor, which prepares the 36 VDC supply voltage for the 24 V prism heater. A current limitation reduces the inrush current to 2.5 A. LED indication An LED (→ III.) located on PCB Thermosplicer output stage flashes as long as the power supply part is supplied with the permitted voltage (200 ... 400 VDC).

b


11 - 32

148-640 001 8.0 en 6.2003

Autoconer 338

D161-33e

Technical data D Input voltage Air heater:

Prism heater:

Power side: Logic side:

148-640 001 en 6.2003

D Inputs 240 VDC minimum 400 VDC maximum 250 mA 36 VDC ±10% 150 mA Actuation current 2.5 A 16 VDC ±10% 50 mA 12 VDC ±10% 50 mA

Thermoelement:

(Fe-CuNi) 56 µV/°C

Aktivation of air heater:

5 V-Logic

Prism heater switch ON:

5 V-Logic

D Outputs Actual value of core temperature of air heater:

12 V-Logic PWM appr. 88 Hz

11 - 33

Autoconer 338

11.2.3 PCB Clearer Evaluation Unit The electronic clearer system is composed of measuring head, PCB clearer evaluation unit, and clearer control box*. With integrated clearer there is no control box, clearer control is integrated with the Informator. Note The electronic clearer is not furnished by WSC. Instructions concerning function, settings, and operation established by the clearer maker are furnished with each machine.

Serial interface Data exchange with PCB SP-Control takes place via the asynchronous serial interface. Signal leads D TDG The rotation pulses of the yarn guide drum are transmitted by PCB SP-Control via signal lead TDG. D Power Fail

Measuring head The measuring head transmits the yarn signal to PCB Clearer evaluation unit. Evaluation unit PCB Clearer evaluation unit is piggy-backed on PCB SPControl. It evaluates the yarn signals received from the measuring head, and performs data exchange with PCB SPControl: D Process data for the control of status changes and occurrences.

Signal lead Power Fail, PCB SP-Control signals failing line voltage. D Power Good This signal is generated by the power supply part of PCB SP-Control. The signal is active as long as the logics voltage is ≤ 4.2 V. Technical data D Input voltage Logics voltages:

5 VDC ±5%, 280 mA + 12 VDC ±5%, 130 mA - 12 VDC ±5%, 130 mA

Knife voltage:

36 VDC ±15%, 300 mA

D Operation data for start-up (Machine specifications, performance characteristics). D Operation data for the operation of the evaluation unit (Setting parameters, quality data). Data exchange and voltage supply are provided via PCB SPControl. PCB SP-Control is connected to the machine control via the CAN bus. There could be a separate bus connection between the control box and PCB clearer evaluation unit, for the exchange of clearer-related data*.

* Not with integrated clearer.

11 - 34

148-640 001 8.0 en 6.2003

Autoconer 338

D161-34e

148-640 001 en 6.2003

11 - 35

Autoconer 338

11 - 36

148-640 001 8.0 en 6.2003

Autoconer 338 11.3

11.4

11.5 Delivery Package Doffer 11.5.1 PCB (Printed Circuit Board) ‘XW (Doffer) Control’ Installed is one PCB ‘XW control’ per doffer. This PCB controls all electrical functions; it also incorporates the power supply to generate the required internal voltages. Originally this PCB has been designed for the winding unit, therefore the descriptions of inputs and outputs match those of the winding unit. Compared to the winding unit control the PCB’s function controls are fewer, therefore (for spare part supply) all PCBs presently available serially can be used. Description for application of the PCB in winding units → 11.2.

Computer unit The computer unit is based on a micro-controller provided with (depending on specific application) a 32 ... 64 kB SRAM with 8 or 16 Bit data bus. During booting (after supply voltage switch-ON) the controller and its periphery is initialized. Remanent data management Remanent data management is performed by a serial EEPROM controlled by the micro-controller via a serial bus, e.g. securing the radial degrees position of the cam package at voltage failure.

Power supply The power supply represents a primary-clocked, free-running B.O.-type converter with secondary stabilized output voltage generating a voltage of 36 VDC from the 275 VDC present in the energy bus.

Voltage monitoring

The 36 VDC are the main supply voltage for producing auxiliary voltages, the 24 V outputs, the 12 V inputs, and other electrical components.

The power supply transmits a signal to the micro-controller indicating the clock frequency of the power supply. This clock frequency is load-dependent. The power supply is switched-OFF if it detects undervoltage of the supply voltage (275 VDC Energy bus). The voltage failure is recognized by the micro-controller from the absence of the pulses.

All output branches of the power supply are short circuit and idling protected.

Recognition of device location

The power supply automatically begins to oscillate (at 220 VDC) when the supply voltage is switched ON. An automatic restart takes place after a short circuit. The power supply is designed for a continuous load of 150 W maximum. Open-circuit voltage is 37 V max. Generation of auxiliary voltages From the 36 V are generated the voltages 24 VDC, +12 VDC, -12 VDC, and 5 VDC.

From the serial interface of plug connection X8 PCB ’XW control’ recognizes the device location. The software of the package doffer becomes functional when the micro-controller recognizes the operation unit of the doffer. When failing to recognize the operation unit, only the winding unit software becomes functional. This recognition takes place during the initialization phase (booting). CAN bus

24 VDC:

24 V outputs, current end stages.

+12 V DC:

12 V inputs, interface for module function XW, and programming voltage (PCB-internal).

PCB ’XW control’ is provided with a CAN bus connection.Data exchange with other components of the machine, such as Informator, machine control, winding unit, and adjoining doffers takes place via this CAN bus.

-12 V DC:

Module’s voltage supply ’XW operation’.

Test instrument interface

Supply voltage for logics circuitry (PCB internal).

The test instrument interface is not applicable for the package doffer!

5 V DC:

148-640 001 en 6.2003

11 - 37

Autoconer 338 Ouputs The 24 V outputs are n-switching. This is possible due to the galvaniv insulation of the power supply. Inputs The inputs are provided for 12 V n-switching sensors. Each input’s plug position provides the supply voltage, the 0 V L, and an input for the sensor signal lead. Each input is RCswitched, and is subjected to a load of 5 mA, max. Analogous-inputs

Output stage drum drive motor (for patrol drive motor) This output stage controls, via PCB ’MB adapterXW’, patrol drive motor =A6+C2-M1 and cam package drive motor =A6+C2-M2. The integrated differential amplifier of the current output stage establishes the absolute value of the current consumed by the motor. The motor’s velocity is established from the signals transmitted by the rotor position sensors intergrated with the motor.

Not utilized.

An added PI-controller controls, pulse width-modulated, the output stage transistors.

Clearer interface

An overvoltage guard is triggered at appr. 390 V, releasing the module again at appr. 370 V.

Communication with PCB ’XW operation’ takes place via a synchronized serial bus. Thermosplicer Not utilized. Tension device Not utilized.

Output stage cam package drive motor Not utilized. Rotor (radial) position sensor Cam package drive motor and drum drive (patrol drive) motor are provided with 3 each rotor position sensors. The transmitted signals correspond with the motor velocity (RPM). For one revolution of the motor shaft the following table is passed-through three times. D The motor shaft turns clockwise: Table is passed-through from top to bottom. D The motor shaft turns counter-clockwise: Table is passed-through from bottom to top.

Input

H1

H2

H3

Sensor

S1

S2

S3

1

0

1

1

0

0

1

1

0

0

1

0

0

1

1

0

0

1

Signal sequence

11 - 38

148-640 001 8.0 en 6.2003

Autoconer 338 Output stage step motors

Technical data

The control logic for the step motors is generated in the micro-controller through software, and transmitted to the output stages via shift registers. The output stages control the step motors using an array of 4 signals.

D Power supply

The current-limited output stages are occupied as follows: D Tension device and waxing device: vacant D Circular magazine RM: Control of step motor for package guiding =A6+C1-M3 D Drum traversing: Control of step motor for cone/sleeve drive =A6+C1-M4

Input voltage:

240 VDC minimum 385 VDC maximum

Residual ripple:

≤5 %

Frequency:

70 kHz ... 130 kHz

Output voltage

24 V DC +15%/-5%

Output current:

5.5 A

Efficiency:

≥80 %

D Generation of auxiliary voltages LED indication

Output voltage:

On PCB ’XW control’ LED 1 flashes if the power supply is supplied with the permitted voltage of 240 ... 385 VDC.

b

+5 V L; 1 A max. 1.8 A +12 V; 0.15 A +15 V; 1 A max. 2.4 A

D Inputs Failure to flash, however, does not indicate absence of voltage!

12 V Inputs:

Switch current 5 mA

D Outputs Absence of voltage has to be double-checked with a measuring instrument!

24 V outputs: Disengage cradle lifter latch, cone/sleeve feeder CLOSED, cone/sleeve feeder OPEN, Disengage latch, Yarn lifter clamp CLOSED, Yarn lifter shears CLOSED,

Schaltstrom 350 mA

Current output stages for reversal of patrol drive / cam package drive motor:

Switch current 20 mA

Patrol drive/cam package drive motor:

275 VDC, 0 ... 4.2 A, 7 Bit resolution

Motor package guide arm:

36 V, max. 1 A, Full step operation

Motor cone/sleeve drive:

36 V, max. 0.35 A, Semi-step operation

D Module ’XW operation’

148-640 001 en 6.2003

Voltage supply

+/-12 V DC, 130 m A

Control:

Synchronous serial bus

11 - 39

Autoconer 338

Block diagram of PCB 'XW-Control' (XW-Steuerung) (Package doffer) 275 VDC energy bus (from PCB MB-Adapter-XW)

Output stages drum drive and cycling drive motors

24 V voltage supply

Power supply Voltage monitoring

24V

Auxiliary voltage preparation

24 V inputs

12V

Test instruments interface (not applicable) Synchronous serial bus

Synchronous serial bus

Remanent data management

12 V inputs

Input signals

Message: Fuse tripped

12V

12V

Input signals

15V 24 V outputs

MB-Adapter XW Package guide Package drive Operation of XW

CAN bus

Inputs

D 561-01

11 - 40

148-640 001 8.0 en 6.2003

Autoconer 338

LED 1

D 301-128

148-640 001 en 6.2003

11 - 41

Autoconer 338

D 560-04

11.5.2 PCB MB-Adapter-XW This PCB MB-Adapter-XW is used one time per package doffer. It adapts the levels of inputs and outputs of PCB XWControl (XW-Steuerung) to the functions of the package doffer.

The conductive signals of the rotor position sensors are split open and conducted to PCB XW-Control either as ”Rotor position sensor drum drive motor“ or as “Rotor position sensor cycling drive motor“. On PCB XW-Control the signals control:

Energy bus

D “Rotor position sensor drum drive motor“ the output stage for driving the respective motor of the package doffer (Patrol drive, or cycling drive motor).

The energy bus is wired to PCB XW-Control via PCB MBAdapter-XW. CAN bus The required bus end resistor is located on PCB MBAdapter-XW , therefore the CAN bus is wired to PCB XWControl via this PCB. Control of motors

D “Rotor position sensor cycling drive motor” the incremental acquisition of rotor revolutions of the respective motor of the doffer (Patrol drive, or cycling drive motor). Signal distributor For the adaption of signal levels and wiring the signals of PCB XW-Control are distributed to the sensors of the doffer via PCB MB-Adapter-XW.

Patrol drive motor (M1) and cycling drive motor (M2) are controlled by only one output stage of PCB XW-Control (Drum drive motor). In order to operate both these motors, the power leads and signal leads of the motors are switched-over under control of signal input -FAH/AUT (PATR/CYC).

b 11 - 42

Switch-over of the power leads takes place on two phases only, the third phase is permanently motorconnected.

148-640 001 8.0 en 6.2003

Flextrack

Inputs/Outputs PCB 'XW-Control' (XW-Steuerung)

Sensors Package doffer

AT-L XHS

Cone/sleeve sensor XHS

AT-A

LH distance sensor AT-L

Distance sensor AT-AL LH adaption

Distance sensor AT-AR RH adaption

AT-R

RH distance sensor AT-R

Rotor position sensor, cycling drive motor M2

H1-, H2-, H3-AUT

Cone/sleeve sensor

LH distance sensor

Distance sensor adaption

RH distance sensor

Ultrasonic sensor Transmission

Ultrasonic sensor Echo

Rotor position sensor, patrol drive motor M1

H1-, H2-, H3-FHA

US-S

5VP

Power, cycling drive motor M2

U-AUT V-AUT, W-AUT

Ultrasonic sensor US-S Transmission

5V

Power, patrol drive motor M1

Voltage supply Package doffer

U-FAH V-FAH, W-FAH

US-E

12V

M

SL 275 V 0 V P1

Ultrasonic sensor US-E Echo

Reversal from patrol drive motor to -FAH/AUT cycling drive motor

Rotor position sen- H1-, H2-, H3-A sor of cycling drive

12 V P Rotor position sensor of drum drive H1-, H2-, H3-T

U-T Power output stage drum drive V-T, W-T

SL Voltage supply 275 V Package doffer 0 V P1

PCB 'XW-Control' (XW-Steuerung) Patrol drive motor M1 Cycling drive motor M2

148-640 001 en 6.2003

Inputs/Outputs PCB 'XW-Control' (XW-Steuerung)

Block diagram of PCB 'MB-Adapter-XW'

Autoconer 338

D 561-02e

11 - 43

Autoconer 338

11.5.3 Module Operation-XW (Bedienung-XW) Module operation-XW (1) represents the interface between PCB XW-Control (XW-Steuerung) and the operation of the package doffer. Functions are selection of operation statuses, alteration of parameters, display of data, and reception/decoding of IR (Infra-Red) data. Switches 1

Menu control and activation of different operation statuses of the doffer takes place on switches S1 ... S6. DIL switch The number of the package doffer is established on DIL switches S7 (S7.1 and S7.2) Standard entry is doffer Nr. 1.

D 501-24

Setting of selector switch S7 =A6+D1–D3 S7

S6

S7.2

S7.1

Coding of doffer Nos.

OFF

OFF

Doffer No.: 1

OFF

ON

Doffer No.: 2

ON

OFF

Doffer No.: 3

ON

ON

Doffer No.: 4

More notes concerning settings → 5.5.4. Infrared (IR) receiver

S1

D 560-02

S2

S3

S4

S5

For data transmission from winding unit to package doffer the latter is provided with an IR receiver (B2). Evaluation of the IR signals is performed by module operation-XW (Bedienung-XW). For suppression of interferences the asynchronous serial data transmission from winding unit to package doffer is modeled with a carrier frequency of 56 kHz. LCD (Liquid crystal display) display The 16-digit, 2-lined LCD display is temperature-compensated for the purpose of ascertaining constant contrast. Informative and failure displays are set forth on the pages of chapter 4.5. Failure display The 2 switches S2 and S3 flash RED at appearance of a failure message.

D 560-05

11 - 44

148-640 001 8.0 en 6.2003

Autoconer 338

D 561-03e

148-640 001 en 6.2003

11 - 45

AC 338 Type RM

Recommend Documents